Home

NEC NDA-24300 User's Manual

1. _ BGs m5 mu ms Dimweueesai Ne NDA 24300 CHAPTER 8 Page 519 Issue 1 MAINTENANCE COMMANDS Table 8 1 Command List Continued COMMAND FULLNawE sr mmus ss ome powon _ ream ms E a Pm Pm bm eina mm Diss ema mm bmw Region _ Disyor UD ee Peg Com Dan Pm Digyor co PT Dishyor UD Sain Diora aere Pe Conan _ Rowe _ ran Dior Comes CHAPTER 8 NDA 24300 Page 520 Issue 1 MAINTENANCE COMMANDS Table 8 1 Command
2. 7 PIM 1 PIM 1 PM BUS MUX MUX 5 7 E a LC TRK LC TRK LC TRK LC TRK 5 o dee MUX T PMBUS PMBUS 2 i LES JELELI L LES ES 0 PM BUS PIM 0 PM BUS 5 MUX ab cubre i H H LI L LC TRK LC TRK LC TRK LC TRK i TTo 1 RA MUX z D PMBUS 1 2 PMBUS J 1 2 TolMG3 i EE EESE EEEE EEEE mu LI LI I EN mre aana anaa TSWM TSW TSW i TSW 5 INT i ANT n 1 1 003002001000 110111112113 TSW P TSW INT TSW INT BUS Symbols gt Controlling Routes of CPU Cable i _ Circuit card active Circuit card STBY 5 LI cid Cable Clock O
3. 613 Scanning or Route Status sar oem o dre qe db RHEE HOKE ORR ERY 618 ARAT MESI PU DANS s kus beeen d d ERR ENERO dg E Wade cee es 619 NDA 24300 TABLE OF CONTENTS Page ix Issue 1 Figure Figure 2 1 Figure 2 2 Figure 2 3 Figure 2 4 Figure 2 5 Figure 2 6 Figure 2 7 Figure 2 8 Figure 2 9 Figure 2 10 Figure 2 11 Figure 2 12 Figure 2 13 Figure 2 14 Figure 2 15 Figure 2 16 Figure 2 17 Figure 2 18 Figure 2 19 Figure 2 20 Figure 2 21 Figure 2 22 Figure 2 23 Figure 2 24 Figure 2 25 Figure 2 26 Figure 4 1 Figure 4 2 Figure 4 3 Figure 4 4 Figure 4 5 Figure 4 6 Figure 4 7 Figure 4 8 Figure 4 9 Figure 4 10 Figure 4 11 Figure 4 12 Figure 4 13 Figure 4 14 Figure 4 15 Figure 4 16 Figure 4 17 Figure 4 18 Figure 4 19 Figure 4 20 Figure 4 21 Figure 4 22 Figure 4 23 LIST OF FIGURES Page x Issue 1 LIST OF FIGURES Title Flow of Administrative Management 5 __ ae d 127 7177 Face Layout of IMG1 er 9 934 279 4199 4 V4 dX EOS AAO Wd E al Yd LENS POLIS soi dor eode eoo e de da Ah de echt de e cards Module Group Allocations ias ae Ad Unit Number 5
4. 74 a swe es cae ose eens gt 75 ital LN Pou steaks ews bees eee es ob ude 76 Lada Eod 4d ey ahs 77 Ready cccadetuceciasdebasbeadotn bod Guus edd sw ne eoe 78 TSW Ready PS 6454245 be eared GEO mg HAS 79 OLEG Pia 12 80 Peg bh gg eee tee 81 MUA Ready FAUTO gei 82 oes Cae eee take oes gt ene 83 PO Gard Failure Recovered uo de dor ened _ 85 52555 en 87 Hours MONGI FAIUFE iua uerb gend do qoom dhe d eb doge doe d epe d SKE cea Hees 88 Lina Load SIM sear goma a dopo RR ___ d 89 LEO a unu o opea dota dp ve de Svr ee dre d 90 A each ew PR SGASRNASMPRAqASRRPERERATSSS ETE 91 STA Test Connection Data sordo a e EUR qa FOL SEAR Re OPENERS enr naria 96 xc qe2b cote eee ones T 99 emergency 100 C nirol SIOD Lus 54 he seueuss 101 Abnormal Call Duration
5. 24300 CHAPTER 3 Page 177 Issue 1 SYSTEM MESSAGES VPS Failure Permanent Default Alarm Default Grade Grade Modified Lamp Modified MN 2 This message displays when a VPS failure 15 detected IX 0000 9000 2 0000 8000 0000 4000 38 4000 8000 0000 0000 Sa a 4 0000 0000 0000 0000 5 0000 0000 0000 0000 6 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 QUOO 20000 30000 0000 0000 0000 09000 Os 0001 0000 0 Probable cause for failure b0 b7 0 1 Sector error 67 66 65 64 63 52 bl Other than above 2 LENS of VPS with the failure evel 57 b6 b5 b3 b2 bl b3 b7 Group LT 3 LENS of VPS with the failure b1 Unit No BP bo us BA 53 CHAPTER 3 NDA 24300 Page 178 Issue 1 SYSTEM MESSAGES VPS Restore Default Alarm Default Grade NON 2 This message displays when a VPS failure 15 restored to normal Grade Modified Lamp Modified 4 0000 0000 0000 0000 5 ver 0000 UO 39000 64 1 0000 00009 0000 24 0000 9000 0000 0000 35 0000 0000 00009 0000 EQ mi 0000 0000 0000 0000 6 00900 0000 0000 20000 9 0000 0000 0000 0000 00900 0000 0000 D LENS of VPS with the failure b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 bl bo 7727 Group 2 LENS of VP
6. ate ote ace ae ote ate ace mca mca sists ose aoe ae ate moa ad eee bp vore pe pee ERE RENE iur 7 5 il re M 5 4 E TII x x ds p funr ee ess isos ot een id ee n Uu D e 5 n Ius Ee E i a 6 E 1 s Loren EPER P ee Quir About Log Manager Log out 7 Station Bata T 4L Trunk Date 1 Numbering Plan 1 Service Feature Data HLG List Up Commands 1 dL List Up Commands 2 Signal Translation Data dL Restriction Data 7 Installation IL Local Data Memory 2 Network Data Memory 1 Ga Event S Processes n n n a n n n a E Command Name Input Text Box Figure 6 21 IPX MAT Menu Display Image Example CHAPTER 6 NDA 24300 Page 428 Issue 1 SYSTEM OPERATIONS 2 Data Output Details on DIFD DTFDN Command To obtain the collected Traffic data you can use DTFxxx or DTFxxxN command as shown below The comman
7. Group Number Allocating qa ador cose qae dee RACE AC Level Number Allocations 1 110 2517 a TL eer System Message Fault Detection General Fault Detection Block General System Block dea SEH d e dr a raaa CPU GConirelmtg BIOCE Daga ou d n dope Er COS ORO x dor Speech Path Block Diagram Speech Path Range of 3M Model 8012 Portable Field Service Kit PI 10 Cand How to Sel the HOM IC 5 How to Clean the Connector Portion How to Clean Gold Plated Diagnostic Work Items and Symbols Example Recovery Procedure Circuit Card Version Number Program Name and Program Package Version Number Circuit Card Mounting Face Layout of
8. XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX 8 0000 0000 0000 9 0000 0000 0000 0000 O F Memory Failure lt 02020 0 oo 4 Le iMd M D Information on Self CPU Restart after detection of a clock fault b3 b4 b7 55 b4 63 bO 2 Mate CPU Restart Information b3 b7 95 b4 b3 bO b4 b7 3 NMI Factor 57 b 65 64 63 b2 bl b4 0 1 Monitor Restart 0 1 Initialization 0 1 Data Copy Restart for Dual CPU system only 0 1 MBcontrol 0 1 ACT STBY active system indication after restart 0 1 Monitor Restart 0 1 Initialization 0 1 Data Copy Restart for Dual CPU system only 0 1 MBcontrol 0 1 ACT STBY active system indication after restart 0 1 Reset by Power On 0 1 Watchdog Timer timeout 0 1 ISGAT is mounted ISGAT is not mounted 0 1 OSC clock interrupt on ISGAT 0 1 parity Alarm 0 1 IO ready Alarm 0 1 External NMI Reference See Chapter 5 Section 6 2 for the repair procedure NDA 24300 CHAPTER 3 Page 47 Issue 1 SYSTEM MESSAGES 4 System Controlling Port B b0 b7 66 65 b4 63 b2 bl b4 CPU Alarm b7 66 65 64 63 b2 bl b4 CPU Changeover Factors D System ALM 57 b 65 63 b2 bl b4 Data Analyzed by NEC Engineers CHAPTER 3 Page 48 Issue 1 b7 b b5 b4 b3 b2 bl bO b4 b5 b6 b7 0 1 Ti
9. G31 NDA 24300 SYSTEM MESSAGES 52H Trunk Ineffective Hold Detected Impossible D 2 Jt 0000 0000 0000 0000 lt 0000 0000 27 0000 0000 09000 20000 51 de 1 0000 OOOO 0000 0000 58 0000 OOOO 0000 4000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 00009 0000 94 0009 0000 0000 0000 D Error detection by Routine Diagnosis 2 Cause for suspended detection of Trunk Ineffective Hold b7 bl 52H Trunk Ineffective Hold Detected Impossible bO 1 CPU to detect is abnormal 0 Data transfer error No Answer error NDA 24300 CHAPTER 3 Page 151 Issue 1 SYSTEM MESSAGES 70H Call Forwarding Memory Clear NG 1 7000 XX00 0000 0000 24 0000 0000 0000 0000 3 0000 0000 0000 0000 ey de CD 2 1 OOOO OOOO 0000 4000 5 0000 0900 00002 9000 OOOO 0000 QUOD 73 0009 0000 0000 0000 85 00009 0000 0000 0000 95 0000 0000 0000 0000 D Rrror detection by Routine 70H Call Forwarding Memory Clear NG Diagnosis 2 Cause for which Transfer Memory was stopped bO 1 CPU 15 abnormal Data Transfer error b7 bl CHAPTER 3 NDA 24300 Page 152 Issue 1 Periodic Backup Abnormal End SYSTEM MESSAGES XX00 XX00 2 Sa 209 4 0000 0000 0000 0000 5 dee
10. Cable to be disconnected from OUTPWR CPU 0 6P 4P 3P PWR CPU 1 6P 4P 3P PWR CA B FRONT VIEW Cable to be disconnected from INPWR CPU 0 4P 2P PWR CA A CPU 1 4P 2P PWR CA B Disconnect bus cables from the front connectors Refer to Figure 4 2 for CPR on the PZ GT16 face layout Cables be disconnected EXGT BUSCA A for CN A connector 50 40 GT BUS for CN B connector Refer to Figure 4 2 for CPR Disconnect Ethernet cables from the front face layout connectors on the PZ PC19 LANI Cables to be disconnected Ether cable UTP CTG5 ST CA n Note The kind of Ethernet cable may vary vary depending on its connecting conditions Refer to Figure 4 3 to replace Take off the four screws fastened onto the CPR the CPU Keep the removed screws CHAPTER 4 NDA 24300 Page 250 Issue 1 UNIT CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE Fo ATTENTION Contents Static Sensitive andling Precautions Required Refer to Figure 4 3 to replace Extract the CPR from the LPM the CPU DSP 2 CPUOPEWDT IMGO e IMG IMG2 IMG3 Turn ON the MBR key on the DSP of the new CPR m b 99999 FRONT VIEW Mount ISAGT PZ GT13 and LANI PZ PC19 cards ont
11. 484 12 2 5 System Initialization by SINZ 485 12 2 6 Peripheral Equipment Initialization Line Trunk Initialization 486 12 3 How to Turn ON OFF Whole 487 12 3 1 How to Turn On Whole 487 12 3 2 How to Turn OFF Whole System 488 DG ee 0 TE EEEE E 489 CHAPTER7 ROUTINE MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE 495 Ae _____ ____ ___ 495 11 ex ER Rd dS 495 1 2 Required Test Equipment and Tools 00 eee ens 496 2 ROUTINE MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES suo hh Rh xn 497 NDA 24300 TABLE OF CONTENTS Page vii Issue 1 TABLE OF CONTENTS CONTINUED Page 2 1 Ambient Conditions in Switch Room 498 2 2 Alarm Check 0 ee ee eee hh 499 et a o a4 9r wy PP Geers hey eee gt 500 2 4 Collection of System 501 29 Display Vr Locked out Avie cc ces eae deed eee ws ees Rot de 1 a 502 26 Fan eee eee ee eee eens 503 DEN E 1 1227213 9 932 3 92
12. 597 Toco boit o M bass ene gt 614 Route Number Explanation 617 NDA 24300 LIST OF TABLES Page xv Issue 1 This page is for your notes LIST OF TABLES NDA 24300 Page xvi Issue 1 CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION 1 GENERAL This manual describes routine system maintenance procedures and fault repair procedures This chapter explains how to follow the manual and provides precautions pertaining to maintenance jobs as a whole Be sure to read this chapter thoroughly before starting the required maintenance project 2 HOW TO FOLLOW THIS MANUAL If technicians engage in a fault repair with a sufficient amount of knowledge of the system system configurations controlling systems functions etc the time spent repairing the system is minimized This manual provides explanations about the system while placing emphasis on system configurations controlling systems and functions If faults of all conceivable cases are to be assumed for the explanations the explanations may lack reality and be more difficult to understand Therefore this manual provides the explanations on the basis of the following points 1 Itis very important to determine whether the fault occurred in the PBX or at any of the peripheral equip ment 2 Incase the PBX 15 faulty explanations are provided about the actions to take until the faulty circuit card cards are identi
13. Sees dene 1 CHAPTER2 SYSTEM 3 Lh aero cena E AO EPOD 3 EE E E E E ____ _ _ 3 1 2 Administrative Management 3 13 Summary of This Manual s 4 E BASO As oo he keke so 28 dard Pire i op AO Oe odo ee od dx 4 21 OEE RE ERA oO REDD RES 5 2 2 Line Equipment Numbers 5 9 Ex 1 9 ___ __ _ ese 10 ERO SIDE a ee ee ee ee ee ee re ee ee eee 23203999 11 CAU AS on te bad eo Oe eo oe ee oe 12 2c LocalPFanition LP el due ee ae bos REA GRE RE 13 2 4 System Messages d XOU QR od Joe RC RR 14 Detecting FUNCION aae quads Sha 15 2 6 Range of Faults 18 mo ee eee 25 3 HOW TO READ PRECAUTIONS DIAGNOSTIC AND FAULT REPAIR INFORMATION 26 3 1 Precaution about Diagnostic Procedure Fault Repair
14. Pe nesters ge P AES Replace THE iua aso HERR qe RR RH RR Ghee ERR Hees bee Removal of Front Panel and Top Cover from CPR Insertion of ISAGT and LANI Reattachment of CPR Top Cover and Front Accommodation of New CPR into Insertion of New HFD into Gri an ees Oa S xr Seed seeds ends Removal of Front Panel and Top Cover From Insertion of ISAGT and LANI lt Reattachment of CPR Top Cover and Front Location of New CPR Into inserion New ene Circuit Card Mounting Face Layout of TSWM System Block Diagram Connections Between GT and System Block Diagram TSW and Other Speech Path 5 LEDs and Switches for TSW Circuit Card Mounting Face
15. TEX ERE 560 DSTN of Staton Prep 561 DTELN Display of Telephone Number Data 562 DTF101 Display X wacg Quei sw x 564 DTF102 Display of Route Traffic deans se sec noua 565 DTF103 Display of Station Peg Count 566 TABLE OF CONTENTS NDA 24300 Page viii Issue 1 DTF104 DTF105 DTF201 DTF301 DTF302 DTF303 DTF501 DTF601 DTF602 DTF101N DTF102N DTF103N DTF104N DTF105N DTF201N DTF301N DTF302N DTF303N DTF501N DTF601N DTF602N FLINST HDD FDD HDD MAT HDD MAT N HDFP MBCT MBLE MBPM MBRT MBSM MBST MBST T MBTC MBTK MEM HDD MEM HDD N MFCH PMBU RALM RALMN RLST RLST T SINZ SPTS SRTS XHFD TABLE OF CONTENTS CONTINUED Page Display of Attendant Peg Count Data 567 Display of Route Peg Count 568 Display of Service Peg Count 569 Display of UCD Route Peg Count 570 Display or UCD Group Peg Count 571 Display of Station Peg Count Data 572 Display of Attendant Answering Peg Count Data
16. lt lt lt MUX PIM 1 PIM 1 7T yq LVDS Low Voltage Differential Signaling ToIMG2 ToIMG2 ToIMG3 ToIMG3 TSWM MUX 100 MUX 101 MUX 102 MUX 103 TSW INT Symbols Speech Path 0 0 Cable TSW PH SW12 jJ Circuit Card active X Circuit Card STBY MUX PH PC36 1 a i Figure 2 17 Speech Path Block Diagram CHAPTER 2 NDA 24300 Page 22 Issue 1 SYSTEM MAINTENANCE OUTLINE IMG2 IMG3 PIM 3 PIM 3 sd 2 2 I MUX PIM 1 PIM 1 gt LVDS Low Voltage Differential Signaling TSWM MUX 120 MUX 121 Symbols Speech Path 0 0 Cable TSW PH SW12 jJ Circuit Card Active Circuit Card STBY MUX PH PC36 I ed Figure 2 17 Speech Path Block Diagram Continued NDA 24300 CHAPTER 2 Page 23 Issue 1 SYSTEM MAINTENANCE OUTLINE rA ELM Se I I 4 LC TRK A fault within this range affects this module 32ch PIM3 EUM eee 512 A fault within this range affects the circuit card gum
17. 385 13 INTEGRATED SERVICE DIGITAL NETWORK ISDN LINE 386 Ol on eee eure 386 to eee LONI rrr 386 13 3 DCH PRT Gard ls nhac cease ee Rc edhe tana ORO n ees 387 13 4 Fault of DCH DTI and Related Flat Cable 388 14 HARD CLOCK 22 3 25 93 389 CHATIERS soa acad dy A SS Obes 391 1 ALARM INDICATIONS 391 13 or ABI EAR 391 1 2 How to Stop Alarm 392 1 3 Alarm Indications 392 14 Variable Alarm 393 2 COLLECTION OF SYSTEM MESSAGES Ls dades EXG dea EXC cus wena Cus bes 393 21 Automatic Printout to System Message Dedicated 393 cs DODIVOU MAT ad RR debe socie teks bated obec Renee cR ie di 394 INDICATION OF LOCKOUT STATIONS wees CRI A do COR 394 yl AMNEM le a se oh ee 394 3 2 Recovery Procedure ee ee ee OR OR ROCHE e 3 4 ee 394 amp LINE LOA
18. 573 Display of Connection Route Peg Count Data 574 Display of Connection Route Traffic 5 5 Display of Terminal Traffic Data for Fusion 5 6 Display of Route Traffic Data for Fusion Network 577 Display of Station Peg Count Data for Fusion 578 Display of Attendant Peg Count Data for Fusion 579 Display of Route Peg Count Data for Fusion Network 580 Display of Service Peg Count Data for Fusion Network 581 Display of UCD Route Peg Count Data for Fusion Network 582 Display of UCD Group Peg Count Data for Fusion 583 Display of UCD Station Peg Count Data for Fusion Network 584 Display of Attendant Answering Peg Count Data for Fusion Network 585 Display of Connection Route Peg Count Data for Fusion Network 586 Display of Connection Route Traffic Data for Fusion Network 587 Pee Wt _ _ 588 Data Control Between HDD and 589 Data Control Between HDD and 591 Data Control Between
19. D IMG2 IMG3 O O O 4 MA STATUS If the CPU is active the ae mode LEDs here indicate CPU left side LED here goes occupancy rate OFF and the right side beams E S b and y in rotation Legend XX Lamp is ON Figure 6 41 How to Check STATUS LEDs Note Except for the indication of the STATUS 7 segment LEDs the ACT STBY of the CPU also can be con firmed via the lamps on the DSP If the CPU OPE lamp light steady green and IMGO 3 are flashing the CPU is active If CPU OPE appears OFF and IMGO is flashing the CPU is in STBY mode CHAPTER 6 NDA 24300 Page 460 Issue 1 12 1 2 How to Control CPU Block SYSTEM OPERATIONS The CPU when it is provided in a dual configuration can be switched over by one of the operations shown in Table 6 8 If the system of CPU is changed over ACT STBY of GT in TSWM also changes over Contents Static Sensitive Handling Precautions Required Table 6 8 Changeover of CPU Block OPERATIONS REMARKS Changeover by Use the CMOD command CPU OPE lamp CMOD Changeover by key Turn ON key on the active DSP of the active CPU After a few operation lights steady green Note 1 See Chapter 8 on the DSP of the CPU which is placed
20. 398 Line Load Control Key Operations on 398 Line Load Control Indication 399 Class Change and Number Change of Station and Data Terminal Procedure 402 Make Busy Make Busy Cancel of Line Tie Line Procedure 402 Message Formal Ter Outgoing Gall 406 Message Format for Incoming 407 NDA 24300 LIST OF FIGURES Page xi Issue 1 Figure Figure 6 16 Figure 6 17 Figure 6 18 Figure 6 19 Figure 6 20 Figure 6 21 Figure 6 22 Figure 6 23 Figure 6 24 Figure 6 25 Figure 6 26 Figure 6 27 Figure 6 28 Figure 6 29 Figure 6 30 Figure 6 31 Figure 6 32 Figure 6 33 Figure 6 34 Figure 6 35 Figure 6 36 Figure 6 37 Figure 6 38 Figure 6 39 Figure 6 40 Figure 6 41 Figure 6 42 Figure 6 43 Figure 6 44 Figure 6 45 Figure 6 46 Figure 6 47 Figure 6 48 Figure 6 49 Figure 6 50 Figure 6 51 Figure 6 52 Figure 6 53 Figure 6 54 Figure 6 55 Figure 6 56 Figure 6 57 Figure 6 58 Figure 6 59 Figure 6 60 Figure 7 1 Figure 7 2 Figure 7 3 Figure 8 1 LIST OF FIGURES Page xii Issue 1 LIST OF FIGURES CONTINUED Title Page Message Format for Station to Station 408 Message Format for Outgoing Call Fusion
21. 26 3 2 How to Follow Diagnostic Procedure Fault Repair 30 REPORTING FAULT TONEGO reddat oe oo oe 41 Repornino PIU d uten 91794 3 33 4 2 Forwarding Faulty Circuit Card Method 35 LHAFTEHS SYISIENMBESSAUES 2222425922135 04 538 EX dcm UP QUEE UE eR ai 37 0 E E E hee 42 0 D DOWD Lions auae dh 44 0 E LOOD su ods eae tertsen are 45 0 ond cbt dbo tie ease _ ____ 47 0 B1 Level Infinite Loop 49 0 H B1 Level Infinite Loop 50 NDA 24300 TABLE OF CONTENTS Page i Issue 1 nmooum vozzr c roou c caAooococ ronmoouz c c Aovonmoour c NN amp A AAAA WWWWWDWDWWW gt 1 TABLE OF CONTENTS CONTINUED Page FAUD cht oh ede eee weed 51 Abnormal ee eee eee eee eens 52 Both TSW Failure Permanent acea ERE
22. 336 4 3 Unit Fault When Dial Tone DT Cannot Be Heard 340 4 4 Unit Fault ACT Side MUX Card Is Faulty and System Has Changed Over 344 5 SPEECH PATH TSW SYSTEM FAULT ne dw ERE 346 ODER FN rrr 346 5 2 Speech Path System Fault Fault Related to 349 5 3 Speech Path System Fault When Dial Tone DT Cannot Be Heard 353 5 4 Speech Path System Fault STBY Side Has Become 354 B FAUL ee ee ee de dt ded 356 hog peed hee be TITRE 356 6 2 Control System Fault Fault Occurs 359 6 3 Control System Fault STBY Side Is Faulty 361 7 ALARM 6 364 364 7 2 Fault of Alarm Indicating Panel 364 7 3 Fault That Cannot Be Detected 366 FONWERSUPPLST nada XA HD EROR AXES 367 a ___ E ESSET 367 62 Fuse
23. 368 Block Diagram of Power Supply System IMG2 3 368 dio dod oes nee tony beads Gece _ pees 369 PONG GUO WO LEM risus va deco RuPR 369 wisi O te 370 Circuit Diagram of Fan Unit and Thermal 374 DB Tore CeO ceeds coeds E RAS Godson 455084 376 External Hold Tone Supply Block Diagram 378 System Down Fault Repair 5 379 Lone COS ead adag ops qoot dede 383 Longum eos e o9 cabo 6 outs es seus QE E RE SERES PIS P 386 ovem sius MODE ua dudordra d06 3 4 Rec qe do odes qp dC dor de b 391 PIT TENERE dpi eid dde eng hoe EER Ee hee eee hee esa ae ES 391 Parm Ingiesddoris Om Las ua d sched E JG ae Re PUR 392 Automatic Printout to System Message Dedicated Printer Operating Procedure 393 Recovery Procedure From Lockout 394 Line Load Control Operations on ATTCON Setting 396 Line Load Control Operations on 397 Locations OF Lamps ATTCON a aoa e dh de RR 397 Line Load Control Key Operations on DESKCON Setting
24. 417 Message Format for Incoming Call Fusion 418 Message Format for Station to Station Call 419 SMDR TCP IP Interface Billing Output Devices 423 IPX MAT Menu Display Image 428 DTFD Command Display Image 430 Listup Report Window when View Database is Selected Example 431 Export Dialog for Traffic Report Text File Saving 431 Office Data Change Procedure for Release 1 2 434 Office Data Change Procedure for Release 435 Backup CommandS ee kab ed a ee d OR 436 Test Operation Method 438 Register Test Procedure Connection Diagram 440 Sender Test Procedure Connection Diagram 441 3 Party Conference Test Procedure 442 3 Party Conference Test Connection Diagram 443 Tone Test Procedure Connection Diagram 444 Interrupt Ringing IR Test Procedure Connection Diagram
25. MGI MGO _ _ _ _ MG2 0 1 MUX connection error functional fault not mounted M MG5 MG4 M NDA 24300 CHAPTER 3 Page 143 Issue 1 SYSTEM MESSAGES MUX card STBY linkage As shown in the following table each bit represents the Unit No allocated condition for each MUX card in position When 1 is set the corresponding MUX b7 66 65 64 63 b2 bl card status has a functional failure is not mounted in the proper location LT TTT tT tt b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 bl bO esse MGI MGO MG3 MG2 0 1 functional fault not mounted M MG5 MG4 CHAPTER 3 NDA 24300 Page 144 Issue 1 SYSTEM MESSAGES 41H CPU ACT STBY Changeover Failure It LXX 0000 00009 0000 0000 0000 0004 10006 33 0000 0000 0000 20000 DO 1 OOOO OOOO 0000 0000 5 0000 2000105 0900 0000 9000 OOOO 0000 QUOD 73 0009 0000 0000 0000 85 00009 0000 0000 0000 95 0000 0000 0000 0000 D Error detection by Routine 41H CPU ACT STBY Changeover Failure Diagnosis 2 ACT system after changeover b0 CPU 0 1 0 is ACT 1 is ACT b7 bl bO NDA 24300 CHAPTER 3 Page 145
26. 4 Table 2 2 Kinds of Circuit Card Front Restart 26 Table 3 1 GUB Messio a 37 3 2 gach fhe gt bh ee ad 225 Table 3 3 EI TESI 227 4 1 LPM Unit Circuit Cards and Reference 241 Table 4 2 TSWM Circuit Cards and Reference Items 267 Table 4 3 PIM Circuit Cards and Reference Items 284 Table 5 1 Fault Repair Procedure Quick Reference 309 Table 5 2 Line Fault Situation 311 Table 5 3 TRUE oh hee E ad ee ee 320 Table 5 4 Timings for MUNKS ine he here dede o eei ier eee ea ee eee 321 Table 5 5 Tor SONOS Luaexccad dc qtd he Pad a Re URP RS REedde 322 Table 5 6 LEG PORN ee gt uod dcn yess cus 333 Table 5 7 Speech Path TSW System Fault Situation 346 Table 5 8 Conr System Fault GUUAUON 2533 ua pie 3 9 356 Table 5 9 Alarm Indication Fault Situation ccecioadwisctcedutddatediedvisttcwnescadecdwss 364 Table 5 10 PWR Supply Faull Situation 2546605540444 05 50 REO DEES DRESSED RODEO HO
27. 4 Buffer Usage Rate Assigned by b0 b3 Units ASYD SYS1 Index 250 b4 b7 Tens b7 b 65 64 63 b2 bl 111 b FS 1 FE 0 2 Fault Grade by ALMG command 00 NON CONT 01 SUP b7 ho db B ire 3 Overflow Rate bO 0 1 100 Overflow b7 b0 4 Overflow Rate b4 b7 1 9 10 90 Overflow b7 b6 55 b4 bO 11 3 NDA 24300 Page 106 Issue 1 SYSTEM MESSAGES c FS 2 FE 0 SMDR Gr oup No b0 b3 SMDR Group No to which failure occurred b7 b3 b2 bl 111 S Port No bO b7 Port No allocated for SMDR Group to which failure occurred 0 7 b7 b6 65 b4 b3 62 bl TT 4 Not used d FS 3 FE 0 2 0 63 SMDR Group No to which failure occurred b7 b3 62 bl ttt EET tT NDA 24300 CHAPTER 3 Page 107 Issue 1 SYSTEM MESSAGES SMDR Output Buffer Overflow Release Default Alarm Default Grade Grade Modified Lamp Modified NON 0 This message displays when the SMDR output buffer usage rate has been lowered to less than the value as signed in the ASYD SYS1 Index 250 after the rate exceeds the value assigned by Index 249 1 XX00 0000 0000 0000 2 0000 0000 0000 0000 3 0000 0000 0000 0000 y7 CD 4t 0009 90990 09000 0000 4 0000 80900 4000 0000 10000 80060 009090 0000 WOOO OOOO sS WOOO OOO OOOO ir QUO OUUU OOOO D Detail Information
28. 446 obuia wr 447 Trunk Test Connection Diagram 448 Switching Network General Block Diagram 456 How to Check LEDs and SW Keys for System Changeover 457 How to Check LEDs and SW Keys for System Changeover 1 458 How to Check LEDs and SW Keys for System Changeover IMG2 3 459 How to Check STATUS LEDS au oasis ams tun 460 system Block Diagram Switching Network Between CPU and 1 462 LIU NOU 463 IBY ED Sad qr dies rad 463 CPU Changeover via MBR 464 LED Indications Before and After CPU 464 gi pec 4 319 dod dua p EX EP S 465 System Block Diagram Switching Network for Speech Path System 468 TSW DLKOC MUX in 469 Toe DLEO PLUA m STBT MODO og dor ie quic eda 469 Speech Path System Changeover via Active GT MBR Key 470 LED Indications Before and After Speech Path System Changeover
29. 34 960d Hd XxNW MBR CPUOPEWDT IMGO Vl ir x n IMG1 IMG2 IMG3 XX STATUS DSP 0 PZ DK224 XO HF 0000000 VIN3 BASEU FRONT VIEW 1 Lamp is ON 30 Lamp is Flashing Figure 6 38 How to Check LEDs and SW Keys for System Changeover IMGO NDA 24300 CHAPTER 6 Page 457 Issue 1 SYSTEM OPERATIONS To perform ACT STBY system changeover check the lamp indicators shown in Figure 6 39 and then operate the related key Note LED indications cited in Figure 6 39 are only an example The indicating patterns ON Flash OFF can differ depending on each system setting MUX ACT SS System State gt ACT PLOO gt ACT DLKC 0 ACT TOPU PIM3 PIM2 FANU PIM1 PIMO fos 08 09 10 1112 13 14 15 16 17 19 19 20 21 22 23 Xm mx e 5 0 2151515121215 gt gt o o 010 5 5 5 5 3 5 _ 2 2 D m mimm OPE MB MB LI D a TI TI Note Use any of the following c
30. 102 SMDR Output Buffer Overflow 105 SMDR Output Buffer Overflow 108 System Initialize With Data Load 109 eC ee ee ee 111 6 TOTON 112 LPUNBH TUTECPP Lucas d bud 113 Ton MER Rd 114 Toe MBR ROS TUM csoedeteseeiccdotas ted adtad i 3 he 115 TABLE OF CONTENTS NDA 24300 Page ii Issue 1 TABLE OF CONTENTS CONTINUED Page 7 G TON PLLLISBY TUUT TUBE su dud acess eines obese SOR Ur ERE RR EHE FERE Gad S eo ES RES 116 7 H TSW PLO Key 117 7 ON ePi wie rre 118 7 J ALMC Key Turn sa RAE GRASSES EA d 119 7 K TUM Gs ocd et oe ed do cep eee 120 7 L PM MB Key 121 7 M MOUNE REY ee Ree Pe 122 7 NCU MB Key OPI iurandi rte de OR edo ke OE ER RR CIR nm SERS 123 7 O eee a as eS 124 7 P Cyclic Diagnosis Info
31. 4 gt lt 3l L L c gt lt 3l c gt lt 3l 3l C gt lt mmn y on L a gt lt gt lt x c 3l TW i2 TSW I O BUS DLKC 0 DLKC 1 MISC BUS OC MISC ISAGT PZ GT13 LANI PZ PC19 GT 9 TSW PH SW12 MUX PH PC36 DLKC PH PC20 16 17 16 17 PH PC40 IOC PH IO24 Figure 6 37 Switching Network General Block Diagram CHAPTER 6 NDA 24300 Page 456 Issue 1 Note 1 Note 2 SYSTEM OPERATIONS To perform the ACT STBY system changeover check the lamp indicators shown in Figure 6 38 and then operate the related key LED indications cited in Figure 6 38 are only an example The indicating pattern ON Flash OFF can differ depending on each system setting STATUS 7 seg LED provides information on ACT STBY status of the belonging CPU For details on the LED s checking method refer Figure 6 41 TOPU System State CPU 0 gt ACT ieee eres TSW 0 gt ACT PIM3 m MUX ACT MB a A MUX ACT 1 2 PIM2 9EO0d Hd XNW m FANU MUX ACT 1 PIM1 34 9E0d Hd XNW m oo A MUX ACT PIMO DSP 1 PZ DK224
32. 0 1 Data in OPTN is invalid valid 7 OPTN data b0 b3 Tenant No Over 15 b7 63 b2 bl bO 0 1111 NDA 24300 CHAPTER 3 Page 97 Issue 1 SYSTEM MESSAGES Tested Route No b0 b5 Route No 1 63 Note b7 b6 55 b4 63 b2 b b6 0 1 Data in OPRT is invalid valid 0 1 Internal trunk External trunk Note When Logical Routes are assigned Logical Route Numbers are displayed here 9 OPRT data b0 b7 Route No gt 64 Note b7 66 b5 b4 63 b2 bl ___ Note When Logical Routes are assigned Logical Route Numbers are displayed here This data is not for Ringing Signal 50 b7 Trunk No for Outgoing trunk test ORT IRT Test Sender Test and Test Digital Conference test Tone Slot No for Tone Test b7 b6 b5 63 62 bl 0 DT 1 SPDT 4 BT 5 RBT 6 SST WT 7 SDT 8 TRG 9 SDTT 10 CWRBT 14 MSC D Digit of Dialed Number for test b0 b4 Dialed number digit sent by the test Trunk Sender b7 b4 b3 b2 bl TE Dialed Number digit received by the test Register 42 Dialed Number for test 57 b6 65 63 62 bl a Dialed Number sent by the test Trunk Sender b Dial Number received by the test Register onn 4e dcll CHAPTER 3 NDA 24300 Page 98 Issue 1 SYSTEM MESSAGES Emergency Call Default Alarm Default Gra
33. onten Static Sensitive Han Hoa MR Required On the DSP of active CPR turn ON the MBR key isum of GT from Turn OFF the MBR key again to mode MBR CPUOPE WDT GT 9 ur FRONT VIEW Check the following lamp indications on the GT card to be replaced and on the DSP of CPR that controls the GT GT card OFF CPU OPE CPU DSP OFF e CPU DSP Flash green MGI 3 CPU DSP OFF Check the following lamp indications on the mate GT card and the DSP of the mate CPR GT card Steady green Confirm the mate GT s ACT mode On the EMA PH PC40 card set the EMA SUP key UP CPU OPE CPU DSP Steady green e MGO0 3 CPU DSP Flash green EMA SUP lamp on the EMA card is A steady green NDA 24300 CHAPTER 4 Page 269 Issue 1 UNIT CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE yos ATTENTION ontents n Static Sensitive Handlin Precautions Required On the GT card to be replaced set the MBR switch UP OPE MB lamp on the GT card On the GT card to be replaced remains OFF set the MB switch UP Extract the GT card to be replaced from the TSWM oet the MBR and MB keys on the new card UP Insert the new GT card into the TSWM OPE MB lamp on the new card 18 Set the MB key on the new card DOWN OFF OPE MB lamp on the new card remains OFF oet th
34. 2 Changing Method b0 b7 1 Night ATTCON DESKCON b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 bl b0 TT NDA 24300 CHAPTER 3 Page 207 Issue 1 SYSTEM MESSAGES Day Night Mode Specification 3 Mode after changing b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 52 bl b0 b4 b7 Mode before changing __ ILL Note This data is programmed as initial data Night Mode 2 available only for Japan Night Mode 3 DIT Night Connection Fixed Note External Switch Status 0 7 012Not used b7 6 b5 63 62 bl 02 Day Night Change CHAPTER 3 NDA 24300 Page 208 Issue 1 SYSTEM MESSAGES MB Key Turn ON Default Alarm Default Grade Grade Modified Lamp Modified NON 3 This message displays when the MB switch on the IOC card is turned ON while extracting or inserting a circuit card 1 XX00 0000 0000 0000 2 0000 0000 0000 0000 3 0000 0000 0000 0000 y7 4t 0009 9990 00900 0000 58 0009 00090 0000 78009 0000 0000 0000 re OOOO OOOO OOOO 9x P000 WOOO OOOO OOOO Oc OUO OOOO WOOO D Circuit Card No bO 0 1 IOC 0 IOC 1 b7 NDA 24300 CHAPTER 3 Page 209 Issue 1 SYSTEM MESSAGES MB Key Turn OFF Default Alarm Default Grade Grade Modified Lamp Modified NON 3 This message displays when the MB switch on the IOC card 15 turned OFF Tx 9000 0000 0
35. 9 3 99 gt gt 504 28 505 OE 4 neds CRUE hes 506 2 10 ATTCON DESKCON Check 507 oT rrr E 509 3 ROUTINE MAINTENANCE CHECK 5175 510 CHAPTER8 MAINTENANCE COMMANDS 519 i bos ea __ _ 519 ALLC Assignment of Line Load Control 522 ALMG Assignment of Alarm Grade 523 ATRF Assignment of Traffic Measurement Order 524 ATRFN Assignment of Traffic Measurement Order for Fusion Network 525 BOSD Back Up One Touch Speed Call Memory 526 CADSD Continuous Assignment of Station Data 527 CATK Continuous Assignment of Trunk Data 530 CBCN Control of Broadcasting for 537 CCSE Change of Common Signaling Channel Equipment 538 CDBU 10130 Deh Tm 539 CMOD Change or System DIDUE begs se 5
36. CHAPTER 5 Page 328 Issue 1 Set up a loop back connection between the DTI Trunk to be tested and another DTI Trunk as shown below Receive Heceive R R Send Send T T If the office is the PLO source office perform the tests by disconnecting the PLO and M OSC The mode of the PLO becomes Self Operation Mode When the loop back test is performed at the time of PCM LOSS FRM LOSS or MERM LOSS alarm lamp red illuminates If the alarm lamp goes out the DTI circuit card side is normal When only one DTI circuit card is to be checked make the following connections and confirm that no alarm lamps illuminates Loop back Cross Connection NDA 24300 FAULT REPAIR PROCEDURES 3 ATTCON DESKCON FAULT This section explains the fault repair procedure when a specific Attendant Console ATTCON is in any of the following faulty conditions 3 1 1 2 3 3 2 No speech can be made No operations can be made Check Point When repairing an ATTCON DESKCON fault consider the following items Check the cable connections on the backplane When replacing the circuit card for master ATTCON DESKCON the system is placed under Night Mode during replacement procedure When replacing master ATTCON DESKCON the system is placed under Night Mode during replace ment procedure ATTCON DESKCON Control Each ATTCON DESKCON is controlled from an ATI PA CS33 circuit card The ATI ci
37. b7 0 1 Even numbered MG Odd numbered MG Ii TTI NDA 24300 CHAPTER 3 Page 73 Issue 1 SYSTEM MESSAGES Ground Failure Default Alarm Default Grade Grade Modified Lamp Modified SUP 1 This message displays when a wire of the line between the LC circuit card and the telephone set is short circuited with ground 0 4t 0009 80909 0000 0000 34 0009 8990 0000 0000 6 rs OOOO WOOO OUO OOOO Ox UOOO UOO OUG GOOG 98 1 XXXX 0000 0000 0000 2 0000 0000 0000 0000 3 0000 0000 0000 0000 Em ms cud 0000 0000 0900 0000 3000010000 0000 Location of faulty circuit card 0 2 Circuit No 0 7 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 bl b3 b7 Circuit card No 0 31 111 1114 2 Location of faulty circuit card b1 Unit No 0 3 pP 66 B5 B4 Dy Boo 99490999 Note This message displays when the specific LC card providing the above function is used CHAPTER 3 NDA 24300 Page 74 Issue 1 SYSTEM MESSAGES Digital Line Warning Default Alarm Default Grade Grade Modified Lamp Modified SUP 2 This message displays when the DTI card detects an abnormal state of a digital line but this failure has no fluence on the speech path When the status worsens the system issues 3 1 Digital Line Failure message 1 XXXX 0000 0000 2 0000 0000 0000 0000 3 0000 0000 0000 0000 4 0000 0000 0000 0000 5 0000 0000 0000 0
38. longer battery life observe the following items Place the batteries in a dark cool place Keep the room temperature within the range of 10 C to 35 C 40 F to 85 F e Floating voltage must be kept within the range of the battery specification at all times After discharging perform equalized charging as per the battery specification NDA 24300 CHAPTER 7 Page 505 Issue 1 ROUTINE MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE 2 9 Trunk RGU Check START Check alarm lamps on the line trunk circuit cards Check to see if a system message pertaining to a circuit card has been output Check the speech path for each PIM and also check ringing signal END CHAPTER 7 NDA 24300 Page 506 Issue 1 ROUTINE MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE 2 10 ATTCON DESKCON Check 1 Attendant Console Check START Ask the operator at each ATTCON if the ATTCON 1s operating normally Each operator presses the LCHK button on the ATTCON and confirms that all the lamps on the control panel light up When the ATTCON is equipped with a Time Indicator Section the operator also checks the displayed time END Note Adjusting Time Method see Figure 7 2 Ifthe Hour button 15 pushed once the time will advance one hour To push the button use a thin object such as a toothpick Ifthe button is held continuously the time will advance one hour each second Ifthe Minute M button is pushed once the time will advance one minute Ifth
39. m am HUB ous ied HUB UEM 0 5 PER re eer ee a 10 BASE T Disi symbols EMA 40 ISAGT PZ GT13 PZ PC19 GT PH GTO9 1024 Circuit Card TSW PH SW12 DLKC 20 MUX PH PC36 PH CK16 17 16 A 17 A Figure 2 15 General System Block Diagram NDA 24300 CHAPTER 2 Page 19 Issue 1 SYSTEM MAINTENANCE OUTLINE IWNEININININININININININA j E E LI LC TRK L E il a I Tee 5 5 T 2 BUS 2 BUS 4 A H 5 i H LC TRK LC TRK LC TRK LC TRK 5 l 63006 5 42 EI MUX L PMBUS z L PMBUS kaa 7
40. 009009 000909 0000 0000 3 0000 0000 0000 0000 6 0000 DOUO 93 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 D Self CPU Restart information b7 65 b4 b3 I LET OT 2 Mate CPU Restart information b7 65 64 63 I LET CI b3 b4 b7 b3 b4 bS b7 0 1 Monitor Restart 0 1 Initialization 0 1 Data Copy Restart for Dual CPU system only 0 1 MB control 0 1 ACT STBY active system indication after restart 0 1 Monitor Restart 0 1 Initialization 0 1 Data Copy Restart for Dual CPU system only 0 1 MB control 0 1 ACT STBY active system indication after restart NDA 24300 CHAPTER 3 Page 113 Issue 1 SYSTEM MESSAGES TSW MBR Key Turn ON Default Alarm Default Grade Grade Modified Lamp Modified NON 3 This message displays when the MBR switch on the TSW card is turned ON at CPU changeover or speech path changeover 1 0 0000 0000 0000 2 0000 0000 0000 0000 3 0000 0000 0000 0000 y7 4 0000 0000 0000 0000 5 0000 0000 0000 0000 6 0000 0000 0000 0000 Te 0900 0000 9990 0000 sy 0090 00009 9990 0000 9 GOOG 00009 99090 0000 D system status of TSW card 0 1 No 0 system No 1 system b7 Kind of Circuit Card b7 bO 0 1 SW12 GT19 CHAPTER 3 NDA 24300 Page 114 Issue 1 SYSTEM MESSAGES TSW MBR Key Turn OFF Defau
41. 268 2 3 2 TSW Card Replacement Procedure 272 2 3 3 DLKC Card Replacement Procedure 277 2 3 4 Card Replacement 279 2 3 5 PWR SW Card Replacement 281 2 3 6 MISC Card Replacement 282 3 ACCOMMODATING CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE 283 SJ os oo oe _____ _____ ____ ____ _ 283 3 2 Circuit Card Mounting Face 283 43 284 3 3 1 LC TRK Circuit Card Replacement Procedure 285 3 3 2 MUX Card Replacement Procedure 286 3 3 3 SDT Card Replacement 289 3 3 4 PWR Card Replacement Procedure 294 REPLACEMEN abe ER ERES REOR A 296 5 CPR COOLING FAN REPLACEMENT as Lisieux ct Rb CR m RE RC CC HC Sa 301 TABLE OF CONTENTS NDA 24300 Page iv Issue 1 TABLE OF CONTENTS CONTINUED Page B ai gy eee 2 ee usd eee ee w Ed Rad 304 Charlier FAULT
42. 77 d 231 33 C DE Pe Gap tata eee ts 233 33 D Pa eee easy aes __ 236 33 E SDT Interface Change 237 CHAPTER 4 UNIT CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE 239 1 LPM ACCOMMODATING UNIT CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE 239 LE 2222454492423 gt E rdc AEEA E E 239 1 2 Circuit Card Mounting Face 239 241 1 3 4 CPR Replacement 242 1 3 2 Card Replacement Procedure 258 1 3 3 IOC Card Replacement 261 1 3 4 Power Supply Unit Replacement 263 1 3 5 MISC Card Replacement 265 2 TSWM ACCOMMODATING CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE 266 23 266 2 2 Circuit Card Mounting Face Layout 266 2 3 Operating Procedures cccccasdseese URS RE 267 2 3 1 GT Card Replacement
43. STN No ATT CON No RT TK No 6 digits FPC 3 digits User Group Number Telephone Number Max 16 digits Logical Route No Byte Data Minute Milli Second Outgoing Trunk Information Call End Time Calling Party Information Station No Note Account Code Account Code Max 16 digits Calling Party Information Telephone No Condition B Information Note Alternate Physical Routing RT No 1 Information Note Logical RT No 1 FPC2 Logical RT No 2 150 155 160 165 170 175 195 200 205 210 215 SYSTEM OPERATIONS Byte Data Billing Informa Byte Data 220 Condition C Figure 6 17 Message Format for Outgoing Call Fusion NDA 24300 tion Information Call Note Metering 225 Condition D Information Note cation ATT CON No 1 5 ees Department Dial Code Dial Code Code Max 32 digits Automatic Automatic Office Number Code of diaits Indication Calling 915 Note Party Office Code Information Office Code of Billing Pro cess Office Authoriza tion Code Authoriza tion Code Max 16 9818 Converted Number Max 6 285 digits Page 417 Issue 1 SYSTEM OPERATIONS Byte Data Byte Data Call Start 3 digits Trunk Information Milli Second Physical Route No Trunk No Call End Time Logical Route No ORIG Note Called Tenant Party 3 digits Information Station
44. 470 e c date 471 ghee o ee eee eee 472 PLO Changeover via MB 473 LED Indications Before and After PLO Changeover 473 Conceptional Diagram of Initial Program Load 477 Related Keys and LEDs for System 1 478 How to Turn ON the Whole 487 How To Turn OFF the Whole System 488 FION Ol Eos 495 AUC do due dte qct cow d d ood 9 3 x qo ded 507 Bo Aeey MM 508 Port Status Report MG Display isse ees ewe 614 NDA 24300 Figure Figure 8 2 Figure 8 3 Figure 8 4 LIST OF FIGURES CONTINUED Title Page Port Status Report MG Unit 615 Port Status Report MG Unit Group Display Designating Group 616 Port Status Report MG Unit Group Display Designating Group Trunk 617 NDA 24300 LIST OF FIGURES Page xiii Issue 1 LIST OF TABLES Table Title Page Table 2 1 Summary of This Manual s Contents
45. 6 XXXX KAXA lt lt a _ _ M 7 8 0000 0000 0000 9 0000 0000 0000 0000 b3 Initialization 57 65 b4 b3 bO b4 Data Copy restart for Dual CPU system only b7 0 12 ACT STBY active system indication after restart 2 Restart Information FF 0 1 Monitor Restart H not mounted b3 0 1 Initialization b7 bS b4 53 bO b4 Data Copy restart for Dual CPU system only b5 0 1 MB control 11 b7 ACT STBY active system indication after restart b0 0 1 B level Infinite Loop b7 bj bo bL 0 1 Timer Timeout 1111 LLJ 4 Data Analyzed by NEC Engineers Reference See Chapter 5 Section 6 2 and Section 6 3 for the repair procedure CHAPTER 3 Page 50 Issue 1 NDA 24300 SYSTEM MESSAGES Mate CPU Failure Default Alarm Default Grade Grade Modified Lamp Modified SUP 3 This message displays when a fault such as the Clock down or C level infinite loop error has occurred 1 0 0000 0000 0000 2 0000 0000 0000 0000 3 0000 0000 00009 0000 D 4 0009 0000 0000 0000 5 0000 0000 0000 0000 6 0000 0000 0000 0000 Ji 0000 0009 0000 0000 8 0000 0000 0000 0000 93 0000 0000 0000 0000 D Mate CPU Restart Information 0 1 CPU clock down bl C level infinite loop b7 b3 b2 bl b2 0 1
46. 67 b 65 b4 63 b2 bl b7 Even numbered MG Odd numbered MG III 2 Data Analyzed by NEC Engineers NDA 24300 CHAPTER 3 Page 167 Issue 1 SYSTEM MESSAGES 3 Probable cause for the failure b7 63 62 bl III 11 CHAPTER 3 168 Issue 1 Oo CCITT FLT ID ERROR A O Q C E O2 1j P NDA 24300 FACTOR S F 1 frame is received DM F 1 response is received UA F 1 response is received UA F 0 response is received DM F 0 response is received SABME command is received N200 Timeout Link is set N200 Timeout Link is disconnected N200 Timeout Link failure is restored to normal N R frame error is received FRMR frame is received Link is re set up Undefined frame is received Improper long frame is received I frame with I field which exceeds N201 is received Layer 1 down for ILC FRMR frame is received Link is not re setup SYSTEM MESSAGES Restoration From CCS Link Failure Default Alarm Default Grade Grade Modified Lamp Modified NON 3 This message displays when the faults pertaining to CCIS ISDN Link are restored to normal It 0000 0000 0000 24 0000 0000 0000 0000 35 0000 8000 0000 0000 EQ mi DO 4 0000 0000 0000 0000 5 0000 0000 0000 0000 6 0000
47. 9 2 1 2 Office Data Stored Locations The office data is stored in the memory MEM and on the Hard Disk HD While the system is in service it operates by the office data stored in the memory Should the contents of the office data be destroyed due to trouble the system restarts its operations by loading the office data from the hard disk into the memory The office data of the system in operation is being backed up by the hard disk Office Data Preservation Since the PBX keeps operating by the assigned office data be sure to preserve the latest office data If the office data 15 not preserved all office data must be reassigned if the contents of the data memory have been destroyed because of trouble occurrence etc The system will remain in a system down state until reas signment of the office data 15 complete Practice to verify and confirm the valid office data by routine maintenance is considered an effective means to prevent loss of the office data and occurrence of trouble due to the office data For this reason be sure to keep the following items near the system at all times so that they may be available when needed Office Data Programming Sheets As the most up to date data must be recorded in the sheets be sure to make entries by pencil Floppy Disks for Data Saving To back up the office data stored on the HD use floppy disks The necessary number of Floppy Disks FD is determined by the following factors
48. D Circuit Card No bO 0 1 IOC 0 IOC 1 b7 CHAPTER 3 NDA 24300 Page 212 Issue 1 DCH Back Up Automatic Change Start End Default Alarm SYSTEM MESSAGES Default Grade NON Grade Modified Lamp Modified 1 This message displays when the Primary Dch fails and the Dch Back Up function is operated automatically E zie mien cutem oo 9o OO 4 0000 0000 0000 0000 5 ver 0000 QUOD 20000 39000 1 XXXX XXXX 008 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 35 0000 0000 00000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 6 00900 0000 0000 20000 9 0000 0000 0000 0000 00900 0000 0000 Condition of Dch b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 bl 2 Location of Dch Primary 57 b6 65 b4 b3 62 bl 3 Location of Dch Back up 57 b6 65 63 62 bl b0 b7 Back up Start 2 Back up End 3 Back up Failed bO b4 Group No b5 b6 Unit No 0 3 b7 0 1 Even numbered MG Odd numbered MG bO b4 Group No b5 b6 Unit No 0 3 b7 0 1 2 Even numbered MG Odd numbered MG NDA 24300 CHAPTER 3 Page 213 Issue 1 SYSTEM MESSAGES 4 Changeover Information b7 b3 62 bl Status of the Primary Back up Dch b7 65 64 23 b2 bl 1 6 EVENT No b7 b6 65 b4 563 562 CHAPTER 3 214 Issue 1 bO b1 b2 b3 b0 b2 b3 b5 b0 b7 00 Change from Primary Dch to Dch
49. Is any fuse blown Yes 5 m N Fault in LC card that accompanied Fuse is still blown the fuse blowing Yes Fault of PWR card Perform system initialization after inserting all removed cards There the backboard of PIM Figure 4 32 RGU Fuse Blown Fault Flowchart NDA 24300 CHAPTER 4 Page 307 Issue 1 UNIT CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE Perform the procedure in Figure 4 33 to confirm the cause of DC 48V fuse blown fault Visual check No pin contacting or backboard melting OPE Lamps green of No LC TRK NCU cards remain lit Turn ON UP the MB key on the circuit card Remove the card from the PIM Replace the fuse with a new one The replaced fuse No is blown again LPM TSWM PIM Make sure in which module the fuse has blown Fault of circuit card that was removed Turn ON UP the MB keys on the whole circuit cards and remove them from the PIM Only PWR cards Turn ON UP the MB are inside the PIM keys on the whole circuit cards and remove them from the PIM Only PWR cards are inside the PIM Replace the blown fuse with a new one Insert the removed cards Replace the blown fuse with a new one one by one into the PIM f lowing No Theseglaced duse Is there any fuse blowing is blown again Yes Yes Insert the removed cards one by one into the PIM Is any fuse blown Perform system initializ
50. KOO 0000 0000 24 OOOO 8000 0000 0000 se 0000 2000 49000 0000 4 0000 0000 0000 0000 5 0000 0000 0000 0000 6 0000 0000 0000 0000 T OOOO QUOO 20000 0000 0000 0000 10000 0000 Os 0000 0000 10000 D Restoration of PLO fault 0 1 PLO No 0 system PLO No 1 system b7 ILILILLLI Current Status of PLO card 0 1 Clock is in STBY side ACT side bl PLO synchronizing PLO self running or drifting b7 b b4 b3 bl 50 b2 0 1 Input clock down LLLI 53 b4 Route of input clock see the table below Connected With Primary Connected With Oscillator M OSC External Clock Pe pep Ro b5 0 1 PLO input all down b6 PLO output down b7 Drifting 3 Current Status of PLO card 0 1 5msec clock down bl Frame Synchronization from SYNC is down b7 b4 bl 50 b4 Internal OSC clock down CHAPTER 3 NDA 24300 Page 68 Issue 1 SYSTEM MESSAGES C Level Infinite Loop Permanent Default Alarm Default Grade Grade Modified Lamp Modified MN 3 This message displays when a C level program abnormal state is detected as permanent When the Port Mi croprocessor PM on an LC TRK card detects the abnormal state the PM places the card into make busy sta tus If the failure occurs more than 15 times an hour the system judges the failure as permanent
51. NDA 24300 FAULT REPAIR PROCEDURES ATTENTION Contents Static Sensitive Handling Precautions Required Replace the TSW circuit card referring to Sec tion 2 3 2 TSW Card Replacement Procedure in Chapter 4 Set the TSW circuit card into ACT mode by flipping the MBR key on the active GT PH GTO9 card Refer to Section 12 1 6 Manual System Changeover of Speech Path System in Chapter 6 Initialize the system by pressing the START button on the TOPU Check to see if a station to station connection can be set up to identify a TSW circuit card re sponsible for the fault Perform the above check by extracting the TSW circuit cards individually Replace the MUX circuit card referring to Sec tion 3 3 2 MUX Card Replacement Procedure in Chapter 4 Set the MUX circuit card into ACT mode by flipping the MBR key on the active GT PH GTO9 card Refer to Section 12 1 6 Manual System Changeover of Speech Path System in Chapter 6 Check to see if a station to station connection can be set up and identify a TSW circuit card re sponsible for the fault Perform the above check by extracting the MUxX circuit cards individually CHAPTER 5 Page 355 Issue 1 FAULT REPAIR PROCEDURES 6 CONTROL SYSTEM FAULT This section explains the fault repair procedure for the control system listed in Table 5 8 Table 5 8 Control System Fault Situation FAULTY SITUATION REFERENCE SECTION Fault occurs occasionally at the ST
52. Place the MUX circuit card into ACT mode by flipping the MBR key on the active GT PH GTO9 card Refer to Section 12 1 6 Manual System Changeover of Speech Path System in Chapter 6 Check to see if a station to station connection can be set up to identify a circuit card responsi ble for the fault END Extract all the line trunk circuit cards from their mounting slots in the unit Insert the cards back into their slots one after another and see if the dial tone 1s heard each time If DT is heard check the next circuit card If DT is not heard replace the circuit card with a spare NDA 24300 FAULT REPAIR PROCEDURES ATTENTION Contents Static Sensitive Handling Precautions Required Extract all the line trunk circuit cards from their slots Note Set the MB switch of the line trunk circuit card UP and extract Confirm the MUX ACT lamp on the MUX circuit card illuminates Set the MB switch of an extracted Line Trunk circuit card UP and insert the circuit cards into their mounting slots one by one Confirm the OPE lamp of the inserted circuit card illuminates by setting the MB switch DOWN Make a station to station call and see if dial tone can be heard Note Perform this check on the reset of the circuit cards by inserting them into their slots individually CHAPTER 5 Page 343 Issue 1 FAULT REPAIR PROCEDURES 4 4 Unit Fault ACT Side MUX Card Is Faulty and System Has Changed Over Fau
53. This command is used to execute the D channel route changeover associated with the D CHANNEL BACKUP PRI feature for AT amp T NT N ISDN2 Parameters Input Data MG CNT Buttons Get Change Stop Exit Display Data RT STSO SISI P LENS B LENS CHG STS Module Group Number 00 07 Note Number of Dch Backup Route 1 32 Note Click to get information on the Dch Routes Click to execute the Dch route changeover Click to cancel the Dch route changeover Click to exit this command External Route Number Primary side DCH Status ACT ST BY OOS out of service Backup side DCH Status ACT ST B Y OOS out of service Primary DCH LENS 6 digits Backup DCH LENS 6 digits Change Status Completed Executing Note Data entry procedure by this command is as follows l Specify the Module Group No in the MG parameter 2 Click the Get button Then the related Dch data appears in the display data field 3 Referring to the display data enter the CNT No attached to the Dch to be changed over 4 Click the Change button Now the Dch changeover starts automatically NDA 24300 CHAPTER 8 Page 541 Issue 1 CMOD Change of System Mode CMOD Change of System Mode 1 Functional Outline This command is used to execute ACT ST BY change of the processor CPU TSW and display the status of CPU CLK TSW 2 Parameters Input Data TYPE DEVICE SW SYSTEM Type of Process 1 2
54. e Mounting capacity of office data depends upon the system data SYSI Index30 e Each floppy disk can save IMB of data After a large scale office data change in particular which includes system data unpredictable failures might occur To deal with such failures prepare an FD for saving the office data before the changing In addition prepare an FD for saving the latest office data NDA 24300 CHAPTER 6 Page 433 Issue 1 SYSTEM OPERATIONS 9 3 Office Data Management Procedure The procedure generally taken when changing the office data is shown below CREATION OF DATA CHANGE PLAN DATA CHANGING LISTING OFFICE DATA DATA SAVE FROM MEM INTO HDD DATA VERIFY DATA SAVE FROM HDD INTO FD DATA VERIFY Note Refer to Figure 6 29 for each command function Entry Into Office Data Programming Sheets Entry Into Office Data Programming Sheets Entry Into Office Data Programming Sheets MEM_HDD command Note Direction Select Memory to Hard Disk Data Type Select Data Memory etc MEM HDD command Note Direction Select Verify HDD against MEM Data Type Select Data Memory etc HDD MAT command Note Direction Select PBX Hard Disk to MAT Data Type Select Data Memory etc HDD MAT command Note Direction Select Verify HDD against MAT Data Type Select Data Memory etc Figure 6 25 Office Data Change Procedure CHAPTER 6 Page 434 Issue 1 NDA 24300 SYSTEM OPERATIONS CREATION OF DATA CHANGE PLAN
55. 439 10 2 Designated Connection Test 449 451 FL ROUTINE DIAGNOSIS sara dodo ao o3 452 11 1 Related System Dala 239 44 3 dde do de dede 3r Hee do9 4 aded ab Reich gd 452 DLE ea aed RENS RO PDC dde dote od A 454 12 SYSTEM CONTROL PROCEDURES pd EG RS qa Ys 455 121 Changeover Make Busy Make Busy Cancel of 455 ded ISDN MA Lu ouch gt __ _ ee 455 Dl Pe er BIOK soe Sd 6585404 461 12 1 3 Manual System Changeover of CPU 463 12 1 4 Forced Changeover of CPU onc cece ee cca eds REGC EEG 465 12 1 5 How to Control Switching Block 466 12 1 6 Manual System Changeover of Speech Path System 467 12 1 7 Manual System Changeover of 472 12 2 Initialization 1 474 eR C c or PTT 474 12 2 2 System Initialization by Turning ON Power 475 12 2 3 System Initialization by Key Operations on 476 12 2 4 System Initialization by Keys on CPU Front
56. CHAPTER 5 Page 361 Issue 1 FAULT REPAIR PROCEDURES PIM 1 PZ PW92 LPM REAR VIEW LPM FRONT VIEW REAR VIEW Symbols Alarm related connector Cable EMA PH PC40 MUX PH PC36 Circuitcard ts External Cable LANI PZ PC19 ISAGT PZ GT13 Figure 5 10 Alarm Bus Cable Connections Diagram CHAPTER 5 NDA 24300 Page 362 Issue 1 FAULT REPAIR PROCEDURES IMG 2 rid SM PZ DK222 DSPM Te d 5 gt LPM REAR VIEW LPM FRONT VIEW Symbols Alarm related connector 0 0 Cable EMA PH PC40 MUX PH PC36 Circuit card ts External Cable LANI PZ PC19 ISAGT PZ GT13 Figure 5 10 Alarm Bus Cable Connections Diagram Continued NDA 24300 CHAPTER 5 Page 363 Issue 1 FAULT REPAIR PROCEDURES 7 ALARM INDICATION FAULT This section explains the fault repair procedure where any of the faults shown in Table 5 9 occur Table 5 9 Alarm Indication Fault Situation FAULTY SITUATION REFERENCE SECTION A fault is indicated on the TOPU but it is not indicated on the Alarm Indicating Panel Section 7 2 Fault of Alarm External Alarm Indicating Panel Indicating Panel system message is indicated but no alarm indication is made on the Section 7 3 Fault That alarm lamp on the circuit card is lighting but no alarm indication is made on the MAT Cannot Be Detected or on
57. Entry Into Office Data Programming Sheets Entry Into Office Data Programming Sheets DATA CHANGING LISTING OFFICE DATA Entry Into Office Data Programming Sheets MEM_HDD command Note Direction Select Memory to Hard Disk Data Type Select Data Memory etc DATA SAVING FROM MEM INTO HDD MEM_HDD command Note Direction Select Verify HDD against MEM Data Type Select Data Memory etc DATA VERIFICATION HDD_FDD command Note System Select HFDO HFDI Direction Select Hard Disk to Floppy Disk Data Type Select Data Memory etc DATA VERIFICATION HDD_FDD command Note System Select HFDO HFDI Direction Select Verify HDD against FDD Data Type Select Data Memory etc DATA SAVING FROM HDD INTO FD Note Refer to Figure 6 27 for each command function Figure 6 26 Office Data Change Procedure NDA 24300 CHAPTER 6 Page 435 Issue 1 SYSTEM OPERATIONS Figure 6 27 shows the function of three backup commands HDD to FDD HDD to MAT and MEM to HDD PBX MEM MAT HDD_MAT DM NDM DM Data Memory NDM Network Data Memory LDM Local Data Memory ND Name Display Data RCF Wireless Call Forwarding Data CF Call Forwarding Data SPD Speed Calling System Data USK User Assign Soft Key Data for Release or later NS Number Sharing Data for Release 3 or later Note CBK Call Block Data for Release 5 or later Command Note Number Sharing data load backup also affects the da
58. Load OK NG Number Sharing Data Load Status 0 1 Load OK NG Note 2 Call Block Data Load Status 0 1 Load OK NG CHAPTER 3 Page 109 Issue 1 NDA 24300 SYSTEM MESSAGES Note 1 Phasel Restart is executed when initializing the system without disrupting the following two way con nections that have already been established e Basic two way connections STN STN STN TRK TRK TRK Fixed connections e Two way connections established on a Fusion link For more details see Section Chapter 6 Section 12 2 3 Note 2 Number Sharing data load also affects the data load of Dual Station Calling Over FCCS CHAPTER 3 NDA 24300 Page 110 Issue 1 SYSTEM MESSAGES System Initialize Default Alarm Default Grade Grade Modified Lamp Modified NON 3 This message displays when system initialization is activated ss 0000 0000 0000 2 0000 0000 0000 0000 3 0000 0000 0000 0000 CD 4 0000 0000 0000 0000 5 0000 0000 0000 0000 60 0000 0000 0000 0000 7 0000 0000 0000 0000 8 0000 0000 0000 0000 9 0000 0000 0000 0000 9 b2 0 1 KEY MAT INITIAL b7 b4 b3 52 bO b3 0 1 Program Load Non Load b4 0 1 Phase1 Restart Note Note Phasel Restart is executed when initializing the system without disrupting the following two way connections that have already been established Basic two way connections STN STN STN TRK TRK TRK Fixed connections Two way connections established on a Fusi
59. SUPERVISION CONDITIONS FOR SUPERVISION TIMING SPECIFICATIONS Sender Acknowledge Wait Timing limit for waiting to receive connection 4 sec standard Timer acknowledgement signal from the opposite Timing can be assigned using AS YD office after seizing the opposite office SYS 1 Index 130 command Sender Prepause Timer Time from sender seizure till sending of the DP 3 sec standard Ist digit where connection acknowledgmentis PB 2 5 sec standard made by interface with the opposite office Timing can be assigned using AS YD SYS 1 Index 131 command Sender Inter digit Timer Inter digit timing for the numbers to sent For DP out by the sender 10 pps 860 ms standard 20 pps 460 ms standard Timing can be assigned using ASYD SYS 1 Index 132 com mand For PB 60 ms 120 ms to be selected by ONSG of ARTD command Timing can be changed using ASYD SYS 1 Index 133 com mand CHAPTER 5 NDA 24300 Page 322 Issue 1 FAULT REPAIR PROCEDURES 2 2 Trunk Control Trunk circuit cards are controlled from the CPU via the MUX Each trunk line in a specific trunk circuit card is controlled by the Port Microprocessor PM in a trunk circuit card Figure 5 2 shows the control route of the trunk circuit card ORT SND Control Signal MUX Speech Path MDF COT TLT LT Control Signal DT NN CM Note f COT TLT LT Cable Control Signal MUX
60. Service Peg Count DTF201N UCD Route Peg Count DTF301N UCD Group Peg Count DTF302N UCD Station Peg Count DTF303N Attendant Ans Peg Count DTF501N Connection Route Peg Count DTF601N Connection Route Traffic DTF602N NDA 24300 CHAPTER 8 Page 581 Issue 1 DTF105N Display of Route Peg Count Data for Fusion Network DTF105N Display of Route Peg Count Data for Fusion Network 1 Functional Outline This command is used for displaying the result of traffic measurement data for 5 Route Peg Count assigned by the ATRFN command 2 Parameters Traffic Data 1 Terminal Traffic DTFIOIN Route Traffic DTF102N Station Peg Count DTF103N Attendant Peg Count DTF104N Route Peg Count DTF105N Traffic Data 2 Service Peg Count DTF201N Traffic Data 3 UCD Route Peg Count DTF301N UCD Group Peg Count DTF302N UCD Station Peg Count DTF303N Traffic Data 5 Attendant Ans Peg Count DTF501N Traffic Data 6 Connection Route Peg Count DTF601N Connection Route Traffic DTF602N CHAPTER 8 NDA 24300 Page 582 Issue 1 DTF201N Display of Service Peg Count Data for Fusion Network 1 Functional Outline DTF201N Display of Service Peg Count Data for Fusion Network This command is used for displaying the result of traffic measurement data for 6 Service Peg Count assigned by the ATRFN command Parameters Traffic Data 1 Traffic Data 2 Traffic Data 3 Traffic Data 5 Traffic Data 6 Terminal Traffi
61. Turn ON the MB and EMA SUP keys on the new card Insert the new card into the LPM Turn OFF the MB and EMA SUP keys on the card l e OPE MB lamp on the EMA card is steady green PFT service is cancelled resumption of normal operation Assign the time data by using the ATIM command CHAPTER 4 NDA 24300 Page 260 Issue 1 UNIT CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE 1 3 3 IOC Card Replacement Procedure The IOC 1024 card is mounted in Slot No 02 and or 03 of the LPM The card s main function is to provide serial interface between the system and its m ATTENTION ternal equipment such as the Maintenance Administration Terminal MAT Sta Static Sensitive tion Message Detail Recording System SMDR Message Center Interface MCI Handling Property Management System PMS etc The equipment connected to the I O ports of each card SMDR etc cannot be used while replacing the IOC card Replacement Procedure e OPE lamp the IOC card first Turn ON the MBR key on the IOC 1024 flashes and then becomes red card to be replaced i e All T O ports are closed and the equipment such as MAT and SMDR loses connections Note The text data such as billing information registered before this step will be safely transmitted later However the data recorded after this step will not be sent out and instead is stored in th
62. b7 b6 65 b4 63 62 bl TITITT 7 Error Code of No 1 system HD Refer to No 67 66 65 b4 63 62 bl Error Status of No system HD Refer to b7 b3 b2 bl bO 1 111 9 Data analyzed by NEC Engineers Data analyzed by NEC Engineers CHAPTER 3 NDA 24300 Page 154 Issue 1 SYSTEM MESSAGES COH Detection of Remaining Link Abnormal End 1 000 XX00 00009 0000 24 0000 0000 0000 0000 Sr 0000 0000 0000 0000 oy CD 2 1 OOOO OOOO 0000 0000 5 0000 200005 0900 0000 0000 OOOO 0000 QUOD 73 0009 0000 0000 0000 85 00009 0000 0000 0000 95 0000 0000 0000 0000 D Performed Diagnosis Item COH Detection of Remaining Link Abnormal End 57 56 65 b4 b3 b2 bl I __ 2 ED Error Data bO 1 CPU is not normal 0 Data transfer error 1 No Answer error b7 bl NDA 24300 CHAPTER 3 Page 155 Issue 1 SYSTEM MESSAGES PLO MB Key Turn ON Default Alarm Default Grade Grade Modified Lamp Modified NON 3 This message displays when the MB switch on the PLO card is turned on while extracting or inserting a circuit card 1 XX00 0000 0000 0000 2 0000 0000 0000 0000 3 0000 0000 0000 0000 y7 CD 4t 0009 0900 0000 0000 55 8009 8000 00090 0000 or 760000 0000 0000 0000 ODD OOOO OOOO 9 P000 WOOO OOOO e OUO OUUU ODOD Faulty PLO card No b0 0 1 PLO No 0 syst
63. i eed 371 8 3 Circuit Breaker OFF Fault PWR 372 8 4 Fault of Alarm Lamps PWR 373 Pe eT 2252 2 22 2 6 2 959 374 A oe Gaye es eed E 374 PAA UA __ ____ __ 375 NDA 24300 TABLE OF CONTENTS Page v Issue 1 TABLE OF CONTENTS CONTINUED Page eS ee ee ee SK d TEM ad 376 10 1 Check POUT 6565 03 4 39 eX dedos gt 376 o2 hay 9421923 9 9939 9233 1 2329 990 9 ee 377 11 SYSTEM DOWN FAULT cee ns we cones che kee we 379 11 1 When Cause for Fault Cannot Be 380 11 2 When Faulty Circuit Cards Can Be Assumed From System Message 382 12 COMMON CHANNEL INTEROFFICE SIGNALING CCIS LINE FAULT 383 le Gale Ol ou toes eyed d dre 383 bb ow 383 123 Card IS Pa uua web hee 384 12 4 Fault of CCH DTI and Related Flat
64. ATTENTION Contents __ Static Sensitive Handlin Precautions Required TSW ACT lamp on the TSW card is On the TSW card to be replaced red set the MB switch UP Extract the TSW card to be replaced from the TSWM Set the keys on the new card referring to the card replaced Set TSW MBR and MB keys on the new card UP TSW ACT lamp on the new card is Insert the new TSW card into the TSWM red Confirm MOSY M1SY M2SY and 5 LEDs on the new card are all green NDA 24300 CHAPTER 4 Page 275 Issue 1 UNIT CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE Fo ATTENTION Cont ntents Static Sensitive Handlin Precautions Required TSW ACT lamp on the new card goes OFF Set the MB key on the new card DOWN TSW ACT lamp on the new Set the TSW MBR key on the new card DOWN remains OFF MBR on the active GT card Flip the MBR key on the active GT card Confirm the new TSW card functions normally System Changeover Replaced TSW STBY to ACT Mate TSW ACT to STBY Y Check the following lamp indications on the Speech Path block to which the new TSW card belongs and ensure that they are all steady green TSW ACT TSW cards OPE MB DLKC card MUX ACT MUX cards Check the following lamp indications on the mate Speech Path block and en sure that they are all OFF TSW ACT TSW cards OPE MB DLKC card MUX ACT MUX cards END Note
65. Accommodated Location b2 Module Group No b7 b2 bl 111 3 Virtual Tie Line Call Header b0 b2 Level Accommodated Location b3 b7 Group No b7 b2 bl NDA 24300 CHAPTER 3 Page 183 Issue 1 SYSTEM MESSAGES Virtual Tie Line Set Time Out Default Alarm Default Grade Grade Modified Lamp Modified NON 1 This message displays when virtual tie line setup has failed due to a fault in the network of the terminating office concerned 1 OOXX XXGX XXXX 0000 2 0000 0000 0000 0000 3 0000 0000 0000 0000 o OG 00 4 0000 0000 0000 0000 5 0000 0000 0000 0000 6 0000 0000 0000 0000 OUO WOOO OOO OOOO sos QODO WOOO OOOO OOOO Se OUO OOOO WOOO D Virtual Tie Line Call Header b0 b1 Unit No Accommodated Location b2 Module Group No b7 b2 bl ITITI COLL 2 Virtual Tie Line Call Header 2 Level Accommodated Location b3 b7 Group No b7 b 65 b4 b3 bl 1111 1114 CHAPTER 3 NDA 24300 Page 184 Issue 1 SYSTEM MESSAGES 3 Virtual Tie Line Call Header b3 b7 Call Source Accommodated Location b7 b6 b5 14 b3 b2 bl BALA CALL SOURCE User 000 NN 3 network to which the user is connected Self side National network to which the user is directly connected Self side EE d Tie Line Network National network to which the opposite party is directly connected Opposite party s side Priva
66. Contents __ Static Sensitive Handling Precautions Required OPE lamp new card is red Connect the disconnected flat cables to the connectors on the new card and other PA SDTA PA SDTB cards When the new card is PA SDTB also connect the MT 24 TSW cables to all the required front connectors Insert both PA SDTA PA SDTB cards including new card simultaneously into the same slots of the PIM Note 1 When the card is in a dual On the PA SDTA card set the MB key DOWN OFF configuration perform this Note 1 action for both system sides both ACT and STBY sides Note 2 When the card is in a dual On the PA SDTA card turn OFF Switch 4 of the configuration perform this P SW key Note 2 action for both system sides in the order of STBY OPE lamp on the new card is steady On the PA SDTB card set the MB key DOWN green END NDA 24300 CHAPTER 4 Page 293 Issue 1 UNIT CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE 3 3 4 PWR Card Replacement Procedure The PWR PA PW55 A PA PW55 B and DPWR PA PW54 A PA PW54 B FA cards are mounted respectively in Slot No 1 and Slot No 3 of each PIM The card s c ATTENTION main function is to provide operating power to the circuit cards accommodated in Stalic Sensitive the PIM The procedures to replace the PWR DPWR card are as follows Pr Precautions Required Replacement Procedure OPE lamp on the card goes OFF Turn ON the MB ke
67. DESKCON PIMI LIII L3 op o d PIM3 Q CHAPTER 7 NDA 24300 Page 516 Issue 1 ROUTINE MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE Attendant Console ATTCON DESKCON TEST TYPE TEST ITEM CONNECTION DIAGRAM Call Termination Test Station dials the operator access code and confirm that the call termination 15 indicated at all the ATTCON DESKCON Station dials the operator access code An attendant answers and speaks with the caller This process is repeated DESRGON at all the ATTCON DESKCON Call Origination Test Attendant originates a call to the station by pressing LOOP keys one after another ATTCON DESKCON VES RINGING NDA 24300 CHAPTER 7 Page 517 Issue 1 ROUTINE MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE CALL TERMINATION CALL ORIGINATION TTCON A prion SPEECH RELEASE SPEECH RELEASE DESKCON NO CHAPTER 7 NDA 24300 Page 518 Issue 1 CHAPTERS MAINTENANCE COMMANDS 1 GENERAL This chapter explains various commands and list up commands which are used in the system administrative management procedure The table below shows the list of commands Table 8 1 Command List amas _ muc 17 _ AG AsigmenatatmGaeDae _ e cart eonan aseme nener E e _ comatose
68. FAULT REPAIR PROCEDURES ATTENTION Contents Static Sensitive Handling Precautions Required Check the ATT connector cable between the ATTCON DESKCON and the PBX Confirm that MB switch of the ATI circuit card is in ON position UP side Confirm that trunk data ATRK command in the ATI circuit card are assigned Replace the ATI circuit card with a spare Confirm that MB switch of the ATI circuit card is in ON position UP side Use MBTK command to confirm ATI circuit card is placed into make busy state Check assignment of ATI data ATRK command Replace the ATI circuit card with a spare Replace the operator s headset Replace the ATI circuit card with a spare CHAPTER 5 Page 331 Issue 1 FAULT REPAIR PROCEDURES Note No operations can be made ATTENTION Contents Static Sensitive Handling Precautions Required START Replace the ATTCON DESKCON with a Set the MB switch of ATI PA CS33 circuit spare card UP If the circuit card is equipped with a fuse remove the fuse Disconnect the CHAMP connector of the ATTCON DESKCON replace the ATTCON DESKCON If the circuit card is equipped with a fuse insert the fuse into its position Set the MB switch of the ATI circuit card DOWN Confirm the PA lamp illuminates on END ATTCON DESKCON CHAPTER 5 NDA 24300 Page 332 Issue 1 FAULT REPAIR PROCEDURES 4 UNIT FAULT This section explains the fault repair procedure in a case where any
69. Figure 5 13 Block Diagram of Power Supply System IMGO NDA 24300 CHAPTER 5 Page 367 Issue 1 FAULT REPAIR PROCEDURES PIM2 PIM1 PIMO LPM a Note is mounted when power supply system is a dual system configuration Figure 5 14 Block Diagram of Power Supply System IMG1 IMG2 3 PIM2 Note PIM1 Note PIMO 1 Note Note PWR is mounted when power supply system is a dual system configuration BASEU Figure 5 15 Block Diagram of Power Supply System IMG2 3 CHAPTER 5 NDA 24300 Page 368 Issue 1 4 Figure 5 16 shows the power supply system for PIM 5V 12V 5V HOW for LC 48V for LC TRK 80V Note Note 90 is for message waiting lamp Figure 5 16 Power Supply to PIM 5 Figure 5 17 shows the power supply system for LPM To CPR 1 5V 4 12V To EMA MISC Cards etc 48V To EMA MISC Cards etc Figure 5 17 Power Supply to LPM NDA 24300 FAULT REPAIR PROCEDURES CHAPTER 5 Page 369 Issue 1 FAULT REPAIR PROCEDURES 6 Figure 5 18 shows the power supply system for TSWM 5V 12V 5V To MISC Cards 48V To MISC GT TSW DLKC PLO Cards Figure 5 18 Power Supply to TSWM CHAPTER 5 NDA 24300 Page 370 Issue 1 8 2 Fuse Blown Fault START
70. HOO OO 000000000 58 XXXX XXXX XX00 3 0000 0000 0000 0000 mcum cd m dn d 0 8 9 0000 0000 0000 0000 6 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 9 0000 0000 0000 0000 D Error detection by Routine Diagnosis 2 Information of Periodic Backup Abnormal End b7 bl 1111 LLJ 3 Backup Data to No 0 system b7 66 65 64 63 b2 bl Error Code of No 0 system HD b7 66 65 64 63 b2 bl AOH Periodic Backup Abnormal End 0 1 0 Normal end Abnormal end bl 0 1 1 Normal end Abnormal end 0 1 Individual Speed Calling Data bl Call Forwarding Data b2 0 1 RCF b3 0 1 2 Name Display Data b4 User Assign Soft Key Data b5 0 1 Number Sharing Data Note b6 Call Block Data 21H 40 47 53H Parameter 57H 59H 5BH 80H 84H AOH HD Fault A2H A6H BDH COH Failed installation O1H HD being used by another program 02H HD not equipped Note Number Sharing data load also affects the data load of Dual Station Calling Over FCCS NDA 24300 CHAPTER 3 Page 153 Issue 1 SYSTEM MESSAGES 6 Error Status of No 0 system HD Error occurs 0 1 At the time data transfer started b7 63 b2 bl bO bl 0 1 At the time data saved 0111 b2 0 1 At the time data transfer ended b3 0 1 At the time file transfer started 6 Backup data to No 1 system Refer to No 3
71. Issue 1 SYSTEM MESSAGES 42H CPU ACT STBY Changeover Failure DM Verification NG or PM Verification NG Itf 0000 00009 0000 25 0000 0000 0000 20006 33 0000 0000 0000 2000 DO 1 OOOO OOOO 0000 0000 5 0000 2000105 0900 0000 9000 OOOO 0000 QUOD 73 0009 0000 0000 0000 85 00009 0000 0000 0000 95 0000 0000 0000 0000 D Error detection by Routine 42H CPU ACT STBY Changeover Failure Diagnosis DM Verification NG 2 ACT system after changeover b0 CPU 0 1 0 is ACT 1 is ACT b7 bl bO CHAPTER 3 NDA 24300 Page 146 Issue 1 SYSTEM MESSAGES 43H CPU ACT STBY Changeover Failure PCI Fault Itf 0000 00009 0000 0000 0000 0004 0000 33 0000 0000 0000 20000 Noo m DO 1 OOOO OOOO 0000 0000 5 0000 2000105 0900 0000 9000 OOOO 0000 QUOD 73 0009 0000 0000 0000 85 00009 0000 0000 0000 95 0000 0000 0000 0000 D Error detection by Routine 43H CPU ACT STBY Changeover Failure PCI Fault Diagnosis 2 ACT system after changeover CPU 0 1 0 is ACT 1 is ACT b7 bl bO NDA 24300 CHAPTER 3 Page 147 Issue 1 SYSTEM MESSAGES 44H CPU ACT STBY Changeover Failure Changeover NG or CPU RAM Copy NG 1 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 S7 0000 0000 DO 1 0000 0000 0000 0000 5 0000 0009 0000 0000 0000 73 0000 0000 0000 0000 85 0
72. Press CANCEL key NDA 24300 CHAPTER 6 Page 449 Issue 1 SYSTEM OPERATIONS b Trunk seizure by access code dialing Press LOOP key or Lx L1 L6 key Dial access code e Special Code is assigned by ASPA command for designated connection CIN SRV SSC SID 17 Dial Line No is assigned by command C O Line No DT from distant office Dial called party number RBT Called party at the distant office answers and talks Press CANCEL key CHAPTER 6 NDA 24300 Page 450 Issue 1 SYSTEM OPERATIONS 10 3 Bad Call Notification 1 General When a station user has trouble because of hearing noise during a call or has other difficulty having a normal call the line involved 15 recorded as a bad call notification The record displays on the MAT screen as system message 6 H which indicates the recording source Station Number Called Station Number or Trunk Number etc 2 Operating Procedure Talking SFC of the station user who can perform this operation must be allowed ASFC SFI 46 e SFC of the station user who can perform this operation must Switch hook flash be allowed ASFC SFI 46 SPDT Dial access code for i Access code is assigned by ASPA command CI H bad call notification SRV SSC SID 46 System message 6 H displays Station user returns to talking state NDA 24300 CHAPTER 6 Page 451 Issue 1 SYSTEM OPERATIONS 11 RO
73. SEE PARAGRAPH 7 2 5 BYTE DATA 60 CALLED NUMBER PARAGRAPH 7 2 2 PARAGRAPH 7 2 3 SEE PARAGRAPH 727 BYTE DATA SEE PARAGRAPH 7 2 4 SEE 128 ONLY FOR NO 7 CCIS SEE PARAGRAPH 7 2 8 Figure 6 14 Message Format for Outgoing Call CHAPTER 6 Page 406 Issue 1 NDA 24300 SYSTEM OPERATIONS BYTE DATA BYTE DATA BYTE DATA BYTE DATA 104 60 CALLED NUMBER SEE SECTION 7 2 4 NUMBER TERMINATING TRUNK TIME SECTION INFORMATION SEE 7 2 3 SECTION NUMBER 7 2 2 CALLED PARTY ACCOUNT 114 INFORMATION CODE SEE SEE SECTION Sey 116 7 2 1 118 SEE SECTION 727 CALL START oe PARTY SEE TENANT SECTION 7 2 2 128 ONLY FOR NO 7 CCIS SEE SECTION ROUTE 7 2 8 ADVANCE INFORMATION SEE SECTION 7 2 5 Figure 6 15 Message Format for Incoming Call NDA 24300 CHAPTER 6 Page 407 Issue 1 SYSTEM OPERATIONS BYTE DATA BYTE DATA BYTE DATA BYTE DATA 60 104 SEE SECTION 62 7 2 4 CALL END CALLED TIME SEE PARTY SECTION 7 2 2 INFORMATION SEE SECTION 7 2 1 68 TENANT CALLING PARTY 38 SEE SECTION 114 INFORMATION 7 2 4 71 SEE SECTION 124 116 118 92 CALLSTART 4 TIME SEE yaa ve 96 51 SEE SECTION 7 2 6 128 54 Figure 6 16 Message Format for Station to Station Call CHAPTER 6 NDA 24300 Page 408 Issue 1 SYSTEM OPERATIONS 7 2 Details on Transmission Data 7 2 1 Calling Party Information Called Party Informat
74. STB Y mode bl FH failure for 2M PCM Highway b7 b3 52 bl bO CLK failure for 2M PCM Highway 100 Reference See Chapter 4 Section 3 3 2 for the circuit card replacement procedure CHAPTER 3 NDA 24300 Page 218 Issue 1 SYSTEM MESSAGES Default Alarm Default Grade Grade Modified Lamp Modified NON 0 This message displays when the MAT is log in or log out 1 XXXX XXXX XXXX 2 XXXX XXXX XXXX 3 cer cafes mim Ext miu up miles i cx qd m mim af xp cler D EDD D D 00 00 99 o9 o9 99 99 o9 99 99 4 0000 0000 0000 0000 5 0000 0000 0000 0000 6 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 QUOO 20000 30000 0000 0000 0000 09000 Os 0001 0000 D Port No of the MAT logged in out 50 b2 I O Port No 000 PortO 001 Port 1 57 56 65 b4 b3 62 bl 010 2 011 3 110 Port6 11 Port 7 b4 b7 0000 Login 0001 Logout 0010 Command is startup 0011 Command END 2 Command b0 b7 Command b7 b 55 64 63 b2 bl 3 User Name b0 b7 User name entered by the MAT 57 b6 65 b4 b3 62 bl NDA 24300 CHAPTER 3 Page 219 Issue 1 SYSTEM MESSAGES Call Trace Default Alarm Default Grade Grade Modified Lamp Modified NON 2 This massage is issued when a call originated via a station
75. Speech Path LTCable ORT SND Control Signal Note Speech Path TDSW INT Symbols Control Signal Circuit Card Speech Path Control Signal TSW PH SW12 GT PH GT09 ISAGT MUX PH PC36 ISAGT PZ GT13 CPU Note Eight CFTs are provided on the MUX PH PC36 cards Figure 5 2 Controlling Trunk Circuit Cards and Speech Path NDA 24300 CHAPTER 5 Page 323 Issue 1 FAULT REPAIR PROCEDURES 2 3 Trunk ORT SND CFT Fault Note fa circuit card is replaced because only one line is faulty no other lines in that circuit card can be used until the replace ment is complete START When only one line is faulty Replace the circuit card with spare END CHAPTER 5 Page 324 Issue 1 ATTENTION Contents Static Sensitive Handling Precautions Required Place the faulty line into make busy state For ORT SND set MB switch of each circuit to ON position For CFT place it into make busy state using command MBTK Set MB switch UP and extract the circuit card from its mounting slot Set MB switch of the new circuit card UP and insert the circuit card into its mounting slot Set MB switch DOWN If the line is under make busy state cancel it 2 4 Trunk COT TLT DTI Fault Note 1 Jfa circuit card is replaced because only one line is faulty any other lines in that circuit card cannot be used until the replacement is complete Note 2 f the polarities of the
76. Terminate all MAT commands and make sure no commands are currently running via the Processes button Set the programmed Traffic Measurement in routine operation Click the Scan New Alarms Traffic and Collect New Alarms buttons on the IPX MAT Menu confirm the clicked buttons remain in the pressed state Then the Traffic Measurement is activated as programmed NDA 24300 CHAPTER 6 Page 427 Issue 1 SYSTEM OPERATIONS Figure 6 21 shows the IPX MAT Menu display image The display should look similar to the following Scan New Alarms Traffic Office Name assigned by ASYD AOFC command Collect New Alarms Collect New Traffic Major Alarm Indicator Abort Data Collections Minor Alarm Indicator View Scanning Log Supervisory Message Indicator Traffic Data Indicator SAPP FPG 1 morOPTOPOESE et tee sete et pete tet op te tet om aoe acy mea ate ose usa ame ate ose wom mom
77. The system changeover of TSW card can be executed also by using the command For details refer to Chapter 9 Maintenance Commands CHAPTER 4 NDA 24300 Page 276 Issue 1 UNIT CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE 2 3 3 DLKC Card Replacement Procedure The DLKC 20 15 located in Slot No 08 or 09 within TSWM The card s main function is to provide all the Attendant Desk Consoles with information such as termination answer release abandoned of ATT calls or idle busy status of a station via the link of the TSW system Use the fol lowing procedures to replace the DLCK card with a spare Note system changeover of DLKC must be executed by the MBR key operation on the active GT PH 9 card or by using the command Before starting this work confirm the system block diagram shown in Figure 4 16 or Section 12 System Control Procedures in Chapter 6 Replacement Procedure Use extreme care when operating the keys on the circuit card ATTENTION Contents __ Static Sensitive andlin Precautions Required System Changeover Check the following lamp indications on the circuit cards to be affected and ensure that they are all OFF TSW ACT TSW cards DLKC card Note MUX ACT MUX cards On the active GT 9 card set the MBR key UP Then return the key DOWN Note 7 the card to be replaced represents system sta
78. Unassigned Port TN Tenant Number STN Station Number TEC Telephone Equipment Class SPTS Scanning of Port Status Type 1 by MG 3 by MG Unit Grou MG Unit Group Interval 2 by MG Unit o Dynamic Port Status Report MG UNIT GROUP PKG Type DL PKG Status ID SP No 3124 Issue 5 Level STATUS STN Idle Idle Idle Figure 8 3 Port Status Report MG Unit Group Display Designating Group NDA 24300 CHAPTER 8 Page 621 Issue 1 SPTS Scanning of Port Status When Group Trunk is Designated Figure 8 4 RT See Table 8 8 TK Trunk Number TCL Trunk Class SPTS Scanning of Port Status Type 1 by MG 3 by MG Unit Grou MG Unit Group Interval 2 by MG Unit o 0 13 Dynamic Port Status Report MG UNIT GROUP PKG Type PKG Status ID SP No 3010 Issue 5 Level STATUS TN STN TEC Idle TIE Line Idle TIE Line Idle TIE Line Idle TIE Line Figure 8 4 Port Status Report MG Unit Group Display Designating Group Trunk Table 8 8 Route Number Explanation 9m MAS 905 Sender Trunk DPPB 9 PB Receiver for Automated Attendant Service 907 AMP 908 Not used 99 Three Way Conference Trunk 910 911 Not used 915 916 Register 929 930 Rate Adapter Conversion Trunk CHAPTER 8 NDA 24300 Page 622 Issue 1 SRTS Scanning of Route Status SRTS Scanning of Route Status 1 Functional Outline This command
79. Unit No 0 3 b7 0 1 2 Even numbered MG Odd numbered MG NDA 24300 CHAPTER 3 Page 215 Issue 1 SYSTEM MESSAGES Detailed information on changing bO bl Dch b7 63 62 bl 52 53 5 Status of Primary Back up Dch b0 b2 b7 65 b4 23 62 bl b3 b5 5 EVENT No b0 b7 b7 b 65 64 63 b2 bl 216 Issue 1 00 Change from Primary Dch to Dch for Back up 01 Change from Dch for Back up to Primary Dch 10 Place Primary Dch to ACT status 11 Place Dch for Back up to ACT status Way of changing OO Changed by the MAT 01 Changed by the MB switch of the circuit card 02 Changed by placing Dch to Make Busy 03 Unknown Status of Primary Dch In service 1 Standby 2 Out of Service 3 Make Busy 4 Changing status from STBY to In Service 5 Manual out of service Status of Back up Dch In service Standby 2 Out of Service 3 Make Busy 4 Changing status from STBY to In Service 5 Manual out of service EVENT No NDA 24300 SYSTEM MESSAGES MUX Clock Failure Default Alarm Default Grade Grade Modified Lamp Modified MN 3 This message displays when the MUX PH PC36 card has a clock failure in one of the dual systems pe 0000 0000 0000 2 0000 0000 0000 0000 3 0000 0000 0000 0000 D 4 0000 0000 0000 0000 5 0000 0000 0000 0000 6 0000 0000 0000 0000 7 0000 0000 0000 0000 8 0000 0000 0000 0000 9
80. b d CHAPTER 6 432 Issue 1 The NDM network level data for the traffic measurement order is replaced updated at each time the system is initialized or data change is requested from theATRFN command When network level data 15 once assigned via the ATRFN command the node level data for ATRF command cannot be changed or modified When the network level data is once assigned via the ATRFN command the already assigned data by the ATRF command is not cleared but becomes ineffective When a data transfer error occurs the following are performed in order gt Traffic measurement is suspended momentarily and system message is displayed notification of fault gt Traffic measurement concerning all the remaining data except for the fault involved one 15 re sumed gt Retry 15 made repeatedly for the transfer of fault involved data until the fault has been eradicat ed gt If the fault hasn t been eradicated still until the time of next measurement routine the data 15 finally discarded and next traffic measurement routine starts When the same Individual Numbers exist on the network the traffic measurement concerning the ATTCON DESKCON cannot be performed correctly NDA 24300 SYSTEM OPERATIONS 9 OFFICE DATA MANAGEMENT This section explains how to manage various kinds of data such as Call Forwarding Data Individual Speed Calling Data and Office Data etc 9 1
81. by MG Unit Grou Interval 2 by MG Uni Dynamic Port Status Report MG Package Status PM Package is not Mounted or Package is make Busy ID More than one port in a Group is Idle BY All Port in a Group is Busy MB All Port in a Group is Hard Make Busy or Soft Make Busy 4 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 meee 8 8 DTDT ne PM ID ID ID ID ID ID PM PM PM MB meee o DL TK DT ne ID ID MBMBID ID Figure 8 1 Port Status Report MG Display Table 8 7 provides a list of the circuit cards and the working status of PM in each group Table 8 7 Type of Circuit Cards NDA 24300 CHAPTER 8 Page 619 Issue 1 SPTS Scanning of Port Status Type 2 By MG Unit Display of Scanning by Designating Unit Figure 8 2 Port Status on Circuit Card Basis ID On Line Status BY Make Busy
82. card is controlled by the PM in that line circuit card The line circuit cards are controlled from the CPU via the MUX Figure 5 1 shows the control route of line circuit cards LC ELC LT Cabl Control Signal Speech Path LT Cable LC ELC LT Cabl Control Signal 2 TDSW INT Sein Telephone MUX Speech Path Unc LT Cable Control Signal Circuit Card Speech Path ISAGT Control Signal Sr TSW PH SW12 GT PH GT09 MUX PH PC36 ISAGT PZ GT13 Figure 5 1 Controlling LC ELC Circuit Cards and Speech Path CHAPTER 5 NDA 24300 Page 312 Issue 1 FAULT REPAIR PROCEDURES 1 3 Line Fault When Dial Tone DT Cannot Be Heard Note fa circuit card is replaced because only one line is faulty no other lines in that circuit card can be used until the replacement is complete ATTENTION Contents Static Sensitive Handling Precautions Required START When OPE lamp on the LC circuit card Confirm MB switch of the LC circuit card 1s in does not illuminate ON position UP Use ASDT command to confirm that station data in the LC circuit card is assigned Replace the LC circuit card with a spare When BL lamp for each line is flashing or Confirm MB switch of the LC circuit card is in illuminating on the LC circuit card ON position UP side Use MBST command to confirm LC circuit card has not been placed into make busy state Use ASDT command to check the sta
83. from ORT SND COT TLT DTI Fault No three way calling can be made on CFT or noise gets in a established connection A connection results in no speech Noise gets in a established connection ATTCON DESKCON e No speech can be made Section 3 3 ATTCON DESKCON Nocontrol operations can be made Fault Unit Fault Faults related to speech Section 4 2 Unit Fault Fault Related to Speech Dial tone is not heard Section 4 3 Unit Fault When Dial Tone DT Cannot Be Heard The ACT MUX card side has become faulty and system Section 4 4 Unit Fault ACT Side changeover has been executed MUX Card Is Faulty and System Has Changed Over NDA 24300 CHAPTER 5 Page 309 Issue 1 FAULT REPAIR PROCEDURES Table 5 1 Fault Repair Procedure Quick Reference Continued FAULTY ITEM FAULTY SITUATION REFERENCE SECTION Speech System Fault Faults related to speech Section 5 2 Speech Path System Fault Fault Related to Speech Dial tone is not heard Section 5 3 Speech Path System Fault When Dial Tone DT Cannot Be Heard STBY side is faulty Section 5 4 Speech Path System Fault STBY Side Has Become Faulty Control System Fault Fault occurs occasionally at the ACT side Section 6 2 Control System Fault Fault Occurs Intermittently STBY side is faulty Section 6 3 Control System Fault STBY Side Is Faulty Alarm Indication Fault No fault indication is made on the Alarm Indicator Section 7 2 Fault of Alarm Panel In
84. oU S E TM q LC TRK q A fault within this range affects this module 32ch LC TRK 9 7 eir 2 512ch A fault within this range affects the circuit card A fault within this range affects two slots PIM 2 A fault within this range 55215 affects this module PIM 1 cus MUX 512ch A fault within this range affects this module PIM 0 512ch 71 LC TRK affects the circuit card A fault within this range affects two slots ED ER RES FEARR A fault within this range A fault within this range affects the circuit card TSW INT Symbols Gircuit Card Possible fault range to be affected Speech Path Figure 2 18 Speech Path Range of Fault CHAPTER 2 NDA 24300 Page 24 Issue 1 SYSTEM MAINTENANCE OUTLINE 2 Explanation of Terms e C Level Infinite Loop The program repeatedly executes specific routines due to a fault of the main memory data destruction etc The program is not able to be processed normally This faulty condition is referred to as Program Infinite Loop C Level infinite loop is a state where a clock level program which runs under clock interrupt disable state 15 in an infinite loop status e B Level Infinite Loop This is a state where a program infinite loop has occurred during a co
85. sure that they are all steady green TSW ACT TSW cards OPE MB DLKC card MUX ACT MUX cards MUX ACT lamp on DLKC card is red CHAPTER 4 NDA 24300 Page 286 Issue 1 UNIT CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE Fo ATTENTION Contents __ Static Sensitive Handlin Precautions Required Disconnect the cable for the MUX front connector on the card to be replaced Extract card to be replaced from the mounted PIM On the new card set the MB key UP MUX ACT lamp on the new card is Insert the new card into the PIM red Connect the disconnected cable to the MUX front connector on the new card NDA 24300 CHAPTER 4 Page 287 Issue 1 UNIT CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE yos ATTENTION Contents __ Static Sensitive Handlin Precautions Required Verify that the SYNC LED on the new card lights green MBR on the active GT card On the new MUX card set the MB key DOWN System Changeover Replaced MUX STBY to ACT Mate MUX ACT to STBY Flip the MBR key on the active GT card Confirm the new MUX card functions normally Check all the following lamp indica tions on the Speech Path block to which the new MUX card belongs and ensure that they are all steady green TSW ACT TSW cards DLKC card MUX ACT MUX cards Check the following lamp indications on the mate Speech Path block and ensure that they are all steady green TSW
86. the Tenant No I 15 this OPTN data provides a supportive role to cover the larger Tenant No ranging from 16 to 255 Use the following method to analyze the data Tenant No of Calling Station 1 15 SSS mm OPTN data 0 fixed bit 0 bit 3 of Tenant No of Calling Station 16 255 OPTN data OPTN data variable bit 0 bit 3 of OG route number Hex b7 AC data 0 1 Internal trunk External trunk b7 b b5 b4 63 b2 bl b6 OP data 0 1 ____ When OPRT data of amp is valid 1 displays b0 b5 OG route number e bit 620 Route No 64 Refer to OPTN bit 6 1 gt 63 Route No data of CHAPTER 3 NDA 24300 Page 188 Issue 1 SYSTEM MESSAGES OPRT data b0 b3 OPRT data Note b7 b3 62 bl III LLLI Note This data displays when the OG Route No is larger than 63 and bit6 of displays as 1 otherwise 0 displays at any time While the six bit data of is self sufficient in verifying the Route No 1 63 this OPRT data provides a supportive role to cover the Route No which is larger than 63 Use the following method to analyze the data coronene OT OTe TO seme aca OPTN data 0 fixed bits of D OG Route No 64 or larger OPTN data OG Route No ee OPTN data variable bits of D 9 Trunk No of OG trunk b0 b7 Trunk No of OG trunk b7 6 b5 63 62 bl Trunk No of
87. 0 1 Ineffectively held G1 G2 G3 lt lt 2 m M G31 NDA 24300 CHAPTER 3 Page 149 Issue 1 SYSTEM MESSAGES 51H Trunk Ineffective Hold Detected and Released eO 1 SU0XX QUXX RAXA 2 m ndm 4 XXXX XXXX 5 s 3 dee SOOO 4000 20 00901 OOOO 584 XXXX XXXX 3 m 3 3 3 XXXX XX00 0000 0000 6 0000 0000 0000 0000 uS 4 0000 20 000 000 94 4004 20809 0 000 0000 D Error detection by Routine Diagnosis 2 LENS of Trunk Ineffective Hold Detected and Released MG U b7 jt tt OIT 51H Trunk Ineffective Hold Detected and Released bl bO 0 0 Unit0 b2 bl 0 2 1 1 Unit 3 0 1 Even No Odd No Module 3 LENS of Ineffective Hold Trunk LV Group No doe Group gt D Number 4 XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX 2 5 XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX 905 919 748 0000 0000 0000 0000 LY CN c y ened 309 EDEA 228 e980 6 Jt 10000 00009 8 0090 0000 0000 0000 9 0000 0000 0000 0000 CHAPTER 3 Page 150 Issue 1 Level Level b 56 bd b4 63 62 bi GO 0 1 Ineffectively held G1 G2 G3
88. 0000 0000 0000 0000 QUOO 20000 30000 0000 0000 0000 09000 Os 0001 0000 D Location of faulty CCH DCH card Group No b5 b6 Unit No 0 3 67 b 65 b4 63 bl b7 0 1 2 Even numbered MG Odd numbered MG LL CKT No of faulty circuit b0 b7 No 0 3 57 b6 b5 b4 b3 62 bl NDA 24300 CHAPTER 3 Page 169 Issue 1 SYSTEM MESSAGES CCH Reset Interrupt Failure Default Alarm Default Grade Grade Modified Lamp Modified SUP 3 This message displays when a fault occurred to the Port Microprocessor PM within the CCH DCH circuit card and the restart processing is executed 1 0000 0000 0000 2 0000 0000 0000 0000 3 0000 0000 0000 0000 y7 4t 0000 99909 009009 0000 54 0009 80009 00090 0000 78009 0000 09090 0000 OOOO WOOO sos QODO WOOO OOOO OOOO Se OOOO WOOO Location of faulty CCH DCH card Group No b5 b6 Unit No 0 3 67 b b5 b4 63 02 bl 50 b7 Even numbered MG Odd numbered MG 111 3 NDA 24300 Page 170 Issue 1 Default Alarm SYSTEM MESSAGES Digital Line Warning SUP Default Grade Grade Modified Lamp Modified 1 This message displays when a digital line failure occurs 1 0000 0000 0000 2 EQ mi 4 0000 0000 0000 0000 5 ver 0000 UO 39000 6
89. 0000 0000 0000 0000 D Unit MG system number for p0 b1 Unit number where a clock failure occurred card with a clock failure b2 MG number where a clock failure occurred b3 a clock failure in MUX No 0 system b7 b4 b3 bl a clock failure in MUX No 1 system gt Faulty MUX is in STBY 2 Scan Data Scan Data Clock alarm information on the faulty MUX card bl FH failure for 2M PCM Highway b7 b3 52 bl bO CLK failure for 2M PCM Highway LLLLLLLI cnr Reference See Chapter 5 Section 4 3 Section 4 4 and Section 5 3 for the repair procedure NDA 24300 CHAPTER 3 Page 217 Issue 1 SYSTEM MESSAGES Both MUX Clock Failure Default Alarm Default Grade Grade Modified Lamp Modified MN 3 This message displays when the MUX PH PC36 card has a clock failure in both of the dual systems 1 XXXX XX00 0000 0000 2 0000 0000 0000 0000 3 0000 0000 0000 0000 4 0000 0000 0000 0000 5 0000 0000 0000 0000 6 0000 0000 0000 0000 7 0000 0000 0000 0000 8 0000 0000 0000 0000 9 0000 0000 0000 0000 D MUX card location 1 Unit No b7 b2 bl b0 b2 MG No LLLI 2 Scan Data 1 Scan Data 1 Details on clock alarm information ACT mode bl FH failure for 2M PCM Highway b7 b3 b2 bl bO 0 1 CLK failure for 2M PCM Highway 3 Scan Data 2 Scan Data 2 Details on clock alarm information
90. 0000 0000 3 0000 0000 0000 0000 lt DO 4 0009 909909 00009 0000 0009 80009 00090 0000 49000 0000 0000 0000 WOOO OOOO se QODO WOOO OGG P000 OOOO WOOO Faulty PFT card No b0 b2 Circuit card No 0 7 b7 b2 bl b0 2 Location of faulty PFT card b0 b4 Group No b5 b6 Unit No 0 3 67 b 65 b4 63 b2 bl b7 0 1 2 Even numbered MG Odd numbered MG 111 NDA 24300 CHAPTER 3 Page 123 Issue 1 SYSTEM MESSAGES Cyclic Diagnosis Normal Default Alarm Default Grade Grade Modified Lamp Modified NON 3 In a specific time cycle the system allows a routine diagnosis 1 its hardware and software to determine if they are operating properly This message indicates that the system has been checked by the routine diagnosis pro gram and the result of the diagnosis 1s normal 1 XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX 2 0000 0000 0000 0000 3 0000 0000 0000 0000 lt lt lt 1 Note 4 0000 0000 0000 0000 5 0000 0000 0000 0000 6 0000 0000 0000 0000 Fe 0009 9090 0000 0000 85 0009 2000 090909 0000 295 0000 08007 00090 0000 D Performed Diagnosis Item OOH Routine Diagnosis Start 10H Program Memory Verification Normal End b7 b b5 b4 b3 b2 bl 20H Data Memory Verification Normal End 30H TSW ACT STBY Changeover Normal End 40H CPU ACT STBY Changeover Normal End SOH No Trunk Ineffectiv
91. 1 DTF303 Display of Station Peg Count Data DTF303 Display of Station Peg Count Data 1 Functional Outline This command displays the result of traffic measurement data for Type 10 UCD Station Peg Count assigned by the ATRF command 2 Parameters Traffic Data 1 Terminal Traffic DTF101 Route Traffic DTF102 Station Peg Count DTF103 Attendant Peg Count DTF104 Route Peg Count DTF105 Traffic Data 2 Service Peg Count DTF201 Traffic Data 3 UCD Route Peg Count DTF301 UCD Group Peg Count DTF302 UCD Station Peg Count DTF303 Traffic Data 5 Attendant Ans Peg Count DTF501 Traffic Data 6 Connection Route Peg Count DTF601 Connection Route Traffic DTF602 CHAPTER 8 NDA 24300 Page 574 Issue 1 DTF501 1 DTF501 Display of Attendant Answering Peg Count Data Display of Attendant Answering Peg Count Data Functional Outline This command displays the result of traffic measurement data for 15 ATT Answering Peg Count assigned by the ATRF command Parameters Traffic Data 1 Traffic Data 2 Traffic Data 3 Traffic Data 5 Traffic Data 6 Terminal Traffic DTF101 Route Traffic DTF102 Station Peg Count DTF103 Attendant Peg Count DTF104 Route Peg Count DTF105 Service Peg Count DTF201 UCD Route Peg Count DTF301 UCD Group Peg Count DTF302 UCD Station Peg Count DTF303 Attendant Ans Peg Count DTF501 Connection Route Peg Count DTF601 Connection Route Traffic DTF602 NDA 24300 CHAPTER 8
92. 1 2 Change Operating Mode Make Busy of TSW Device to be changed 1 2 Note 1 1 CPU Note 2 2 TSW Type of Switch Note 3 1 TSW fixed System of Switch 0 1 Note 3 0O 1 System O System 1 Note 1 This parameter appears only when TYPE 1 Note 2 When the CPU mode change is executed the MAT TCP IP is once disconnected Then log in to the system again Note 3 This parameter appears only when TYPE 2 Display data Status CHAPTER 8 Page 542 Issue 1 CPU 0 1 TSW 0 1 PLO 0 1 0 3 O Not Mounted 1 Standby 2 ACT 3 Make Busy NDA 24300 CMWL 1 Functional Outline CMWL Control Message Waiting Lamp Control Message Waiting Lamp This command is used to indicate ON OFF status and to control the Message Waiting Lamp ON OFF MW Lamp at the station If the station is D this command can also be used to control Message Waiting Display on the Parameters Input data TYPE TN STN LENS MCI ATT STA VMM MWLAMP Type of Input 1 2 1 2 Designation by Station Number Designation by LEN Note 1 Maximum 5 digits for Business system and 6 digits for Hotel system Note 1 Note 2 Message Center MW Status 0 1 0 1 OFF ON Attendant Console MW Status 0 1 See the parameter MCI Station MW Status 0 1 See the parameter MCI Voice Mail Module MW Status 0 1 See the parameter MCI MW Lamp Status 0 1 OFF ON Note 1 This parameter appears when TYPE 1 Note 2 T
93. 16 A 17 A is independent and not affected by the development Note 2 Ifthe ACT STBY of CPU is once changed over the system of GT in TSWM also changes over Note 3 Though an external cable is physically connected between ISAGTO and GTI the actual control signal is sent received only between ISAGTO and This is because and are having a multiple connection on the backboard side Refer to Chapter 6 Section 12 Figure 5 9 CPU Controlling Block Diagram Continued CHAPTER 5 NDA 24300 Page 358 Issue 1 FAULT REPAIR PROCEDURES 6 2 Control System Fault Fault Occurs Intermittently Faulty Situation Fault occurs intermittently at ACT side in the dual configuration system Fault occurs intermittently in the single configuration system ATTENTION 0 0 CPU Failure 1 C Both TSW Write Failure 1 D TSW Write Failure 3 D 3 E Lock Up Failure Permanent Temporary 1 For Dual Configuration START Replace ACT side related circuit card CPU GT TSW MUX EMA with a spare and check When a fault is not indicated set the faulty system to STBY mode Refer to Section 12 System Control Pro cedures in Chapter 6 NDA 24300 Contents Static Sensitive Handling Precautions Required Replace the circuit cards CPU GT TSW MUX EMA individually referring to the following sec tions in Chapter 4 Section 1 3 1 CPR Replacement Procedure Section 1 3 2 EMA Ca
94. 2 Details on alarm 54 63 2 0 00 000 67 64 b3 b2 bl 00 001 Hardware Failure SDT Card 1 00 010 Optical Line Failure Trouble 00 011 Onboard Power Alarm 01 000 HEN 01 001 PCM Loss 01 010 Frame Alignment Loss 2M 01 011 Receiving Section Failure PADL Intenace 01 100 Mistake Rate Degradation decay 01 101 Sending Section Failure 01 110 Mistake Detection 10 000 10 001 Receiving Path Failure 10 Pointer Failure VC 11 Path 10 011 Sending Path Failure Trouble 10 100 Receiving Path Error Note 10 101 Sending Path Error b7 SDT Card Status 0 1 No 0 System No 1 System Note Alarm detected HW is specified in next page NDA 24300 CHAPTER 3 Page 231 Issue 1 SYSTEM MESSAGES 9 Alarm detected HW The data here specifies the HW on which any of the VC 11 Path b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 52 bl Trouble was detected in data see Note Refer to the table below TTT tT ttt b7 66 65 b4 63 b2 bl i 0 1 VC 11 Path Trouble pe peppers PPR EER RT Note This data displays only when b4 is 1 and b3 is 0 in data Repair Procedure Basically fault repair work is not required by the display of this message However if the message is created frequently 1 is recommended that the repair work be performed as shown in the message 33 C SDT Alarm Trouble CHAPTER 3 NDA 24300 Page 232 Issue 1 SYSTEM MESSAGES SDT Alarm Trouble Default Alarm D
95. 3 Page 95 Issue 1 SYSTEM MESSAGES STA Test Connection Data Default Alarm Default Grade Grade Modified Lamp Modified NON 3 This message displays to indicate the result of a designated connection test Individual Trunk Access from a station 1 XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX 2 XXXX XXXX 3 XXXX See lt lt lt oo oo 0 40 2 2 2 2 2 4 0000 0000 0000 0000 5 0000 0000 0000 0000 6 0000 0000 0000 0000 OOOO OUUU OOOO sos QODO WOOO OJOS OVOG Sr QUO OOOO D Test Item b0 b3 is valid only for 60 92 Kind of Signal Outgoing trunk test 2 Second Dial Tone 6 Sender Delay Dial Start 57 b6 65 b4 b3 62 bl 7 Sender Wink Start b4 b7 Test item 1 Outgoing Trunk Test 2 Test 3 Sender Test 4 Digital Conference 5 Tone Test 6 Ringing Signal test 0 Test NG CHAPTER 3 NDA 24300 Page 96 Issue 1 SYSTEM MESSAGES 2 b0 b3 Number of digits of testing station No b7 b6 b5 b4 b2 bl b4 b7 Error Numbers see table below __ Error Numbers and Their Meanings NN NN Trunk Number Error when trunk has been designated by 5 Reser aes 3 6 Station number of testing station see table Tenant No b0 b3 Tenant No 1 15 b7 b3 b2 b bo 57 OP FT
96. 3 Specific DCH PRT Card Is Faulty and transmission receiving of control signals cannot Section 13 4 Fault of DCH DTI performed and Related Flat Cable Hard Time Clock Fault EMA card is faulty Section 14 Hard Time Clock Fault When the signal transmission line is a digital line 1 LINE FAULT This section explains the fault repair procedure in a case where only one specific station line is in any of the faulty conditions listed in Table 5 2 Table 5 2 Line Fault Situation FAULTY SITUATION REFERENCE SECTION When Dial Tone cannot be heard Section 1 3 Line Fault When Dial Tone DT Cannot Be Heard When dialing results in a wrong connection Section 1 4 Line Fault When Dialing Results in Wrong Connection When the bell does not ring Section 1 5 Line Fault When Bell Does Not Ring When call cannot be answered and speech cannot be Section 1 6 When Call Cannot Be Answered and Speech made Cannot Be Made NDA 24300 CHAPTER 5 Page 311 Issue 1 FAULT REPAIR PROCEDURES 1 1 Check Point When repairing a line fault consider the following items 1 Check alarm lamps on line circuit cards 2 When an outgoing call cannot be originated to a specific line trunk or when an incoming call cannot be terminated from a specific line trunk check Tenant Restriction Data assigned via ATNR command and Route Restriction Data assigned via ARSC command 1 2 Line Control Each line in a specific Line circuit LC ELC
97. 5 0000 0000 0000 0000 6 0000 0000 0000 0000 T OOOO QUOO 20000 30000 0000 0000 0000 Os 0000 0900 00009 DOO D IOC circuit card No O 1 2 No 0 No 1 b7 2 Cause for fault 0 1 COP Alarm bl 0 1 CLK Alarm 67 b4 53 b2 bl bO 49 Oy MEM bus CLK Alarm 11 b3 0 1 Abnormal Interruption b4 Infinite Loop Detected CHAPTER 3 NDA 24300 Page 198 Issue 1 Default Alarm Failure Permanent Default Grade SYSTEM MESSAGES SUP Grade Modified Lamp Modified 2 This message displays when the IOC card failure observed in the message 16 T 1s detected more than 8 times a day 1 XXXX 0000 0000 0000 2 0 4 0000 0000 0000 0000 5 re 0009 0000 00009 8000 25 0099 0000 0000 0000 3 0000 0000 0000 0000 6 000 CUO 0000 9 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 D IOC circuit card No bO b7 2 Cause for fault b0 bl b7 b4 b3 b2 bl b2 b4 Reference See Chapter 4 Section 1 3 3 for the circuit card replacement procedure 0 1 No O No 1 0 1 COP Alarm 0 1 CLK Alarm 1 MEM bus CLK Alarm 0 1 Abnormal Interruption 0 1 Infinite Loop Detected NDA 24300 CHAPTER 3 Page 199 Issue 1 SYSTEM MESSAGES Station Exchanged Report Default Alarm Default Grade Grade Modified Lamp Modified NON 0 This
98. 55 b4 63 b2 bl b7 0 1 Even numbered MG Odd numbered MG 2 Data Analyzed by NEC Engineers NDA 24300 CHAPTER 3 Page 165 Issue 1 SYSTEM MESSAGES 3 Probable cause for failure b0 b3 See Table b3 b2 bl a O 1 response is received i LM gt E AEN NEN o eee NN N200 Timeout Link failure is restored to normal N R frame error 15 received i frame is received Link 15 re set Undefined frame is received WE GNE Improper long frame is received OE I frame with I field which exceeds N201 is received FRMR is received Link is not re setup CHAPTER 3 NDA 24300 Page 166 Issue 1 SYSTEM MESSAGES CCS Link Failure Temporary Default Alarm Default Grade Grade Modified Lamp Modified NON 1 This message displays when a failure has occurred numerous times to a common channel signaling link and the link has been placed into make busy state When this fault lasts over three minutes the system message changes to 13 H CCS Link Failure Permanent lt XXXX XXO0 0000 0000 2 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0009 00009 0000 yy 4 0000 0000 0000 0000 5 0000 0000 0000 0000 6 0000 0000 0000 0000 7 0000 0000 0000 0000 8 0000 0000 0000 0000 9 0000 0000 0000 0000 D Location of faulty CCH DCH card 50 b4 Group No b5 b6 Unit No 0 3
99. 63 b2 bl LT TTT tT tt Data Analyzed by NEC Engineers CHAPTER 3 Page 46 Issue 1 0 1 Timer 2 Gate ON OFF 0 1 Speaker Gate ON OFF 0 1 Parity Check Enable MASK 0 1 Channel Check Enable MASK 0 1 RAM Refresh Pulse Output State 0 1 Timer 2 Output State 0 1 2 Channel Check Error Detected 0 1 Parity Error Detected 0 1 ACT side Processor CLK Alarm 0 1 ACT side Processor COP Alarm 0 1 ACT side Processor MEM Alarm 0 1 ACT side Processor Emergency Timer Overflow 0 1 STBY side Processor CLK Alarm 0 1 STB Y side Processor COP Alarm 0 1 STBY side Processor MEM Alarm 0 1 STBY side Processor Emergency Timer Overflow 0 1 CLK Alarm 0 1 Emergency Timer Overflow 0 1 SOFT EMA 0 1 SOFT changeover 0 1 Emergency Counter Overflow STBY ACT 0 1 Dual Single 0 1 CPU 0 CPU 1 0 1 Main Power Alarm 0 1 Power Alarm 0 1 FUSE Alarm 0 1 TEMP MJ Alarm 0 1 TEMP MN Alarm 0 1 Parity Alarm 0 1 Card is not mounted mounted 0 1 EMA CLK Alarm NDA 24300 SYSTEM MESSAGES Memory Failure Default Alarm Default Grade Grade Modified Lamp Modified SUP 3 This message displays when a CPU memory read write error occurs 2 3 XXXX 5 6
100. 9 NDA 24300 ISSUE No ISSUE No _ Ese cea ia e He cut 442 480 8l EM ee ISSUE 1 ISSUE 2 ISSUE 3 ISSUE 4 2000 oae ______ oe ________ _______ 2400 IPX system Operations and Maintenance Manual Revision Sheet 7 9 NDA 24300 ISSUE No ISSUE No _ esi ha Se eae 518 556 8l s NM ee ISSUE 1 ISSUE 2 ISSUE 3 ISSUE 4 owe 2000 oae are TSE ________ _______ 2400 IPX system Operations and Maintenance Manual Revision Sheet 8 9 NDA 24300 ISSUE No ISSUE No pepe te 115 ete wr ETE ISSUE 1 ISSUE 2 ISSUE 3 ISSUE 4 2000 oae ______ oe _ oe owe NEAX2400 IPX oystem Operations and Maintenance Manual Revision Sheet 9 9 NDA 24300 NDA 24300 ISSUE 1 OCTOBER 2000 NEAX2400 IPX System Operations and Maintenance Manual TABLE OF CONTENTS Page PVCU S a dide edes eee 9e eot _ 3 X LIEST LP IBI a oe eee een dau REA xiv LHAPTEMT TION 1 L eee a ee ee PE US 1 2 HOW TO FOLLOW THIS MANUAL iis zu
101. ACT TSW cards DLKC card MUX ACT MUX cards Refer to Figure 4 16 and Figure 4 17 END Note The changeover of Speech Path System can be performed also by using the command For details refer to Chapter 8 Maintenance Commands CHAPTER 4 NDA 24300 Page 288 Issue 1 UNIT CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE 3 3 3 SDT Card Replacement Procedure The SDT PA SDTA PA SDTB card mounted in a universal slot of a PIM is used to provide 52M interface for the optical fiber lines Use the following procedure ATTENTION 5 to replace SDT card with a spare Static Sensitive Precautions Required Nem While this card is being replaced the connected optical fiber line cannot be used ATTENTION START Contents _ Static Sensitive Handling Precautions Required e ACT lamp onPA SDTA card goes On the PA SDTA card turn ON Switch 4 OFF When card is provided in a dual configuration the card becomes of the P SW key STBY Procedure to Replace Optical Fiber Cable The following occurs in call processing When card is provided in dual configuration All calls including already established calls plus newly attempted calls can normally be handled by the mate card When card is in single configuration or mate card is faulty in dual configu ration Though any call attempt is rejected al ready established calls are not affected When any
102. Call Forwarding All Calls Call Forwarding Busy Line Call Forwarding Don t Answer Speed Calling System Speed Calling Station Off Hook Outgoing Trunk Queuing Outgoing Trunk Queuing Consultation Hold All Call Call Transfer All Calls Three Way Calling UCD Route Peg Count Measurement of the number of incoming calls answered calls and abandoned calls handled at UCD Groups on a per route basis UCD Group Peg Count Measurement of the number of incoming calls answered calls and abandoned calls on a UCD Group basis 10 UCD Station Peg Count Measurement of the number of incoming calls answered calls and abandoned calls for each station on a UCD Group basis ATT Answer Peg Count Measurement of the number of answered calls handled by each attendant Connection Route Peg Measurement of the number of various type of call connection on a connection route Count basis Connection Route Traffic Measurement of traffic on a connection route basis Note Asterisk identifies the traffic measurements that can be saved on the HD of the MAT Service Peg Count CHAPTER 6 NDA 24300 Page 426 Issue 1 SYSTEM OPERATIONS 8 2 Operating Procedure 1 Procedure for Set up and Start The procedure to set up and start the traffic measurement is as follows STEP 1 ASYD ASYDN STEP 2 Note STEP 3 STEP 4 END By using the ASYD ASYDN command assign the necessary system data as follows When perfor
103. Check the backplane of the PIM Extract all the circuit cards from the PIM and insert them back into their slots individually to see if the fuse blows END NDA 24300 FAULT REPAIR PROCEDURES Make a visual check on the backplane for pin contacting melting or burn etc Set the MB switch of the PWR supply UP Set the circuit breaker of the PWR supply DOWN Extract all the circuit cards from their mounting slots except PWR supply Replace the fuse with spare Set the circuit breaker of the PWR supply UP side Set the MB switch of the PWR supply DOWN Insert the circuit cards into their mounting slots individually with their MB switch to UP side Check to see if the fuse blows when the MB switch has been set to DOWN CHAPTER 5 Page 371 Issue 1 FAULT REPAIR PROCEDURES 8 3 Circuit Breaker OFF Fault in PWR Supply START Check the backplane of the PIM Extract all the circuit cards from the PIM and make a visual check of the circuit cards END CHAPTER 5 NDA 24300 Page 372 Issue 1 Make a visual check on the backplane for pin contacting melting or burning etc Set MB switch of the PWR supply UP Set the circuit breaker of the PWR supply DOWN Extract all circuit cards out of their mounting slots Make a visual check of the extracted circuit cards Check ICs resistors and capacitors to see if any are burned 8 4 Fault of Alarm Lamps on PWR Supply START Press RESET button of the PW
104. Forwarding Speed Calling User Assign Soft Key Number Sharing or Call Block data is designated Auto Verify Afterward Note 1 Note 2 Note 3 When Data Memory is selected Network Data Memory NDM and Local Data Memory LDM are also saved verified simultaneously Program data can be valid when MAT to PBX Hard Disk option in the Direction Select list box is se lected By saving the Number Sharing data the data concerning Dual Station Calling Over FCCS is also saved verified automatically NDA 24300 CHAPTER 8 Page 593 Issue 1 HDD_MAT_N Data Control Between HDD and MAT for NDM HDD MAT Data Control Between HDD and MAT for 1 Functional Outline This command available at the NCN only installs overwrites the updated Program data from the centralized MAT onto the HDD of all local nodes To use this command first install the updated program data on the HDD of the MAT and then execute the program installing onto the HDD of each LN 2 Parameters Input data Data Type Selection Select all the listed program data Execution Button Installing of program data is to be executed CHAPTER 8 NDA 24300 Page 594 Issue 1 HDFP HDD Format of PBX 1 Functional Outline This command is used to execute the formatting of the HDD of PBX Parameters Input Data Selection by check System HDD of No 0 System System HDD of No 1 System Buttons Execute Click to execute the formatting Close Click
105. Functional Outline This command is used for displaying the result of traffic measurement data for 15 ATT Answering Peg Count assigned by the ATRFN command Parameters Traffic Data 1 Traffic Data 2 Traffic Data 3 Traffic Data 5 Traffic Data 6 Terminal Traffic DTFIOIN Route Traffic DTF102N Station Peg Count DTF103N Attendant Peg Count DTF104N Route Peg Count DTF105N Service Peg Count DTF201N UCD Route Peg Count DTF301N UCD Group Peg Count DTF302N UCD Station Peg Count DTF303N Attendant Ans Peg Count DTF501N Connection Route Peg Count DTF601N Connection Route Traffic DTF602N NDA 24300 CHAPTER 8 Page 587 Issue 1 DTF601N Display of Connection Route Peg Count Data for Fusion Network DTF601N Display of Connection Route Peg Count Data for Fusion Network 1 Functional Outline This command is used for displaying the result of traffic measurement data for 18 Connection Route Peg Count assigned by the ATRFN command 2 Parameters Traffic Data 1 Terminal Traffic DTFIOIN Route Traffic DTF102N Station Peg Count DTF103N Attendant Peg Count DTF104N Route Peg Count DTF105N Traffic Data 2 Service Peg Count DTF201N Traffic Data 3 UCD Route Peg Count DTF301N UCD Group Peg Count DTF302N UCD Station Peg Count DTF303N Traffic Data 5 Attendant Ans Peg Count DTF501N Traffic Data 6 Connection Route Peg Count DTF601N Connection Route Traffic DTF602N CHAPTER 8 NDA 24300
106. IS BUSY 3rd DIGIT 1st DIGIT 2nd DIGIT NUMBER 2 3rd DIGIT ROUTE NUMBER 1 The route which was actually used ROUTE NUMBER 2 The route which should have been selected first 7 2 6 Condition B Information The 51st through 53rd bytes are Condition B Information The Condition B Information indicates the following data DATA OUTPUT NUMBER 0 Call is not transferred 1 Call is transferred 0 Normal Call 1 Call originated by OG trunk queuing 2 Call originated by dialing with Account Code 3 Call originated by OG trunk queuing and dialing with Account Code 0 Regular Call Direct Dialing from a station 1 Regular Call Call is made through an ATTCON DESKCON 2 Call through route advance Direct Dialing from a station 3 Call through route advance Call is made through an ATTCON DESKCON 4 Call through Least Cost Routing Direct Dialing from a station 5 Call through Least Cost Routing Call is made through an ATTCON DESKCON NDA 24300 CHAPTER 6 Page 413 Issue 1 SYSTEM OPERATIONS 7 2 7 Call Metering Information The value of call metering from the Central Office 15 transmitted data from the 92nd byte to 95th byte EXAMPLE WHEN 5200 METERING PULSES ARE RECEIVED FROM C O 7 2 8 Office Code of Calling Called Party and Billing Process Office The 96th byte through 99th byte indicates the Office Code of Calling Called Party terminated via CCIS line The 100th byte
107. LI 7 MUX D PMBUS PMBUS CO L PIM 1 PM BUS PIM 1 PM BUS MUX MUX z LC TRK LC TRK LC TRK LC TRK aeons e 5 In u cE Ab Ie MUX MUX D PMBUS PMBUS Less PM BUS 5 E 5 LC TRK 1 1 1 E 5 i PM BUS a a LI LC TRK LC TRK LC TRK 3 i E E ToIMG1 To IMGO ToIMG1 FN 1 FN i LES EE ee OT CE LI LI a LI LI LI a LI LI LI LI LI LI LI LI Im ius iris AAAA TSWM i4 E 023022021020 033032031030 TSW sw 101111 TSW INT TSW INT is i ni Note 3 971 i E Iopo 77 Vman mimimamamamumimumumumusmumumuamumusmumsmusmsmsmimsmusmsemsmumsmu
108. Last Trunk Number 1 768 STEP Trunk Count up Step 1 10 Note 1 LENS START First Line Equipment Number 6 digits LENS END Last Line Equipment Number 6 digits TN Tenant Number RSC Route Restriction Class 0 15 Note 2 SFC Service Feature Class 0 15 Note 2 GROUP START First Group Number 0 31 GROUP END Last Group Number 0 31 LEVEL START First Level Number 0 7 LEVEL END Last Level Number 0 7 TYPE Count up Type 1 6 Note 3 LEVEL GROUP UNIT 2 LEVEL UNIT GROUP 3 GROUP LEVEL 4 GROUP LEVEL UNIT 5 UNIT LEVEL GROUP 6 UNIT GROUP LEVEL Note 1 n the parameter here specify the size of increment between the consecutive trunk numbers to be as signed See the example below Example Input data Result TK START 1 TK END 221 _ Trunk Number is assigned by 2 increments STEP 2 1 3 5 7 9 1 19 21 Note 2 Data entry for this parameter is necessary when is 901 or 915 Note 3 TYPE parameter here determines how to arrange the trunk data See Details on Trunk Arrange ment TYPE later pages for details CHAPTER 8 NDA 24300 Page 532 Issue 1 Buttons Execute Cancel Exit Display Data TK LENS STATUS Note 4 f not OK i e the data entry is not successful related error message is displayed here CATK Continuous Assignment of Trunk Data Click to make the input data valid Click to cancel the input data Click t
109. NDA 24300 CHAPTER 8 Page 577 Issue 1 DTF101N Display of Terminal Traffic Data for Fusion Network DTF101N Display of Terminal Traffic Data for Fusion Network 1 Functional Outline This command is used for displaying the result of traffic measurement data for 1 Terminal Traffic assigned by the ATRFN command 2 Parameters Traffic Data 1 Terminal Traffic DTFIOIN Route Traffic DTF102N Station Peg Count DTF103N Attendant Peg Count DTF104N Route Peg Count DTF105N Traffic Data 2 Service Peg Count DTF201N Traffic Data 3 UCD Route Peg Count DTF301N UCD Group Peg Count DTF302N UCD Station Peg Count DTF303N Traffic Data 5 Attendant Ans Peg Count DTF501N Traffic Data 6 Connection Route Peg Count DTF601N Connection Route Traffic DTF602N CHAPTER 8 NDA 24300 Page 578 Issue 1 DTF102N Display of Route Traffic Data for Fusion Network 1 Functional Outline DTF102N Display of Route Traffic Data for Fusion Network This command is used for displaying the result of traffic measurement data for 2 Route Traffic assigned by the ATRFN command Parameters Traffic Data 1 Traffic Data 2 Traffic Data 3 Traffic Data 5 Traffic Data 6 Terminal Traffic DTFIOIN Route Traffic DTF102N Station Peg Count DTF103N Attendant Peg Count DTF104N Route Peg Count DTF105N Service Peg Count DTF201N UCD Route Peg Count DTF301N UCD Group Peg Count DTF302N UCD Station Peg Count DTF303N A
110. NDA 24300 CHAPTER 6 Page 395 Issue 1 SYSTEM OPERATIONS 4 LINE LOAD CONTROL In the PBX Line Load Control can be activated automatically or manually as a countermeasure against abnor mal traffic congestion In the case of automatic control the system automatically monitors an overloaded situation and restricts out going calls from stations and incoming calls from trunks In the case of manual control the operator at an Attendant Desk Console or the MAT restricts outgoing calls from stations and incoming calls from trunks This section covers the following methods to activate Line Load Control Control by dialing an access code from theATTCON DESKCON Control by entering command data from the MAT System automatic monitoring Operating Procedure 1 Operations on the Attendant Console By the operations on the ATTCON restriction is effected on an outgoing call from a station having SFC in which the SFI 16 Line Load Control of ASFC command is set as RES 0 incoming calls to that station are allowed For restricting incoming calls from a trunk system data ASYD SYSI INDEX59 0 1 should be assigned e Setting Press LOOP key Dial the access code for setting Line Load Control Lamp Figure 6 8 on control SST panel lights System message 6 C displays Press CANCEL key Figure 6 6 Line Load Control Operationson ATTCON Setting CHAPTER 6 NDA 24300 Page 396 Issue 1 SYSTEM OPERATION
111. Not Mounted Port Status on Circuit Level Basis 0 Not Assigned 1 Line Idle 2 Line Busy 3 Make Busy 4 Lockout 5 Status 5 SPTS Scanning of Port Status Type 1 by MG 3 by MG Unit Grou Interval 2 by MG Unit 9 Dynamic Port Status Report MG UNIT Port Status 0 Not Assigned 1 Line Idle 2 Line Busy 3 Make Busy 4 LockOut 5 Status5 Group 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 DL DT Status BY BY BY BY BY ID BY BY BY ID BY ID BY BY BY BY BY BY BY BY BY BY BY Level BY BY WWW CO Co C2 CO LL ee c lE ck lk WWWWWWW CO Figure 8 2 Port Status Report MG Unit Display CHAPTER 8 NDA 24300 Page 620 Issue 1 SPTS Scanning of Port Status Type 3 By MG Unit Group Display of Scanning by Designating Group When Group ts Designated Figure 8 3 STATUS Idle Idle
112. Number of Link 2 2 Not used When type of connection is Trunk connection 2 Station number See table b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 62 bl Remote Route No b0 b5 Route No 1 63 b7 b 55 54 63 b2 bl 50 0 1 Data in is invalid valid 0 1 Internal trunk External trunk 5 Remote Route No b0 b3 OPRT Route No Over 64 b7 b3 62 bl III 11 CHAPTER 3 NDA 24300 Page 92 Issue 1 SYSTEM MESSAGES Called Trunk No 0 7 Trunk No 67 b6 65 b4 63 62 bl Not used 9 Time Slot Number of Link 1 Not used 7 Time Slot Number of Link 2 12 Not used NDA 24300 CHAPTER 3 Page 93 Issue 1 SYSTEM MESSAGES When type of connection is ACD Trunk connection ACD Trouble Kind b7 b5 b4 63 62 bl bO b0 b7 ACD trouble kind trunk trouble key Note 1 14H ACD reset start Note 2 15H Insufficient ACD memory 16H Insufficient ACD call record 17H Excessive business station on ACD calls 18H Excessive calls queued 21H Unknown Pilot No called Note 3 24H Illegal execution of ACD timeout procedure Note 4 30H ACD pointer error detection and recovery Note 5 33H ACDP reset completion Note 6 34H Call recovery failure on unknown Pilot No Note 7 37H ACD Traffic incoming Capacity Over 99H Illegal ACD processing trace stored Note 4 Note 1 When ACD Trouble Kind is 01 Hex 3 6 Information on Calling Party a Station My Line N
113. OPE GT Card OFF Steady ON green Figure 6 46 LED Indications Before and After CPU Changeover STEP 4 Analyze the displayed system messages After STEPs 1 through 3 are performed the system messages 7 and 7 D automatically display Confirm that no errors occurred during the CPU changeover process Note When the CPU mode change executes the MAT TCP IP is once disconnected Then log in to the sys tem again CHAPTER 6 NDA 24300 Page 464 Issue 1 12 1 4 Forced Changeover of CPU Figure 6 47 shows how to perform the forced changeover of CPU by key oper ation on EMA 40 card Because the key operation will cause the en SYSTEM OPERATIONS tire system to initialize do not rely on this method except as a last resort m m m m LPM joo or OSIIN OSIN OOI OSIIN OpOd Hd VIN3 z v eee eee eee 2 1 CKERR1 ACTO CKERRO EMASUP EMASUP CPU SEL NMI SEL SW92 SW70 00000000 SW AO EMA PH PC40 FACE LAYOUT o z v 555 2 LANI PZ PC19 CPUOPEWDT IMGO MBR 660 d PIEM SELECT1 a b 1100000 SYSTEM SELECT2 100000000 ST SLOT No CPUOPEWDT IMGO MBR a IMG1 XY x x 600 SELECTO AE AE SYSTEM SE
114. PROCEDURES 4 2 Unit Fault Fault Related to Speech Faulty Situation Noise one way speech no tone etc occurs only within a unit Even if dialing has started dial tone does not stop 1 For Dual Configuration START Check by replacing the MUX PH PC36 circuit card After replacement of the MUX circuit card make a station to station call in the faulty unit and see if speech is normal Check by replacing the TSW circuit card After replacement of the TSW circuit card make a station to station call in the faulty unit and see if speech is normal CHAPTER 5 NDA 24300 Page 336 Issue 1 ATTENTION Contents Static Sensitive Handlin g Precautions Required Replace the MUX circuit card referring to Section 3 3 2 MUX Card Replacement Procedure in Chapter 4 Place the MUX circuit card into ACT mode by flipping the MBR key on the active GT 9 card Refer to Section 12 1 6 Manual System Changeover of Speech Path System in Chapter 6 Replace the TSW circuit card by referring to Section 2 3 2 TSW Card Replacement Procedure in Chapter 4 Place the TSW circuit card into ACT mode by flipping the MBR key on the active GT 9 card Refer to Section 12 1 6 Manual System Changeover of Speech Path System in Chapter 6 FAULT REPAIR PROCEDURES ATTENTION Contents Static Sensitive Handling Precautions Required Check the line trunk circu
115. REPAIR PROCEDURES hee oes doe eh See 309 he CINE Pe qur Sa dios dubii daba sp ux 7 EHE Cpu 311 LL dosi 312 nc hs ees 312 1 3 Line Fault When Dial Tone DT Cannot Be Heard 313 1 4 Line Fault When Dialing Results in Wrong 318 1 5 Line Fault When Bell Does Ring 316 1 6 When Call Cannot Be Answered and Speech Cannot 317 17 dia 318 2 TRUNK FAULT eee sed pur nee ee 320 MEE EC ML DU oe _ __ _ 320 esses 323 23 SND CFT Faull 324 2 4 Trunk COT TLT DID Faull Ra eoe xd a 325 ATTCONDESKCON 329 yl COR ON uico ard 329 32 AIIDOUNUESELUN 329 ___ __ _ 331 _ VE 6546655 333 ee eee ree ee ee re 334 4 2 Unit Fault Fault Related to Speech
116. Table 8 5 Internal Route Number Explanation Om _ 905 Sender Trunk DP PB 90 PB Receiver for Automated Attendant Service 907 AMP 908 Not used 909 Three Way Conference Trunk 910 911 Not used 915 916 Register 929 930 Rate Adapter Conversion Trunk TK C_RT Connection Route Number 1 1023 C_TK Connection Trunk Number 1 4095 NDA 24300 CHAPTER 8 Page 555 Issue 1 DLSL Display of Lockout Station LENS DLSL Display of Lockout Station LENS 1 Functional Outline This command prints the LENS of stations in lockout state 2 Parameters Input data Type MG UNIT Type of Printout 1 3 1 Printout of all LEN in lockout 2 Printout of locked out LEN in the designated Module Group 3 Printout of locked out LEN in the designated Unit Note 1 Note 2 Note 2 Note 1 The parameter is valid only when 2 Note 2 The parameter is valid only whenType 3 Display data LENS CHAPTER 8 Page 556 Issue 1 NDA 24300 DLSS Display of Lockout Station Number DLSS Display of Lockout Station Number 1 Functional Outline This command prints the stations in lockout state by station number 2 Parameters Input data Type Type of Printout 1 3 1 Printout of all lockout stations 2 Printout of lockout stations by tenant 3 Printout of lockout stations within a specified range of station number TN Note 1 Note 2 Start STN Maximum 6 digits Note 2 End STN Max
117. To change over the system of Phase Lock Oscillator PLO use the key operations listed below Note Though the PLO belongs to the Switching Block as explained in Section 12 1 5 its ACT STBY Switching Network is separate from that of the Speech Path System Therefore the changeover of the PLO must be independently performed improper key operations may result in a system down Operate the related keys using extreme care STEP 1 Make sure the PLO system is active 1 When the PLO system 15 active ACT or OPE lamp on the PLO card lights green If the LED is OFF the system is STBY mode 2 Check the mate PLO s STBY mode Refer to Figure 6 54 he changeover of PLO system can be done only when the mate PLO is in STBY mode Do not attempt the changeover if the mate PLO 1s closed PLO Front View a ACT OPE Note ACT OPE Note PH CK16 PLO PH CK16 PH CK17 PH CK17 PH CK16 A PH CK16 A PLO Active PLO STBY PH CK17 A Note ACT lamp for PH CKI6 PH CKI7 OPE lamp for PH CKI6 A PH CK17 A Figure 6 54 PLO in ACT STBY Mode CHAPTER 6 NDA 24300 Page 472 Issue 1 SYSTEM OPERATIONS STEP 2 Flip the MB key on the PLO card Refer to Figure 6 55 After the above steps set the MB key as shown below Then the system changeover starts automatically ATTENTION ontents __ pag Sensitive andling Precau tions Required PLO Active Figure 6 55 PLO Changeover via MB Key No
118. U two digits for G and one digit for Lv LENS XX X XX X Lv Level 0 7 Group 00 23 Note U Unit 0 3 MG Module Group 00 07 Note PA FCHA card is used line groups 24 31 can be used as the extended group numbers Figure 2 6 LENS Format 2 2 1 Module Group Figure 2 7 explains the Module Group MG In a fully expanded system the MG number ranges from 00 to 07 FRONT VIEW Figure 2 7 Module Group Allocations NDA 24300 CHAPTER 2 Page 9 Issue 1 SYSTEM MAINTENANCE OUTLINE 2 2 2 Unit Figure 2 8 which represents a fully expanded system explains the Unit U numbers The numbers range from to 3 and each unit represents the PIM universal slots No 04 12 U 0 2 or No 15 23 U 1 3 On each Module Group MG 00 07 a total of four Units U3 can be assigned IMGO IMG1 FRONT VIEW Unit Number 0 2 Unit Number 1 3 Slots No eS Se usquam CIC 192 ETE x 2s ces 192 ETE Number PIM of Time Slots 1616116 1616116 32 32 321 2 16 16 16 16 16 16 32 32 32 16 16 Control Control Figure 2 8 Unit Number Allocations CHAPTER 2 NDA 24300 Page 10 Issue 1 SYSTEM MAINTENANCE OUTLINE 2 2 3 Group The Group G numbers are allocated as shown in Figure 2 9 A total of two Groups are assigned on each universal slots within the PIM Slot numbers 10 11 12 21 22 23 can contain a total of four Gro
119. U 3 1 Level Group Unit Trunk data is arranged in the following numerical order U 2 U 3 Slot ECCE 06 UM UM 16 ACICE IMG 81 89 _8 16 E 3 Pele NDA 24300 CHAPTER 8 Page 535 Issue 1 CATK Continuous Assignment of Trunk Data TY PE 2 Level Unit Group Trunk data is arranged in the following numerical order U 2 U 3 Slot 05 06 15 16 c TT TN bi rejas Fr fes ee er MN 3 Group Level Unit Trunk data is arranged in the following numerical order U 2 U 3 Slot _ 05 06 TOR NUN 16 SETE alee 1MG 1121314 CHAPTER 8 24300 536 Issue 1 CATK Continuous Assignment of Trunk Data TY PE 4 Group Unit Level Trunk data is arranged in the following numerical order U 2 U 3 Slot 05 06 EIER SES 1MG 5 Unit Level Group Trunk data is arranged in the following numerical order U 2 U 3 Slot gt 05 06 P ya 16 FAESETIES 7 40 66 3 35 4 a6 66 82 1MG FICE 5 37 67 85 1 8 65 81 an NDA 24300 CHAPTER 8 Page 537 Issue 1 CATK Continuous Assignment of Trunk Data TY PE 6 Unit Group Level Trunk data is arranged in the followin
120. and issues the this system message OX WOOO OOOO HOO OOo Ss OD NOUO TOO OO m CD 4 0000 0000 0000 0000 5 0000 0000 0000 0000 6 0000 0000 0000 0000 ie 0000 0000 20099 0900 0000 0000 20099 0000 95 0000 0000 20000 0000 D Faulty Circuit Card Mounting b0 b4 Group Location b5 b6 Unit 0 3 b7 Module Group 0 1 b7 b6 b5 63 b2 bl bO 111 NDA 24300 CHAPTER 3 Page 69 Issue 1 SYSTEM MESSAGES C Level Infinite Loop Temporary Default Alarm Default Grade Grade Modified Lamp Modified SUP 1 This message displays when C level program is detected as abnormal by the Port Microprocessor PM mount ed on an LC TRK card If the failure occurs less than 15 times hour and a B monitor Initial restart executes as the result the failure 1s judged as temporary and this message is created Ir 0000 0000 0000 2 0000 9000 0000 0000 2 00009 0000 0000 0000 noe ond D 4 0000 0000 0000 0000 5 0000 0000 0000 0000 6 0000 0000 0000 0000 Fe 0009 9090 00909 0000 85 0009 2000 009090 0000 295 0000 08007 00090 0000 D Faulty Circuit Card Mounting b0 b4 Group Location b5 b6 Unit 0 3 b7 Module Group 0 1 b7 b6 b5 63 b2 bl bO Tit 0 PM Restart 0 1 B monitor Initial Restart b7 ILIILLLI Note B monitor Restart Ports whose link has alr
121. appear according to the selected data type When TYPE 1 is selected When TYPE 2 is selected When TYPE 3 is selected CHAPTER 8 Page 548 Issue 1 UGN User Group Number TELN Telephone Number Max 16 digits FPC Fusion Point Code 1 253 TN Tenant Number Max 3 digits STN Physical Station Number Max 6 digits Fusion Point Code 1 253 LENS Line Equipment Number NDA 24300 DCBD Display Data CNT Registered Restriction Numbers in total 1 5 DC Each Restriction Number When Physical Station Number is registered Max 6 digits When Telephone Number is registered Max 16 digits When Trunk Call Number is registered Max 32 digits NDA 24300 Display of Call Block Entry Data CHAPTER 8 Page 549 Issue 1 DCEN Display of Connection Trunk LENS Data for LDM DCEN Display of Connection Trunk LENS Data for LDM 1 Functional Outline This command is used to display the registered connection trunk route data by designating LENS 2 Parameters Input Data C_LENS Display Data C_RT C_TK RT TK TN CHAPTER 8 Page 550 Issue 1 Line Equipment Number 6 digits Connection Route Number 1 1023 Connection Trunk Number 1 4095 External Route Number Trunk Number 1 255 Tenant Number NDA 24300 DCON Display of Connection Status Display of Connection Status 1 Functional Outline This command displays the
122. b3 62 61 bO b7 No 0 1 Even numbered MG Odd numbered MG 2 Kind of Fault b0 b4 Kind of Fault HEX b7 dde He e 01 Frame alignment loss PCM down 11 02 Bit error rate is over 10 4 03 Slip is detected 04 Opposite office alarm AIS is detected 05 06 Multi frame alignment loss 07 Frame alignment loss PCM down continuously 08 Multi frame alignment loss continuously CHAPTER 3 NDA 24300 Page 172 Issue 1 Default Alarm SYSTEM MESSAGES Digital Line Restore NON Default Grade Grade Modified Lamp Modified 0 This message displays when a digital line failure is restored to normal 0 1 0000 00009 0000 24 0000 0000 0000 0000 35 0000 0000 00009 0000 EQ mi 4 0000 0000 0000 0000 5 0000 0000 0000 0000 6 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 QUOO 20000 30000 0000 0000 0000 09000 Os 0001 0000 D Accommodated location b7 b b5 b4 63 b2 bl Kind of Fault b7 b4 63 62 61 II LLLILLI bO b4 Group No b5 b6 Unit No 0 3 b7 MG No 0 1 Even numbered MG Odd numbered MG bO b4 Kind of Fault HEX 00 01 Frame alignment loss PCM down 02 Bit error rate is over 107 03 04 Opposite office alarm AIS is detected 05 Dch restores to normal 06 Multi frame alignment loss NDA 24300 CHAPTER 3 Page 173 Issue 1 SYSTEM MESSAGES DRU Batt
123. b4 SYSTEM MESSAGES V E b3 b0 bO b3 64 67 The status of TSW card in each MG 00 07 0000 Normal 0001 Abnormal Impossible to make links 7 MG00 1 V vV V EZ b7 b4 b3 b0 bO b3 b4 b7 The status of TSW card in each 00 07 0000 Normal 0001 Abnormal Impossible to make links NDA 24300 CHAPTER 3 Page 65 Issue 1 SYSTEM MESSAGES DLKC Data Transfer Failure Permanent Default Alarm MN Default Grade Grade Modified Lamp Modified 3 This message displays when DLKC data transfer failure temporary shown in message 1 V occurs more than 16 times an hour At this time the faulty DLKC card is down and its switching network automatically changes over hoy 09 lt XXXX 00 0000 0000 2 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 y7 4 0000 0000 0000 0000 5 0000 0000 0000 0000 6 0000 0000 0000 0000 7 0000 0000 0000 0000 8 0000 0000 0000 0000 9 0000 0000 0000 0000 D System status of faulty card b7 bO U 2 Error Code 01 02 03H b7 66 b5 b4 63 b2 bl 3 Details on Switching Network b0 b7 bl i tt CHAPTER 3 Page 66 Issue 1 0 1 No 0 system No 1 system Firmware fault Data transfer time out to DLKC No answer time out at DLKC Data parity error Status of Speech Path System including DLKC 0 1 No 0 system is ACT No 1 system is ACT Status of ba
124. be written into the switch memory of the TSW card in one of the dual systems 1 XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX 2 0000 0000 0000 0000 3 0000 0000 0000 0000 DO 4 0000 0000 0000 0000 5 0000 0000 0000 0000 6 0000 0000 0000 0000 0009 0000 D000 0000 85 0000 0000 0000 0000 95 0000 0000 UUUDU 0000 D TSW system in which a fault is 0 12 TSW No 0 TSW No 1 detected b7 Tt 2 Status at the time of fault detection bO 0 1 TSW No 0 TSW No 1 57 b6 bO b6 0 1 Speech Path ACT status TSW No 0 system is ACT TSW No 1 system is ACT 3 Data Analyzed by NEC Engineers Reference See Chapter 5 Section 5 2 Section 5 4 and Section 6 2 for the repair procedure CHAPTER 3 NDA 24300 Page 56 Issue 1 SYSTEM MESSAGES Both TSW Clock Failure Default Alarm Default Grade Grade Modified Lamp Modified MN 3 This message displays when the system detects a clock failure such as TSW internal clock down or Frame Head down in both systems 1 XXXX 0000 0000 2 0000 0000 0000 0000 3 0000 0000 0000 0000 oy 4 0000 0000 0000 0000 5 0000 0000 0000 0000 6 0000 0000 0000 0000 0009 0000 D000 0000 9t 0000 0000 0000 0000 95 0000 0000 UUUDU 0000 D TSW card in which a fault is b0 0 1 TSW No 0 system detected bl 0 1 TSW No 1 system b7 bl it 2 Clock status of No 0 TSW b2 0 1 DTG ou
125. bl 0 1 Call Forwarding Data b2 0 1 RCF b4 User Assign Soft Key Data b5 0 1 Number Sharing Data Note b6 0 1 Call Block Data o Backup Data to No system 0 1 Individual Speed Calling Data b7 b 65 b4 63 b2 bl bl Call Forwarding Data b2 0 1 RCF b4 User Assign Soft Key Data b5 0 1 Number Sharing Data Note b6 0 1 Call Block Data CHAPTER 3 NDA 24300 Page 132 Issue 1 Note Number Sharing data load also affects the data load of Dual Station Calling Over FCCS SYSTEM MESSAGES Detection of Remaining Link Normal End Itf COXX 0080 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 33 0000 8000 0000 20000 DO 1 OOOO OOOO 0000 0000 5 0000 2000105 0900 0000 9000 OOOO 0000 QUOD 73 0009 0000 0000 0000 85 00009 0000 0000 0000 95 0000 0000 0000 0000 Performed Diagnosis Item COH Detection of Remaining Link Normal End 7 66 65 b4 63 62 bl I __ NDA 24300 CHAPTER 3 Page 133 Issue 1 SYSTEM MESSAGES Cyclic Diagnosis Information Error Detected Default Alarm Default Grade Grade Modified Lamp Modified NON 3 In a specific time cycle the system allows a routine diagnosis 1 its hardware and software to determine if they are operating properly This message indicates that the system has been checked by the routine diagnosis pro gram and result of the diagn
126. cannot be used use the key operations listed below As explained in this section the ACT STBY of the Speech Path System can be changed over via the key on the GT PH GT09 card Because each GT and can control both the Speech Path System 0 an 1 perform the key operation on the active GT card not on the card in STBY mode Refer to Figure 6 46 Figure 6 48 shows a system block diagram centering upon the GT and its controlling Speech Path Sys tem By changing over the ACT STBY of Speech Path System all the related systems such as TDSW INT DLKC and MUX are totally switched over The changeover can be executed by a key operation on the active GT card If the MBR key is flipped on the active GT card all the Speech Path related systems TSW INT DLKC and MUX in the same switching block are totally changed over However the ACT STBY of GT and PLO is not affected NDA 24300 CHAPTER 6 Page 467 Issue 1 SYSTEM OPERATIONS IMGO IMG1 IMG2 IMG3 Line Trunk PM Line Trunk PM a Line Trunk PM Line Trunk PM MH Wd MH WOd Wd rN MH Wd MH Wd MH Wd MH WOd Wd rN MH MH Wd MH MH Wd MH WOd Wd MH INOd Nd MH Nd MH W
127. check to see if the connection is established normally When the dialed station is called The station telephone set is faulty Replace the station telephone set with a spare When a wrong connection Replace the LC circuit card with a spare occurs END NDA 24300 CHAPTER 5 Page 315 Issue 1 FAULT REPAIR PROCEDURES 1 5 Line Fault When Bell Does Not Ring Note fa circuit card is replaced because only one line is faulty no other lines in that circuit card can be used until the replacement is complete ATTENTION Contents Static Sensitive Handlin g Precautions Required START Call the faulty station line by Station to Replace the telephone set and check to see if Station calling and check to see if the bell its bell rings of the telephone rings Check the faulty line on the MDF Isolate the faulty line to the in house wiring side and to the system side Connect the test telephone to the system side Call the faulty line by station to station calling and check to see if the bell rings When the bell does not ring Replace the LC circuit card with a spare When the bell rings The in house wiring side is faulty Confirm that the A wire is not short circuiting with END ground CHAPTER 5 NDA 24300 Page 316 Issue 1 FAULT REPAIR PROCEDURES 1 6 When Call Cannot Be Answered and Speech Cannot Be Made Note fa circuit card is replaced because only one line is faulty no other lines
128. connection status of the station and trunks the specified station or trunk 15 busy the connected party is displayed Parameters Input data Type Kind of Connection Status 1 4 1 Station of Connection Status 2 Trunk of Connection Status 3 LENS of Connection Status 4 Connection Trunk of Connection Status Fusion Network TN Note 1 STN Maximum number of digits is 5 for Business system and 6 for Hotel system Note 1 RT Note 2 TK Note 2 LEN Note 3 C_RT Connection Route Number 1 1023 Note 4 C_TK Connection Trunk Number 1 4095 Note 4 Note 1 This data is valid when Type 1 Note 2 This data is valid when 2 Note 3 This data is valid when 3 Note 4 This data is valid when Type 4 NDA 24300 CHAPTER 8 Page 551 Issue 1 DFTD Display of System Message Details DFTD Display of System Message Details 1 Functional Outline This command is necessary to print the system messages detected by the Fault Diagnostic programs When the fault scanning Scanning PBX 15 effective the MAT can scan the PBX status by polling every 20 sec default setting is Effective If the PBX has faults this command executes automatically 2 Parameters Input data New Old Show Details YES NO CHAPTER 8 NDA 24300 Page 552 Issue 1 DISS 1 Functional Outline Display of Program Issue DISS Display of Program Issue This command outputs to the printer and displays at the MAT the program information versio
129. dre 53 TSW Failure Permanent 54 i ho eke HE eee hae 55 TSW Write 56 og nae bh bee 57 TSW Clock IEG a drea gt act le ohh 58 or oe es eS ORES ORE EES 59 PE Fe e E ede dee eee e hhh eo eh e doe ee 61 Module Group Down FANG sert 03 0 3 4C de ct eden 63 TSW ACT Change 64 DLKC Data Transfer Failure 66 DLKC Data Transfer Failure 67 ELO elt oe xs be oe eee oe ee 68 C Level Infinite Loop 69 C Level Infinite Loop 70 Lock Up Failure 71 L ck Up Falu 1 Tempora Vus ica diac voxor dedo doge RC dra dod 72 ___ _ 73 u tli Ig
130. following lamp indication Check the mate PLO s ACT mode e OPE Steady green Extract the PLO card to be replaced from the TSWM Set the keys on the new card according to the card replaced NDA 24300 CHAPTER 4 Page 279 Issue 1 UNIT CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE ATTENTION Contents __ Static Sensitive Handling Precautions Required On the new PLO card set the MB key UP Insert the new PLO card into the TSWM OPE lamp on new card is OFF Note Set the MB key on the new card DOWN END Note After all steps are completed check the ACT mode of TSW cards which are in the same switching block with the replaced PLO Because the PLO located MUSIC ROM supplies hold tones only to the TSW cards belonging to the same switching block verify all the TSW cards are also in the ACT mode status Refer to Section 12 System Control Procedures in Chapter 6 CHAPTER 4 Page 280 Issue 1 NDA 24300 UNIT CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE 2 3 5 PWR SW Card Replacement Procedure The PWR SW PH PW14 card is located in Slot No 00 or 01 within the TSWM The card s main function is to supply DC 48V operating power to the same TSWM circuit cards and also DC 5 5V and 12V output power to the MISC slots Use the following procedures to replace the card with a new one Replacement Procedure ATTENTION C ni Precautions Required tents ic Sensitiv
131. for Back up 01 Change from Dch for Back up to Primary Dch 10 Place Primary Dch to ACT status 11 Place Dch for Back up to ACT status 00 Change signal is received 01 Change signal is sent Status of Primary Dch 0 In service 1 Standby 2 Out of Service 3 Make Busy 4 Changing status from STBY to In Service 5 Manual out of service Status of Primary Dch In service 1 Standby 2 Out of Service 3 Make Busy 4 Changing status from STBY to In Service 5 Manual out of service EVENT No NDA 24300 DCH Back Up Manual Change Start End Default Alarm SYSTEM MESSAGES Default Grade NON Grade Modified Lamp Modified 1 This message displays when the Primary Dch fails and the Dch Back Up function is operated manually E zie mien cutem oo 9o OO 4 0000 0000 0000 0000 5 ver 0000 QUOD 20000 39000 1 XXXX XXXX 008 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 35 0000 0000 00000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 6 00900 0000 0000 20000 9 0000 0000 0000 0000 00900 0000 0000 Condition of Dch b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 bl 2 Location of Dch Primary 57 b6 65 b4 b3 62 bl 3 Location of Dch Back up 57 b6 65 63 62 bl b0 b7 Back up Start 2 Back up End 3 Back up Failed bO b4 Group No b5 b6 Unit No 0 3 b7 0 1 Even numbered MG Odd numbered MG bO b4 Group No b5 b6
132. has stopped the circuit card extracted at that time is faulty Replace the circuit card with a spare If the fault continues check the next circuit card NDA 24300 FAULT REPAIR PROCEDURES ATTENTION Contents Static Sensitive Handling Precautions Required Set the MB switch of the line trunk circuit card UP and extract it from its mounting slot Make a station to station call and see if a fault occurs CHAPTER 5 Page 339 Issue 1 FAULT REPAIR PROCEDURES 4 3 Unit Fault When DialTone DT Cannot Be Heard Faulty Situation e Dial Tone DT cannot be heard except within a unit 4 T Both MUX Failure 4 5 MUX Ready Failure e 23 Y MUX Clock Failure ATTENTION Contents Static Sensitive Handling Precautions Required Note For dual system configuration if a system message indicates that both systems are faulty first repair the fault in the indicated system and then proceed to repair the PIM in the other system 1 For Dual Configuration START Check to see if the MUX PH PC36 circuit card is making poor contact Check by replacing the MUX circuit card with a spare CHAPTER 5 NDA 24300 Page 340 Issue 1 Set the MUX circuit card into STBY mode by flipping the MBR key on the active GT PH GTO9 card Refer to Section 12 1 6 Manual System Changeover of Speech Path System in Chapter 6 Set the MB switch of the MUX circuit card UP Extract the MUX circuit card from its mounting
133. in ON position UP Use MBST command to confirm that ELC circuit card has not been placed into make busy state Check the station data ASDT command assignment Replace the ELC circuit card with a spare Check the faulty line on the MDF When no speech can be made When speech can be made END FAULT REPAIR PROCEDURES ATTENTION Contents Static Sensitive Handling Precautions Required Isolate the faulty line to the in house wiring side and to the system side ptem Connect the test to the system side Confirm speech by Station to Station calling Check LT cables Replace ELC circuit card with a spare Check to see if the modular plug is firmly connected with the Check the wiring inside the rosette Check the in house wiring for abnormality Replace the D with a spare CHAPTER 5 Page 319 Issue 1 FAULT REPAIR PROCEDURES 2 TRUNK FAULT This paragraph explains the fault repair procedure when a fault shown in Table 5 3 has occurred to a specific trunk Table 5 3 Trunk Fault Situation TRUNK FAULTY SITUATION REFERENCE SECTION ORT No connection can be set up Section 2 3 Trunk ORT SND PB DP signals are erroneously received or cannot be received CFT Fault No connections can be set up PB DP signals are erroneously sent out or cannot be sent out No connections can be set up No three way calling can be made Noise gets in an established connection No conne
134. in the following table each bit represents the Unit No allocated condition for each MUX card in position When 1 is set the corresponding MUX b7 66 65 64 63 b2 bl card status has a functional failure is not mounted in the proper location LT TTT tT tt b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 bl bO esse MGI MGO MG3 MG2 0 1 functional fault not mounted M MG5 MG4 CHAPTER 3 NDA 24300 Page 142 Issue 1 SYSTEM MESSAGES 31H TSW ACT STBY Changeover Failure MUX Fault 1 31XX XXXX XXXX 2 XXXX 0000 0000 0000 3 0000 0000 0000 0000 oy Cos DO OO OO oo 9 40 4 OOOO OOOO 0000 0000 5t 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 00140 0000 TE 0000 90099 99009 809009 0000 0000 09999 0000 9 00090 8000 9999 0000 D Detected Error Item 31H TSW ACT STBY Changeover Failure MUX Fault 2 Active TSW No 0 1 TSW 0 is is ACT b7 3 6 MUX ACT side linkage As shown in the following table each bit represents the Unit No allocated condition for each MUX card in position When 1 is set the corresponding MUX card status ACT has a functional failure or is not mounted in the proper b7 66 b5 63 62 bl location b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 bl OO
135. into act mode by this operation OPE MB lamp of seconds return the MBR key to the previous position Note 1 See Section 12 1 3 Manual System Changeover of CPU Forced Changeover ACT STBY mode of CPU can be controlled by CPU SEL key operation on the 9 Note 2 EMA PH PC40 card card which is in the UP No 0 system ACT controlling route DOWN No 1 system ACT lights green Normally this key must be placed in the center position when the CPU is provided in a dual configuration See Section 12 1 4 Forced Changeover of CPU Note 1 While changeover of the CPU is in progress any call attempt is rejected Already established calls however will not be affected Note 2 When the forced changeover is executed the entire system is initialized For this reason do not use this operation except in unavoidable circumstances Figure 6 42 shows a system block diagram centering upon the CPU and its controlling GT Though the two sides have a complicated cable connection the controlling route of CPU 0 directly goes to GT 0 and that of CPU to GT 1 Therefore if the system of CPU is changed over the ACT STBY of GT also changes over Because the ACT STBY changeover of CPU also affects the GT status the MBR key on the GT card 15 not used for GT system changeover The key 15 used to switch over the Speech Path System involv ing the TSW DLKC and MUX circuit cards Refer to Section 12 1 6 Manual System
136. is performed when a traffic measurement instruction has been assigned by this command The collected traffic measurement data can be stored on the HD of the MAT which can be designated on the basis of traffic measurement type 2 Parameters Input Data TYPE Type of Traffic Measurement 1 19 See Table 8 2 Table 8 2 Type of Traffic Measurement Explanation om we WbReMs Cam vooreen PORT Traffic Information Output Terminal Number 0 7 IOC 8 LAN 9 NMS INTERVAL Output interval 0 30 120 Assign the data 30 120 in 10 minute increments When assigning 0 available when any of TYPE 3 18 is selected instead specify your desired output time in the OUTPUT HOUR MINUTE parameters below START HOUR Note 1 START MINUTE Note 1 END HOUR Note 1 END MINUTE Note 1 OUTPUT HOUR This data is valid only when INTERVAL 0 OUTPUT MINUTE This data is valid only when INTERVAL 0 START RT Start External Route Number available when TYPE 2 5 8 15 selected END RT End External Route Number available when TYPE 2 5 8 is selected START C_RT Start Connection Route Number available when TYPE 18 19 15 selected END C_RT End Connection Route Number available when TYPE 18 19 is selected Note 1 Assign the traffic measurement time period between START HOUR MINUTE and END HOUR MINUTE longer than an hour Also if the measurement should be executed throughout a day assign the same data in both STAR
137. is selected in the FDD parameter 3 Click the Copy button Then a message requiring to insert the first FD into the FDD drive appears 4 Insert the first FD into the FDD of the MAT Then click OK 5 File copy starts automatically and the Copy End message appears upon completion 6 Click OK Another message asks you whether the next FD is to be installed or not 7 Click OK 8 A message requiring you to insert the second FD into the FDD drive is displayed Insert the second FD into the FDD and click OK 9 File copy starts automatically and the Copy End message appears upon completion 10 Click OK A message asks you whether the next fourth FD is to be installed or not 11 Click Cancel CHAPTER 8 NDA 24300 Page 590 HDD FDD Data Control Between HDD and FDD HDD FDD Data Control Between HDD and FDD 1 Functional Outline This command is used to install the program data from FDD of PBX to HDD of PBX and to verify the program data between FDD of PBX and HDD of PBX 2 Parameters Input data System Select HFDO HFDI Direction Select Floppy Disk to Hard Disk Verify HDD against FDD Note Data Type Selection Program data others are invalid LP Select Not used Auto Verify Afterward Note Hard Disk to Floppy Disk cannot be selected Input data System Select HFDO HFDI Direction Select Floppy Disk to Hard Disk Verify HDD against FDD Hard Disk to Floppy Disk Data Type Selection Data Memory Note 1 Name Disp
138. lead Acknowledge Signal Wink Signal 160 ms standard Sending Delay Start Timing can be assigned using ARTD command Detection of Release at the E amp M System 288 ms standard time of Incoming Loop System Connection 160 ms standard Timing can be assigned using ARTD command Timing for Restricting Call After release of the user s trunk or the trunk at 3070 ms standard Origination after Release the opposite office has been detected a new Timing can be assigned using ARTD call origination is restricted command Seizure of Opposite Office Loop System Closure of DC loop E amp M System Supply of outgoing call signal ground or 48V onto M DL lead Trunk Hold Time Even if answer signal has not reached from the If DP Signal is 10 sec standard opposite office the call is regarded as after dial pulses are sent out answered Timing can be assigned using ARTD command If PB Signal is 30 sec standard after seizure of the trunk Timing can be assigned using ASYD SYS 1 Index 156 only when 2nd Dial Tone System Detection of Release at the Loop System 608 ms standard time of Outgoing Detection of polarity reversal across tip and Timing can be assigned using ARTD Connection ring command E amp M System Detection of Release Signal ground or 48V on E lead NDA 24300 CHAPTER 5 Page 321 Issue 1 FAULT REPAIR PROCEDURES Table 5 5 Timings for Senders ITEMS FOR STATUS
139. message displays when the user uses Follow Phone SWAP service 1 XXXX XXXX XXXX XX00 2 XXXX XXXX XXXX 3 XXXX 0000 0000 0000 eco a cen c Se a 00 900 0 00 219 4 4 0000 0000 0000 0000 5 0000 0000 0000 0000 6 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 QUOO 20000 30000 0000 0000 0000 09000 Os 0001 0000 D Error code b0 b7 See table b7 6 b5 63 62 bl Rat Calling or Called station is Night station Called station is busy MW has been set to Calling or Called station CHAPTER 3 NDA 24300 Page 200 Issue 1 SYSTEM MESSAGES Call Back OG queuing has been set to Calling or Called station Call Forwarding All Calls has been set to Calling or Called station Call Forwarding Busy Line has been set to Calling or Called station Collision of swap service e Under swapping of One Touch Memory Memory overflow Max 4 stations Data Memory read error Data Memory swap failure OAI Terminal Information swap failure CM Data OAI Terminal Information swap failure LP Data SST Time out 2 Tenant No of calling station b0 b3 Tenant No 1 15 b4 b7 Tenant No over 15 b7 b b5 b4 63 b2 bl 3 Accommodated location of calling 2 Level station after Follow Phone service b3 b7 Group 0 22 b7 66 65 64 63 b2 bl 4 Accommodated location of calling bO b1 Unit No 0
140. of Route MBRT Make Busy of Route 1 Functional Outline This command assigns Idle Busy status for all the trunks in the route designated 2 Parameters Input data RT Route Number of the external route internal route Table 8 6 provides the meaning of the internal route numbers MB Idle 1 Busy Table 8 6 Route Number Explanation om 905 Sender Trunk DPPB 9 PB Receiver for Automated Attendant Service 907 AMP 908 Not used 909 Three Way Conference Trunk 910 912 Not used 915 916 MFC Register 929 930 Rate Adapter Conversion Trunk NDA 24300 CHAPTER 8 Page 599 Issue 1 MBRT_LR Make Busy of Route Logical Route Number MBRT LR Make Busy of Route Logical Route Number 1 Functional Outline This command is used for assigning IDLE BUSY status of all the trunks in the logical route designated Route number of the MBRT command can be assigned by using logical route Note 1 When logging in to the NCN Network Control Node the data of other LN Local Node can be changed If logging in to a LN only the DM of self Node can be changed by this command 2 Parameters Input Data LGRT Logical route number allocated to the external internal route Refer to the MBRT com mand as to the Internal route number and its meaning Note MB Make Busy Information Make Idle Make Busy Note Prior to this command logical route number must be allocated by using the ALRTN command Dis
141. of TSWM improper key operations may result in a system down Operate the key using extreme care By replacing a circuit card the system will issue system messages and activate the related alarm Be sure to reset the indicated alarm after the replacement procedure is complete If the indicated alarm is cleared via the RALM command the system also clears the contents of the system mes sage Be sure to print out the messages using the DFTD command BEFORE using the RALM command The ALM RST button is used to reset the alarm lamps only CHAPTER 4 NDA 24300 Page 266 Issue 1 UNIT CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE 2 3 Operating Procedures The following paragraphs explain the operating procedures to replace circuit cards located in the PIM Perform the operations corresponding to each Reference Item specified in Table 4 2 Table 4 2 TSWM Circuit Cards and Reference Items CIRCUIT CARD FUNCTION NAME REFERENCE ITEM Section 2 3 1 GT Card Replacement Procedure Section 2 3 2 TSW Card Replacement Procedure Section 2 3 5 PWR SW Card Replacement Procedure Section 2 3 4 PLO Card Replacement Procedure Section 2 3 6 MISC Card Replacement Procedure Section 2 3 3 DLKC Card Replacement Procedure NDA 24300 CHAPTER 4 Page 267 Issue 1 UNIT CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE 2 3 1 GT Card Replacement Procedure The GT 9 card is located in Slot No 10 or 11 within the TSWM The card s main func
142. slot and clean the contact portion If cleaning cannot be done repeat insertion and extraction of the circuit card two or three times Set the MB switch of the MUX circuit card UP and insert the circuit card into its mounting slot Set the MB switch of the MUX circuit card DOWN Check to see 1f a station to station connection can be set up within the faulty unit Place the MUX circuit card into STB Y mode by flipping the MBR key on the active GT PH GTO9 card Refer to Section 12 1 6 Manual System Changeover of Speech Path System in Chapter 6 Replace the MUX circuit card Refer to Section 3 3 2 MUX Card Replacement Procedure in Chapter 4 END Extract all the line trunk circuit cards from their mounting slots in the unit Insert the cards back into their slots one after another and see if the dial tone is heard each time If Dial Tone DT 15 heard check the next circuit card If DT is not heard replace the cir cuit card with a spare NDA 24300 FAULT REPAIR PROCEDURES ATTENTION Contents Static Sensitive Handling Precautions Required Place the MUX circuit card into ACT mode by flipping the MBR key on the active GT PH 9 card Refer to Section 12 1 6 Manual System Changeover of Speech Path System in Chapter 6 Check to see if a station to station connection can be set up to identify the circuit card respon sible for the fault Extract all the line trunk circuit cards from their slo
143. spouse we 09 00 4 0000 0000 0000 0000 5 0000 0000 0000 0000 6 0000 0000 0000 0000 T OOOO QUOO 20000 30000 0000 0000 10000 0000 Os 0000 0000 10000 D Detection of PCI restoration Error detection on PCI slot LANI A bl 0 1 Error detection on PCI slot 1 b7 b3 b2 bl bO b2 0 1 Error detection on PCI slot 2 Not used 111 b3 0 1 Error detection on PCI slot 3 LANI B 2 Details on error restoration PCI Physical connection error restoration Note slot 0 b7 tt ttt 9 Details on error restoration PCI 60 Physical connection error restoration Note slot 1 b7 4 Not used NDA 24300 CHAPTER 3 Page 85 Issue 1 SYSTEM MESSAGES Details on error restoration PCI 0 1 Physical connection error restoration Note slot 3 b7 tt Note Physical Connection Error Ethernet cable is disconnected Ethernet cable has short circuited Ethernet straight cross cable selection error CHAPTER 3 NDA 24300 Page 86 Issue 1 Default Alarm SYSTEM MESSAGES System Failure NON Default Grade Grade Modified Lamp Modified 3 FIXED NON FIXED 3 This message displays when any of the following faults are detected Power failure Fuse blowing In Frame abnormal temperature D 2 1 XX00 XXXX 0000 0000 2 0000 0000 000
144. the TOPU 71 Check Point When repairing an alarm indication fault check the alarm cable route shown in Figure 5 11 and Figure 5 12 7 2 Fault of Alarm Indicating Panel START ATTENTION Contents Static Sensitive Confirm lamps and power supply circuit of the Alarm Indicating Panel P ecanione aut Confirm cross connections on the MDF Confirm that the connector of 16 PH EXALM CA is firmly plugged in the EXALM connector on the backplane of LPR END CHAPTER 5 NDA 24300 Page 364 Issue 1 FAULT REPAIR PROCEDURES DSPL Lamps PIM3 PIM2 PIM1 16PH EXALM Symbols Flat Cable lt lt CHAMP Connector Ended Cable Connector To alarm information of PWR MUX TSW Circuit Card Figure 5 11 Cable Routing for Alarm Indications 16PH EXALM CA CHAMP Connector Cable Alarm Indicating Panel Backplane Power Receiving Terminal Figure 5 12 Cabling Related to Alarm Indicating Panel NDA 24300 CHAPTER 5 Page 365 Issue 1 FAULT REPAIR PROCEDURES 7 3 Fault That Cannot Be Detected ATTENTION Contents Static Sensitive Handling Precautions Required START Check the DSP flat cable See Figure 5 10 WANN the EMA card is removed from the system while the system is in operation under the control of the CPU 1 the system will reset and stop all call processing See Section 1 3 2 EMA Card Replacement Procedure in Chapter 4 for detailed i
145. the data here is output as 0 NDA 24300 CHAPTER 3 Page 223 Issue 1 SYSTEM MESSAGES Default Alarm LAN Interface Error Report SUP Default Grade Grade Modified Lamp Modified This message is issued when the connection error related to external LAN Interface equipment occurs in the system TCP IP Part XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX 2 Se 00 0 0099 0090 0000 0000 3 0000 0000 0000 0000 8 Application Part gt __ 6 0 LLLLLLLLLLLLLL LLLLLLLL LLL LANDS XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX 3 XXXX XXXX XXXX Y rr nts amp d 960 OH 609 D 9 0000 0000 0000 0000 6 0000 0009 0000 0000 94 IP Address for external equipment in which error has been detected Hex 57 b6 65 b4 63 62 bl I 1117 Port No Client Port No Hex b7 66 b5 b4 b3 bl IT TT 7 Socket No Used Socket No Hex b7 66 b5 b4 b3 b2 bl I TT TT Error Code TCP IP Error Code Hex b7 66 b5 b4 b3 b2 bl See Table 3 2 224 Issue 1 NDA 24300 SYSTEM MESSAGES Table 3 2 Error Code Hex Hex 58 Address Address family not supported not supported Um NDA 24300 CHAPTER 3 Page 225 Issue 1 SYSTEM MESSAGES Application T
146. to exit this command NDA 24300 HDFP HDD Format of PBX CHAPTER 8 Page 595 Issue 1 MBCT Make Busy of Connection Trunk for LDM MBCT Make Busy of Connection Trunk for LDM 1 Functional Outline This command is used to set reset the make busy state of the connection trunk 2 Parameters Input Data C_RT Connection Route Number 1 1023 C_TK Trunk Number 1 4095 MB Make Busy Information 0 1 Idle 1 Make Busy Outgoing CHAPTER 8 NDA 24300 Page 596 Issue 1 MBLE Make Busy of LENS MBLE Make Busy of LENS 1 Functional Outline This command assigns the IDLE BUSY status of Line Equipment Numbers LENS 2 Parameters Input data LENS MB Idle 1 Busy NDA 24300 CHAPTER 8 Page 597 Issue 1 MBPM Make Busy of Port Microprocessor MBPM Make Busy of Port Microprocessor 1 Functional Outline This command sets or resets the make busy state of the circuit card that contains the port microprocessor This setting and resetting is performed individually for each circuit card If the location of the circuit card containing the port microprocessor is specified in this command the operating state of all circuit cards mounted in the associated unit is displayed 2 Parameters Input data MG Unit Group MB Display data MB Idle 1 Busy Note dle Busy status can be displayed and assigned by the MB parameter CHAPTER 8 NDA 24300 Page 598 Issue 1 MBRT Make Busy
147. 0 09090 0000 OOOO WOOO sos QODO WOOO OOOO OOOO Se OOOO WOOO Location of faulty Line Trunk card b0 b4 Circuit card No 0 31 b5 b6 Unit No 0 3 b7 66 b5 b4 b3 62 61 bO b7 No 0 1 Even numbered MG Odd numbered MG NDA 24300 CHAPTER 3 Page 121 Issue 1 SYSTEM MESSAGES NCU MB Key Turn ON Default Alarm Default Grade Grade Modified Lamp Modified NON 3 This message displays when the MB switch on the PFT 15 turned ON while extracting or inserting a circuit card or at PM initialization 1 XXXX 0000 0000 0000 2 0000 0000 0000 0000 3 0000 0000 0000 0000 Y 0 4 0009 909909 00009 0000 54 0009 80009 00090 0000 C000 0000 09090 0000 WOOO OOOO se QODO WOOO OGG P000 OOOO WOOO Faulty PFT card No b0 b2 Circuit card No 0 7 b7 b2 bl b0 2 Location of faulty PFT card b0 b4 Group No b5 b6 Unit No 0 3 67 b 65 b4 63 b2 bl b7 0 1 2 Even numbered MG Odd numbered MG 1111 CHAPTER 3 NDA 24300 Page 122 Issue 1 SYSTEM MESSAGES NCU MB Key Turn OFF Default Alarm Default Grade Grade Modified Lamp Modified NON 3 This message displays when the MB switch on the PFT card is turned OFF while extracting or inserting a cir cuit card or at PM initialization 1 XXXX 0000 0000 0000 2 0000 0000
148. 0 0000 3 0000 0000 0000 0000 4 0000 0000 0000 0000 5 0000 0000 0000 0000 6 0000 0000 0000 0000 7 0000 0000 0000 0000 8 0000 0000 0000 0000 9 0000 0000 0000 0000 D Probable cause for failure b0 bl b7 b4 63 62 61 bO b2 b4 Input power 48V down abnormal detected PWR Supply abnormal detected PWR Supply Fuse Blown detected Abnormal temperature MJ 70 C 158 F Abnormal temperature MN 60 C 140 F 2 Frame in which a fault is detected 50 b3 Frame No 0 Only b7 b b5 b4 63 b2 bl 0 1 CPU is mounted Not mounted b4 b5 Frame Group No 00 IMG 3 Factor of failure b0 b7 b4 b3 b2 bl bO b4 0 1 OBP Alarm side OBP Alarm 1 side OBP Alarm MISC side 0 1 Power Alarm side 0 1 Power Alarm 1 side Reference See Chapter 5 Section 8 for the repair procedure NDA 24300 CHAPTER 3 Page 87 Issue 1 SYSTEM MESSAGES RGU amp Howler Failure Default Alarm Default Grade Grade Modified Lamp Modified MN 3 This message displays when a fault in either the ringer or howler tone occurs in the PWR card 1 0000 00009 0000 24 0000 9000 0000 0000 35 0000 0000 00009 0000 EQ mi DO 4 0000 0000 0000 0000 5 0000 0000 0000 0000 6 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 QUOO 20000 30000 0000 0000 0000 09000 Os 0001 0000 D Unit and MG number of fault b1 Unit No 0 3 detectio
149. 0 2000105 0900 0000 9000 OOOO 0000 QUOD 73 0009 0000 0000 0000 85 00009 0000 0000 0000 95 0000 0000 0000 0000 D Routine Diagnosis 30H TSW ACT STBY Changeover Normal End Active TSW system after 0 12 TSW No 0 is ACT changeover TSW No 1 is ACT b7 11111 1 NDA 24300 Page 128 Issue 1 SYSTEM MESSAGES 40H CPU ACT STBY Changeover Normal End It wOXX 0000 00009 0000 0000 0000 0004 10006 33 0000 0000 00069 72000 DO 1 OOOO OOOO 0000 0000 5 0000 2000105 0900 0000 9000 OOOO 0000 QUOD 73 0009 0000 0000 0000 85 00009 0000 0000 0000 95 0000 0000 0000 0000 D Routine Diagnosis 40H CPU ACT STBY Changeover Normal End 2 Active CPU system 0 CPU 0 1 0 15 ACT 1 is ACT 07 bl bO bl TSW NDA 24300 CHAPTER 3 Page 129 Issue 1 SYSTEM MESSAGES 150 No Trunk Ineffective Hold SOXX 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 9OOD 225 0000 0000 5 0000 0000 8 O000 0000 0090 0000 537 OOOO 0000 00002 6 0000 0000 0000 0000 9 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 D Routine Diagnosis 2 MG and Unit of No of Trunk Ineffective Hold b7 b b5 b4 63 b2 bl LT TTT ttt CHAPTER 3 Page 130 Issue 1 SOH Trunk Ineffective Hold Unit 0 Even numbered 1 No Trunk Ineffective Hold bl Unit 1 Ev
150. 0 b4 Group b5 b6 Unit 67 b b5 b4 63 02 bl b7 Even numbered MG Odd numbered MG Kind of fault 01H Frame alignment loss occurs 100 times a day b7 b5 b4 b3 b2 bil b0 03H Slip occurs 50 times a day 04H Multiframe alignment loss occurs 110 times a day Ty yt 06H Frame alignment loss lasts for 2 to 3 sec 07H Bit error rate is over 104 09H Warning signal AIS from the opposite office has been received for 1 sec continuously OBH Multiframe alignment loss lasts for 2 to 3 sec OFH Digital Line is not restored 3 Location of faulty circuit card This 53 57 Group No data is valid when 2 is OFH b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 _ 4 Location of faulty circuit card This 50 b1 Unit No data is valid when 2 is OFH b2 b7 MG No b7 b 65 64 63 b2 bl CHAPTER 3 NDA 24300 Page 76 Issue 1 SYSTEM MESSAGES Digital Line Restore Default Alarm Default Grade Grade Modified Lamp Modified NON 0 This message displays when a digital line fault is restored 1 0000 0000 0000 25 0000 0000 0000 0000 35 0000 0000 0000 0000 CD 4 0000 0000 0000 0000 5 0000 0000 0000 0000 6 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 QUOO 20000 30000 0000 0000 0000 09000 Os 0001 0000 D Location of faulty line b0 b4 Group No b5 b6 Unit No 0 3 67 56 55 b4 63 02 bl bO b7 0 1 2 Even numbered M
151. 00 D Unit and MG number for MUX MUX ready fault in even numbered MG Unit 0 card with the ready fault bl 0 1 MUX ready fault in even numbered MG Unit 1 b2 MUX ready fault in even numbered MG Unit 2 67 b 55 b4 63 02 bl bO b3 0 1 MUX ready fault in even numbered MG Unit 3 TLL 1 b4 MUX ready fault in odd numbered MG Unit 0 b5 MUX ready fault in odd numbered MG Unit 1 b6 MUX ready fault in odd numbered MG Unit 2 b7 MUX ready fault in odd numbered MG Unit MG and system number for faulty 50 MG number for faulty MUX card MUX card 0 1 Even number Odd number bl Ready failure in MUX No 0 system Ready failure in MUX No 67 b2 bl 1 system Note 1 LLLI b2 ACT or STBY status of the faulty MUX Note 2 0 1 ACT STBY Note 1 Though this message indicates the Ready Failure in both systems the information displayed here only relates to the ACT side MUX status Two messages are not displayed separately Note 2 Fixed as 0 ACT See Note 1 Reference See Chapter 5 Section 4 3 and Section 4 4 for the repair procedure CHAPTER 3 NDA 24300 Page 82 Issue 1 Default Alarm SYSTEM MESSAGES PCI Card Failure MN Default Grade Grade Modified Lamp Modified 3 This message displays when a PCI card failure occurs 20 0 1 0 00 0000 2 0000 0000 0000 0000 3 0000 0000 0000 0
152. 00 OOOO WOOO sos QODO WOOO OOOO OOOO Se OOOO WOOO Frame No and its kind b0 b3 Frame No 0 only b4 b5 Frame Group No 0 only Dy DT pe Db pn b6 b7 Kind of Frame NDA 24300 CHAPTER 3 Page 119 Issue 1 SYSTEM MESSAGES PM MB Key Turn ON Default Alarm Default Grade Grade Modified Lamp Modified NON 3 This message displays when the MB switch on the line trunk card is turned ON while extracting or inserting a circuit card or at PM initialization 1 XX00 0000 0000 0000 2 0000 0000 0000 0000 3 0000 0000 0000 0000 y7 4t 0000 99909 009009 0000 54 0009 80009 00090 0000 78009 0000 09090 0000 OOOO WOOO sos QODO WOOO OOOO OOOO Se OOOO WOOO D Location of faulty Line Trunk card 504 Circuit card No 0 31 b5 b6 Unit No 0 3 b7 66 b5 b3 62 bl b7 No 0 1 Even numbered MG Odd numbered MG CHAPTER 3 NDA 24300 Page 120 Issue 1 SYSTEM MESSAGES PM MB Key Turn OFF Default Alarm Default Grade Grade Modified Lamp Modified NON 3 This message displays when the MB switch on the line trunk card is turned OFF while extracting or inserting a circuit card or at PM initialization 1 XX00 0000 0000 0000 2 0000 0000 0000 0000 3 0000 0000 0000 0000 y7 4t 0000 99909 009009 0000 54 0009 80009 00090 0000 78009 000
153. 00 0000 0000 95 0000 0000 UUUDU 0000 D TSW system in which a fault is 0 12 TSW No 0 TSW No 1 detected b7 Tt 2 Status at the time of fault detection 0 1 TSW No O TSW No 1 b7 b6 b6 Speech Path in ACT status 677 3 Data Analyzed by NEC Engineers Reference See Chapter 5 Section 5 4 for the repair procedure CHAPTER 3 NDA 24300 Page 54 Issue 1 SYSTEM MESSAGES Both TSW Write Failure Default Alarm Default Grade Grade Modified Lamp Modified MN 2 This message displays when the link information cannot be written into the switch memory of the TSW in both systems 1 XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX 2 0000 0000 0000 0000 3 0000 0000 0000 0000 0 4 0000 0000 0000 0000 5 0000 0000 0000 0000 6 0000 0000 0000 0000 0009 0000 D000 0000 85 0000 0000 0000 0000 95 0000 0000 UUUDU 0000 D TSW system in which a fault is 0 12 TSW No O TSW No 1 detected b7 Tt o 0 1 TSW 0 TSW No 1 h Path in ACT b7 b6 bO b6 0 1 Speech Path in ACT status No 0 system No 1 system 3 Data Analyzed by NEC Engineers Reference See Chapter 5 Section 5 2 and Section 6 2 for the repair procedure NDA 24300 CHAPTER 3 Page 55 Issue 1 SYSTEM MESSAGES TSW Write Failure Default Alarm Default Grade Grade Modified Lamp Modified MN 2 This message displays when the link information cannot
154. 000 2 OOOO 0000 0000 0000 Se 100007 D000 0000 0000 CD 4 0000 0000 0000 0000 5 0000 0000 0000 0000 6 0000 0000 0000 0000 T OOOO QUOO 20000 30000 0000 0000 0000 Os 0000 0900 00009 DOO D Circuit Card No 0 1 2 IOC O IOC 1 b7 CHAPTER 3 NDA 24300 Page 210 Issue 1 SYSTEM MESSAGES MBR Key Turn ON Default Alarm Default Grade Grade Modified Lamp Modified NON 3 This message displays when the MBR switch on the IOC card is turned on at the time of CPU changeover or speech path changeover 1 XX00 0000 0000 0000 2 0000 0000 0000 0000 3 0000 0000 0000 0000 y7 4t 0009 9990 00900 0000 58 0009 00090 0000 78009 0000 0000 0000 re OOOO OOOO OOOO 9x P000 WOOO OOOO OOOO Oc OUO OOOO WOOO D Circuit Card No bO 0 1 IOC 0 IOC 1 b7 NDA 24300 CHAPTER 3 Page 211 Issue 1 SYSTEM MESSAGES MBR Key Turn OFF Default Alarm Default Grade Grade Modified Lamp Modified NON 3 This message displays when the MBR switch on the IOC card 1s turned off at the time of CPU changeover or speech path changeover 1 XX00 0000 0000 0000 2 0000 0000 0000 0000 3 0000 0000 0000 0000 y7 4t 0009 9990 00900 0000 58 0009 00090 0000 78009 0000 0000 0000 re OOOO OOOO OOOO 9x P000 WOOO OOOO OOOO Oc OUO OOOO WOOO
155. 000 rY rY tT 4 0000 0000 0000 0000 5 0000 0000 0000 0000 6 0000 0000 0000 0000 7 0000 0000 0000 0000 8 0000 0000 0000 0000 9 0000 0000 0000 0000 D Fault detection on PCI card bl b7 b3 62 bl b2 2 Error status on PCI slot 0 b0 bl b7 bl i 1 3 Error status on PCI slot 1 b0 bl b7 bl 1111 1 4 Not used 0 1 Error detection on PCI slot 0 LANI A 0 1 Error detection on PCI slot 1 0 1 Error detection on PCI slot 2 Not used 0 1 Error detection on PCI slot 3 LANI B 0 1 Physical connection error Note 1 0 1 Hardware Fault Note 2 0 1 Physical connection error Note 1 0 1 Hardware Fault Note 2 NDA 24300 CHAPTER 3 Page 83 Issue 1 SYSTEM MESSAGES Error status on PCI slot 3 0 1 Physical connection error Note 1 b7 bl bO bl 0 1 Hardware Fault Note 2 Note 1 Physical Connection Error Ethernet cable is disconnected Ethernet cable has short circuited Ethernet straight cross cable selection error Note 2 Hardware Fault Transmitter failure e Controller lock up CHAPTER 3 NDA 24300 Page 84 Issue 1 SYSTEM MESSAGES Card Failure Recovered Default Alarm Default Grade Grade Modified Lamp Modified MN 3 This message displays when the PCI card which was detected as faulty is recovered 14 030X 0X00 0000 2 0000 2000 0000 000 Se 9000 0000 000 0000
156. 000 0000 0000 0000 94 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 D Error detection by Routine 44H CPU ACT STBY Changeover Failure Diagnosis Changeover NG or CPU RAM Copy NG 2 ACT system after changeover CPU 0 1 0 is ACT 1 is ACT b7 bl bO CHAPTER 3 NDA 24300 Page 148 Issue 1 SYSTEM MESSAGES 50H Trunk Ineffective Hold Detected 1 DOXK Zr AQUA ARAK AKAM m ndm d DO 3 3 4 XXXX XXXX XXXX 5 XXXX 0000 0000 6 0000 0000 0000 0000 s 7777 3 3 dx 10000 0090 0000 OOOO 0000 00000000 0000 92 30000 0000 20 0 00 00 00 D Error detection by Routine SOH Trunk Ineffective Hold Detected Diagnosis 2 LENS of Trunk Ineffective Hold bl bO MG U 0 0 Unit 0 0 1 Unit 1 b7 62 bl 0 Unit2 1 b2 0 1 Even No Odd No Module 3 LENS of Ineffective Hold Trunk G LV Group No t 300X 21 3 XXXX XXXX Group gt DO 66 DO 90 TE COU Number 4 XXXX XXXX b XXXX XX00 0000 0000 6 0000 0000 0000 0000 YN NY ya y 2922 eID 500 728 2930 3 Te 0009 9900 9000 0000 8 000 20000 0900 0000 94 0000 0000 00900 0000 lt Level gt Level b 56 bd b4 63 b2 bi GO
157. 000 0000 0000 7 0000 0000 0000 0000 8 0000 0000 0000 0000 9 0000 0000 0000 0000 Meaning 1 SYSTEM MESSAGE 3 E SUP LOCK UP FAILURE TEMPORARY Meaning of the message oystem Message Level Indicated by Alarm Lamp Note oystem Message Number Note There are four kinds of alarm information to be indicated by alarm lamps MN MJ SUP and No Indication 2 Office Name Date and Time 3 1 00 0 ACT STBY indication for dual systems No 0 No 1 system indication for dual systems Faulty processor Related processor 4 Message detail data notation by hexadecimal numbers Figure 2 12 System Message Example CHAPTER 2 NDA 24300 Page 14 Issue 1 SYSTEM MAINTENANCE OUTLINE 2 5 Fault Detecting Function The system finds a fault by its fault detecting circuit and the fault detecting program Once a fault occurs the system initiates a remedial action such as system changeover make busy setting or restart processing by the automatic diagnosis function This action reduces the influence of the fault so that system servicing may be minimized The result of the process taken and the fault situation are indicated for equipment concerned Among the faults those related to speech path noise one way speech speech inability etc are not detectable Since these fault reports are to be obtained from a station or operator periodic trunk tests must be performed without failure to detect the faults related to speech path
158. 000 6 0000 0000 0000 0000 0009 0000 D000 0000 85 0000 0000 0000 0000 95 0000 0000 UUUDU 0000 D Location of PM LENS with a b0 b4 Group fault b5 b6 Unit b7 0 1 Even numbered MG Odd numbered MG b7 6 b5 63 62 bl 1111 Kind of fault 01H Frame alignment loss occurs three times a day 02H Bit error rate is over 1079 b7 b 65 b4 b3 bl 03H Slip occurs twice a day T 04H Multiframe alignment loss occurs three times a day 08H Fault detection on the CCIS Bch Time Slot No of fault This data 1s b0 b4 Time slot No in which the digital line failure occurred 1 16 17 31 valid only when the kind of fault is 08H b7 b4 b3 b2 bl 1I PEt tt NDA 24300 CHAPTER 3 Page 75 Issue 1 SYSTEM MESSAGES Digital Line Failure Default Alarm Default Grade Grade Modified Lamp Modified SUP 3 This message displays after 3 H Digital Line Warning lasts in the DTI card over the particular time This failure may cause a speech path fault to the DTI card 1 XXXX OOOO XXXX XXXX 2 XXXX 3 XXXX ux ud d yy yy CNY mn a 0797 rnnt 3 O 2020 O 4 XXXX 0000 0000 5 0000 0000 0000 0000 6 0000 0000 0000 0000 OT 09 7 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 9 0000 0000 0000 0000 D Location of faulty PM b
159. 0000 0000 8000 3 OOOO 0000 00002 6 0000 0000 0000 0000 9 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 D Routine Diagnosis Information on HD b7 bl bO tt 11 3 Verification of Drive Number b7 b3 62 bl 1 1 a CHAPTER 3 Page 126 Issue 1 10H Program Memory Verification Normal End bl b3 0 1 HFC 0 is normal 0 1 HFC 1 is normal 0 1 Drive Number 0 0 1 Drive Number 1 0 1 Drive Number 2 0 1 Drive Number 3 NDA 24300 20H Data Memory Verification Normal End SYSTEM MESSAGES lt 0000 0000 2 eye 09 4 0000 0000 0000 0000 5 Jt 0000 0000 0000 0000 9 0000 0000 0000 0000 3 0000 0000 0000 0000 900 0000 0900 8000 lt 63 000 OOOO QUOD 0009 0000 0000 0000 94 0000 0000 0000 0000 D Routine Diagnosis 2 Verification of HD b7 bl 3 Verification of Data Memory b7 b2 bl LLLI 20H Data Memory Verification Normal End bl bl 0 1 HFC 0 1s normal 0 1 HFC 1 15 normal 0 1 Data Memory 0 1 Local Data Memory 0 1 2 Network Data Memory NDA 24300 CHAPTER 3 Page 127 Issue 1 SYSTEM MESSAGES 30H TSW ACT STBY Changeover Normal End 1 0000 0000 000 25 0000 0000 0000 0000 92 0000 8000 0000 0000 Em c m DO 1 OOOO OOOO 0000 0000 5 000
160. 01 Connection Route Traffic DTF602 NDA 24300 CHAPTER 8 Page 567 Issue 1 DTF103 Display of Station Peg Count Data DTF103 Display of Station Peg Count Data 1 Functional Outline This command displays the result of traffic measurement data for Type 3 Station Peg Count assigned by the command 2 Parameters Traffic Data 1 Terminal Traffic DTF101 Route Traffic DTF102 Station Peg Count DTF103 Attendant Peg Count DTF104 Route Peg Count DTF105 Traffic Data 2 Service Peg Count DTF201 Traffic Data 3 UCD Route Peg Count DTF301 UCD Group Peg Count DTF302 UCD Station Peg Count DTF303 Traffic Data 5 Attendant Ans Peg Count DTF501 Traffic Data 6 Connection Route Peg Count DTF601 Connection Route Traffic DTF602 CHAPTER 8 NDA 24300 Page 568 Issue 1 DTF104 1 DTF104 Display of Attendant Peg Count Data Display of Attendant Peg Count Data Functional Outline This command displays the result of traffic measurement data for Type 4 ATT Peg Count assigned by the ATRF command Parameters Traffic Data 1 Traffic Data 2 Traffic Data 3 Traffic Data 5 Traffic Data 6 Terminal Traffic DTF101 Route Traffic DTF102 Station Peg Count DTF103 Attendant Peg Count DTF104 Route Peg Count DTF105 Service Peg Count DTF201 UCD Route Peg Count DTF301 UCD Group Peg Count DTF302 UCD Station Peg Count DTF303 Attendant Ans Peg Count DTF501 Connection Route Peg Count DTF601 Connection Rout
161. 24300 CHAPTER 3 Page 157 Issue 1 SYSTEM MESSAGES CCH Clock Failure Default Alarm Default Grade Grade Modified Lamp Modified SUP 3 This message displays when a clock down failure occurs in the CCH DCH circuit card When this message 1s indicated the related CCH DCH card is placed into make busy status 1 0000 0000 0000 2 0000 0000 0000 0000 3 0000 0000 0000 0000 y7 4t 0000 99909 009009 0000 54 0009 80009 00090 0000 78009 0000 09090 0000 OOOO WOOO sos QODO WOOO OOOO OOOO Se OOOO WOOO Location of faulty CCH DCH card Group No b5 b6 Unit No 0 3 67 b b5 b4 63 02 bl 50 b7 Even numbered MG Odd numbered MG 111 3 NDA 24300 Page 158 Issue 1 SYSTEM MESSAGES CCH C Level Infinite Loop Failure Permanent Default Alarm Default Grade Grade Modified Lamp Modified SUP 3 This message displays when C level infinite loop of the Port Microprocessor PM in the CCH DCH circuit card has occurred 1 XX00 0000 0000 0000 2 0000 0000 0000 0000 3 0000 0000 0000 0000 y7 4t 0000 99909 009009 0000 54 0009 80009 00090 0000 78009 0000 09090 0000 OOOO WOOO sos QODO WOOO OOOO OOOO Se OOOO WOOO Location of faulty CCH DCH card Group No b5 b6 Unit No 0 3 67 b b5 b4 63 02 bl 50 b7 E
162. 3 Station after Follow Phone service b2 b7 MG No b7 b 65 64 63 b2 bl NDA 24300 CHAPTER 3 Page 201 Issue 1 SYSTEM MESSAGES Station No of calling station b7 b 55 64 63 b2 bl Tenant No of called station b0 b3 Tenant No 1 15 bz pe b BL 50 b4 b7 Tenant No over 15 LT Ut tT Tt Q Accommodated location of called 2 Level station b3 b7 Group b7 b 65 64 63 b2 bl Accommodated location of called b1 Unit No 0 3 station b2 b7 MG No b7 b 65 64 63 b2 bl 11111 1114 13 Station No of called station b7 b6 b5 b4 63 b2 bl 111 14 Data Analyzed by NEC Engineers CHAPTER 3 NDA 24300 Page 202 Issue 1 SYSTEM MESSAGES CCH MBR Key Turn ON Default Alarm Default Grade Grade Modified Lamp Modified NON 3 This message displays when the MBR switch on the CCH DCH card is turned ON 1 0000 00009 0000 24 0000 9000 0000 0000 35 0000 0000 00009 0000 EQ mi DO 4 0000 0000 0000 0000 5 0000 0000 0000 0000 6 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 QUOO 20000 30000 0000 0000 0000 09000 Os 0001 0000 D Location of CCH DCH card b0 b4 Group No b5 b6 Unit No 0 3 57 b6 65 b4 b3 62 bl b7 No 0 1 Even numbered MG Odd numbered MG 2 No b0 b1 No 0 3 b7 bl
163. 3 2 MUX Card Replacement Procedure in Chapter 4 Place the MUX circuit card into ACT mode by flipping the MBR key on the active GT 9 card Refer to Section 12 1 6 Manual System Changeover of Speech Path System in Chapter 6 Check to see if a station to station connection can be set up and identify a circuit card responsible for the fault Perform the above check by extracting each MUX circuit card individually CHAPTER 5 Page 345 Issue 1 FAULT REPAIR PROCEDURES 5 SPEECH PATH TSW SYSTEM FAULT This section explains the fault repair procedure when any of the faults shown in Table 5 7 has occurred in whole system Table 5 7 Speech Path TSW System Fault Situation FAULTY SITUATION REFERENCE SECTION Noise one way speech no tone Section 5 2 Speech Path System Fault Fault e Even if dialing has been made dial tone does not stop Related to Speech Dial tone cannot be heard Section 5 3 Speech Path System Fault When Dial Tone DT Cannot Be Heard A fault occurring in the STBY side TSW is indicated by a system Section 5 4 Speech Path System Fault STB Y Side message or an alarm lamp Has Become Faulty 5 1 Check Point When repairing a speech path fault consider that when any of the faults shown in Table 5 7 have occurred in the system it 15 possible that the TSW circuit card is at fault Always check the alarm lamps on the TSW circuit card CHAPTER 5 NDA 24300 Page 346 Issue 1 FA
164. 300 Page 12 Issue 1 SYSTEM MAINTENANCE OUTLINE 2 3 Local Partition LP Number The Local Partition LP number refers to a logical local processor number theoretically assigned for each IMG that consists of four or less Port Interface Modules PIM Though the local processor does not actually exist in any of the IMGs except for IMGO the system can apply the two digit LP number to each IMG see Figure 2 11 on its data memory program The LP numbers are used primarily in the following cases e Display of system messages Assignment of line load control data ALLC command Backup for Call Forwarding Speed Calling data command etc The Local Partition No two digits even number is assigned on each IMG IMGO IMG1 IMG2 PIM3 PIM3 PIM2 PIM2 FANU FANU PIM1 PIM1 PIMO PIMO LP No 00 LP No 02 LP No 04 LP No 06 FRONT VIEW Figure 2 11 LP Number Allocations NDA 24300 CHAPTER 2 Page 13 Issue 1 SYSTEM MAINTENANCE OUTLINE 2 4 System Messages System messages display during routine diagnosis system operation status controlling and fault occurrence Figure 2 12 shows an example of a system message Refer to Chapter 3 for details on each message 1 SYSTEM MESSAGE 3 E SUP LOCK UP FAILURE TEMPORARY 2 NEC TOKYO JUL 24 09 35 3 LPOO 0 ACT 4 1 1102 0000 0000 0000 2 0000 0000 0000 0000 3 0000 0000 0000 0000 4 0000 0000 0000 0000 5 0000 0000 0000 0000 6 0000 0
165. 4 0000 0000 0000 0000 3 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 6 0000 0000 0000 0000 0404 0000 20000 00009 10000 OOOO C000 OOOO D Accommodated location b7 b b5 b4 63 b2 bl 2 Kind of Fault b7 b4 63 62 61 1I Ett tt bO b4 Group No b5 b6 Unit No 0 3 b7 MG No 0 1 Even numbered MG Odd numbered MG b0 b4 Kind of Fault HEX 00 01 Frame alignment loss PCM down 02 error rate is over 1079 03 Slip is detected 04 05 Dch down 06 Multi frame alignment loss 07 10 11 Frame alignment loss PCM down frequently 12 Bit error rate is over 107 13 Slip is detected frequently 14 Opposite office alarm is detected 15 16 Multi frame alignment loss frequently 17 Frame alignment loss PCM down continuously 18 Multi frame alignment loss continuously NDA 24300 CHAPTER 3 Page 171 Issue 1 SYSTEM MESSAGES Digital Line Failure Default Alarm Default Grade Grade Modified Lamp Modified SUP 2 This message displays when a digital line failure occurs 1 0000 00009 0000 24 0000 9000 0000 0000 35 0000 0000 00009 0000 EQ mi DO 4 0000 0000 0000 0000 5 0000 0000 0000 0000 6 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 QUOO 20000 30000 0000 0000 0000 09000 Os 0001 0000 D Accommodated location b0 b4 Group No b5 b6 Unit No 0 3 b7 66 b5 b4
166. 4 0000 0000 0000 0000 5 0000 0000 0000 0000 6 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 QUOO 20000 30000 0000 0000 0000 09000 Os 0001 0000 D Information on PLO MBR b0 O I System O System 1 operation b7 NDA 24300 CHAPTER 3 Page 117 Issue 1 SYSTEM MESSAGES ALMC MB Key Turn ON Default Alarm Default Grade Grade Modified Lamp Modified SUP 3 This message displays when the MB switch on the EMA card is turned ON while extracting or inserting a circuit card or at PM initialization This message displays with the 7 J ALMC MB Key Turn OFF message 1 XX00 0000 0000 0000 2 0000 0000 0000 0000 3 0000 0000 0000 0000 y7 4 0000 0000 0000 0000 5 0000 0000 0000 0000 6 0000 0000 0000 0000 0009 0000 D000 0000 85 0000 0000 0000 0000 95 0000 0000 UUUDU 0000 Frame No and its kind b0 b3 Frame No 0 only b4 b5 Frame Group No 0 only b7 b b5 b4 b3 bl b6 b7 Kind of Frame CHAPTER 3 NDA 24300 Page 118 Issue 1 SYSTEM MESSAGES ALMC MB Key Turn OFF Default Alarm Default Grade Grade Modified Lamp Modified NON 3 This message displays when the MB switch on the EMA card is turned OFF while extracting or inserting a circuit card or at PM initialization 1 XX00 0000 0000 0000 2 0000 0000 0000 0000 3 0000 0000 0000 0000 y7 4t 0000 99909 009009 0000 54 0009 80009 00090 0000 78009 0000 09090 00
167. 40 CMWL Control Message Waiting Lamp 541 CMWL T Control Message Waiting Lamps Telephone Number 542 CPRS Controlled Alternate PRSCs 543 CSCL Continuous Change of Station 5 544 CSTN Continuous Change of Station 545 DCBD Display of Call Block Entry 546 DCEN Display of Connection Trunk LENS Data for 548 DCON Display of Connection Status e 549 DFTD Display of System Message Details 550 DISS Display of Program Issue deque codec ede tds 551 DLEN or LENS DA es ERROR UA 552 DLSL Display or Lockout Station LENS sui odds 554 DLSS Display of Lockout Station 555 DLSS_T Display of Lock Out Station Number Telephone 556 DLTEL Display of Telephone Number from LENS for 597 DNTEL Display of Telephone Number from LENS for 558 Display of Setting Port Package 559 DPSW Display Package Switch
168. 5 Issue 1 SYSTEM MESSAGES Hard Clock Failure Default Alarm Default Grade Grade Modified Lamp Modified SUP 3 This message displays when the timer circuit in the EMA card becomes faulty and stops functioning and 64 Hz clock alarm is output 1 0000 0000 0000 0000 2 0000 0000 0000 0000 3 0000 0000 0000 0000 4t 0009 99909 009009 0000 5 0009 80009 00090 0000 9009 0000 09090 0000 OOOO WOOO sos QODO WOOO OOOO OOOO Se OOOO WOOO D Message Detail Data This system message is always indicated as 0000 CHAPTER 3 NDA 24300 Page 196 Issue 1 SYSTEM MESSAGES Hard Clock Restore Default Alarm Default Grade Grade Modified Lamp Modified NON 3 This message displays when 16 M 64 Hz Clock Down Detected 1s restored to normal 1 0000 0000 0000 0000 2 0000 0000 0000 0000 3 0000 0000 00009 0000 4 0000 0000 0000 0000 5 0000 0000 0000 0000 6 0000 0000 0000 0000 7 0000 0000 0000 0000 8 0000 0000 0000 0000 9 0000 0000 0000 0000 D Message Detail Data This system message is always indicated as 0000 NDA 24300 CHAPTER 3 Page 197 Issue 1 SYSTEM MESSAGES Failure Temporary Default Alarm Default Grade Grade Modified Lamp Modified SUP 1 This message displays when the IOC card fails 1 0000 00009 0000 24 0000 9000 0000 0000 35 0000 0000 00009 0000 EQ mi DO 4 0000 0000 0000 0000
169. 6 Fuse Replacement The system uses the fuses shown in Figure 4 28 as a protection against an overload resulting from a short cir cuit Figure 4 28 Fuses Used by System When excessive current is applied to a PWR circuit card the related fuse is blown The blown fuse after a fault can be confirmed as shown in Figure 4 29 If a fuse is blown this area turns white A normal fuse A blown fuse Figure 4 29 Blown Fault Example The purpose of fuses 15 to let them blow before the components are damaged If any fuse gets blown replace it immediately with a new one using the following procedure 1 Confirm the blown fuse via the system message 6 A or MJ lamp on the top of IMGO 2 Replace the fuse with a new one referring to Figure 4 30 and Figure 4 31 3 Determine the cause of the blown fault referring to Figure 4 32 case of RGU fuse or Figure 4 33 DC 48V fuse CHAPTER 4 NDA 24300 Page 304 Issue 1 UNIT CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE Figure 4 30 shows the location of fuses within the system In Chapter 4 30 the fuses are indicated by 54 PBX Front View 2 5 0 e e ABE 28 69 PZ M377 Figure 4 30 Fuse Locations Within System NDA 24300 CHAPTER 4 Page 305 Issue 1 UNIT CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE In TSWM the fuse shown in Figure 4 31 15 used for the PWR SW PH PW14 card which 15 housed in Slot No 00 and or 01 PBX I
170. 69 of 69 Total 69 100 Save Text File When saving the currently displayed text page press this button Then a dialog box as shown in Figure 6 24 appears Page UP Page DOWN Any Traffic data now in the database can easily be found via these buttons Select UP or DOWN according to the text display pattern the newest the first the oldest the last Note Note When this window is activated the initial text to appear is the newest file data out of a sequence of Traffic reports Like this the newest text in the database appears on the first page and the next new the next page Figure 6 23 Listup Report Window when View Database is Selected Example The dialog box as shown below appears if the Save Text File button is selected on the Listup Report window see Figure 6 23 above If the file 15 to be saved 1 Select Character separated values on the Format list box Format Destination Character separated values Disk file 2 Select Disk file on the Destination list box 3 Click OK After these steps a new dialog asking the saved file name and directory also appears Then complete the data saving by filling out these necessary items Figure 6 24 Export Dialog for Traffic Report Text File Saving NDA 24300 CHAPTER 6 Page 431 Issue 1 SYSTEM OPERATIONS 3 Service Conditions when performing Traffic Measurement via TCP IP a
171. APTER 6 Page 421 Issue 1 SYSTEM OPERATIONS Data 14 Condition D Information Bill Notification ATT CON Number Bill Notification by ATTCON Not Available Bill Notification by ATTCON Not Applied 1 Bill Notification by ATTCON Available Data 16 Automatic Number Indication Automatic Number Indication Max 32 digits Information Element Identifier Unable to Output Display Unable to Notify Out of Service Out of Area Public Telephone Origination CHAPTER 6 NDA 24300 Page 422 Issue 1 SYSTEM OPERATIONS 7 2 10 Text Format of SMDR TCP IP Interface When using SMDR TCP IP interface billing information 15 output to the billing output devices con nected by an external LAN in the form of socket interface as shown in Figure 6 20 PBX Server Billing Information SMDR A SMDR B SMDR C SMDR D Client Client Client Client Note A maximum of 4 clients can be designated as SMDR equipment for each LN Figure 6 20 SMDR TCPIIP Interface Billing Output Devices Details on the text format for SMDR TCP IP Interface are explained below 1 Identifier 1 Data Request Text A text to be sent by the client when it requests the server to send billing data Data length 00002 Text sending direction Client Server NDA 24300 CHAPTER 6 Page 423 Issue 1 SYSTEM OPERATIONS 2 Identifier 2 Sending Data Text A text for sending billing data in response to 1 Data R
172. ATTENTION Contents Static Sensitive Handling Precautions Required Note For dual system configuration if a system message indicates that both systems are faulty first repair the fault in the indicated system and then proceed to repair the PIM in the other system START Check to see if the TSW circuit card 15 making poor contact END Check front Set TSW circuit card into STBY mode by flip ping the key on the active GT 9 card Refer to Section 12 1 6 Manual System Changeover of Speech Path System in Chapter 6 Set TSW MBR switch on the TSW card UP Set MB switch of the TSW circuit card UP Extract the TSW circuit card from its mounting slot and clean the contact portion If cleaning cannot be done repeat insertion and extraction of the circuit card two or three times Set TSW MBR and MB switches on the TSW circuit card UP and insert the circuit card into its mounting slot Set MB switch of the TSW circuit card DOWN Set TSW MBR switch DOWN Check if a station to station connection can be set up Check the front cables See Figure 5 8 Initialize the system by pressing the START button on the TOPU and see if a station to sta tion connection can be set up CHAPTER 5 Page 353 Issue 1 FAULT REPAIR PROCEDURES 5 4 Speech Path System Fault STBY Side Has Become Faulty Faulty Situation e A fault occurred in the STBY side of the dual configuration system 1
173. BY side Section 6 2 Control System Fault Fault Occurs Intermittently STBY side is faulty Section 6 3 Control System Fault STBY Side Is Faulty 6 1 Check Point When repairing the control system check the status of the following lamps e CPR e GT e TSW e e EMA circuit cards Figure 5 9 shows a block diagram of the CPU controlling block where CPU 0 15 active CHAPTER 5 NDA 24300 Page 356 Issue 1 PIM 3 Cm PIM 2 Cm V PIM 0 PM BUS PM BUS PM BUS PM BUS PM BUS PM BUS PM BUS TSWM TILILiLiLititititit itis PTTL ttt ie 003002001000 PCI BUS Reset Signal cant T md em Ji nus CPU board i PWR AATE Circuit card active EMA LANI IOC DLKC MUX FAULT REPAIR PROCEDURES PM BUS 2 TolMG3 TSW INT Symbols lt gt Controlling Routes of CPU External Cable Signral PH PC40 ISAGT PZ PC19 GT 1024 TSW PH PC20 PLO PH PC36 2 TolMG3 l Cable Circuit card STBY Clock Oscillator PZ GT13 PH GT09 PH SW12 PH CK16 17 16 A 17 A Note 1 The circuit cards drawn by dotted lines indicate they are in STBY state These cards TSW MUX and DLKC are totally changed over to
174. C Both TSW Write Failure e 1 D TSW Write Failure 1 For Dual Configuration START Check to see if fault occurs by extracting TSW circuit cards one by one Check to see if fault occurs by extracting MUX circuit cards one by one NDA 24300 ATTENTION Contents Static Sensitive Handling Precautions Required Replace the TSW circuit card referring to Section 2 3 2 TSW Card Replacement Procedure in Chapter 4 Place the TSW circuit card into ACT mode by flipping the MBR key on the active GT PH GTO9 card Refer to Section 12 1 6 Manual System Changeover of Speech Path System in Chapter 6 Check to see if a station to station connection can be set up and identify a TSW circuit card responsible for the fault Perform the above check by extracting the TSW circuit cards individually Replace the MUX circuit card referring to Section 3 3 2 MUX Card Replacement Procedure in Chapter 4 Place the MUX circuit card into ACT mode by flipping the MBR key on the active GT 9 card Refer to Section 12 1 6 Manual System Changeover of Speech Path System in Chapter 6 CHAPTER 5 Page 349 Issue 1 FAULT REPAIR PROCEDURES When the PLO PH CK16 17 16 A 17 A circuit card is mounted for digital interface replace PLO circuit card with a spare and check Set the faulty speech path system to STBY side by flipping the MBR key on the active GT 9 card Refer to Section 12 1 6 Manual Syst
175. C Service Feature Class 0 15 NDA 24300 CHAPTER 8 Page 563 Issue 1 DTELN Display of Telephone Number Data for NDM DTELN Display of Telephone Number Data for NDM 1 Functional Outline This command is used to display the registered station data corresponding to specified User Group Number UGN and Telephone Number TELN The following data related to Number Group can be displayed by clicking the selection button for each data This command can be used only when logging in to Network Control Node NCN e ACPGN Call Pickup Group NDM e ACPEN Call Pickup Expand Group NDM ASHUN Station Hunting Group UCD NDM ASHCN Station Hunting Group Circular NDM AHLSN Hot Line Station NDM ASHPN Station Hunting Group Pilot NDM AKYD Key Data for 2 Parameters Input Data UGN User Group Number TELN Telephone Number Display Data FPC Fusion Point Code 1 253 TN Tenant Number STN Station Number LENS Line Equipment Number 6 digits MG Module Group Number UNIT Unit Number G Group Number LV Level Number TEC Telephone Class 1 31 RSC Route Restriction Class 0 15 SFC Service Feature Restriction Class 0 15 CHAPTER 8 NDA 24300 Page 564 Issue 1 DTELN Display of Telephone Number Data for NDM Selection Button CPGN Call Pickup Group NDM CPEN Call Pickup Expand Group NDM SHUN Station Hunting Group UCD NDM SHCN Station Hunting Group Circular NDM HLSN Hot Line Station ND
176. CPR Note The cooling fan is located in the backbone of CPR and the cable connector lies in its right side Refer to Figure 4 26 Connector for Cooling FAN Cable Cooling FAN Figure 4 26 Rear View of CPR STEPS Loosen the two screws fastening the box that contains the fan inside Slightly lift the box and remove it from the CPR Refer to Figure 4 26 and Figure 4 27 STEP9 off the four screws and remove the cooling fan from the CPR Refer to Figure 4 27 STEP 10 Fasten the new cooling fan and CPR with screws Then connect the fan cable again to con nector Refer to Figure 4 26 and Figure 4 27 CHAPTER 4 NDA 24300 Page 302 Issue 1 STEP 11 STEP 12 STEP 13 STEP 14 STEP 15 STEP 16 STEP 7 UNIT CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE Insert the CPR back into the LPM Fasten the CPR and LPM with the four screws Connect the disconnected power bus and ether cables to the relevant connectors Turn ON the SW key on the PZ PW92 Connect the disconnected power alarm cable to the PALM connector on PZ PW92 Analyze the indicated system message The message displayed when the PWR SW on the PZ PW92 was turned OFF Clear the indicated ALM and confirm that the ALM lamp is not lit again indicating that the cooling fan is replaced securely e RAO NN AAA Figure 4 27 How to Remove the Cooling FAN NDA 24300 CHAPTER 4 Page 303 Issue 1 UNIT CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE
177. Changeover of Speech Path System NDA 24300 CHAPTER 6 Page 461 Issue 1 SYSTEM OPERATIONS IMGO IMG1 IMG2 IMG3 TSW I O BUS ISAGT PZ GT13 LANI PZ PC19 GT PH GT09 TSW PH SW12 MUX PH PC36 DLKC PH PC20 PLO PH CK16 17 EMA PH PC40 1024 Note The connection between ISAGT and is somewhat unique in this system As shown though an external cable is physically connected between ISAGT 0 and GT 1 the actual control signal is sent received only between ISAGT 0 and GT 0 This is because GT 0 and GT I have a multiple con nection on the backboard side Figure 6 42 System Block Diagram Switching Network Between CPU and GT CHAPTER 6 NDA 24300 Page 462 Issue 1 SYSTEM OPERATIONS 12 1 3 Manual System Changeover of CPU To change over the CPU system the CMOD command is normally used However if the command cannot be used for some reason use the key operations listed below Note For system changeover via the command see Chapter 8 MATINN eg key operations may result in a system down Operate the related keys applying extreme care STEP Determine which CPU 15 active 1 Check the lamp indications Refer to Figure 6 43 and Table 6 8 DSP Front View MBR CPUOPE IMGO MBR IMGO 1 1 IMG2 IMG3 D IMG1 IMG IMG3 xk XE Oe STATUS gt Figure 6 43 CPU in ACT STBY Mode The CPU changeover also aff
178. Chapter 5 Section 6 2 and Section 6 3 for the repair procedure CHAPTER 3 NDA 24300 Page 52 Issue 1 Both TSW Failure Permanent SYSTEM MESSAGES Default Alarm Default Grade Grade Modified Lamp Modified MN 3 This message displays when link information cannot be written into the switch memory of the TSW in both systems 0 3 1 XXXX XXXX 2 0000 0000 0000 0000 3 0000 0000 0000 0000 X 4 0000 0000 0000 0000 5 0000 0000 0000 0000 6 0000 0000 0000 0000 0009 0000 D000 0000 85 0000 0000 0000 0000 95 0000 0000 UUUDU 0000 D TSW system in which a fault is 0 12 TSW No 0 TSW No 1 detected b7 Tt 2 Status at the time of fault detection b0 0 1 TSW No 0 system TSW No 1 system 57 b6 bO b6 Speech Path in ACT status 0 1 No 0 system No 1 system 3 Data Analyzed by NEC Engineers Reference See Chapter 5 Section 5 3 for the repair procedure NDA 24300 CHAPTER 3 Page 53 Issue 1 SYSTEM MESSAGES TSW Failure Permanent Default Alarm Default Grade Grade Modified Lamp Modified MN 3 This message displays when link information cannot be written into the switch memory of the TSW card in one of the dual systems 1 XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX 2 0000 0000 0000 0000 3 0000 0000 0000 0000 aun 0 4 0000 0000 0000 0000 5 0000 0000 0000 0000 6 0000 0000 0000 0000 0009 0000 D000 0000 85 0000 00
179. Click to get information on the lockout status Exit Click to exit this command CHAPTER 8 NDA 24300 Page 558 Issue 1 DLTEL Display of Telephone Number from LENS for LDM DLTEL Display of Telephone Number from LENS for LDM 1 Functional Outline This command available at each Local Node LN is used to display the Telephone Number or other station data by designating a specific LEN 2 Parameters Input Data LENS Line Equipment Number 6 digits Display Data UGN User Group Number TELN Telephone Number Max 16 digits TN Tenant Number STN Station Number Max 6 digits TEC Telephone Equipment Class 1 31 RSC Route Restriction Class 0 15 SFC Service Feature Class 0 15 NDA 24300 CHAPTER 8 Page 559 Issue 1 DNTEL Display of Telephone Number from LENS for NDM DNTEL Display of Telephone Number from LENS for 1 Functional Outline This command available at Network Control Node NCN only is used to display the Telephone Number or other station data by designating a specific FPC and LEN 2 Parameters Input Data FPC Fusion Point Code 1 253 LENS Line Equipment Number 6 digits Display Data UGN User Group Number TELN Telephone Number Max 16 digits NID Network ID Note TN Tenant Number STN Station Number Max 6 digits TEC Telephone Equipment Number 1 31 RSC Route Restriction Class 0 15 SFC Service Feature Class 0 15 Note Network ID NID is allocated automatically when th
180. D CONTROL oe ee EK a KR Oa x 396 B S s eae He a ee ee Ge 3E MER d dap diae d 400 LINE MANAGEMENT 22443493 6644005666860 5955 09 904008000004 401 6 1 Make Busy Make Busy Cancel of Station and Data 401 6 2 Class Change and Number Change of Station and Data 402 6 3 Make Busy Make Busy Cancel of Line Tie Line 402 6 4 Line Management 403 7 STATION MESSAGE DETAIL RECORDING SYSTEM SMDHR 403 7 1 Transmission Data to SMDR 404 7 2 Details on Transmission Data 409 7 2 4 Calling Party Information Called Party 1 409 7 2 2 Call Start Call End Time 410 3 RETE eed ees 411 7 2 4 Account Code Authorization Code 412 7 25 Route Advance 413 7 2 6 Condition B Informati n a xa doo RE xA 413 TABLE OF CONTENTS NDA 24300 P
181. E 8l mS ISSUE 1 ISSUE 2 ISSUE 3 ISSUE 4 owe 2000 oare ______ oe _ oe owe NEAX2400 IPX oystem Operations and Maintenance Manual Revision Sheet 3 9 NDA 24300 ISSUE No ISSUE No _ esse a 214 252 8l ee ISSUE 1 ISSUE 2 ISSUE 3 ISSUE 4 2000 oae ______ ______ ______ ________ _______ 2400 IPX system Operations and Maintenance Manual Revision Sheet 4 9 NDA 24300 ISSUE No ISSUE No _ 290 328 8l 291 ISSUE 1 ISSUE 2 ISSUE 3 ISSUE 4 2000 oae ______ oe ________ _______ 2400 IPX system Operations and Maintenance Manual Revision Sheet 5 9 NDA 24300 ISSUE No ISSUE No _ 366 wo mE 11111 ISSUE 1 ISSUE 2 ISSUE 3 ISSUE 4 2000 oare ______ oe ________ _______ 2400 IPX system Operations and Maintenance Manual Revision Sheet 6
182. ES 367 Table 5 11 LUIS gt d 383 Table 5 12 GON Line be gaya sucess 386 Table 6 1 Description of Alarm Indications on TOPU 392 Table 6 2 Message Judgment 400 Table 6 3 uod eke he eg 405 6 4 Centralized Billing Fusion Kinds of Data 415 Table 6 5 Traffic Measurement Types 425 Table 6 6 Designated Connection Test Station Operations 439 Table 6 7 TOME d edo E1S a senda PRI 445 Table 6 8 Changeover of fe 461 Table 6 9 Changeover of Switching Block 466 Table 6 10 System Initialization by Turning On Power Supply Procedure 475 Table 6 11 System Initialization Procedure Types 476 Table 6 12 System Initialization Without Loading Procedure 1 479 Table 6 13 system Initialization With Office Data Loading From HD Procedure 2 480 Table 6 14 system Initialization with Program Loading From HD Procedure 43 481 Table 6 15 System Initialization With Of
183. FAULT REPAIR INFORMATION 3 1 Precaution about Diagnostic Procedure Fault Repair Procedure When performing diagnostic procedures fault repair procedures always adhere to the following actions 1 When replacing a circuit card with a spare handle the circuit card using the Field Service Kit a To protect the circuit card from static electricity wear a wrist strap before handling the circuit card b Before extracting the circuit card from its mounting slot set its MB switch to the UP side ON 2 When holding a circuit card by hand wear gloves and be careful not to touch mounted parts gold plated terminal etc on the circuit card The 3M9 Model 8012 Portable Field Service Kit shown in Figure 2 19 is recommended as an effective countermeasure against static electricity CHAPTER 2 NDA 24300 Page 26 Issue 1 SYSTEM MAINTENANCE OUTLINE Connect ground wire to the Earth terminal of the Module Group E n B j al 1 a ie oll fr 1 k 1 1 1 li 3 ij 4 A N HX Vw AS UN Place the Circuit Card ona conductive sheet Wrist Strap Note 3M isa registered trademark of Minnesota Mining and Manufacturing Inc Gold Plated Terminal gi a pun 1000090 Circuit Card Note VP 7 Plastic Bag Note Do not touch the G
184. FF TSW ACT TSW cards OPE MB DLKC card END MUX ACT MUX cards Refer to Figure 4 16 and Figure 4 17 Note The changeover of speech path system be performed also by using the command For details refer to Chapter 8 Maintenance Commands CHAPTER 4 NDA 24300 Page 278 Issue 1 UNIT CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE 2 3 4 PLO Card Replacement Procedure The PLO PH CK16 17 16 A 17 A card is located in Slot No 21 or 23 within the TSWM Used to gether with a different direct digital interface circuit card the card s main function is to set up the clock synchronization on the network In addition the MUSIC ROM supplies the hold tone to each station line via the TSW circuit card Use the procedures below to replace the PLO card with a spare Note The ACT STBY of PLO can be changed over via a single MB key operation on the circuit card Though its circuit is controlled by the GT 9 card via TSW I O bus the switching system of PLO is not affected by the speech path system changeover differing from other echelons such as TSW MUX DLKC Refer to Section 12 System Control Procedures in Chapter 6 Replacement Procedure ATTENTION Contents Static Sensitive andling Precautions Required On the PLO PH CK16 17 16 A 17 A card to be PLO system is changed over from replaced set the MB key UP ACT to STBY mode Y OPE lamp on the PLO card goes OFF Check the mate PLO card s
185. Figure 2 13 shows an outline of fault detection and Figure 2 14 shows a block diagram of fault detection Fault Occurrence Information Indication Collection and Diagnosis Example of Faults L CLCLCLU UVgAnU AY C CLUOCVCC OC gGAGU UC IM pamm _ Fault of line trunk card Display of System Messages TSW write failure Fault of clocks etc Indication Of Alarm Lamps I B onTOPU UOP Abnormal temperature power supply failure fuse blowing etc within the equipment frame Figure 2 13 Fault Detection General Diagram NDA 24300 CHAPTER 2 Page 15 Issue 1 SYSTEM MAINTENANCE OUTLINE Alarm Lamps on TOPU Symbols Thermal Reed Relay Circuit Card gt Main faults to be detected Speech path Firmware Fault Flow of fault information LC TRK C level monitor lt gt Howler To MAT Ringing Printer etc Circuit Fault Fa Power Fuse blown fault Note Blown Temperature CPU fault Speech Path System fault SPE RGU Howler fault PFT fault CPU Clock fault Central Processing Unit DLKC Data Link Controller Emergency Alarm Controller Speech Path Control Interface EMA Pes _ Figure 2 14 Fault Detection Block Diagram CHAPTER 2 NDA 24300 Page 16 Issue 1 SYSTEM MAINTENANCE OUTLINE a Main Faults Faults that may occur in the system can be generally categorized into Processor System Fault Speech Path System F
186. G odd numbered MG LL NDA 24300 CHAPTER 3 Page 77 Issue 1 SYSTEM MESSAGES Both TSW Ready Failure Default Alarm Default Grade Grade Modified Lamp Modified MN 3 This message displays when a Ready Failure occurs in both systems as a result of the TSW card having a failure or the card is not mounted properly 1 XX00 0000 0000 0000 2 0000 0000 0000 0000 3 0000 0000 0000 0000 y7 4 0000 0000 0000 0000 5 0000 0000 0000 0000 6 0000 0000 0000 0000 0009 0000 D000 0000 9t 0000 0000 0000 0000 95 0000 0000 UUUDU 0000 D Unit and MG number of fault bO 0 1 TSW No 0 system TSW No 1 system detection b7 bO Note When Ready Failure occurs in both systems the 4 C message is separately issued twice 0 displays in one i 11111 message and 1 in the other message Reference See Chapter 5 Section 5 3 for the repair procedure CHAPTER 3 NDA 24300 Page 78 Issue 1 SYSTEM MESSAGES TSW Ready Failure Default Alarm Default Grade Grade Modified Lamp Modified MN 3 This message displays when a Ready Failure occurs in one of the dual systems because the TSW card fails or the card is not mounted properly 1 XX00 0000 0000 0000 2 0000 0000 0000 0000 3 0000 0000 0000 0000 y7 4 0000 0000 0000 0000 5 0000 0000 0000 0000 6 0000 0000 0000 0000 0009 0000 D000 0000 85 0000 0000 0000 0000 95 0000 0000 UUUDU 0000 D Unit and MG number of fault b
187. H PC36 MUX 2 PH PC36 MUX TSWO2 ______ __ 6 9 PH PC36 MUX 9 TSWO STSWO ___ J zEGOGM 2 GTO J 8 J B DKCi O J KCO 5 1 MISC 8S MISC __ _____ S Js S MISC 5 s PWR1 S Prt 5 PWRSW1 PWRO PWRO SI PWREWO PIM 1 PIM O TSWM BASEU Front View GT PH GT09 TSW PH SW12 DLKC 20 PLO PH CK16 17 16 A 17 A Note circuit card is mounted in Slot 02 of TSWM Instead on the backboard of this slot a PWRSW PH PW14 terminal resistor with a total of two in a dual system is fastened 4 Face Layout of IMG1 Figure 2 CHAPTER 2 NDA 24300 Page 7 Issue 1 SYSTEM MAINTENANCE OUTLINE Figure 2 5 shows the face layout of IMG 2 3 IMG2 3 TOPU PH PC36 M E PH PC36 M z PH PC36 M H PH PC36 M PH PC36 PH PC36 MEX H PH PC36 M PH PC36 DUMMY BASEU Front View Figure 2 5 Face Layout of IMG2 3 NDA 24300 CHAPTER 2 Page 8 Issue 1 SYSTEM MAINTENANCE OUTLINE 2 2 Line Equipment Numbers LENS The Line Equipment Numbers LENS are used to specify the location of a circuit trunk port in any of the PIM universal slots Refer to the figures this section and confirm the LENS format used in the system As shown in Figure 2 6 the LENs consists of six digits two digits for MG one digit for
188. HDD and for 592 Pee a band 593 Make Busy of Connection Trunk for 594 ee oa oe bee gt ESTE ne tee pets 595 Make Busy of Port Microprocessor 596 BUSV Of ROUTO ODED HERS ES Ee a 597 Make Busy of System Message 598 Make BIB Sr sse ke 599 Make Busy of Station Telephone Number 600 Make Busy of 5 601 BUSY OI TUNG bee pice ke 602 Data Control Between Memory HDD 603 Data Control Between Memory and HDD for 604 Mako tc cae Cr 605 For MIPTOBIDOOSSOL ce ird acp eh ee ded HO dt dr dor ace or ard doa deed eap d ee 606 cB els hea oa or eed oe CT E E eee esas aes 607 Release Alarm for 608 Slalom TUNK eire os eee rd nese retas gute eds Senses 609 Release of Station Trunk Telephone Number 610 tet ooo E 3 309494 2213 eka gt 612 eng 6I POI
189. HDD for 1 Functional Outline This command available at the NCN only is used to save verify a series of Office Data from the Memory of all Local Nodes to the HDD of each same node Parameters Input data Direction Select Data Type Selection LP Select Auto Verify Afterward MEM to HDD Verify HDD against MEM Data Memory Note 1 Name Display Wireless Call Forwarding Call Forwarding Speed Calling User Assign Soft Key Number Sharing Note 2 Call Block The parameter is valid when Call Forwarding Speed Calling User Assign Soft Key Number Sharing or Call Block data is designated Note 1 When Data Memory is selected Network Data Memory NDM and Local Data Memory LDM are also saved verified simultaneously Note 2 By saving the Number Sharing data the data concerning Dual Station Calling Over FCCS is also saved verified automatically Display data Information Direction Data Type FPC of Node in which saving verifying is executed Result of the execution MEM to HDD Verify HDD against MEM Selected Data Type NDA 24300 CHAPTER 8 Page 609 Issue 1 MFCH Make Busy of FCCH MFCH Busy of 1 Functional Outline This command is used to set or reset the make busy state of the FCH card 2 Parameters Input Data FCHN FCH Number 1 255 MB Make Busy Information 0 1 Idle 1 Busy CHAPTER 8 NDA 24300 Page 610 Issue 1 PMBU Port Micropro
190. Hex 1 9 A B C 0 Actual Meaning 1 9 0 blank NDA 24300 CHAPTER 3 Page 221 Issue 1 SYSTEM MESSAGES When a call is originated from a trunk XXXX 2 XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX 3 3 XXXX XXXX XXXX 5 XXXX 0000 0000 0000 6 0000 0000 0000 0000 ee _ D 0000 0000 0000 0000 8 0000 0000 0000 0000 9 0000 0000 0000 0000 Information on Called Party Informer D Fusion Point Code FPC Hex Note b7 6 b5 b4 63 62 bl ___ 2 Tenant Hex Note b7 6 5 b4 63 62 bl ___ 3 Physical Station No Hex Note 57 b 25 64 b3 62 bl 111 11111 User Group No UGN Hex Note b7 6 65 b4 63 62 bl ____ Telephone Hex Note b7 6 b5 b4 63 62 bl CHAPTER 3 222 Issue 1 4 9 dc10 11 24300 SYSTEM MESSAGES Information on Malicious Call Kind of Call Hex Note 20H Call from a trunk b7 b6 65 63 62 bl bO 1 ii 2 Calling No of Trunk Call Caller ID Hex Note Note 1 4 3 b7 6 b5 b4 b3 b2 bl 46 dc __ 14 1 Note Each No Code is output in hexadecimal Detailed meanings are as follows Output Data Hex Actual Meaning n gt 0 0 gt blank Note 1 f the number of the trunk call Caller ID cannot be identified
191. LAST TWO DIGITS AS IN 98 FOR 1998 CHAPTER 6 NDA 24300 Page 410 Issue 1 SYSTEM OPERATIONS 7 2 3 Called Number The data which indicates the Called Number 18 as follows EXAMPLE 1st DIGIT 2nd DIGIT 3rd DIGIT 9 0471 83 0351 HAS BEEN DIALED Ath DIGIT 5th DIGIT 9 OG ACCESS CODE 12th DIGIT 30th DIGIT 32nd DIGIT NDA 24300 CHAPTER 6 Page 411 Issue 1 SYSTEM OPERATIONS 7 2 4 Account Code Authorization Code The data which indicates the Account Code 15 as follows EXAMPLE 1st DIGIT 2nd DIGIT 3rd DIGIT ACCOUNT CODE 1115 HAS BEEN DIALED 4th DIGIT 5th DIGIT 9th DIGIT 10th DIGIT Note An Account Code is a numerical code to be dialed up to 10 digits by a station user with the capa bility to enter a cost accounting The data which indicates the Authorization Code 15 as follows EXAMPLE 1st DIGIT 2nd DIGIT 3rd DIGIT AUTHORIZATION CODE 4001 HAS BEEN DIALED Ath DIGIT 5th DIGIT 9th DIGIT 10th DIGIT Note An Authorization Code is a numerical code to be dialed up to 10 digits by station users which will override the station s class RSC or SFC for facilities access restriction CHAPTER 6 NDA 24300 Page 412 Issue 1 SYSTEM OPERATIONS 7 2 5 Route Advance Information When a call has been originated by route advancing the following data is transmitted EXAMPLE 1st DIGIT 2nd DIGIT NUMBER 1 THE CALL ORIGINATES VIA NO 3 ROUTE BECAUSE NO 30 ROUTE
192. LECT1 A lei SELECT2 AC ATTENTION Contents Static Sensitive Handling Precautions Required ISAGT PZ GT13 gt gt For the forced system changeover set the CPU SEL switch from middle to Up or Down Note this operation also leads to system initialization 1 UP The CPU 1 is placed into the ACT side 2 MIDDLE Normal setting for dual CPU configuration 3 DOWN The CPU O0 is placed into the ACT side This setting is mandatory for single CPU system CPU SEL CPU SEL Key Figure 6 47 Forced CPU Changeover NDA 24300 CHAPTER 6 Page 465 Issue 1 SYSTEM OPERATIONS 12 1 5 How to Control Switching Block The Switching Block denoted here includes the following system equipment ATTENTION TSW PH SW 12 Contents Static Sensitive Required e PH PC36 DLKC PH PC20 PLO PH CK16 17 16 A 17 A Perform the required system changeover by using the CMOD command or by operating the relevant key on the GT PLO card Refer to Table 6 9 Table 6 9 Changeover of Switching Block O Speech Path Changeover by the Use CMOD command All OPE or ACT lamps on the CMOD command Speech Path System which were f
193. Layout of PIM FANU LOCOTO ___ ____ _ Preparation for FANU Replacement Fans on How to Replace Fans on Preparation for FANU Replacement Fans in Fan How to Replace FANU Fans in Fan NDA 24300 Figure Figure 4 24 Figure 4 25 Figure 4 26 Figure 4 27 Figure 4 28 Figure 4 29 Figure 4 30 Figure 4 31 Figure 4 32 Figure 4 33 Figure 5 1 Figure 5 2 Figure 5 3 Figure 5 4 Figure 5 5 Figure 5 6 Figure 5 7 Figure 5 8 Figure 5 9 Figure 5 10 Figure 5 11 Figure 5 12 Figure 5 13 Figure 5 14 Figure 5 15 Figure 5 16 Figure 5 17 Figure 5 18 Figure 5 19 Figure 5 20 Figure 5 21 Figure 5 22 Figure 5 23 Figure 5 24 Figure 6 1 Figure 6 2 Figure 6 3 Figure 6 4 Figure 6 5 Figure 6 6 Figure 6 7 Figure 6 8 Figure 6 9 Figure 6 10 Figure 6 11 Figure 6 12 Figure 6 13 Figure 6 14 Figure 6 15 LIST OF FIGURES CONTINUED Title Page MERCI _ _ 301 Extraction of CPR from LPM 302 FN re TE eee D 4 302 How to Remove the Cooling FAN 303 Fuses ess o Pcr 304 Blown Fault Example 304 Fuse L
194. List Continued REMAMS eat Hop Consol wm wm NIA MdeBeyesenMee now Nake By FSi Tae we O Rae _ MN RN TK ok MasBeymwktee dee hs _ mmo Memon gD EN ADDN onl ewe Menon www RN xw NDA 24300 CHAPTER 8 Page 521 Issue 1 ALLC Assignment of Line Load Control ALLC Assignment of Line Load Control 1 Functional Outline This command is used to designate start and stop of line load control 2 Parameters Input data ALL ONE LP STATUS Operation Mode Selection O A Only One LP All LPs 2 is not valid for 1IMG system Local Partition LP Number Note The data is designated as 00 for 1IMG system Line Load Control Status 0 3 O Stop Line Load Control 1 Start Line Load Control 2 Automatic Line Load Control 1s in effect display only 3 Status of all LPs do not match
195. M SHPN Station Hunting Group Pilot NDM Key Data for NDA 24300 CHAPTER 8 Page 565 Issue 1 DTF101 Display of Terminal Traffic Data DTF101 Display of Terminal Traffic Data 1 Functional Outline This command displays the result of traffic measurement data for Type 1 Terminal Traffic assigned by the command 2 Parameters Traffic Data 1 Terminal Traffic DTF101 Route Traffic DTF102 Station Peg Count DTF103 Attendant Peg Count DTF104 Route Peg Count DTF105 Traffic Data 2 Service Peg Count DTF201 Traffic Data 3 UCD Route Peg Count DTF301 UCD Group Peg Count DTF302 UCD Station Peg Count DTF303 Traffic Data 5 Attendant Ans Peg Count DTF501 Traffic Data 6 Connection Route Peg Count DTF601 Connection Route Traffic DTF602 CHAPTER 8 NDA 24300 Page 566 Issue 1 DTF102 1 Display of Route Traffic Data Functional Outline DTF102 Display of Route Traffic Data This command displays the result of traffic measurement data for Type 2 Route Traffic assigned by the ATRF command Parameters Traffic Data 1 Traffic Data 2 Traffic Data 3 Traffic Data 5 Traffic Data 6 Terminal Traffic DTF101 Route Traffic DTF102 Station Peg Count DTF103 Attendant Peg Count DTF104 Route Peg Count DTF105 Service Peg Count DTF201 UCD Route Peg Count DTF301 UCD Group Peg Count DTF302 UCD Station Peg Count DTF303 Attendant Ans Peg Count DTF501 Connection Route Peg Count DTF6
196. MDF connect the faulty line to a normal trunk By a designated connection from the ATTCON DESKCON seize the trunk connected with the faulty line E When the connection is not set up After the trunk has been seized check the C O Tie Line 15 faulty to see if a call can be originated When the connection is set up Replace the with a spare END CHAPTER 5 NDA 24300 Page 326 Issue 1 FAULT REPAIR PROCEDURES Note When performing loop back connection tests on the trunks at the user s office provide cross connection as follows ATTENTION Contents Static Sensitive Handling Precautions Required 1 Fora COT Setupaloop back connection between the COT Trunk to be tested and station line e The trunk route must be assigned for Loop Start 2 Fora TLT for DID Set up a loop back connection between the Tie Line Trunk TLT to be tested and another TLT e Ifthe TLT is a Direct Inward Dialing DID Trunk connect the related leads as shown below T TLT R R Ifthe is a 4 wire amp M System connect related leads as shown below Receive E Receive TLT Send Send TLT Deest M M NDA 24300 CHAPTER 5 Page 327 Issue 1 FAULT REPAIR PROCEDURES 3 For ATTENTION Contents Static Sensitive Handling Precautions Required If the TLT is a2W E amp M System connect the related leads as shown below TLT TLT DTI
197. MG1 PH PW14 PWR SW i M b Front View Figure 4 31 Fuse Location Within TSWM CHAPTER 4 NDA 24300 Page 306 Issue 1 UNIT CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE Perform the procedure in Figure 4 32 to confirm the cause of the RGU fuse blown fault Visual check No pin contacting or backboard melting OPE Lamp green of each LC card remains lit Yes 1 Turn ON UP the MB key on the LC card Replace the blown fuse with anew 2 Remove the card from PIM one The fuse is blown again 3 Replace the fuse with a new one Yes The replaced fuse N Perform station to station Turn ON UP MB connections within the PIM ae keys on all LC cards Is any fuse blown Y and remove them from the E Perform station to station Yes PIM Only PWR cards are connections within the PIM No inside the PIM Turn ON UP the MB Is any fuse blown Fault of LC card that accompanied he f logs and remove them from the Fault of LC card the fuse blowing Replace the blown fuse PIM Only PWR cards are that was removed with a new one inside the PIM mar Fault in LC card that accompanied s n orn m The replaced fuse is the fuse blowing eeds further observation of the fault blown again Replace the blown fuse with a new one Yes No The replaced fuse is blown again Insert the removed cards Ye one by one into the PIM Replace the PWR card
198. MM n 9 Wem NDA 24300 CHAPTER 3 Page 181 Issue 1 SYSTEM MESSAGES Virtual Tie Line Set Report Default Alarm Default Grade Grade Modified Lamp Modified NON 3 This message displays when virtual tie line setup has completed IX 0000 9000 2 0000 8000 0000 4000 38 4000 8000 0000 0000 Sa a 4 0000 0000 0000 0000 5 0000 0000 0000 0000 6 0000 0000 0000 0000 T OOOO QUOO 20000 0000 0000 0000 10000 0000 Os 0000 0000 10000 Counter 00 b7 bO 01 2 Virtual Tie Line Call Header b0 b1 Unit No Accommodated Location b2 Module Group No b7 b2 bl 111 3 Virtual Tie Line Call Header b0 b2 Level Accommodated Location b3 b7 Group No b7 66 65 b4 63 b2 bl CHAPTER 3 NDA 24300 Page 182 Issue 1 SYSTEM MESSAGES Virtual Tie Line Cancel Report Default Alarm Default Grade Grade Modified Lamp Modified NON 3 This message displays when virtual tie line cancel has completed IX 0000 9000 2 0000 8000 0000 4000 38 4000 8000 0000 0000 Sa a 4 0000 0000 0000 0000 5 0000 0000 0000 0000 6 0000 0000 0000 0000 T 00900 DOO 20000 68 0000 70000 0000 OO00 0000 0000 DOOUD D Counter bO O I Re setup b7 bO 2 Virtual Tie Line Call Header b0 b1 Unit No
199. Memory error Parity alarm 111 b3 0 1 Emergency Timer Overflow Reference See Chapter 5 Section 6 2 and Section 6 3 for the repair procedure NDA 24300 CHAPTER 3 Page 51 Issue 1 SYSTEM MESSAGES Abnormal Interrupt Default Alarm Default Grade Grade Modified Lamp Modified SUP 2 This message displays when the system 15 interrupting abnormally in the processing 1 XXXX 2 3 ee DO O 4 4 4 4 b 6 lt D 4 4 4 7 XXXX XXXX XXXX 8 0009 0000 0000 94 0000 0009 0000 0000 4 4 b3 Initialization By DM Do bO b4 Data Copy restart for Dual CPU system only b7 ACT STBY active system indication after restart 2 Mate CPU Restart Information FF 0 1 Monitor Restart not mounted b3 0 1 Initialization b4 Data Copy restart for Dual CPU system only b7 b5 b4 b3 bO ps 0 1 control 11 L1 b7 0 1 ACT STBY active system indication after restart S Abnormal Interruption Hardware b7 b3 bO b3 Program Exception Data Analyzed by NEC Engineers Reference See
200. NDA 24300 CHAPTER 3 Page 203 Issue 1 SYSTEM MESSAGES CCH MBR Key Turn OFF Default Alarm Default Grade Grade Modified Lamp Modified NON 3 This message displays when the MBR switch on the CCH DCH card is turned OFF It 0000 0000 0000 24 0000 0000 0000 0000 35 0000 8000 0000 0000 EQ mi DO 4 0000 0000 0000 0000 5 0000 0000 0000 0000 6 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 QUOO 20000 30000 0000 0000 0000 09000 Os 0001 0000 D Location of CCH DCH card b0 b4 Group No b5 b6 Unit No 0 3 57 b6 65 b4 b3 62 bl b7 No 0 1 Even numbered MG Odd numbered MG 2 No b0 b1 No 0 3 b7 bl CHAPTER 3 NDA 24300 Page 204 Issue 1 SYSTEM MESSAGES CCH MB Key Turn ON Default Alarm Default Grade Grade Modified Lamp Modified NON 3 This message displays when the MB switch on the CCH DCH card is turned ON while extracting or inserting a circuit card or at PM initialization etc 1 XX00 0000 0000 0000 2 0000 0000 0000 0000 3 0000 0000 0000 0000 y7 4t 0000 99909 009009 0000 54 0009 80009 00090 0000 78009 0000 09090 0000 OOOO WOOO sos QODO WOOO OOOO OOOO Se OOOO WOOO D Location of CCH DCH card b0 b4 Group No b5 b6 Unit No 0 3 57 b6 65 b4 b3 b2 bl b7 No 0 1 Even numbered MG Od
201. NEC NDA 24300 ISSUE 1 STOCK 200787 NEAX 2400 IPX System Operations and Maintenance Manual OCTOBER 2000 NEC Amenca Inc LIABILITY DISCLAIMER NEC America Inc reserves the right to change the specifications functions or features at any time without notice NEC America Inc has prepared this document for use by its employees and customers The information contained herein is the property of NEC America Inc and shall not be reproduced without prior written approval from NEC America Inc NEAX and D are registered trademarks of NEC Corporation Copyright 2000 NEC America Inc Printed in U S A ISSUE No ISSUE No mni 15151 ni ESESESENESESESES eee EENEN eee EM eee 2 a 2000 ome ______ mME ______ NEAX2400 IPX system Operations and Maintenance Manual Revision Sheet 1 9 NDA 24300 ISSUE No ISSUE No _ ISSUE 1 ISSUE 2 ISSUE 3 ISSUE 4 2000 oae ______ oe ________ _______ 2400 IPX system Operations and Maintenance Manual Revision Sheet 2 9 NDA 24300 ISSUE No ISSUE No _ em enn ree reser enr 138
202. No STN No ATT CON No RT TK No 6 digits Account Code FPC 3 digits Account User Group Code Number Max 16 3 digits Called digits Party Information Telephone No Telephone Number Max 16 digits Condition B Information Note Logical Route No 3 digits Incoming Route Number Note For more information on the data to which the Note marks are attached see Reference Figure 6 18 Message Format for Incoming Call Fusion CHAPTER 6 NDA 24300 Page 418 Issue 1 Byte Data Logical RT No 1 FPC2 Physical RT No 2 Logical RT No 2 0 0 3 1 2 Dial Code Dial Code Max 32 digits Office Code of Calling Party of Billing Process Office Office Code 190 Office Code Information 205 210 215 220 230 235 240 245 250 255 Authoriza Byte Data Authorization tion Code Gode Max 16 digits Condition C Information Note Metering Automatic Number Indication Automatic Max 32 Number digits Indication Note SYSTEM OPERATIONS Byte Data Byte Data Byte Data 3 digits Called 1 Party Information Telephone No Calling Party Information Station No ORIG Note Condition B Information Note Tenant 3 digits w 3 digits STN No ATT CON No 6 digits 0 3 0 2 8 3 digits FPC 3 digits User Group Number 3 digits 20 Calling Party Information T
203. O 0 1 TSW No 0 system TSW No 1 system detection b7 ILIILLLI Reference See Chapter 5 Section 5 4 for the repair procedure NDA 24300 CHAPTER 3 Page 79 Issue 1 SYSTEM MESSAGES DLKC Ready Failure Default Alarm Default Grade Grade Modified Lamp Modified MN 3 This message displays when I O Ready Failure occurs on a DLKC card 14 9000 D000 0000 2 10000 0000 0000 0000 Se 160000 0000 0000 0000 CD 4 0000 0000 0000 0000 5 0000 0000 0000 0000 6 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 QUOO 20000 30000 0000 0000 0000 09000 Os 0001 0000 D Details on faulty DLKC card b0 0 1 No 0 system No 1 system b7 ACT STBY b7 3 NDA 24300 Page 80 Issue 1 Default Alarm MN SYSTEM MESSAGES MUX Ready Failure Default Grade Grade Modified Lamp Modified 3 This message displays when the MUX PH PC36 card has a Ready Failure in one of the dual systems When the card is not ready for service function because of the failure or because the card is not mounted properly the system creates this message 4 0000 0000 0000 0000 5 7 0000 0000 0000 0000 8 lt XXXX 0000 0000 0000 2 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 6 0000 0000 0000 0000 9 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 Unit and MG number for MUX card w
204. O WOOO OOOO e OOOO DOOU OUO OOOO S SUO HOO CHAPTER 3 NDA 24300 Page 90 Issue 1 SYSTEM MESSAGES Bad Call Notification Default Alarm Default Grade Grade Modified Lamp Modified SUP 2 This message displays to indicate the result of Bad Call Notification LE 21 RAKE o 0000 0009 0000 0000 T suum quan oO 0 96 OO 9 4t OOOO 0000 0000 90009 50000 00990 0000 cof 9000 80940 20000 Jr SDOOU 309000 20000 OOOO 39x JOO 0D 290900 QUO 97 10000 0000 0000 00 00 b5 Station number digit with fault 15 data 15 always indicated as b0 b3 Stati ber digit with the fault This data is al indicated 0 when T f ion is 2 ACD Trunk b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 bl b0 07 when 0 connection 15 2 ACD Trunk b4 b7 Type of connection 1 Trunk connection 2 ACD Trunk connection When type of connection is Station connection 2 Station number see table b7 66 65 b4 b3 62 bl 111 The called station number b0 b3 Number of digits for called station number b7 b3 62 bl 11 1 NDA 24300 CHAPTER 3 Page 91 Issue 1 SYSTEM MESSAGES Called station number See table b7 b 55 64 63 b2 bl 9 Time Slot Number of Link 1 Not used 1 Time Slot
205. Od Wd MH WOd Nd MH Wd 3l gt lt x gt lt x gt lt x gt lt x gt lt gt lt 3l gt lt 3l gt lt 3l gt lt 3l 3l gt lt x gt lt x gt lt gt lt gt lt 3l gt lt FN C2 T TSW I O BUS ISAGT PZ GT13 LANI PZ PC19 GT PH GT09 TSW PH SW12 MUX PH PC36 DLKC PH PC20 PLO PH CK16 17 16 A 17 A Figure 6 48 System Block Diagram Switching Network for Speech Path System CHAPTER 6 NDA 24300 Page 468 Issue 1 SYSTEM OPERATIONS STEP 1 Make sure the active Speech Path System 1 Check all the lamp indications in Figure 6 49 which are in the same switching block Legend SS LampisON Xf LampisON N TW PH SW12 N pike PH PC20 PH PC36 TSW Active DLKC Active MUX Active Figure 6 49 TSW DLKC MUX in ACT Mode Note Because this 4 IMG uses multiple TSW and MUX cards be sure to check all the circuit cards concerned which are in the same Switching Block For example if your system adopts the fully expanded system you must check a total of 4 TSW cards and a total of 16 MUX cards in this step 2 Make sure the STBY mode of mate Speech Path System Check all the lamp indications in Figure 6 50 which are in the same Switching Block Loe ACT STBY of Speech Path Syst
206. P of CPU 15 ON System Initial STATUS LED right on the DSP of CPU 1s ON Lr cc M CHAPTER 6 Page 492 Issue 1 NDA 24300 SYSTEM OPERATIONS Table 6 21 Start Up When Basic Application Software and Office Data Installed Procedure 2 Continued 7SEG LED OPE LAMP KEY PERON SETTINGS ATTENTION Contents Static Sensitive Handlin Precautions Required System starts up again CPU OPE lamp on the DSP of active CPU lights steady green IMGO 3 light steady green IMGO lamp on the DSP of mate CPU flashes green STATUS LED right on the DSP of CPU is ON ON LINE NDA 24300 CHAPTER 6 Page 493 Issue 1 This page is for your notes CHAPTER 6 NDA 24300 Page 494 Issue 1 CHAPTER ROUTINE MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE 1 GENERAL When a fault has occurred in the system for example when a fault has occurred to No circuit on the 161 card the stations connected to No 1 circuit become unserviceable When the 16LC card has been replaced with a spare to analyze the cause of the fault or to repair the fault other normal lines also become unserviceable As in this example even when the fault is restricted to a single component it very often harms the system operations as a whole Even if the system is operating normally it is necessary to perform a routine check to prevent a fault occurrence before it is too late to discover any latent cause of a fault This chapter categorizes the routine main
207. PR into the LPM c ATTENTION STEP 1 Using the Phillips Screwdriver remove the 4 8 screws Then detach the Static Sensitive Handlin front panel and top cover from the new CPR Refer to Figure 4 4 Precautions Required As shown in Figure 4 4 detach the front panel of the new CPR by removing the 4 screws Then also lift away the top cover by removing the 8 screws Top Cover Figure 4 4 Removal of Front Panel and Top Cover from CPR CHAPTER 4 NDA 24300 Page 244 Issue 1 UNIT CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE STEP 2 Insert the ISAGT PZ GT13 and LANI PZ PC19 cards into the following slots of the new CPR refer to Figure 4 5 ISAGT PZ GT13 Slot 6 ISA ATTENTION LANI PZ PC19 Slot 0 PCI For Fusion Link a cenae Precautions Required PZ PC19 Slot 1 PCD When connecting MAT via 10 BASE T and PCI buses PZ PC19 Slot 3 PCD When LANI for Fusion Link is in dual configuration Note Figure 4 5 shows how to insert the ISAGT and LANI cards into CPR slots 6 ISA and 0 1 and 3 PCI respectively ISAGT Slot 6 ISA Slot 3 Slot 1 PCI Slot 0 PCI Note Accommodation of the second LANI in PCI Slot 3 is optional Figure 4 5 Insertion of ISAGT and LANI Cards NDA 24300 CHAPTER 4 Page 245 Issue 1 UNIT CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE STEP3 Reattach the top cover and front panel by fastening the removed screws Refer t
208. PU as follows PROGRAM KEY NON LOAD T id d e SYSTEM DATA KEY LOAD e LOAD MM LOAD Press INITIAL START button on the TOPU indio CPU OPE and IMGX lamps on both DSP go OFF HD Initial STATUS LED right on the DSP of CPU is ON H DM Load STATUS LED right on the DSP of CPU is ON H System Initial STATUS LED right on the DSP of CPU is ON System starts up again CPU OPE lamp on the DSP of active CPU lights steady green IMGO 3 lamps flash lamp on the DSP of mate CPU flashes green STATUS LED right on N the DSP of CPU is ON ON LINE NDA 24300 CHAPTER 6 Page 491 Issue 1 SYSTEM OPERATIONS Table 6 21 Start Up When Basic Application Software and Office Data Installed Procedure 2 7SEG LED OPE LAMP KEY SETTINGS When Power is OFF START Set the SENSE switch at 2 DM Load Restart on the DSP of CPU 0 Turn ON the SW on the PZ PW92 of CPU 0 When Power is ON and OFF LINE START Set the SENSE switch at 2 DM Load Restart on the DSP of active CPU Press the CPU RST button on the DSP of active CPU ATTENTION Contents Static Sensitive Handlin Precautions Required or Turn OFF the SW on the PZ PW92 of active CPU and turn it ON again HD Initial STATUS LED right on the DSP of CPU 15 ON Program Load STATUS LED right on the DSP of CPU 1s ON Office Data Load STATUS LED right on the DS
209. Page 575 Issue 1 DTF601 Display of Connection Route Peg Count Data DTF601 Display of Connection Route Peg Count Data 1 Functional Outline This command displays the result of traffic measurement data for Type 18 Connection Route Peg Count assigned by the ATRF command 2 Parameters Traffic Data 1 Terminal Traffic DTF101 Route Traffic DTF102 Station Peg Count DTF103 Attendant Peg Count DTF104 Route Peg Count DTF105 Traffic Data 2 Service Peg Count DTF201 Traffic Data 3 UCD Route Peg Count DTF301 UCD Group Peg Count DTF302 UCD Station Peg Count DTF303 Traffic Data 5 Attendant Ans Peg Count DTF501 Traffic Data 6 Connection Route Peg Count DTF601 Connection Route Traffic DTF602 CHAPTER 8 NDA 24300 Page 576 Issue 1 DTF602 1 DTF602 Display of Connection Route Traffic Data Display of Connection Route Traffic Data Functional Outline This command displays the result of traffic measurement data for Type 19 Connection Route Traffic assigned by the ATRF command Parameters Traffic Data 1 Traffic Data 2 Traffic Data 3 Traffic Data 5 Traffic Data 6 Terminal Traffic DTF101 Route Traffic DTF102 Station Peg Count DTF103 Attendant Peg Count DTF104 Route Peg Count DTF105 Service Peg Count DTF201 UCD Route Peg Count DTF301 UCD Group Peg Count DTF302 UCD Station Peg Count DTF303 Attendant Ans Peg Count DTF501 Connection Route Peg Count DTF601 Connection Route Traffic DTF602
210. Page 588 Issue 1 DTF602N Display of Connection Route Traffic Data for Fusion Network 1 Functional Outline DTF602N Display of Connection Route Traffic Data for Fusion Network This command is used for displaying the result of traffic measurement data for 19 Connection Route Traffic assigned by the ATRFN command Parameters Traffic Data 1 Traffic Data 2 Traffic Data 3 Traffic Data 5 Traffic Data 6 Terminal Traffic DTFIOIN Route Traffic DTF102N Station Peg Count DTF103N Attendant Peg Count DTF104N Route Peg Count DTF105N Service Peg Count DTF201N UCD Route Peg Count DTF301N UCD Group Peg Count DTF302N UCD Station Peg Count DTF303N Attendant Ans Peg Count DTF501N Connection Route Peg Count DTF601N Connection Route Traffic DTF602N NDA 24300 CHAPTER 8 Page 589 Issue 1 FLINST File Install FLINST File Install 1 Functional Outline This command is used to install the DPSW dedicated database files to your MAT This command 15 necessary to provide each circuit card s various information such as circuit card name equipped switch names etc when your system uses the DPSW DPKG command Issue 1 2 Parameters Input Data None Buttons Copy Click to start the data file install Exit Click to exit this command Data Install Procedure 1 Start up the FLINST command from the Start menu 2 Initial Display of the FLINST command appears Make sure the proper FD drive name
211. R 1 3 2 EMA Card Replacement Procedure The PH PC40 card is mounted in Slot No 04 of the LPM The main func tions of the card are as follows ATTENTION Contents __ nc sensitive Designation of ACT STBY status of the CPU and forced changeover of sys Precautions Required tem e Shutoff of the system s power supply and detection of rising temperature within the system e Music source for Music On Hold for 1 IMG system only e Control of the NCU 53 card CHAPTER 4 NDA 24300 Page 258 Issue 1 UNIT CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE Before replacing the EMA card check the CPU 0 s ACT mode Attempting to replace the card when the CPU 15 active will result in the system being initialized Replacement Procedure Check the CPU OPE lamp of DSP CPU is Active 1 When the lamp is steady green perform the system changeover NO YES Turn ON the MBR key on the DSP 1 System Changeover of CPU 1 ACT 5 Turn ON the MB key on the EMA PH PC40 card OPE MB lamp on the card lights red from green Y When NCU 53 cards are Extract the EMA card from the LPM mounted Power Failure Transfer PFT is activated NDA 24300 CHAPTER 4 Page 259 Issue 1 UNIT CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE ATTENTION Contents __ Static Sensitive Handling Precautions Required Set the keys on the new card by referring to the card being replaced
212. R This data is valid only when INTERVAL 0 OUTPUT MINUTE This data is valid only when INTERVAL 0 START RT Start External Route Number available when TYPE 2 5 8 is selected END RT End External Route Number available when TYPE 2 5 8 is selected START C_RT Start Connection Route Number available when TYPE 18 19 15 selected END C_RT End Connection Route Number available when TYPE 18 19 is selected Note 1 The selected traffic measurement data except for TYPE 1 Terminal Traffic is collected with the whole network systems as a single unit Note 2 When time difference exists between the nodes confirm that the related time difference data based on the UCT Universal Coordinated Time standard has been assigned at each node via the ATDF command Note 3 Assign the traffic measurement time period between START HOUR MINUTE and END HOUR MINUTE longer than an hour Also if the measurement should be executed throughout a day assign the same data in both START HOUR MINUTE and END HOUR MINUTE parameters Note 4 f the data for this command is once assigned the node level data by the ATRF command is not cleared but loses its validity the network level data takes precedence NDA 24300 CHAPTER 8 Page 525 Issue 1 BOSD Back Up One Touch Speed Call Memory Data BOSD Back Up One Touch Speed Call Memory Data 1 Functional Outline Save Function e Saves the data residing in the One Touch Speed Call Memory of DLC ELC card onto a flo
213. R 3 Page 61 Issue 1 SYSTEM MESSAGES Scan Data 1 Status of PLO card Clock status at time of detection 0 1 STBY ACT bl Circuit card at time of detection b7 66 55 64 63 b2 bl LLLI 0 1 PLO synchronizing PLO self running or drifting b2 Input clock down b3 b4 Route of Input clock DCS Input Route Route Of Input Clock b5 PLO input all down b6 PLO output down b7 Drifting Scan Data Status of PLO card 5 Burst Clock down bl Frame Synchronization from SYNC card is down b7 b4 bl b4 0 1 Internal OSC clock down _ LIT 1 CHAPTER 3 NDA 24300 Page 62 Issue 1 Default Alarm SYSTEM MESSAGES Module Group Down Failure Default Grade Grade Modified Lamp Modified 3 This message displays when a fault of the speech path system has occurred in a specific Module Group The specific Module Group is placed into make busy state 1 XXXX XX00 0000 0000 2 0000 0000 0000 0000 3 0000 0000 0000 0000 yoy 00 4 0000 0000 0000 0000 5 0000 0009 0000 0000 6 0000 0000 It 0000 D000 0000 0000 ot 6000 DODO 0000 90090 9 00009 0000 OQUO 5000 D MG number of fault detection 0 1 Even numbered MG Odd numbered MG b7 bO Kind of failure b0 b7 00H 01H ACT side TSW fault b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 bl 3 Speech Path Clock System 0 side speech pat
214. R supply Alarm lamp goes out Alarm lamp illuminates again END FAULT REPAIR PROCEDURES FAULT SUPERVISION Set the MB switch on the PWR supply UP Turn circuit breaker OFF Set MB switch on all the circuit cards except PWR supply Extract all circuit cards from their mounting Turn circuit breaker ON Set the MB switch to DOWN side Check to see if the alarm lamp illuminates If the alarm lamp illuminates replace the PWR supply with a spare If the alarm lamp does illuminate insert the circuit cards into their mounting slot individually to see if the alarm lamp illuminates Note nsert each PWR supply with its MB switch to UP side and then set it back to DOWN side NDA 24300 CHAPTER 5 Page 373 Issue 1 FAULT REPAIR PROCEDURES 9 FAN UNIT FAULT This section explains the fault repair procedure where a fan in the Fan Unit FANU does not operate 9 1 1 2 Check Point When repairing a FANU fault exercise care about the following conditions The fans a total of 3 are activated by operating the PWR SW key located on the PZ M369 The conditions for starting the fan are as follows With PWR SW key for the fan set to ON position Always operating e With PWR SW key for the fan set to AUTO position Starts operating if the in frame tempera ture is higher than 40 C 104 stops op erating at temperatures lower than 32 C 90 F See Figure 5 19 When replacing the FANU wit
215. RONT VIEW Xin When FANU is mounted on TOPU When FANU is mounted in FAN BOX Figure 4 19 FANU Locations Replacement Procedure FANU on TOPU When the FANU is mounted on the TOPU perform the following replacement procedure STEP 1 Using a Phillips screwdriver remove the four screws Lift away top cover STEP 2 Turn OFF the PWR SW on PZ M369 Refer to Figure 4 20 STEP 3 Remove the fan fuse 5A on the PZ M369 STEP 4 Remove the fan cables from the fan connector and connector s corresponding to the fan to be replaced for example when replacing FAN 0 disconnect the FCO connector together with the fan connector CHAPTER 4 NDA 24300 Page 296 Issue 1 UNIT CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE ATTENTION 1 Turn PWR SW OFF PZ M369 b EX 12 15 1 1 4 TALMO TALM1 N 3 Disconnect the cable s and the connector s here used for the FAN to be replaced 3 Disconnect the FAN cable 2 Remove this FAN fuse from this power connector Figure 4 20 Preparation forFANU Replacement Fans on TOPU STEP 5 Remove the four screws fastening the fan to be replaced Refer to Figure 4 21 Note The removed screws are used in STEP 7 again Do not dispose of them when unscrewing the fan here STEP 6 Remove the unscrewed fan from the FANU STEP 7 Fasten the new fan with the removed screws STEP 8 Connect
216. S Cancelling Press LOOP key Dial the access code for cancelling Line Load Control e Lamp Figure 6 8 on control SST panel lights e System message 6 D displays Press CANCEL key Figure 6 7 Line Load Control Operations on ATTCON Cancelling OOCL OOCL Ooga LACAL LAMP Figure 6 8 Locations of Lamps ATTCON NDA 24300 CHAPTER 6 Page 397 Issue 1 SYSTEM OPERATIONS 2 Key Operations on the Desk Console DESKCON By the operations on the Desk Console restriction 15 applied on an outgoing call from a station having SFC in which the SFI 16 Line Load Control of ASFC command is set as RES 0 incoming calls to that station are allowed For restricting incoming calls from a trunk system data ASYD SYSI INDEX59 0 1 should be assigned e Setting Press Lx L1 L6 key Dial the access code for setting Line Load Control LLC displays on desk console SST Figure 6 1 1 e System message 6 displays Press CANCEL key Figure 6 9 Line Load Control Key Operations on DESKCON Setting e Cancelling Press Lx L1 L6 key Dial the access code for cancelling Line Load Control LLC displays on desk console e System message 6 D displays Press CANCEL key Figure 6 10 Line Load Control Key Operations on DESKCON Cancelling CHAPTER 6 NDA 24300 Page 398 Issue 1 SYSTEM OPERATIONS LLC is displayed on
217. S Line Equipment Number STATUS Data Entry Result OK Data Assignment is successful Note Note f not OK i e the data entry is not successful related error message is displayed here CHAPTER 8 NDA 24300 Page 528 Issue 1 CADSD Continuous Assignment of Station Data When Delete is selected in the Type selection list box Input Data TN START First Tenant Number TN END Last Tenant Number STN START First Station Number Max 6 digits STN END Last Station Number Max 6 digits STEP Station Count up Step Note 1 If using and 1 12 If not using and 1 10 Note 1 n this parameter specify the size of increment between the consecutive station numbers to be deleted See the example below Example Input data Result STN START 100 Station Number is deleted by 10 increments STN END 200 When and are not used as part of STN STEP 10 100 110 120 130 190 200 V When and Z are used as part of STN Buttons 10 118 126 134 1 1 8 Execute Click to delete the input data Cancel Click to cancel the deletion Exit Click to exit this command Display Data TN Tenant Number STN Station Number STATUS Result of Deletion Note 2 Note 2 When the deletion is successful OK is displayed here Otherwise i e the deletion is rejected related error message is displayed NDA 24300 CHAPTER 8 Page 529 Issue 1 CARR Continuous Assignment of Alternative Route Restriction CARR _ Continuous Assignment of Alt
218. S with the failure b0 b1 Unit No b7 b6 b5 63 b2 bo tT Tt NDA 24300 CHAPTER 3 Page 179 Issue 1 SYSTEM MESSAGES Inside Trunk All Busy Default Alarm Default Grade Grade Modified Lamp Modified SUP 3 This message displays when Intra Office Trunks ATI RST etc have all become busy 14 9000 D000 0000 2 10000 0000 0000 0000 Se 160000 0000 0000 0000 CD 4 0000 0000 0000 0000 5 0000 0000 0000 0000 6 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 QUOO 20000 30000 0000 0000 0000 09000 Os 0001 0000 CD Intra Office trunks that have b0 b7 Intra Office trunks that have become all busy 01 1F become all busy See table on the following page b7 b b5 b4 63 b2 bl 3 NDA 24300 Page 180 Issue 1 SYSTEM MESSAGES ROUTE DATA ROUTE DATA TRUNK NAME TRUNK NAME Originating Register Trunk Not used New o rine rk 95 Mox _ 3s m _ PB Receiver for Automated 922 16 MODEM Attendant Service Not o MODEM LAS Three Way Conference Trunk LN MODEM HL Not o o Not p o Originating Register ae for Not EE X ATTCON DESKCON Three Way Conference Trunk for Data Signaling Trunk Option ATTCON DESKCON C 90
219. SCs 1 Functional Outline This command is necessary for the Controlled Alternate PRSCs function It either selects the class used between two priority restriction classes Normal or Urgent or indicates the class used This command is allowed only when of SYS 1 INDEX 59 is 1 Controlled Alternate PRSCs in service 2 Parameters N U Priority Restriction Class N U N Normal U Urgent NDA 24300 CHAPTER 8 Page 545 Issue 1 CSCL Continuous Change of Station Class CSCL Continuous Change of Station Class 1 Functional Outline This command can change the station class information TEC RSC SFC en bloc by designating the range of the station number 2 Parameters Input Data TN STN START STN END TEC OLD TEC NEW RSC OLD RSC NEW SFC OLD SFC NEW Tenant Number First Station Number 0 9 Max 6 digits Note 1 Last Station Number 0 9 Max 6 digits Note 1 Telephone Equipment Class before change 1 31 Note 2 Note 3 Telephone Equipment Class after change 1 31 Note 2 Route Restriction Class before change 0 15 Note 3 Route Restriction Class after change 0 15 Service Feature Class before change 0 15 Note 3 Service Feature Class after change 0 15 Note 1 n the bottom part of the display a check box is provided to determine whether to use and as a part of the Station Number If necessary check the box Note 2 Details on TEC Telephone Equipment Cl
220. SEU BASEU FRONT VIEW Base Unit Dummy Box Fan Unit Local Processor Module Port Interface Module Top Unit Time Division Switch Module Figure 2 2 System Configuration NDA 24300 CHAPTER 2 Page 5 Issue 1 SYSTEM MAINTENANCE OUTLINE Figure 2 3 shows the face layout of IMGO IMGO TOPU _______ _ _______ e _______ ______ e PH PC36 MUX __ 6 MUX PH PC36 MUX pep Qe QP e 0 0 0 T m ee E PH PC36 MUX PH PC36 MUX FL PH PCS6 MUX PH PCS6 MUX _ BASEU Front View Note The 2nd IOC card optional may be mounted in this slot Figure 2 3 Face Layout of IMGO NDA 24300 CHAPTER 2 Page 6 Issue 1 SYSTEM MAINTENANCE OUTLINE IMG1 Figure 2 4 shows the face layout of IMGI TOPU z E PEPO MUX PH PC36 MUX RC Poo E gom TSW13 L TSW12 S gts m 9 2 _____ P
221. SPTS command verify that no calls are being handled by the SDT card OPE lamp on PA SDTA card is On the PA SDTA card set the MB key UP ON red When already established calls exist the connections lose voice tone When any connection link exists the link is severed after a few seconds Note When the card is in a dual configuration perform this for both system sides both ACT and STBY sides NDA 24300 CHAPTER 4 Page 291 Issue 1 UNIT CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE te it Contents __ Static Sensitive Handling Precautions Required OPE lamp on PA SDTB card 15 On the PA SDTB card set the MB key UP ON red When any connection link exists the nailed down connection between the FCH PA FCHA and SDT PA SDTB cards is cut off Already established calls while in speech are all disconnected Extract both PA SDTA PA SDTB cards simultaneously Remove the flat cables from the front connectors I O and PCM on both PA SDTB and PA SDTA cards When replacing the PA SDTB also remove MT24 TSW cables from all the front connectors on the card Confirm that the MB key on the new card 15 set UP ON If the new card is PA SDTA also confirm that Switch 4 of the P SW key is ON Referring to the card removed perform the switch settings on the new card CHAPTER 4 NDA 24300 Page 292 Issue 1 UNIT CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE
222. Set SENSE switch at 1 DM Set SENSE switch at 1 DM Clear Restart on the DSP of Clear Restart on the DSP of CPU 0 active CPU Turn ON the SW on the PZ Press the CPU RST button PW92 of CPU 0 on the DSP of active CPU or Turn OFF the SW on the PZ PW92 of active CPU and turn it ON again HD Initialization Program Load System Initial System starts up clearing the Office Data on the HD The system starts up again 3 when Power is ON and ON LINE START CHAPTER 6 NDA 24300 Page 490 Issue 1 7SEG LED OPE LAMP KEY SETTINGS ATTENTION Contents Static Sensitive Handlin Precautions Required STATUS LED right on the DSP of CPU is ON H STATUS LED right on the DSP of CPU is ON STATUS LED right on the DSP of CPU is ON CPU OPE lamp on the DSP of active CPU lights steady green IMGO 3 lamps flash lamp on the DSP of mate CPU flashes green STATUS LED right on the DSP of CPU is ON Li ON LINE SYSTEM OPERATIONS Table 6 20 Start Up When Basic amp Application Software Is Installed Procedure 1 Continued 7SEG LED OPE LAMP KEY SETTINGS Set SENSE switch at 2 DM Load Restart on the DSP of active ATTENTION CPU Contents Static Sensitive Handling Precautions Required Enter your Office Data Back up Office Data using the MEM_HDD command Turn ON the EFFECT key on the TOPU See Figure 6 58 Set the keys on the TO
223. T HOUR MINUTE and END HOUR MINUTE parameters Note 2 Traffic Type 15 only works on Ring Down Trunks CHAPTER 8 NDA 24300 Page 524 Issue 1 ATRFN Assignment of Traffic Measurement Order for Fusion Network ATRFN Assignment of Traffic Measurement Order for Fusion Network 1 Functional Outline This command 15 used to assign and delete traffic measurement programs available on the Ethernet A request for traffic measurement is performed on a network basis when a traffic measurement instruction has been assigned by this command The collected traffic measurement data can be stored on the HD of the MAT connected to the NCN Network Control Node which can be designated on the basis of traffic measurement type Note that this command can be used at the NCN only 2 Parameters Input Data TYPE Type of Traffic Measurement 1 19 See Table 8 3 Table 8 3 Type of Traffic Measurement Explanation MEANING 5 6 _ UCD Gu Cam Usage 15 Anvering _ PORT Traffic Information Output Terminal Number 0 7 IOC 8 LAN 9 NMS INTERVAL Output interval 0 30 120 Assign the data 30 120 in 10 minute increments When assigning 0 available when any of TYPE 3 18 is selected instead specify your desired output time in the OUTPUT HOUR MINUTE parameters below START HOUR Note 2 Note 3 START MINUTE Note 2 Note 3 END HOUR Note 2 Note 3 END MINUTE Note 2 Note 3 OUTPUT HOU
224. TSW Failure Permanent e 1 D TSW Write Failure e 1 F TSW Clock Failure 4 D TSW Ready Failure START Check to see 1f the TSW circuit card 1s mak ing poor contact Check PCM cables CHAPTER 5 24300 354 Issue 1 ATTENTION Contents Static Sensitive Handling Precautions Required Set the TSW MBR switch of the TSW circuit card UP Set the MB switch of the TSW circuit card UP and extract the circuit card from its mounting slot Extract the TSW circuit card from its mounting slot and clean the contact portion If cleaning cannot be done repeat insertion and extraction of the circuit card two or three times Set the TSW MBR and MB switches of the TSW circuit card UP and insert the circuit card into its mounting slot Set the MB switch of the TSW circuit card DOWN Set the TSW MBR switch DOWN Check if a station to station connection can be set up Check the PCM cables See Figure 5 8 Initialize the system by pressing the START button on the TOPU and see if a station to sta tion connection can be set up Faulty Situation e Fault related to speech such as noise one way speech no speed etc occurs Even if dialing started Dial Tone DT does not stop 1 Both TSW Write Failure e 1 D TSW Write Failure Check to see if fault occurs by extracting TSW circuit cards one by one Check to see if the fault occurs by extracting MUX circuit cards one by one END
225. TSW and Other Speech Path Echelons CHAPTER 4 NDA 24300 Page 273 Issue 1 UNIT CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE TSW Card Replacement Procedure Use extreme care when operating the keys on the circuit card ATTENTION Contents Static Sensitive Required System Changeover Check the following On the active GT PH GTO09 card set the MBR key lamp indications on the circuit cards to be UP Then return the key DOWN affected and ensure that they are all OFF TSW ACT TSW cards DLKC card Note MUX ACT MUX cards Note f the TSW card to be replaced represents system status 0 all the circuit cards with 0 status Check the ACT mode of the mate are totally affected Check the Speech Path System whole cited cards lamp indications See Figure 4 16 and Figure 4 17 Check the following lamp indications on the mate Speech Path block and ensure that On the TSW PH SW12 card to be replaced they are all steady green set the TSW MBR key UP TSW ACT TSW cards OPE MB DLKC card MUX ACT MUX cards TSW ACT lamp on the TSW card remains OFF DLKC 20 GT PH GT09 MUX PH PC36 TSW PH SW12 OPE MB 4 OPE MB MUX ACT TSW ACT 0 E i 0 0 bj TSW FRONT VIEW Figure 4 17 LEDs and Switches for TSW Changeover CHAPTER 4 NDA 24300 Page 274 Issue 1 UNIT CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE Fo
226. ULT REPAIR PROCEDURES IMGO IMG1 PIM 3 PIM 3 x OR lt lt Rae oet d umi beum eno PIM 2 PIM 2 Ri 9 MUX f MUX eae PIM 1 PIM 1 LVDS Low Voltage Differential Signaling IMG2 To IMG2 IMG3 IMG3 nm b I 1 TSWM MUX 100 MUX 101 Symbols Speech Path 0 1 Cable TSW PH SW12 Circuit Card active Circuit Card STBY MUX PH PC36 L 4 Figure 5 8 Speech Path Block Diagram NDA 24300 CHAPTER 5 Page 347 Issue 1 FAULT REPAIR PROCEDURES IMG2 IMG3 PIM 3 PIM 3 Poe IL 14 ux ee emo PIM 2 PIM 2 Ri 9 MUX p f MUX Ee ues oes d PIM 1 PIM 1 pe v LVDS Low Voltage Differential Signaling To IMGO To IMGO To IMG1 ERES b 1 TSWM MUX 120 MUX 121 Symbols Speech Path 0 1 Cable TSW PH SW12 Circuit Card Active Circuit Card STBY MUX PH PC36 L Figure 5 8 Speech Path Block Diagram Continued CHAPTER 5 NDA 24300 Page 348 Issue 1 FAULT REPAIR PROCEDURES 5 2 Speech Path System Fault Fault Related to Speech Faulty Situation Fault related to speech such as noise one way speech etc occurs Even if dialing started Dial Tone DT does not stop e I
227. US _____ a B 1 PIMO PM BUS i MUX gt cus EL X 5 i E LC TRK LC TRK LC TRK i i 1 1 E E E To ToIMG1 ToIMG1 1 FN ll E F ee LL LLLE FE TSW ANT 023022021020 033032031030 TSW INT TSW INT i I I a N n i i LI SUN BE 2 T GT 0 Note 3 Tide HI 971 i E I WmamimumumimumumumumumumumumurmumumumumumIMEMEMHINEEMENHINIEININIEEEINEEENINENEENININEININININININEININIEEEINIEENEINENIE CE RO MENT Symbols 4 Controlling Routes of CPU Cable 1 Circuit card active 1 Circuit STBY External Cable Clock Oscillator LANI LANI mE CPU board EMA PH PC40 ISAGT PZ GT13 LANI PZ PC19 GT PH GT09 IOC PH IO24 TSW PH SW12 DLKC PH PC20 PLO PH CK16 17 16 A 17 A MUX 6 Note 1 The circuit cards drawn by dotted lines indicate they are in STBY state These cards TSW MUX and DLKC are totally changed over to the ACT mode when the key of the active GT PH GTO09 card is once flipped However PLO PH CK16 17
228. UTINE DIAGNOSIS For confirming its own servicing status the system automatically executes self diagnosis every day and dis plays the result of the diagnosis on a system message By this function possible causes for trouble can be dis covered in an early stage and possible trouble can be prevented from remaining undetected 11 1 Related System Data ASYD SYS1 INDEX86 b0 When routine diagnosis starts and the result of the routine diagnosis is normal the result displays as system message 7 O 0 1 Not displayed To display bl When the result of the routine diagnosis is abnormal it displays as system message 7 0 1 Not displayed To display 63 62 Processing at the time when Trunk Ineffective Hold is detected Note Except the trunks being held on two way calls All trunks being held at LENS of the trunk detected station to station call station to trunk trunk present are forcibly display as system message to trunk call the trunks being held at present released 7 are forcibly released Note Trunk Ineffective Hold is a continuous state other than idle state within a predetermined duration while CHAPTER 6 Page 452 Issue 1 routine diagnosis is in progress Whether it is to be detected not detected is assigned by ASYD SYS1 INDEXS89 SYS1 INDEX87 88 Routine Diagnosis Start Time Start time should be such time at which the traffic of the office 15 the lowest INDEX 87 02 Hou
229. V at LOAD side of the rectifier Confirm that NFB circuit breaker on all PWR supplies is at ON position UP side Check to see if there is any PWR supply to which the alarm lamp illuminates System Initialization by loading office data and program data from the hard disk Refer to Chapter 6 Service connections such as See Check by Minimizing the System station to station connection Configuration on the next page cannot be set up Service connections such as Data in the memory is temporarily destroyed station to station connection can Observe the situation for a while be set up CHAPTER 5 NDA 24300 Page 380 Issue 1 FAULT REPAIR PROCEDURES 1 Check by minimizing the system configuration Mount only the basic circuit cards in CPU Remove all circuit cards from CPU No 0 No 0 system and initialize system except the basic circuit cards Circuit cards to be mounted are as follows CPU EMA TSW MUX EMA PH PC40 TSW PH SW12 MUX PH PC36 On the CPU Display Panel DSP set its SENSE switch to 1 Press Reset RST button on the DSP CPU OPE lamp should be illuminated on the DSP Initialization cannot be made Check by replacing the basic circuit cards indi vidually Set MB switch of the circuit card UP and extract the circuit card from its mounting Slot Make necessary switch settings on the new circuit card Set MB switch of the new circuit card UP and insert the circuit card into its mounting
230. X lamps on both DSP go OFF the CPU 1s ON HD Initialization STATUS LED right on x System Initialization STATUS LED right on the DSP of CPU is ON System starts up again CPU OPE lamp on the DSP of active CPU lights steady green IMGO 3 lamps flash IMGO lamp on the DSP of mate CPU flashes green STATUS LED right on the DSP of active CPU Li is ON ON LINE NDA 24300 CHAPTER 6 Page 483 Issue 1 SYSTEM OPERATIONS 12 2 4 System Initialization by Keys on CPU Front Panel This initialization executes when the INITIAL key on the TOPU cannot be used The CPU s active status must be confirmed before executing this type of initial ization Perform the procedure in Table 6 17 c ATTENTION ontents Static Sensitive Handlin Precautions Required Table 6 17 System Initialization by Keys on CPU Front Panel Procedure EMA PH PC40 Check ACTO ACTI lamps on the EMA ACTO lights green ACTI lights green Confirm SENSE switch on the Confirm SENSE switch on the DSP of CPU 0 15 2 DM Load DSP of CPU 1 1s 2 DM Load Restart Restart Press CPU RST key on the Press CPU RST key on the DSP of CPU 0 DSP of CPU 1 CPU 0 is being initialized CPU 1 is being initialized Confirm ACTO lamp lights Confirm ACTI lamp lights green again green again Use ATIM command to adjust date and time Refer to Chapter 8 CHAPTER 6 NDA 24300 Page 484 Issue 1 12 2 5 System Initializati
231. XX XX00 0000 0000 0000 9 0000 0000 0000 eoe D Information on Self CPU Restart after detection of a clock fault b7 65 64 63 I LET CI 2 Mate CPU Restart Information b7 95 b4 b3 bO 11 CI 3 B level Infinite Loop b7 bl 1111 4 Data Analyzed by NEC Engineers b3 b4 bS b3 b4 b7 bl 0 1 2 Monitor Restart 0 1 Initialization 0 1 Data Copy restart for Dual CPU system only 0 1 MB control 0 1 2 ACT STBY active system indication after restart 0 1 2 Monitor Restart 0 1 Initialization 0 1 Data Copy Restart for Dual CPU system only 0 1 MBcontrol 0 1 2 ACT STBY active system indication after restart 0 1 B level Infinite Loop 0 1 Task Timer Timeout Reference See Chapter 5 Section 6 2 for the repair procedure NDA 24300 CHAPTER 3 Page 49 Issue 1 SYSTEM MESSAGES B1 Level Infinite Loop Temporary Default Alarm SUP Default Grade Grade Modified Lamp Modified 1 This message displays when in the CPU program processing the counter value to check the normality of the processing has become abnormal 1 XXXX 2 3 AAAA XAXA P 0 o o o 4 XXXX XAXA 5 XXXX
232. XXX XX00 0000 0000 2 0000 0000 0000 0000 3 0000 0000 0000 0000 4 0000 0000 0000 0000 5 0000 0000 0000 0000 6 0000 0000 0000 0000 7 0000 0000 0000 0000 8 0000 0000 0000 0000 9 0000 0000 0000 0000 D MG No and Unit No of fault b1 Unit No 0 3 detection b2 0 1 Even numbered MG Odd numbered MG b7 b2 bl bO LLLI 2 Kind of Power bl 0 1 5V Power Failure 52 0 1 12V Power Failure b7 b4 b3 bl bO 3 61 5v Power Failure 3 Location of faulty circuit card bO 0 1 Group 24 0 side Group 25 1 side b7 b0 Jt ttt LJ Reference See Chapter 4 Section 3 3 3 for the circuit card replacement procedure CHAPTER 3 NDA 24300 Page 176 Issue 1 SYSTEM MESSAGES VPS Failure Temporary Default Alarm Default Grade Grade Modified Lamp Modified SUP 1 This message displays when a VPS failure 15 detected IX 0000 9000 2 0000 8000 0000 4000 38 4000 8000 0000 0000 Sa a 4 0000 0000 0000 0000 5 0000 0000 0000 0000 6 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 QUOO 20000 30000 0000 0000 0000 09000 Os 0001 0000 D Probable cause for failure b0 b7 0 b7 b5 b2 bl 1 Sector error FF Other than above 2 LENS of VPS with the failure b0 b2 Level b7 b6 b5 b3 b2 bl b3 b7 Group LT 3 LENS of VPS with the failure b0 b1 Unit No BP cns us
233. XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX 3 XXXX zm Sa eere Soa Sa Sa ey ey Se Say ey 98 8 00 00 OO 00 00 00 45 0000 0000 0000 0000 Ss 0000 0000 0000 0000 G7 0000 0000 0000 8000 7 0000 0090 0000 0000 8 0000 0000 0000 0000 9 0000 0000 0000 0000 D Calling party information b0 b3 Type of Calling party b7 b3 b2 bl 0 Station 1 Attendant console b7 Short Long Time Tenant No of Calling Called party Hex 3 Calling party Information When calling party is Station Calling station No See table b7 b3 62 bl CHAPTER 3 NDA 24300 Page 102 Issue 1 When calling party is ATTCON DESKCON Attendant Desk console No See table b7 b 65 b4 63 b2 bl ITTI When calling party is Trunk Route No and Trunk No See table Note Route No a bO b5 DI be b OX b2 Bb wo 39 Route No b b0 b3 b7 63 62 bl 111 1 Called party information bO b3 b7 b3 62 bl III LLLI SYSTEM MESSAGES b d Route No 1 63 OP 0 1 Data in OPRT is invalid valid AC 0 1 Internal trunk External trunk OPRT Route No Over 64 OO Station to Station call 01 Outgoing call to outside 02 Incoming call from outside NDA 24300 CHAPTER 3 Page 103 Issue 1 SYSTEM MESSAGES 5 Called Party Information Station to Station Call T f called 00 Station
234. __ 203 17 B COH MBR Koy TUM OFF obese een P dU deer RE 204 17 C LUN TIERS TU IN aua he re OR Bes 205 17 D DOMME DUDLIBE AS 206 17 H Day Night Change InformaliOn 55 5 6 Hm dene di ok Rd HEED 207 NDA 24300 TABLE OF CONTENTS Page iii Issue 1 TABLE OF CONTENTS CONTINUED Page 17 O IL MB TUMUON cede rao ed dre PEE Uer 209 17 P MB Key Tum 210 17 Q R WII ___ 211 17 R IOC MBR Key Turn OFF uua ea Rm CORE RR es 212 23 P DCH Back Up Automatic Change Start End 213 23 Q DCH Back Up Manual Change Start End 215 23 Y VERA Hui TT ee a ee 217 23 2 Both MUX Clock 218 26 N E EOE E NEETA EE ETA EAEE E E A E EE ees 219 26 R Call Trac kk eked ond Rege thd anne cde ORC oo RO rakker 220 26 V LAN Merate I __ _ a 224 26 W LAN Interface Release 228 33 A RESIO Li doe dde bdo aed RGR 230 33 B BU uaa GS peas
235. a Desk Console when Line Load Control starts Line Load indication Desk Console Figure 6 11 Line Load Control Indication DESKCON 3 Operations on the MAT By entering ALLC command from the MAT Line Load Control executes The station to be controlled and the contents of the Line Load Control executed on the MAT are the same as those in Step 1 Operations on the Attendant Console COMMAND COMMAND FULL NAME ALLC Assignment of Line Load Control 4 Automatic Setting If the usage rate of the CPU exceeds the system data usage rate Line Load Control is automatically set In this case system message 6 C displays The station to be controlled and the contents of the Automatic Line Load Control are the same as those in Step 1 Operations on the Attendant Console If the usage rate of the CPU drops below the system data usage rate the Line Load Control 15 automati cally cancelled In this case system message 6 D displays While the Line Load Control is set the lamps on the control panel of the Desk Attendant Console remain lit NDA 24300 CHAPTER 6 Page 399 Issue 1 SYSTEM OPERATIONS 5 IOC LINE MONITOR 1 Functional Outline This function monitors the IOC port status As a result of the monitoring by this function the following is executed When the connection with a port has been disconnected it 15 reported by a message When the connection with a port is set up it is reported by a message
236. age vi Issue 1 TABLE OF CONTENTS CONTINUED Page Lec Call Metering isse adn dio Rn ew kiria 414 7 2 8 Office Code of Calling Called Party and Billing Process Office 414 7 2 9 Text Format of Centralized Billing 5 415 7 2 10 Text Format of SMDR TCP IP Interface 423 TRAFFIC 4555456540496 ___6 6 6___ 425 8 1 Kindof Oh CO HER ERROERELA ER Rud 425 Bc SCI FroCeduUrS rerea do aoa RI ir o EINE OS E RO RC OR e ead ORO RA le RON 427 9 OFFICE DATA 433 91 Office Data Stored casos ec ES RR ERR ER ERE 433 Br SC Data 12s bce deat eee Hee Oe ard 433 9 3 Office Data Management Procedure 434 94 Call Forwarding Data Individual Speed Calling Data Management 437 9 5 One Touch Speed Call Memory Data Management 437 9 6 Data Management 5 437 10 TEST OPERATIONS OF VARIOUS KINDS Gr RR m 438 10 1 Designated Connection Test 5
237. agement procedures Administrative Management Procedures Administrative Procedures Expansion and Change of Office Data Management and Office Station Users Data Protection Po See Chapter 6 See Chapter 6 Traffic Management See Chapter 6 Actions on Claims from Station Users and or Operators A Management Procedures Station Message Detail hapter 6 Recording SMDR a See Chapter Diagnosis result system message displays abnormality System Status Monitor See Chapter 6 Alarm Indications Line fault Fault Analysis Circuit card fault Test Operation Collection of System Messages Charigeover Terina Refer to Make Busy Circuit Tel etc fault Chapter 5 Indication of Lockout Stations Card Change Fault cause not Initialization able to be localized gt Abnormal _ Line Load Control See Chapter 6 Congestion Figure 2 1 Flow of Administrative Management Procedures NDA 24300 CHAPTER 2 Page 3 Issue 1 SYSTEM MAINTENANCE OUTLINE 1 3 Summary of This Manual s Contents Table 2 1 provides a brief description of the contents for each chapter in this manual Table 2 1 Summary of This Manuals Contents CHAPTER DESCRIPTION See Section 2 Basic Knowledge Explains basic knowledge of fault detection and indication functions and fault range of the system etc See Section 3 How to Read Precautions Diagnostic and Fault Repair Information Explains the meth
238. amsmsmimsmusmsmsmumsmusmsmsmusmumuamsemsmumumumumumumy Symbols MISC BUS lt gt Controlling Routes of CPU De Cable z 1 Circuit card active 1 1 Circuit card STBY eset Signa redi External Cable Clock Oscillator CPR Signral ST BY cru beard EMA 40 ISAGT PZ GT13 PME ESI LANI PZ PC19 GT PH GT09 DE PH IO24 TSW PH SW12 DLKC PH PC20 PLO PH CK16 17 16 A 17 A AEE AE ATRE AEE ee MUX PH PC36 Note 1 The circuit cards drawn by dotted lines indicate they are in STBY state These cards TSW MUX and DLKC are totally changed over to the ACT mode when the MBR key of the active GT PH GT09 card is once flipped However PLO PH CK16 17 16 A 17 A is independent and not affected by the development Note 2 Ifthe ACT STBY of CPU is once changed over the system of GT in TSWM also changes over Note 3 Though an external cable is physically connected between ISAGTO and GTI the actual control signal is sent received only between ISAGTO and This is because GTO and GTI are having a multiple connection on the backboard side Refer to Chapter 6 Section 12 Figure 2 16 CPU Controlling Block Diagram Continued NDA 24300 CHAPTER 2 Page 21 Issue 1 SYSTEM MAINTENANCE OUTLINE IMGO IMG1 PIM 3 PIM 3 7 PIM 2 PIM 2
239. ancy Li 1000 25 0000 0000 0000 3 0000 0000 09600 0000 e m cd c D 2 3 4 4 0000 0000 0000 0000 5 0000 0000 0000 0000 6 0000 0000 0000 0000 73 0009 0000 0000 0000 85 00009 0000 0000 0000 95 0000 0000 0000 0000 D Error detection by Routine 10H Program Memory Verification Discrepancy Diagnosis 0 Verification of number 0 1 HFD 0 b7 bl bO bl HFD I 3 Verification of Drive Number 0 1 Drive Number 0 bl 0 1 Drive Number 1 67 63 b2 bl 50 22 0 1 Drive Number 2 Data analyzed by NEC Engineers NDA 24300 CHAPTER 3 Page 135 Issue 1 SYSTEM MESSAGES 11H Program Memory Verification Impossible HFD Fault 1 11XX XXXX XXXX 0000 2 0000 0000 0000 0000 3 0000 0000 0000 m mim ee Oo 0000 200005 0000 5000 588 0000 2 0000 70000 BORO 0000 7 0000 0000 0000 0000 9 0000 0000 0000 0000 9 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 D Error detection by Routine 11H Program Memory Verification Impossible HFC Fault Diagnosis 2 Verification Impossible of HD 0 12 HFCO b7 bl bO bl HFC 1 3 Error Type OOH HD Processing NG OIH HD Not Connected b7 6 b5 63 62 bl 02H HD Busy __ II r1 03H HD Fault Fault processing Not equipment etc 04H Transfer NG 05H Response Timeout Da
240. and from this connector the connector s here used for the FAN to be replaced Figure 4 22 Preparation for FANU Replacement Fans in Fan Box NDA 24300 CHAPTER 4 Page 299 Issue 1 UNIT CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE STEP 5 Take off the four screws fastening the fan to be replaced Refer to Figure 4 23 Note The removed screws are used in STEP 7 again Do not dispose of them when unscrewing theFAN here STEP 6 STEP 7 STEP 8 STEP 9 STEP 10 STEP 11 Remove the unscrewed fan from the FANU Fasten the new fan with the removed screws Connect the new fan cables to the fan connector and the connector s disconnected in STEP 4 Fix the fan fuse 5A again onto the PZ M369 Insert the FANU into the fan box and fasten it with the two screws Set the PWR SW on the PZ M369 to the AUTO position Note The switch setting of the PWR SW can be ON depending on the location conditions of the system STEP 12 CHAPTER 4 Page 300 Issue 1 Attach the front cover to the original location FAN BOX Figure 4 23 How to Replace FANU Fans in Fan Box NDA 24300 UNIT CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE 5 CPR Cooling Fan Replacement This section explains how to replace a cooling fan in the back side of the CPR This procedure is necessary when a fault is detected in the cooling fan Because the fan is a vital device to protect the CPR from heated air it is also recommended that the fan be replaced at least eve
241. and logical route number must be allocated to the route number by the ALRTN command Note 2 2 Make Busy Bothway is available in Australia only Display Data FPC Fusion Point Code 1 253 RT Route Number STATUS Make Busy Status for MB 2 Self trunk MB Other trunk MB Both trunk MB Self trunk MB ready Both trunk MB ready NDA 24300 CHAPTER 8 Page 607 Issue 1 Data Control Between Memory and HDD MEM HDD Data Control Between Memory and HDD 1 Functional Outline This command is used to save the following data from MEM of PBX to HDD of PBX and vice versa 2 Parameters Input data Direction Select Memory to Hard Disk Hard Disk to Memory Verify HDD against MEM Data Type Selection Data Memory Note 1 Name Display Wireless Call Forwarding Call Forwarding Speed Calling User Assign Soft Key Number Sharing Note 2 Call Block ACD Data Memory LP Select This data is valid when Call Forwarding Speed Calling User Assign Soft Key Number Sharing or Call Block data is designated Auto Verify Afterward Note 1 When Data Memory is selected Network Data Memory NDM and Local Data Memory LDM are also saved verified simultaneously Note 2 By saving the Number Sharing data the data concerning Dual Station Calling Over FCCS is also saved verified automatically CHAPTER 8 NDA 24300 Page 608 Issue 1 MEM HDD Data Control Between Memory and HDD for MEM HDD Data Control Between Memory and
242. and INPWR connector on the PZ PW92 FRONT VIEW r 2 2 2 2 ee Cable to be disconnected from OUTPWR CPU 0 6P 4P 3P PWR CA A CPU 1 6P 4P 3P PWR CA B Cable to be disconnected from INPWR CPU 0 4P 2P PWR CPU 1 4P 2P PWR O a L en 2 NDA 24300 CHAPTER 4 Page 263 Issue 1 UNIT CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE ATTENTION Contents __ Static Sensitive Handling Precautions Required Extract the PWR UNIT from the CPR Insert the new PWR UNIT into the LPM Reattach power cables to OUTPWR and INPWR Connector on the PZ PW92 Turn ON the SW key on the PWR UNIT Reattach power alarm cable to the PALM Connector on the PZ PW92 On the EMA card set EMA SUP switch DOWN END CHAPTER 4 NDA 24300 Page 264 Issue 1 UNIT CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE 1 3 5 MISC Card Replacement Procedure START On the MISC card set MB switch UP Extract the MISC card from its mounting slot Insert the new circuit card into the same mounting slot On the MISC card set MB switch DOWN END NDA 24300 ATTENTION Contents __ Static Sensitive Handling Precautions Required Keep MB switch UP CHAPTER 4 Page 265 Issue 1 UNIT CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE 2 TSWM ACCOMMODATING CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE This section explains the procedure for replacing circuit cards acco
243. angeover for Dual Systems 0 1 2 No Yes b3 CPU ACT STBY Changeover for Dual Systems 0 1 2 No Yes b4 Trunk Ineffective Hold Check 0 1 2 No Yes b5 Trunk Ineffective Hold Detection 0 1 2 No Yes NDA 24300 CHAPTER 6 Page 453 Issue 1 SYSTEM OPERATIONS b6 Call Forwarding Data Clear See Index 232 0 1 No Yes INDEX90 bl Backup Call Forwarding Individual Speed Data and Name Display Data to HDD see Index 304 0 1 No Yes 63 Residual Link Detection 0 1 No Yes INDEX304 Individual Speed Calling Data Saving 0 1 Out In Service This data 15 valid when SYSI INDEX90 b1 1 b Call Forwarding Data Saving 0 1 Out In Service This data is valid when SYSI INDEX90 b1 1 b3 Name Display Data Saving 0 1 Out In Service This data is valid when SYSI INDEX90 b1 1 b4 User Assign Soft Key Data Saving 0 1 Out In Service This data is valid when SYSI INDEX90 b1 1 b5 Number Sharing Data Saving 0 1 Out In Service This data is valid when SYSI INDEX90 b1 1 11 2 Routine Diagnosis Result The result of routine diagnosis displays as a system message Normally ended 7 0 Abnormality detected 7 P Refer to Chapter 3 for more details In case an abnormality is detected initiate necessary processing explained in Chapter 5 CHAPTER 6 NDA 24300 Page 454 Issue 1 SYSTEM OPERATIONS 12 SYSTEM CONTROL PROCEDURES Although the system is remarkably maintenance free maintenanc
244. arameter error Function error 6 Individual part parameter error Sub function error 7 Individual part parameter error Device error 8 Individual part parameter error Drive selection error 9 Individual part parameter error Data ID error 10 Individual part parameter error Processor ID error 1 1 Individual part parameter error File ID error 12 Individual part parameter error File name error 13 Request order error Health check send error 14 Request order error Data send signal error 15 Internal error File open error 16 Internal error File read error 72Internal error File close error 18 Internal error FAT error 19 Internal error SCSIC error 20 Internal error other 21 Hard interface abnormal end 22 255 NDA 24300
245. are Failure Onboard Power Alarm SDT PA SDTA B card is faulty Replace the card with a spare by referring to Chapter 4 Section 3 3 3 SDT Card Replacement Procedure 2 Optical Line Failure Diagnosis In addition to this alarm 15 the PCM Loss alarm also indicated YES Optical line side is faulty Verify that the SDT card in the distant node 15 not placed into make busy state Also perform light level check of the optical fiber cables NO gt SDT card is faulty Replace the SDT card with a spare by referring to Chapter 4 Section 3 3 3 SDT Card Replace ment Procedure 3 Abnormal MB Key Operation This alarm is indicated when the MB key on the PA SDTA card is turned ON even though the MBR key has been on the OFF side Place the MBR key UP ON and then turn ON the MB key 4 PCM Loss Abnormal state is detected on the optical line side Verify that the SDT card in the distant node is not placed into make busy state Also perform the light level check of the optical fiber cables 5 52M Interface Alarm Frame Alignment Loss Receiving Section Failure Mistake Rate Degradation Sending Section Failure Mistake Detection Clock synchronization with the distant node might be lost or a trouble might occur on the optical line side Check the PLO cards first in both self node and distant node When no fault 15 found proceed with the light level check of the optical fiber cables CHAPTER 3 NDA 24300 Page 234 Issu
246. arm Restore Default Alarm Default Grade Grade Modified Lamp Modified NON 1 This message displays when the SDT PA SDTA B card or optical fiber line which was once detected as faulty recovers 1 0000 0000 0000 2 0000 0000 0000 0000 3 0000 0000 0000 0000 Em co um 0 4t 0009 9990 090009 0000 54 0009 8000 00090 0000 70000 0000 0000 0000 re OOOO WOOO OUO so QODO DCOU OOOO e OUO HOO HOO ODOD D MG Module Group b7 0 1 Even number MG Odd number MG b7 2 Details on the fault 54 63 2 b7 b4 b3 b2 bl 00 001 Hardware Failure LIT 00 010 Optical Line Failure PO Ce 00 011 Onboard Power Alarm Trouble 00 100 Abnormal MB Key Operation 01 000 01 001 Loss 01 010 Frame Alignment Loss 01 011 Receiving Section Failure 52M Interface Alarm 01 100 Mistake Rate Degradation 01 101 Sending Section Failure 01 110 Mistake Detection 10 000 10 001 Receiving Path Failure 10 Pointer Failure VC 11 Path 10 011 Sending Path Failure Trouble 10 100 Receiving Path Error 10 101 Sending Path Error b7 SDT Card Status 0 12No 0 System No 1 System CHAPTER 3 NDA 24300 Page 236 Issue 1 SYSTEM MESSAGES SDT Interface Change Notify Default Alarm Default Grade Grade Modified Lamp Modified NON 2 This message displays when the ACT STBY of the SDT PA SDTA card is changed over as result of faul
247. ase Used to delete clear the whole data based on the selected Traffic Data TYPE so far stored in the data base Log Colors Used to designate change the text font color of the Data Collection Log display area e Exit Used exit this command Note that the database contents are not cleared by pressing this button Figure 6 22 DTFD Command Display Image Example CHAPTER 6 NDA 24300 Page 430 Issue 1 SYSTEM OPERATIONS Figure 6 23 shows a sample image of Listup Report window for the DTFD DTFDN command This window appears by taking the following operations and is used to obtain a sequence of Traffic data so far collected and stored in the database The window is also used to save the Traffic data text now displayed in the window onto your desired PC directory To activate this window 1 Designate a specific Traffic Data TYPE out of the DTFD DTFDN command check boxes see Figure 6 22 2 Press the View Database button on the left bottom part of the DTFD DTFDN command see Figure 6 22 Listup Report de TROUBLE DTFA Start Time 12 25 12 00 End Time 12 25 13 00 Module Group Unit Group Type CCS CCS CCS CCS CCS CCS CCS CCS CCS CCS CCS CCS CCS CCS CCS 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Oooo ooo oo gt oooooa ABCDE gu Terminal Traffic Data DTF101 Display Area This area displays th
248. ass are shown below 1 DP 10pps 2 PB 3 DP PB 4 DP 20pps 5 11 Not used 1220 13 Data Terminal 14 Hot Line 15 CAS Line 16 Data Terminal via Data Module 17 Not used 18 Virtual Line Appearance for D Multi Line 19 22 Not used 24 26 Not used 28 3 1 Not used 23 ISDN Terminal 27 8 Conference Equipment Note 3 f you want to change all classes of all specified stations enter for this parameter Buttons Execute Cancel Exit Display Data STN STATUS Click to make the input data valid Click to cancel the input data Click to exit this command Station Number Data Entry Result OK Data Assignment is successful Note Note f not OK i e the data entry is not successful related error message is displayed here CHAPTER 8 Page 546 Issue 1 NDA 24300 CSTN Continuous Change of Station Number CSTN Continuous Change of Station Number 1 Functional Outline This command can change the consecutive station numbers en bloc by designating the station number range 2 Parameters Input Data TN Tenant Number OLD STN START First Station Number before change 0 9 Max 6 digits Note OLD STN END Last Station Number before change 0 9 Max 6 digits Note NEW STN START First Station Number after change 0 9 Max 6 digits Note NEW STN END Last Station Number after change 0 9 Max 6 digits Note Note n the bottom part of the display a check box
249. ation Fault of circuit card that after inserting all removed cards Replace the PWR card accompanied the fuse blown Yes The fuse is still blown No Fault of circuit card that accompanied the fuse blown Yes Fault of PWR card Perform system initialization after inserting all removed cards There is a short circuit on the backboard of the PIM Figure 4 33 DC 48V Fuse Blown Fault Flowchart CHAPTER 4 NDA 24300 Page 308 Issue 1 CHAPTER5 FAULT REPAIR PROCEDURES This chapter provides information on how to repair the fault s within the system If any of the components or equipment listed in Table 5 1 has a failure move on to the repair procedure explained for each faulty condition Table 5 1 Fault Repair Procedure Quick Reference FAULTY ITEM FAULTY SITUATION REFERENCE SECTION Line Fault DP PB Telephone Dial tone is not heard Section 1 3 Line Fault When Dial Tone DT Cannot Be Heard Dialing results in a wrong Section 1 4 Line Fault When connection Dialing Results in Wrong Connection Bell does not ring Section 1 5 Line Fault When Bell Does Not Ring Answer speech cannot be Section 1 6 When Call Cannot Be made Answered and Speech Cannot Be Made pem cannot be operated Section 1 7 Fault Operations are abnormal Trunk Fault Noconnections can be set up Section 2 3 Trunk ORT SND PB DP signals are erroneously received or set out CFT Fault and Section 2 4 Trunk
250. ation Discrepancy bl bl 0 1 HFC 0 1s normal 0 1 HFC 1 1s normal 0 1 Present Data Memory DM 0 1 2 Local Data Memory LDM 0 1 Network Data Memory NDM NDA 24300 SYSTEM MESSAGES 21H Data Memory Verification Impossible HFC Fault DM XXX 2 So SS eae 0209 0000 4 0000 0000 0000 0000 5 73 0000 0000 0000 0000 XXXX XXXX XXXX 3 oY ia 77 X 20 0000 6 2 200005 100090 00002 6 0000 0000 0000 0000 9 LDM NDM 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 D Error detection by Routine Diagnosis 2 HFC Impossible Verification b7 bl 3 Verification of Data Memory b7 bl ttt Ett fo Error Type b7 b 65 64 63 b2 bl Single Code b7 66 b5 64 63 b2 bl 21H Data Memory Verification Impossible HFC Fault bl bl OOH 01H 02H 03H 04H 05H 51H 53H 55H 0 1 HFC 0 is abnormal 0 1 HFC 1 is abnormal 0 1 Data Memory DM 0 1 2 Local Data Memory LDM 0 1 Network Data Memory NDM HD Processing NG HD Not Connected HD Busy HD Fault Fault processing Not equipment etc Transfer NG Response Timeout Data Transfer starts File Transfer starts Data Load CHAPTER 3 Page 139 Issue 1 NDA 24300 SYSTEM MESSAGES Data analyzed
251. ault Line Trunk Fault etc e Processor System Fault The CPU alarm detecting circuit continuously monitors whether the CPU is working normally If a fault is detected the CPU calls up the diagnostic program which identifies the cause of the fault and determines whether the fault is temporary or permanent When the fault affects system operations Active Standby status of the CPU is changed over provided that the system has dual configuration Bus System Fault The CPU transfers line trunk card control information to the associated peripheral circuits via IO Bus When a parity error is detected in the transfer data or when the required information cannot be transferred from a circuit card the CPU identifies the cause of the fault changes over the CPU so that system operation is not affected and executes restart processing Speech Path Fault The CPU monitors the operating status of the TSW card the occurrence of errors in writing data to the switch memory and the basic clocks supplied to the speech path Upon detecting a fault the CPU identifies the cause of the fault determines whether the fault is temporary or permanent and executes required processing such as changeover of the TSW card e Others The alarm detecting circuit on the EMA card continuously monitors the occurrence of faults in the PWR supply cards such as abnormal temperatures within the equipment frame and lights the alarm lamp on the TOPU when a fault is
252. ays when the MUX PH PC36 card whose clock function was detected as faulty 1s recov ered 1 XXXX 0000 0000 0000 2 0000 0000 0000 0000 3 0000 0000 0000 0000 Y 0 4t 0009 909909 00009 0000 54 0000 0000 0000 0000 10000 00060 00900 0000 OOOO WOOO OUO OOOO 0 DOOU OUOU Sr QUO 01000 D Unit MG number for MUX card 1 Unit number for the recovered MUX card which recovered from a clock b2 MG number for the recovered MUX card failure b3 0 1 fault recovery in the MUX No 0 system fault recovery in MUX No system b7 b4 b3 b2 bl faulty MUX is in ACT 11 EE eee 2 RLS Data RLS Data Clock alarm information on the recovered MUX card bl FH failure for 2M PCM Highway b7 63 b2 bl bO JCLK failure for 2M PCM Highway CHAPTER 3 NDA 24300 Page 230 Issue 1 SYSTEM MESSAGES SDT Alarm Warning Default Alarm Default Grade Grade Modified Lamp Modified NON 2 This message displays when an abnormal state is detected temporarily on the SDT PA SDTA B card It 0 XX00 24 0000 0000 0000 0000 35 0000 0000 00009 0000 DO 3 4 0000 0000 0000 0000 5 0000 0000 0000 0000 6 0000 0000 0000 0000 T 0000 0000 0000 284 0000 0000 20000 00007 Os 0001 0000 D MG Module Group b7 Even number MG Odd number MG b7
253. b0 b7 OOH After SMDR output buffer usage rate exceeds the value b7 b6 b5 b3 b2 bl assigned by ASYD SYS1 Index 249 the rate lowered less than the value assigned by Index 250 CHAPTER 3 NDA 24300 Page 108 Issue 1 SYSTEM MESSAGES System Initialize With Data Load Default Alarm NON Default Grade Grade Modified Lamp Modified 3 This message displays after the office data is loaded and system initialization has executed 4 0000 0000 0000 0000 5 7 0000 0000 0000 0000 8 1 XX0O0 0000 0000 2 0000 0000 0000 0000 3 0000 0000 0000 0000 v 0000 9009 0000 0000 6 0000 0000 0000 0000 9 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 b7 b4 b3 b2 bl 10 1L LETTE I 2 Load Status b7 b6 65 b4 63 62 bl LT TTT tT tt 515 511 b9 b8 ELI b2 b3 b4 b7 b8 b9 11 0 1 IPL PWR ON 0 1 Load Key OFF ON 0 1 IPL KEY MAT INITIAL 0 1 Program load is executed 0 1 Phasel Restart Note 1 Office Data Load Status 0 1 Load OK NG Call Forwarding Data Load Status 0 1 Load OK NG Individual Speed Calling Data Load Status 0 1 Load OK NG Wireless Call Forwarding Data Load Status 0 1 Load OK NG Name Display Data Load Status 0 1 Load OK NG Network DM Load Status 0 1 Load OK NG Local DM Load Status 0 1 Load OK NG 0 1 DM Load Non Load User assign Soft Key Data Load Status 0 1
254. ber Conditionally E Provided Provided 06 Call Star Call End Time Start Call End Time Provided Conditionally Conditionally E Provided Provided Provided 08 Condition B Information B Information Provided E Routing e Route Provided Provided Number 10 Dial Code Provided Conditionally Provided 11 Office Code Information For CCIS Conditionally Conditionally Provided Provided 12 Authorization Code Conditionally Conditionally Provided Provided 13 Condition C Information Billing Info Call Metalling Provided Conditionally Info Provided NDA 24300 CHAPTER 6 Page 415 Issue 1 SYSTEM OPERATIONS Table 6 4 Centralized Billing Fusion Kinds of Data Continued KIND OF CONTENTS DATA 14 Condition D Information Bill Notification Attendant Conditionally Console Number Provided 15 Department Code Conditionally Provided KK KL KM OUTGOING INCOMING STATION 16 Automatic Number Indication Conditionally Conditionally Provided Provided 17 Converted Number Conditionally Provided Note Conditionally Provided Information is provided when data is effective Provided Information is provided on every call with no exception Not available CHAPTER 6 NDA 24300 Page 416 Issue 1 Byte Data For more information on the data to which the Note pem marks are attached see Physical Reference Route Logical Route No 0 2 Tenant 3 digits
255. by NEC Engineers Error Drive b0 0 1 Drive Number 0 bl 0 1 Drive Number 1 b7 63 b2 bl bO b2 04 Drive Number 2 Note When 4 Error is Signal Code and D Error Drive are valid CHAPTER 3 NDA 24300 Page 140 Issue 1 SYSTEM MESSAGES 30H TSW ACT STBY Changeover Failure XXXX XXXX XXXX 2 XXXX 0000 0000 0000 3 0000 0000 0000 0000 y 7r OO 9 40 OOOO OOOO deg s OUGUO BOO OOOO os OOOO OOOO COUR OL 0000 0000 0000 0000 9 0000 0000 0000 0000 94 00009 0000 0000 0000 Detected Error Item 30H TSW ACT STBY Changeover Failure 2 Active TSW No bO 0 1 TSW 0 is ACT 1 is ACT b7 b0 IIILLLLJ MUX card ACT side linkage As shown in the following table each bit represents the Unit No allocated condition for each MUX card in position When 1 is set the corresponding MUX b7 b b5 b4 63 b2 bl card status ACT has a functional failure or is not mounted in the proper location LT TTT tT tt b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 bl bO OO MGI MGO e TSO OOO _ __ _ _ gt MG3 MG2 0 1 MUX connection error functional fault not mounted a MG5 MG4 NDA 24300 CHAPTER 3 Page 141 Issue 1 SYSTEM MESSAGES MUX card STBY linkage As shown
256. c DTFIOIN Route Traffic DTF102N Station Peg Count DTF103N Attendant Peg Count DTF104N Route Peg Count DTF105N Service Peg Count DTF201N UCD Route Peg Count DTF301N UCD Group Peg Count DTF302N UCD Station Peg Count DTF303N Attendant Ans Peg Count DTF501N Connection Route Peg Count DTF601N Connection Route Traffic DTF602N NDA 24300 CHAPTER 8 Page 583 Issue 1 DTF301N Display of UCD Route Peg Count Data for Fusion Network DTF301N Display of UCD Route Peg Count Data for Fusion Network 1 Functional Outline This command is used for displaying the result of traffic measurement data for 8 UCD Route Peg Count assigned by the ATREN command 2 Parameters Traffic Data 1 Terminal Traffic DTF101N Route Traffic DTF102N Station Peg Count DTF103N Attendant Peg Count DTF104N Route Peg Count DTF105N Traffic Data 2 Service Peg Count DTF201N Traffic Data 3 UCD Route Peg Count DTF301N UCD Group Peg Count DTF302N UCD Station Peg Count DTF303N Traffic Data 5 Attendant Ans Peg Count DTF501N Traffic Data 6 Connection Route Peg Count DTF601N Connection Route Traffic DTF602N CHAPTER 8 NDA 24300 Page 584 Issue 1 DTF302N Display of UCD Group Peg Count Data for Fusion Network 1 Functional Outline DTF302N Display of UCD Group Peg Count Data for Fusion Network This command is used for displaying the result of traffic measurement data for 9 UCD Group Peg Count assigned by the ATREN com
257. caller See table b7 66 65 b4 63 b2 bl 111 11111 NDA 24300 CHAPTER 3 Page 193 Issue 1 SYSTEM MESSAGES I O Port Line OFF Default Alarm Default Grade NON 1 Grade Modified Lamp Modified This message displays when the DR signal of the RS 232C connected to the port designated by the system data remains off for 30 consecutive seconds while the system is in service immediately after startup in the case of system start up 1 0000 0000 0000 2 0000 0000 0000 0000 3 0000 0000 0000 0000 D 4 0000 0000 0000 0000 5 0000 0000 0000 0000 6 0000 0000 0000 0000 7 0000 0000 0000 0000 8 0000 0000 0000 0000 9 0000 0000 0000 0000 D Faulty Port No 0 1 Link Down b7 b6 b5 b3 b2 bi 20 Portd pos Fong bl Port 1 b5 5 b3 Port 3 b7 Port7 CHAPTER 3 NDA 24300 Page 194 Issue 1 SYSTEM MESSAGES Port Line Restore Default Alarm Default Grade Grade Modified Lamp Modified NON 1 This message displays when 16 K I O Port Line Down Failure is restored to normal 1 0 0000 0000 0000 2 0000 0000 00007 0000 3 0000 0000 0009 0000 CD 4 0000 0000 0000 0000 5 0000 0000 0000 0000 60 0000 0000 0000 0000 7 0000 0000 0000 0000 8 0000 0000 0000 0000 9 0000 0000 0000 0000 D Faulty Port No 0 1 Link Down Port 0 04 Port4 57 b6 65 b3 b2 bl bl Port 1 bs b3 Port 3 b7 Port 7 NDA 24300 CHAPTER 3 Page 19
258. cessor Back Up PMBU Microprocessor Back Up 1 Functional Outline This command saves the contents of Port Microprocessor PM onto Floppy Disk FD or verifies them Information of firmware Program Code also appears on the screen Parameters Input data Direction Select Port Microprocessor to MAT Verify Port Microprocessor Verify PM with Error List Auto Verify Afterward can be performed when desig nating Port Microprocessor to MAT PM Information Module Group Unit Group Data Size 1 6 1 2 Kbytes 2 4 Kbytes 3 8 Kbytes 4 16 Kbytes 5 32 Kbytes 6 64 Kbytes Display data Office SP Number Information of firmware Program Code SP Issue Information of firmware Program Code NDA 24300 CHAPTER 8 Page 611 Issue 1 RALM Release Alarm RALM Release Alarm 1 Functional Outline This command clears the fault indications 2 Parameters Input data WRT Y Alarm is released N Not released RETURN TO MENU Y Return to MENU N Start operation again Display data Alarms Released CHAPTER 8 NDA 24300 Page 612 Issue 1 RALMN Release Alarm for NDM RALMN Release Alarm for NDM 1 Functional Outline This command available at the NCN only clears the fault indications of all the Nodes by clicking the release button on the display 2 Parameters Display data FPC FPC of alarm released Nodes Status Result of releasing the alarm OK NG NDA 24300 CHAPTER 8 Page 613 Issue 1 RLST Release Sta
259. check the lamp indicators shaded here CPR Face Layout WDT IMGO MT XY 3x IMG IMG2 IMG3 SYSTEM SELECTO AT on STEN STATUS a er E SYSTEM 700000000 SYSTEM SELECT2 CPURST SLOT No Note 1 7715 figure assumes that the CPR is equipped with PZ IO27 HDD FDD in place of PZ 1028 If PZ IO26 is used the MB Make busy key is not furnished on the card Note 2 The LED indication cited above is only an example The actual indicating patterns ON Flash OFF may vary depending on the system configuration Figure 6 58 Related Keys and LEDs for System Initialization CHAPTER 6 NDA 24300 Page 478 Issue 1 SYSTEM OPERATIONS Table 6 12 System Initialization Without Loading Procedure 1 7SEG LED OPE LAMP KEY SETTINGS CPU OPE lamp on the DSP of START active CPU lights steadily green IMGO0 3 lamps flash Confirm system is operating normally IMGO lamp on the DSP of mate Turn ON the EFFECT key on the TOPU See Figure 6 58 CPU flashes green Set the keys on the TOPU as follows PROGRAM KEY gt NON LOAD e SYSTEM DATA KEY NON LOAD NOBEEOAD LOAD Q O LOAD NON LOAD Press INITIAL START button on the TOPU PZ DK222 CPU OPE and IMGX lamps on both DSP go OFF HD Initial STATUS LED right on the CPU is ON H System Initialization STATUS LED right on t
260. cific ATTCON DESKCON etc e Faulty phenomena On lifting the handset dial tone 15 not heard but side tone 15 heard etc NDA 24300 CHAPTER 2 Page 33 Issue 1 SYSTEM MAINTENANCE OUTLINE e History of fault When did the fault occur What kind of repair procedure has been executed Does the fault still exist or not exist etc e Range of fault Range of fault should be reported Single line Specific trunk Specific circuit card Specific PIM Whole system etc 2 Circuit Card Version Number Program Name and Program Package Version Number of the circuit card See Figure 2 26 PA 16LCBE SPA 16LCBE SP 785 Circuit Card Name Circuit Card Version Number Program Name Program Package Version Number Right View of Circuit Card Figure 2 26 Circuit Card Version Number Program Name and Program Package Version Number CHAPTER 2 NDA 24300 Page 34 Issue 1 SYSTEM MAINTENANCE OUTLINE 4 2 Forwarding Faulty Circuit Card Method Send the faulty circuit card to the NEC agent to whom a request 15 made for a replacement card Adhere to the following procedure for sending the faulty circuit card 1 Insert connector covers onto the circuit card terminals 2 Put the circuit card into a static electricity protective bag 3 Pack the circuit card with air cap etc 4 Set the circuit card into the cardboard box for that specific circuit card 5 If multiple circuit cards are to be se
261. connection link exists the link is still maintained On the PA SDTA card set the MB key UP ON OPE lamp on the PA SDTA card is red The following occurs in call processing When card is in single configuration or mate card is faulty in dual configuration Already established calls while in speech lose voice tone Any connec tion link is severed after a few seconds NDA 24300 CHAPTER 4 Page 289 Issue 1 UNIT CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE Contents __ Static Sensitive Handlin g Precautions Required Remove the optical fiber cable from the front connector on the PA SDTA card Connect the new optical fiber cable to the front connector on the PA SDTA card On the PA SDTA card set the MB key DOWN and turn OFF Switch 4 of the P SW key steady green END CHAPTER 4 NDA 24300 Page 290 Issue 1 UNIT CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE Procedure to Replace PA SDTA PA SDTB ATTENTION START Contents Static Sensitive Precautions Required On the PA SDTA card turn ON Switch 4 ACT lamp PA SDTA card of the P SW key goes OFF Though any call attempt is rejected already established calls are safely maintained When any connection link exists the link 1s maintained Note When the card is in a dual configuration perform this for both system sides in the order of STBY ACT By using the
262. contact with the cleansing liquid Be careful to allow only the connector portion gold plated terminal to contact the cleaning liquid Note 2 Be sure to use fresh cleaning fluid FREON or isopropyl alcohol b Using a soft cotton cloth wipe both sides of the connector portion gold plated terminal clean only PA XX type circuit card as shown in Figure 2 23 Gold plated terminal Figure 2 23 How to Clean Gold Plated Terminal Note 1 Use cloth gauze etc to clean Note 2 After wiping be careful not to leave lint on the surface of the circuit card 5 When check on the flat cable or LT cable 15 directed in the tree check the following items a Make a visual check to see if the connector 15 properly connected b Poor connector contact may be responsible for the fault Repeat connection and disconnection a few times and check again to see if the connector 15 properly connected c Perform continuity test on the flat cable 6 When replacing the circuit card is directed in tree replace the circuit card with a spare as per Chapter 4 7 When multiple circuit cards appear to be faulty before replacing them with spares remount them one at a time into their slots to determine which cards should be replaced NDA 24300 CHAPTER 2 Page 29 Issue 1 SYSTEM MAINTENANCE OUTLINE START END 8 3 2 e The following 15 an example where the fault was recovered after the replacement of circuit cards Set th
263. cted within the system E 93 lamps for System Alarm MJ MN CHAPTER 6 NDA 24300 Page 392 Issue 1 SYSTEM OPERATIONS 1 4 Variable Alarm Indication This feature allows PBX users to make a flexible change of system message output grades which range 0 to 3 and alarm lamp grades which consist of MJ MN SUP and NONE Thus the PBX users can give a proper alarm grade to each system message according to their requirements When assigning no data the default alarm grades are automatically adopted COMMAND COMMAND FULL NAME ALMG Assignment of Alarm Grade Data 2 COLLECTION OF SYSTEM MESSAGES System messages are collected in the following ways e Automatic printout to the system message dedicated printer Automatic printout to the MAT printer e Printout by command 2 1 Automatic Printout to System Message Dedicated Printer Figure 6 4 shows the operating procedure Power on to printer Automatic If a message is registered the contents will Printout Status print out i Set printer port to Make Busy Buon dio status using MBSM command Figure 6 4 Automatic Printout to System Message Dedicated Printer Operating Procedure COMMAND COMMAND FULL NAME MBSM Make Busy of System Message Printout NDA 24300 CHAPTER 6 Page 393 Issue 1 SYSTEM OPERATIONS 2 2 Display on MAT Set Scanning to Scanning ON default on the Scanning PBX form to collect system messages If any mes sage 15 collected the info
264. ctions can be set up Section 2 4 Trunk COT DTI A connection results in no speech Fault Noise gets in an established connection 2 1 Check Point When repairing a trunk fault consider the following items 1 Check alarm lamps on trunk circuit cards 2 When an outgoing call cannot be originated to a specific trunk or when an incoming call cannot be termi nated from a specific trunk check Tenant Restriction Data assigned via ATNR command and Route Re striction Data assigned via ARSC command 3 Three Way Conference Trunk CFT is on the MUX PH PC36 circuit cards If a three way conference call cannot be established check the MUX cards 4 If the present timing for supervising the trunk sender status 18 considered to be responsible for the fault change the timing The specifications for timings that can be changed with respect to trunks and senders are shown in Table 5 4 and Table 5 5 CHAPTER 5 NDA 24300 Page 320 Issue 1 FAULT REPAIR PROCEDURES Table 5 4 Timings for Trunks ITEMS FOR STATUS SUPERVISION CONDITIONS FOR SUPERVISION TIMING SPECIFICATIONS Detection of Call Ring Down System Ringing signal of more than 4 cycles Termination Detection by ringing signal 20Hz from is detected within 800 ms the opposite office Loop System Detection within 16 ms after call Detection by loop from the opposite office termination E amp M System Detection by incoming signal ground or 48V on RG2
265. d check to see if a station to station connection can be set up and identify a circuit card responsible for the fault 6 3 Control System Fault STBY Side Is Faulty Faulty Situation START END Fault has occurred in the STBY side of dual configuration system 0 I STBY CPU Failure The ACT side has become faulty and system changeover has executed 0 0 H 0 J Processor Failure ACT side Replace STBY side related circuit cards CPU GT TSW MUX EMA with a spare and check When a fault 1s not indicated set the faulty systems to STBY side in advance by executing CPU changeover Refer to Section 12 System Control Procedures in Chapter 6 NDA 24300 FAULT REPAIR PROCEDURES ATTENTION Contents Static Sensitive Handling Precautions Required Replace the circuit cards CPU GT TSW MUX EMA individually by referring to the following paragraphs in Chapter 4 Section 1 3 1 CPR Replacement Procedure Section 1 3 2 EMA Card Replacement Procedure Section 2 3 1 Card Replacement Procedure Section 2 3 2 TSW Card Replacement Procedure Section 3 3 2 MUX Card Replacement Procedure Place the circuit cards CPU GT TSW MUX into ACT mode by executing CPU changeover Refer to Section 12 1 6 Manual System Changeover of Speech Path System in Chapter 6 Check to see if a station to station connection can be set up to identify the circuit card responsible for the fault
266. d numbered MG 111 NDA 24300 CHAPTER 3 Page 163 Issue 1 SYSTEM MESSAGES CCH B Level Infinite Loop Failure Temporary Default Alarm Default Grade Grade Modified Lamp Modified SUP 1 This message displays when B level infinite loop of the Port Microprocessor PM in the CCH DCH circuit card has occurred 1 XX00 0000 0000 0000 2 0000 0000 0000 0000 3 0000 0000 0000 0000 y7 4t 0000 99909 009009 0000 54 0009 80009 00090 0000 78009 0000 09090 0000 OOOO WOOO sos QODO WOOO OOOO OOOO Se OOOO WOOO Location of faulty CCH DCH card Group No b5 b6 Unit No 0 3 67 b b5 b4 63 02 bl 50 b7 Even numbered MG Odd numbered MG 111 CHAPTER 3 NDA 24300 Page 164 Issue 1 SYSTEM MESSAGES CCS Link Failure Permanent Default Alarm Default Grade Grade Modified Lamp Modified 1 SUP This message displays when a failure has occurred numerous times to a common channel signaling link and the link has been placed into make busy state 1 XXXX O 4 0000 0000 0000 0000 5 Xxo0 0000 0000 2 0000 0000 0000 0000 3 0000 0000 0000 0000 y7 0009 0009 0990 0009 0000 0900 0000 OOOO WOOO sos QODO WOOO OOOO OOOO Se OOOO WOOO D Location of faulty CCH DCH 4 Group No b5 b6 Unit No 0 3 67 b
267. d numbered MG NDA 24300 CHAPTER 3 Page 205 Issue 1 SYSTEM MESSAGES CCH MB Key Turn OFF Default Alarm Default Grade Grade Modified Lamp Modified NON 3 This message displays when the MB switch on the CCH DCH card is turned OFF while extracting or inserting a circuit card or at PM initialization etc 1 XX00 0000 0000 0000 2 0000 0000 0000 0000 3 0000 0000 0000 0000 y7 4t 0000 99909 009009 0000 54 0009 80009 00090 0000 78009 0000 09090 0000 OOOO WOOO sos QODO WOOO OOOO OOOO Se OOOO WOOO D Location of CCH DCH card b0 b4 Group No b5 b6 Unit No 0 3 b7 66 b5 b4 b3 62 61 bO b7 No 0 1 Even numbered MG Odd numbered MG CHAPTER 3 NDA 24300 Page 206 Issue 1 SYSTEM MESSAGES Day Night Change Information Default Alarm Default Grade Grade Modified Lamp Modified NON 0 This message displays when the NIGHT switch on the ATTCON DESKCON 18 operated or when the DAY NIGHT change is executed by the external switch operation 1 XXXX XXXX 0000 0000 2 0000 0000 0000 0000 3 0000 0000 0000 0000 09 00 4 0000 0000 0000 0000 5 0000 0000 0000 0000 6 0000 0000 0000 0000 WOOO OOOO se O00 WOOO OGG ODO O OOOO WOOO Tenant No b0 b3 Tenant No 1 15 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 bl b4 b7 Tenant No over 15 TT
268. de Grade Modified Lamp Modified SUP 3 This message displays when a call terminates to the Emergency Telephone 1 XXXX XXXX XXXX 2 XXXX 0000 0000 3 0000 0000 0000 0000 um ci NS xs run qu ek Oo 20 00 08 20 OW 4 0000 0000 0000 0000 5 0000 0000 0000 0000 6 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 QUOO 20000 30000 0000 0000 0000 09000 Os 0001 0000 D Called Station Emergency DCO lst digit Telephone No ASCII Code Ist digit DC1 2nd digit DC2 3rd digit DC3 4th digit DC4 5th digit DC5 6th digit b7 b b5 b4 63 b2 bl 9 2 Calling Station No ASCII DCO 1st digit Code DC 2nd digit b7 b6 b5 54 63 b2 bl DC2 3rd digit DC3 4th digit ceni 2 DCS 6th digit 9 9 CJ NDA 24300 CHAPTER 3 Page 99 Issue 1 SYSTEM MESSAGES Emergency Control Start Default Alarm Default Grade Grade Modified Lamp Modified NON 3 This message displays when the LCR Attendant Manual Override is set at the Attendant Desk Console 1 zy 0000 0000 0000 25 0000 0000 0000 0000 35 0000 0000 0000 0000 CD 4 0000 0000 0000 0000 5 0000 0000 0000 0000 6 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 QUOO 20000 30000 0000 0000 0000 09000 Os 0001 0000 D Route Selection Time Pattern No assigned at Att
269. detected b Lamp Indications on the TOPU When a fault occurs the corresponding lamp on the TOPU indicates the location of the fault For the meaning of each lamp indication refer to Chapter 6 NDA 24300 CHAPTER 2 Page 17 Issue 1 SYSTEM MAINTENANCE OUTLINE 2 6 1 2 3 4 5 Range of Faults Specification Upon receiving a fault report from a station user or an operator the technician can assume a faulty card exists if the range to be affected by the fault can be determined For the detailed procedure refer to Chap ter 5 Use the following actions to check the MDF a Check the LENS of the reporter Station or ATTCON DESKCON b Check other circuits of the circuit card in which the reporter station lineor ATTCON DESKCON is located c Check the other groups other circuit cards mounted in the same module in the module in which the reporter is located d Check lines in each of the other modules on the basis of plural lines If the fault cannot be detected by the system a fault related to the speech path such as noise during speech one way speech speech inability the range of a through d itemized above should be limited When a major fault is detected in the dual systems the CPU or TSW system automatically changes over if the fault range 15 c and d In this case the whole module involved is placed into make busy status even if the fault is partial and the station lines currently
270. dicating Panel Fault is not detected Section 7 3 Fault That Cannot Be Detected Power Supply Fault Fuse for RGU 48V has blown Section 8 2 Fuse Blown Fault The circuit breaker of PWR supply is off Section 8 3 Circuit Breaker OFF Fault in PWR Supply Alarm lamp on the PWR supply is lit Section 8 4 Fault of Alarm Lamps on PWR Supply e Fan are not activated even if the temperature has risen Section 9 2 Fan Unit Fault higher than a predetermined degree e Fans not activated even if the FAN START switch Fan Unit Fault is set to AUTO position System Down Fault Cause for the fault cannot be identified Section 11 1 When Cause for Fault Cannot Be Identified The faulty circuit card can be detected Section 11 2 When Faulty Circuit Cards Can Be Assumed From System Message CCIS Line Fault A Specific CCH CCT card is faulty When the signal Section 12 3 Specific CCH CCT transmission line is a digital line transmission re Card Is Faulty and ceiving of control signals cannot be performed Section 12 4 Fault of CCH DTI and Related Flat Cable When the signal transmission line is an analog line transmission receiving of control signals cannot be performed CHAPTER 5 NDA 24300 Page 310 Issue 1 FAULT REPAIR PROCEDURES Table 5 1 Fault Repair Procedure Quick Reference Continued FAULTY ITEM FAULTY SITUATION REFERENCE SECTION ISDN Line Fault A specific DCH PRT is faulty Section 13
271. display only Note This parameter appears when only on LP is set in ALL ONE input data CHAPTER 8 Page 522 Issue 1 NDA 24300 ALMG Assignment of Alarm Grade Data ALMG Assignment of Alarm Grade Data 1 Functional Outline This command is used to make a flexible change of system message output grades Thus the PBX user can give a proper alarm grade to each system message according to their requirements When no data is assigned the default alarm grades are automatically adopted Note This command cannot change the alarm grade for system message 6 A Parameters Input data FK Fault Message Kind 0 7 10 17 20 27 30 37 FI Fault Message Index A Z LMP Fault Message Lamp Data 0 3 O Lamp OFF 1 SUP Lamp ON 2 MN Lamp ON 3 MJ Lamp ON GRD Printout Grade 0 3 TY PE Listup Type 1 All Data 2 Changed Data 3 Default Data SYSM GRD System Message Output Grade Note Messages 1 Used 2 MN MJ Grade Messages 3 MJ Grade Messages Note When using ALMG command for system message output grade assignment be sure to set ASYD SYS I Index 91 b2 and b3 0 0 For more information refer to the Office Data Specifications NDA 24300 CHAPTER 8 Page 523 Issue 1 ATRF Assignment of Traffic Measurement Order ATRF Assignment of Traffic Measurement Order 1 Functional Outline This command is used to assign and delete traffic measurement programs A request for traffic measurement
272. displays the designated trunk status busy idle at predetermined intervals A maximum of 15 routes can be scanned 2 Parameters Input data RT Route Number Interval Time Display data Number of Idle TK Number of Busy NDA 24300 CHAPTER 8 Page 623 Issue 1 SRTS_LR Scanning of Route Status Logical Route Number SRTS_LR Scanning of Route Status Logical Route Number 1 Functional Outline This command displays the designated trunk status Busy Idle at predetermined intervals maximum 15 routes Route number of the SRTS command can be assigned by using logical route number Note 1 When logging in to the NCN Network Control Node the data of other LN Local Node can be changed If logging in to a LN only the DM of self Node can be changed by this command Parameters Input Data LGRT Logical route number 1 899 Note Interval Interval Time of two scan 2 999 Note Prior to this command logical route number must be allocated by the ALRTN command Display Data FPC Fusion Point Code 1 253 RT Route of Route Number Number of Idle Busy TK CHAPTER 8 NDA 24300 Page 624 Issue 1 XHFD X RAY HD or FDD Diagnosis XHFD X RAY HD or FDD Diagnosis 1 Functional Outline This command is used to execute the following diagnoses Hard Disk Diagnosis By executing read write check on the files in the hard disk of the PBX this command diagnoses the hard disk for its normality If an error has been found as a result o
273. djust the time and date using the MAT command 3 25 PM WED 1 Figure 7 3 Desk Console CHAPTER 7 NDA 24300 Page 508 Issue 1 ROUTINE MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE 2 11 System Check START Check the OPE lamps green on all circuit cards Check whether a system message pertaining to the CPU TSW has been output Check speech conditions by establishing a station to station connection at each PIM If the condition is abnormal determine the nature of the problem dial tone cannot be heard no speech can be established etc Does the condition occur in No 0 TSW orin No 1 TSW Does the condition occur in No 0 CPU or in No 1 CPU Using MEM_HDD command check the data memory END NDA 24300 CHAPTER 7 Page 509 Issue 1 ROUTINE MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE 3 ROUTINE MAINTENANCE CHECK LISTS This section provides check lists Maintenance Procedure Reports to be used when performing routine main tenance The Routine Maintenance Check Lists consists of the following items e Maintenance Procedure Report e Trunk Tie Line Register Sender Trunk RST Digital Conference Function Speech Path for each PIM and Ringing Generator Unit e Attendant Desk Console CHAPTER 7 NDA 24300 Page 510 Issue 1 ROUTINE MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE SIGNATURE OF WORK TIME SUPERVISOR FROM Name of User Company Date Maintenance Routine Non Classification
274. ds can be activated by your direct log in operation onto the MAT but in normal cases the com mands are to be activated automatically at predetermined intervals assigned by the ATRF ATREN command Also each command below corresponds to the Traffic Measurement assigned by the ATRF ATR EN command When performing traffic measurement on a node basis Measurement TYPE Command Fill Command Name by ATRF Command Name Terminal Traffic DTF101 Display of Terminal Traffic Data 2 Route Traffic DTF102 Display of Route Traffic Data 3 Station Peg Count DTF103 Display of Station Peg Count Data ATTCON Peg Count DTF104 Display of Attendant Peg Count Data Route Peg Count DTF105 Display of Route Peg Count Data Un ATT Answer Peg Count DTF501 Display of Attendant Answering Peg Count Data 8 Connection Route Peg Count DTF601 Display of Connection Route Peg Count Data 19 Connection Route Traffic DTF602 Display of Connection Route Traffic Data When performing traffic measurement on a network basis via TCP IP Measurement TYPE Command by Command Full Command Name 3 Display of UCD Route Peg Count Data for Fusion Network Display of UCD Group Peg Count Data for Fusion Network Display of UCD Station Peg Count Data for Fusion Network Display of Attendant Answering Peg Count Data for Fusion Network Connection Route Peg Count DTF601N Displa
275. e connected to the system e Current status of each switch Explanation of each switch function When MAT is in Off Line Mode not connected to system Explanation of each switch function Note 1 When using this command make sure that each circuit card related database files have already been installed to your MAT See FLINST command for more information 2 Parameters Input Data KIND Display Kind selection MAT On Line Mode MAT Off Line Mode TYPE Circuit Card Type selection Line Trunk Package Control Package PMN Port Micro Processor Number PKG NAME Circuit Card Name LP Local Partition Number 00 06 Even Number only Note 2 SYSTEM System Note 2 O No 0 System 1 System MG Module Group Number 00 07 Note 2 UNIT Unit Number 0 3 Note 2 ACT STB Y ACT ST BY information Note 2 l ST BY 2 Not used No IOC Card Number 0 1 Note 2 Note 2 This parameter may appear when Control Package is selected in the TYPE parameter Buttons Get Click to view the display data Page Up Click to view the next page data when next page exists Page Down Click to return to the previous page data Exit Click to exit this command Display Data PKG Name Circuit Card Name Firm Name Issue Firm Name Issue of the circuit card Each switch data is also displayed on the dedicated display page CHAPTER 8 NDA 24300 Page 562 Issue 1 DSTN Display of Statio
276. e Turn ON the MB key on the card buffer OPE lamp on the IOC card goes Extract the card from the LPR Set the keys on the new card referring to the card to be replaced NDA 24300 CHAPTER 4 Page 261 Issue 1 UNIT CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE Turn ON the MB and MBR keys on the new card Insert the new card into the LPM Turn OFF the MB key on the card Turn OFF the MBR key on the card END CHAPTER 4 NDA 24300 Page 262 Issue 1 Contents __ Static Sensitive Handling Precautions Required OPE lamp on the IOC is red Release of I O ports new IOC card is initialized and I O port channels reopens OPE lamp is green UNIT CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE 1 3 4 Power Supply Unit Replacement Procedure ATTENTION Contents __ Static Sensitive Handlin Precautions Required CPU System Set the mode of the PWR UNIT PZ PW92 Changeover to be replaced into STBY mode Refer to Section 12 1 2 in Chapter 6 On the EMA PH PC40 card set EMA SUP switch UP Disconnect the power alarm cable from the PALM connector on the PZ PW92 PWR PZ PW92 h Cable Name to be disconnected CPU 0 10AL 110 FLT CA CPU 1 10AL 130 FLT CA Turn OFF the SW key the PWR UNIT 4 INPWR ALM Disconnect the power cables from the OUTPWR connector
277. e in On the PWR SW PH PW14 card set the SW key DOWN P ON lamp on the PWR SW card goes OFF ALM lamp on PWR SW card 15 red Extract the PWR SW card to be replaced from the TSWM On the new PWR SW card set the SW key DOWN P ON lamp on the new card is OFF Insert the new PWR SW card into the TSWM ALM lamp on the PWR SW card is red P ON lamp on the new card is steady green ALM lamp on the PWR SW goes OFF On the new PWR SW card set the SW key UP END NDA 24300 CHAPTER 4 Page 281 Issue 1 UNIT CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE 2 3 6 MISC Card Replacement Procedure START On the MISC card set MB switch UP Extract the MISC card from its mounting slot Insert the new circuit card into the same mounting slot On the MISC card set MB switch DOWN END CHAPTER 4 NDA 24300 Page 282 Issue 1 Fo ATTENTION Contents Static Sensitive Handling Precautions Required Keep MB switch UP UNIT CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE 3 PIM Accommodating Circuit Card Replacement Procedure This section covers the procedures for replacing circuit cards mounted in the PIM IMG0 1 2 3 3 1 Precaution e Use this procedure to replace a faulty circuit card with a spare to check a spare card There are functional switches having set the default switch on some of the circuit cards to be placed As for switch setting on the circuit cards confirm the ci
278. e 1 SYSTEM MESSAGES 6 Receiving Path Failure Receiving Path Error Abnormal state is detected in the process of multiplexing the Receive signals To restore this perform the following 7 STEP 1 STEP 2 STEP 3 Initialization of SDT card distant node Initialize the SDT card in the distant node and observe the situation If the fault 1s not restored proceed with STEP 2 Initialization of SDT card self node Initialize the SDT card in the self node and observe the situation If the fault 15 not restored proceed with STEP 3 Replacement of SDT card It cannot be confirmed which node side self node or distant node is faulty By referring to Chapter 4 Section 3 3 3 SDT Card Replacement Procedure first replace the SDT card only in one of the nodes When the fault does not recover then also replace the SDT card in other side of the nodes Pointer Failure Sending Path Failure Sending Path Error Abnormal state is detected in the process of multiplexing the Send signals To restore this perform following STEP 1 STEP 2 Initialization of SDT card Initialize the SDT card in self node and observe the situation If the fault 18 not restored proceed with STEP 2 Replacement of SDT card By referring to Chapter 4 Section 3 3 3 SDT Card Replacement Procedure replace the SDT card in the self node with a spare NDA 24300 CHAPTER 3 Page 235 Issue 1 SYSTEM MESSAGES SDT Al
279. e 6 14 System Initialization with Program Loading From HD Procedure 3 7SEG LED OPE LAMP KEY SETTINGS CPU OPE lamp on the DSP of START active CPU lights steadily green IMGO 3 lamps flash Confirm system 15 operating normally Turn ON the EFFECT key on the See Figure 6 58 lamp on DSP of active CPU flashes green Set the keys on the TOPU as follows SYSTEM DATA PROGRAM KEY LOAD FROGRM RON TOAD e SYSTEM DATA KEY NONLOAD LOAD NON LOAD PZ DK222 Press INITIAL START button on the TOPU CPU OPE and IMGX lamps on both DSP go OFF HD Initialization STATUS LED right on the DSP of CPU is ON H Program Load STATUS LED right on the DSP of CPU 15 ON the DSP of active CPU System Initialization STATUS LED right on is ON Li System starts up again CPU OPE lamp on the DSP of active CPU lights steadily green IMGO0 3 lamps flash lamp on the DSP of mate CPU flashes green STATUS LED right on the DSP of active CPU Li is ON ON LINE NDA 24300 CHAPTER 6 Page 481 Issue 1 SYSTEM OPERATIONS Table 6 15 System Initialization With Office Data And Program Loading From HD Procedure 4 ACTION Confirm system is operating normally Turn ON the EFFECT key on the TOPU See Figure 6 58 Set the keys on the TOPU as follows PROGRAM KEY LOAD e SYSTEM DATA KEY LOAD Press INITIAL START button on HD Initia
280. e Hold 70H Call Forwarding Memory Clear Normal End AOH Periodic Back up Normal End COH Detection of Remaining Link Normal End Note The data in this area will be diverse according to the diagnosis specified in For details on each item data see the following pages CHAPTER 3 NDA 24300 Page 124 Issue 1 SYSTEM MESSAGES 00H Routine Diagnosis Start 1 O0O0XX XX00 0000 0000 2 0000 0000 0000 0000 3 0000 0000 0000 0000 1 OOOO OOOO 0000 0000 5 0000 2000105 0900 0000 9000 200005 0000 OOOO 73 0009 0000 0000 0000 85 00009 0000 0000 0000 95 0000 0000 0000 0000 D Performed Diagnosis Item 008 Routine Diagnosis Start 2 Pending Diagnosis Menu 5 1 0 l Program Memory Verification Index 89 bl 0 1 Data Memory Verification b2 Q I TSW ACT STBY Changeover 67 b6 b5 b4 b3 bl bO 3 ori CPU ACT STBY Changeover IIIIILLLII b4 0 1 Trunk Ineffective Hold Check b5 0 1 Trunk Ineffective Hold Detection b6 0 1 Call Forwarding Memory clear b7 ACT STBY changeover 3 Pending Diagnosis Menu SYSI b0 Not used Index 90 bl Periodic Back up b2 b7 Not used b7 bl tt tte Ey NDA 24300 CHAPTER 3 Page 125 Issue 1 SYSTEM MESSAGES 10H Program Memory Verification Normal End 1 1OXX XXx00 0000 0000 2 O 4 0000 0000 0000 0000 5 73 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000
281. e Ist circuit card back into its mounting slot If the fault recurs Replace the circuit card Set the 2nd circuit card back into its mounting slot If the fault recurs Replace the circuit card Set the 3rd circuit card back into its mounting slot If the fault recurs Replace the circuit card If a circuit card is found to be faulty send the faulty circuit card for repair The fault may be a temporary one or due to poor contact of the circuit card Observe the situation for a while When a fault recovery is completed use the RALM command to clear all the alarm indications and registered system messages If required restore temporary cross connections and transient data for testing to the original ones How to Follow Diagnostic Procedure Fault Repair Procedure a Diagnostic Work A fault diagnostic procedure by system message is explained in the TREE format on an individual system message basis Proceed with judgment as to whether the fault status coincides with the indicated status following the sequence beginning from START How to proceed with the diagnosis work is explained in Figure 2 24 STEP 1 Determine whether the fault coincides with the fault status 1 in Figure 2 24 STEP 2 Ifthe fault status does coincide the fault is indicated by 2 Repair the fault by referring to relevant section in Chapter 5 Otherwise proceed to 3 STEP 3 Perform the work indicated by 3 The result of the wo
282. e M button is held continuously the time will advance one minute each second STATION TRUNK NUMBER Ie 34556 Figure 7 2 Adjusting Time on ATTCON NDA 24300 CHAPTER 7 Page 507 Issue 1 ROUTINE MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE 2 Desk Console Check START Ask the operator at each DESKCON if the DESKCON is operating normally On the DESKCON control panel each operator presses the L3 SRC and Release keys simultaneously and confirms that all the lamps on the control panel light red Operator presses the key and confirms that all the lamps on the same transverse line between the EMG and Mute lamps light green Refer to Figure 7 3 Operator presses the key and confirms that all the green lamps in the step above go OFF and the LCD on the DESKCON displays black Operator presses the key and confirms the black LCD display is cleared and a ringing tone 1s heard Operator presses the key and confirms the provided ringing tone has suspended Operator presses the keys on the DESKCON one by one and confirms that each lamp corresponding to the pressed key emits a light and the name of the key displays on the LCD respectively Operator presses the button and completes the lamp checks Note 1 Operator checks the displayed time on the right part of LCD Note 2 END Note 1 The lamp checks be suspended any time when the key on the control panel is pressed Note 2 The DESKCON obtains time information only from the PBX side Therefore a
283. e MBLE command For the make busy cancellation choose 0 for the MB box On each circuit card basis using the MBPM command or operating the MB toggle key on the card e Assign the required LENS number in the MG UNIT and Group parameters and choose 3 for MB box of the MBPM command e For the make busy cancellation choose 2 for the MB box or Set to UP the MB key on the circuit card ON e For make busy cancellation return MB key down OFF NDA 24300 CHAPTER 6 Page 401 Issue 1 SYSTEM OPERATIONS 6 2 Class Change and Number Change of Station and Data Terminal Figure 6 12 shows the procedure for class change and number change of station and data terminal Line Make Busy Refer to Section 6 1 Class change and number For changing class use ASCL command Note 1 change For changing station number use ASTN command Note 2 Line Make Busy Cancel B Refer to Section 6 1 END Note 1 For guest station of Hotel System use AGCL command Note 2 For guest station of Hotel System use AGSN command Figure 6 12 Class Change and Number Change of Station and Data Terminal Procedure 6 3 Make Busy Make Busy Cancel of C O Line Tie Line Figure 6 13 shows the procedure to make busy make busy cancel of C O line tie line For make busy make busy cancel by line basis MBLE Make Busy Make Busy Cancel of command C O Tie Line For make busy make busy cancel by route basis MBRT c
284. e MBR key on the new card DOWN CHAPTER 4 NDA 24300 Page 270 Issue 1 UNIT CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE Contents __ Static Sensitive Handlin Precautions Required EMA SUP lamp on the EMA card goes On the EMA card set the EMA SUP switch DOWN System Changeover Replaced GT STBY to ACT Mate GT ACT to STBY Y Check the following lamp indications on the new GT card and the DSP of the CPR which controls the GT OPE MB GT card Steady green CPU OPE CPU DSP Steady green e MG0 3 CPU DSP Flash green Flip the MBR key on the DSP of CPU which controls the mate GT Confirm the new GT functions normally Note MG2 3 lamp indications may vary depending on the system configuration Check the following lamp indications on the mate GT card and the DSP of the mate CPR GT card OFF CPU OPE CPU DSP OFF e IMGO CPU DSP Flash green e IMGI 3 CPU DSP OFF Note system changeover of GT can be executed also by using the CMOD command For details refer to Chapter 8 Maintenance Commands NDA 24300 CHAPTER 4 Page 271 Issue 1 UNIT CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE 2 3 2 Note TSW Card Replacement Procedure The TSW PH SW12 card is located in the Slot Nos ranging from 12 to 19 within the TSWM Equipped with the Time Division Switch TSW and Speech Path Controlling Interface INT the card s main f
285. e Module Group Unit data is assigned by the AFMU command Refer to the Fusion Network System Manual for more information CHAPTER 8 NDA 24300 Page 560 Issue 1 DPKG Display of Setting Port Package DPKG Display of Setting Port Package 1 Functional Outline This command is used to display the circuit card name accommodated in each Group of a specific UNIT Note When using this command make sure that each circuit card related database files have already been installed to your MAT See FLINST command for more information 2 Parameters Input Data MG Module Group MG number 00 07 UNIT Unit U number 0 3 Buttons Get Click to get information on mounted circuit cards Close Click to exit this command Note When the Input Data above is entered and the Get button is pressed the related circuit card name is displayed on a Group basis However if the name is not found for some reasons the following mark may appear in the relevant display field Unidentifiable firmware type Data not found in the database 8 Group data not assigned gt Circuit card name not found for the card is in make busy state etc NDA 24300 CHAPTER 8 Page 561 Issue 1 DPSW Display Package Switch Status DPSW Display Package Switch Status 1 Functional Outline This command is used to display the following information on a Line Trunk or Control circuit card When MAT is in On Line Mod
286. e The port status 15 stored in the memory and updated continuously 2 Message Judgment Criteria Table 6 2 describes the message judgement criteria Table 6 2 Message Judgment Criteria System data is assigned and DR signal is ON Port Abnormal System data is assigned and DR signal is OFF Output of Port Disconnected This message 15 output when Port Abnormal status has lasted for 30 seconds This message is immediately output if port abnormal occurs after the IOC card is initialized Output of Port Status Restored This message 15 output when DR signal is ON for the port about which Output of Port Disconnected message is output CHAPTER 6 NDA 24300 Page 400 Issue 1 SYSTEM OPERATIONS 6 LINE MANAGEMENT The following explanations apply to line management 6 1 1 2 3 Make Busy Make Busy Cancel of Station and Data Terminal Class Change and Number Change of Station and Data Terminal Make Busy Make Busy Cancel of C O Line Tie Line Make Busy Make Busy Cancel of Station and Data Terminal Stations and data terminals can be put into make busy state by the following operations On each station basis using the MBST command Assign the station number in the STN parameter and choose 1 for the MB box of the MBST command For the make busy cancellation choose 0 for the MB box On each circuit basis using the MBLE command Assign LENS number in the LENS parameter and choose 1 for the MB box of th
287. e Traffic DTF602 NDA 24300 CHAPTER 8 Page 569 Issue 1 DTF105 Display of Route Peg Count Data DTF105 Display of Route Peg Count Data 1 Functional Outline This command displays the result of traffic measurement data for Type 5 Route Peg Count assigned by the command 2 Parameters Traffic Data 1 Terminal Traffic DTF101 Route Traffic DTF102 Station Peg Count DTF103 Attendant Peg Count DTF104 Route Peg Count DTF105 Traffic Data 2 Service Peg Count DTF201 Traffic Data 3 UCD Route Peg Count DTF301 UCD Group Peg Count DTF302 UCD Station Peg Count DTF303 Traffic Data 5 Attendant Ans Peg Count DTF501 Traffic Data 6 Connection Route Peg Count DTF601 Connection Route Traffic DTF602 CHAPTER 8 NDA 24300 Page 570 Issue 1 DTF201 Display of Service Peg Count Data DTF201 Display of Service Peg Count Data 1 Functional Outline This command displays the result of traffic measurement data for Type 6 Service Peg Count assigned by the command 2 Parameters Traffic Data 1 Terminal Traffic DTF101 Route Traffic DTF102 Station Peg Count DTF103 Attendant Peg Count DTF104 Route Peg Count DTF105 Traffic Data 2 Service Peg Count DTF201 Traffic Data 3 UCD Route Peg Count DTF301 UCD Group Peg Count DTF302 UCD Station Peg Count DTF303 Traffic Data 5 Attendant Ans Peg Count DTF501 Traffic Data 6 Connection Route Peg Count DTF601 Connection Route Traffic DTF602 NDA 24300 CHAPTER 8 Pa
288. e details on the Traffic report specified 09252 000 09215 859 09179 718 09143 576 09107 435 09071 204 09035 153 08999 012 by Page UP Page 09252 000 09215859 09179 718 09143 576 09107 435 09071294 09035 153 08999 012 09252 000 09215859 09179 718 09143 576 09107 435 09071 294 09035 153 08999 012 09252 000 09215859 09179 718 09143 576 09107435 09071294 09035 153 08999 012 DOWN buttons 09252 000 09215859 09179 718 09143 576 09107 435 09071294 09035 153 08999 012 09252 000 09215 859 09179 718 09143 576 09107 435 09071 294 09035 153 08999 012 09252 000 09215859 09179 718 09143576 09107 435 09071 294 09035 153 08999 012 Shown here LS an example of a 09252 000 09215859 09179 718 09143 576 09107 435 09071 294 09035 153 08999 012 09252 000 09215859 09179 718 09143576 09107 435 09071294 09035 153 08999 012 certain first page of Terminal 09252 000 09215859 09179 718 09143576 09107 435 09071294 09035 153 08999 012 09252 000 09215859 09179 718 09143576 09107 435 09071294 09035 153 08999 012 Traffic Data DTF101 2 09252 000 09215859 09179 718 09143576 09107 435 09071294 09035 153 08999 012 09252 000 09215859 09179 718 09143576 09107 435 09071294 09035 153 08999 012 09252 000 09215859 09179 718 09143576 09107 435 09071294 09035 153 08999 012 09252 000 09215859 09179 718 09143576 09107 435 09071294 09035 153 08999 012 Level 0 Level 1 Level 2 Level3 Level 4 Level 5 Level 6 Level 7 cancer EM 0 Cose _
289. e technicians occasionally may confront a situation in which they have to manually control the system This chapter describes system control procedures focusing on the following four items e Changeover Make busy Make busy Cancel of Equipment e Initialization e How to Turn On Off the Whole System e System Start up Note Changeover of equipment is available for common control equipment which is provided in a dual con figuration 121 Changeover Make Busy Make Busy Cancel of Equipment 12 1 1 Note General This section explains system operations which are necessary for Changeover Make Busy Make Busy Cancel of equipment dividing them into the following two blocks CPU Block e Switching Block TSW PLO Prior to performing these operations see Figure 6 37 through Figure 6 47 to obtain general under standing on the system configuration Figure 6 37 shows a general block diagram of a dual configuration system Referring to the diagram confirm the routes to be affected by any of the following operations CPU Changeover The ACT STBY of CPU can be changed over by using the CMOD com mand or operating the MBR key on the CPU front panel If the system of CPU is changed over the ACT STBY of GT in TSWM as well as of the belonging ISAGT and LANI are also changed over The changeover of CPU can be performed by operating the CPU SEL key on the EMA 40 card However this method is not normally used except in cas
290. eady been established remain connected Ports processing a call origination may be released Initial Restart All ports on the circuit card are forcibly released to be placed in idle state CHAPTER 3 NDA 24300 Page 70 Issue 1 SYSTEM MESSAGES Lock Up Failure Permanent Default Alarm Default Grade Grade Modified Lamp Modified MN 3 At the periodic interval the CPU sends diagnosis data to the Port Microprocessor PM on LC TRK cards in order to monitor the PM If the CPU cannot receive the return data within a predetermined period of time the system displays this data When the failure is detected more than 15 times per hour the failure is judged as permanent 14 0000 5000 0000 0000 60009 4000 0000 0009 0000 D 4 0000 0000 0000 0000 5 0000 0000 0000 0000 6 0000 0000 0000 0000 7 0000 0000 0000 0000 8 0000 0000 0000 0000 9 0000 0000 0000 0000 D Faulty Circuit Card Location b0 b4 Group b5 b6 Unit 0 3 57 b6 65 64 53 62 bl b7 Module Group 0 1 Even numbered MG Odd numbered MG Reference See Chapter 5 Section 6 2 for the repair procedure NDA 24300 CHAPTER 3 Page 71 Issue 1 SYSTEM MESSAGES Lock Up Failure Temporary Default Alarm Default Grade Grade Modified Lamp Modified SUP 1 At the periodic interval the CPU sends diagnosis data to the Port Microprocessor PM on LC TRK cards in order to monitor the PM If the CPU ca
291. ects the ACT STBY of GT in the TSWM Refer to Figure 6 44 for more information also check the lamp indications on the GT 9 card GT PH GTO9 GT Active FRONT VIEW Figure 6 44 GTin ACT STBY Mode NDA 24300 CHAPTER 6 Page 463 Issue 1 SYSTEM OPERATIONS 2 Check the mate CPU s STBY mode Also check the mate GT s STBY mode Refer to Fig ure 6 43 and Figure 6 44 WANN The system changeover of CPU can be done only when the mate CPU is in STBY mode Do not attempt the changeover if the mate CPU is closed STEP 2 Flip the key on DSP of the active CPU Refer to Figure 6 45 After the above steps set the MBR key as shown below The system changeover starts automatically ATTENTION DSP Active Figure 6 45 CPU Changeover via MBR Key Note fthe MBR key remains in the UP position the CPU stays in its make busy status Be sure to return the key to the DOWN position except in the case of a special purpose STEP 3 Confirm the changed lamp indications To confirm the CPU changeover check the lamps in Figure 6 46 on both DSPs LED indica tions must change as shown when the CPU system has been correctly changed over CPU Formerly Active After Changeover CPU OPE Steady ON green IMGO Flash green Flash green IMG1 3 Flash green OFF MB OPE GT Card Steady ON green CPU OPE Steady ON green IMGO Flash green Steady ON green IMG1 3 OFF Flash green MB
292. ed MG Odd numbered MG 111 NDA 24300 CHAPTER 3 Page 161 Issue 1 SYSTEM MESSAGES CCH Lock Up Failure Temporary Default Alarm Default Grade Grade Modified Lamp Modified SUP 3 This message displays when a Port Microprocessor PM of the CCH DCH card did not send an answer to the CPU 1 XX00 0000 0000 0000 2 0000 0000 0000 0000 3 0000 0000 0000 0000 y7 4t 0000 99909 009009 0000 54 0009 80009 00090 0000 78009 0000 09090 0000 OOOO WOOO sos QODO WOOO OOOO OOOO Se OOOO WOOO Location of faulty CCH DCH card Group No b5 b6 Unit No 0 3 67 b b5 b4 63 02 bl 50 b7 Even numbered MG Odd numbered MG 111 CHAPTER 3 NDA 24300 Page 162 Issue 1 SYSTEM MESSAGES CCH B Level Infinite Loop Failure Permanent Default Alarm Default Grade Grade Modified Lamp Modified SUP 3 This message displays when B level infinite loop of the Port Microprocessor PM in the CCH DCH circuit card has occurred 1 XX00 0000 0000 0000 2 0000 0000 0000 0000 3 0000 0000 0000 0000 y7 4t 0000 99909 009009 0000 54 0009 80009 00090 0000 78009 0000 09090 0000 OOOO WOOO sos QODO WOOO OOOO OOOO Se OOOO WOOO Location of faulty CCH DCH card Group No b5 b6 Unit No 0 3 67 b b5 b4 63 02 bl 50 b7 Even numbered MG Od
293. ed an ac knowledgment signal from the opposite office As a result the attempted outgoing call is routed to Reorder Tone ROT connection 1 XXXX XXOX 2 XXXX XXXX XXXX 3 XXXX yy MOX RCM Oe H0 90 96 00 2 2 4 0000 0000 0000 0000 5 0000 0000 0000 0000 6 0000 0000 0000 0000 ie 0009 9090 00909 0000 85 0009 2000 00909 0000 295 0000 08007 0000 0000 In Case of Station OG ATT OG ATT Tandem Connection D Type of connection and station b0 b2 Digits of station number origination number digits b6 b7 OH Station OG connection 4H ATT OG connection 67 b b2 bl CH ATT Tandem connection 1 LLLI D Calling station number See table b7 66 55 b4 b3 bl NDA 24300 CHAPTER 3 Page 187 Issue 1 SYSTEM MESSAGES Tenant No of calling station Hex 67 data 0 1 When OPTN data of is valid 1 displays 97 b6 b2 bl _ bO b3 Tenant of calling station e bit7 0 Tenant No 16 Refer to the OPTN bit Z gt 15 lt No lt 255 data of OPTN data b0 b3 OPTN data Note b7 b3 62 61 LII 11 Note This data displays when the Tenant No of the calling station is larger than 15 and bit7 of displays as 1 otherwise O displays at any time While the four bit data of is self sufficient in verifying
294. ed code Call Origination by Call Forwarding Outside Call Origination by Call Forwarding Outside amp dialing with accounted code re oon acd Call was transferred Billing is continued Call was transferred amp billing is continued Call was transferred to last called party ROT m CHAPTER 6 NDA 24300 Page 420 Issue 1 SYSTEM OPERATIONS Data 09 Alternate Routing Information KK Incoming Route Number KL FPC1 Physical Logical FPC2 Physical Logical 3 digits RT No 1 RT No 1 8 digits RT No 2 RT No 2 FPC1 FPC actually used Physical Route No 1 Physical route actually used Logical Route No 1 Logical route actually used FPC2 FPC first selected Physical Route No 2 Physical route first selected Logical Route No 2 Logical route first selected Data 13 Condition C Information Billing Info Call Metering Info Biling Info Call Metering Charge Data Basic Charge Unit x 10 Charge Data Basic Charge Unit x 10 Charge Data Basic Charge Unit x10 In case of Charge Data Basic Charge Unit x10 lt Charge Data Basic Charge Unit 104 Billing Information Charge Data Basic Charge Unit 109 No Charge Information Charge Information for 1 cent unit Charge Information for 0 1 cent unit Charge Information for 10 cent unit Charge Information for 1 unit Charge Information for 10 unit Calling Metering 4 digits Charge Information Error JU cee eae NDA 24300 CH
295. eee eee NA MBR CPUOPEWDT IMGO vl m N e YF IMG2 IMG3 e e CTT PT TT hod ood Kl FRONT VIEW NDA 24300 CHAPTER 4 Page 253 Issue 1 UNIT CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE Circuit Card Installation Into New CPR This procedure shows how to install the new CPR into the LPM ATTENTION 1 Detach the front panel of the new CPR by using the Phillips screwdriver to remove Static Sensitive Handlin the four screws as shown in Figure 4 9 Then lift the top cover by removing the Precautions Reguli d eight screws As shown in the figure below detach the front panel of the new CPR by removing the 4 screws Then also lift away the top cover by removing the 8 screws Top Cover Front Panel Figure 4 9 Removal of Front Panel and Top Cover From CPR CHAPTER 4 NDA 24300 Page 254 Issue 1 UNIT CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE 2 Insert the ISAGT PZ GT13 and LANI PZ PC19 cards into the following slots of the new CPR refer to Figure 4 10 ISAGT PZ GT13 Slot 6 ISA Ganten n Static Sensitive LANI PZ PC19 Slot 0 PCI For Netfusing Link Precautions Required LANI PZ PC19 Slot 1 PCI When connecting MAT 10 BASE T and PCI buses LANI PZ PC19 Slot 3 PCI When LANI for Netfusing Link 15 in dual configuration Note The location of the second LANI PCI Slot 3 is optional This figure example shows how to in
296. efault Grade Grade Modified Lamp Modified MN 3 This message displays when a grave failure occurs on the SDT PA SDTA B card If this is issued remember the ACT STBY change of the SDT card may be followed as a result of fault detection in the optical fiber line see 33 E message 15 XXXX 0000 0000 0000 2 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 andan amd DO 4 0000 0000 0000 0000 5 0000 0000 0000 0000 6 0000 0000 0000 0000 7 0000 0000 0000 0000 8 0000 0000 0000 0000 9 0000 0000 0000 0000 D MG Module Group b7 0 1 Even number MG Odd number MG b7 2 Details on alarm 54 63 b2 b0 b7 54 b3 62 bl a es 00 001 Hardware Failure SDT Card 00 010 Optical Line Failure Troubl 00 011 Onboard Power Alarm HOME 00 100 Abnormal MB Key Operation 01 000 01 001 PCM Loss 01 010 Frame Alignment Loss 52M Interface 01 011 Receiving Section Failure 01 100 Mistake Rate Degradation 01 101 Sending Section Failure 01 110 Mistake Detection 10 000 10 001 Receiving Path Failure 10 010 Pointer Failure VC 11 Path 10 011 Sending Path Failure Trouble 10 100 Receiving Path Error 10 101 Sending Path Error Note b7 SDT Card Status 0 1 No 0 System No 1 System Note Fault repair procedure on each alarm is shown on the next page NDA 24300 CHAPTER 3 Page 233 Issue 1 SYSTEM MESSAGES Repair Procedure Depending on fault status shown in data perform necessary repair work 1 Hardw
297. elephone No 25 digits 0 0 ORIG Note n Called Tenant Party econ 3 digits Information ven Mili Second 120 STN No No 7 6 digits 0 1 1 6 125 60 Account Code UA 130 Account 3 digits Code Max 16 User Group digits 65 Number For more information on the data to which the Note marks are attached see Reference Figure 6 19 Message Format for Station to Station Call Fusion NDA 24300 CHAPTER 6 Page 419 Issue 1 SYSTEM OPERATIONS Reference Data 02 Calling Party Information Station Number Station No Tenant No RT TK No 6 digits 3 digits Originating Source Identification ORIG 0 Transmitted data depicts information on Station ORIG 1 Transmitted data depicts information on Attendant Console ORIG 2 _ Transmitted data depicts information on Trunk Data 08 Condition Information Call Origination Direct Call Origination via ATTCON Call Origination Direct Alternate Routing Call Origination via ATTCON Alternate Routing Call Origination Direct LCR Routing Call Origination via ATTCON LCR Routing Call Origination Direct Called No first 6 digits of change code Call Origination via ATTCON Called No first 6 digits of change code Call Origination by OG Queuing Call Origination by dialing with accounted code Call Origination by OG Queuing amp dialing with account
298. em Changeover of Speech Path System in Chapter 6 END CHAPTER 5 Page 350 Issue 1 NDA 24300 ATTENTION Contents Static Sensitive Handlin Precautions Required Check to see if a station to station connection can be set up and identify a circuit card respon sible for the fault Perform the above check by extracting the MUX circuit cards individually Set MB switch of the PLO circuit card to UP side Confirm OPE lamp on the PLO circuit card of the mate system illuminates Extract PLO circuit card from its mounting slot Set MB switch UP and insert the new PLO cir cuit card into its mounting slot Set MB switch DOWN Set MB switch of the ACT side PLO circuit card UP Confirm that the new PLO circuit card becomes the ACT side OPE lamp on the new card lights green Set MB switch of the STBY side PLO DOWN Confirm that speech can be carried out normal ly by a station to station call 2 For Single Configuration START Check to see if the fault occurs by extracting TSW circuit cards one by one Check to see if the fault occurs by extracting MUX circuit cards one by one NDA 24300 FAULT REPAIR PROCEDURES ATTENTION Contents Static Sensitive Handling Precautions Required Replace the TSW circuit card referring to Section 2 3 2 TSW Card Replacement Procedure in Chapter 4 Check to see if a station to station connection can be set up and identify a TSW circuit card responsible for t
299. em PLO No 1 system b7 CHAPTER 3 NDA 24300 Page 156 Issue 1 Default Alarm SYSTEM MESSAGES PLO MB Key Turn OFF NON Default Grade Grade Modified Lamp Modified 3 This message displays when the MB switch on the PLO card is turned off while extracting or inserting a circuit card 1 00 0000 0090 2 4t 0009 90909 09000 0000 5 Te O00 WOOO OOOO 9 0000 0000 0000 0000 3 0000 0000 0000 0000 0909 0000 0990 00009 7 00009 0009 0900 0000 WOOO OOOO OOOO er VOJO DOGU 0000 Faulty PLO card No b7 Tt 2 Status of PLO card at the time of failure detection Scan Data 1 b7 b 55 b4 63 b2 bl ITI TIT 3 Status of PLO card at the time of failure detection Scan Data 2 b7 b4 bl 1 tt 1 0 1 PLO No 0 system PLO No 1 system Clock STBY ACT bl PLO Synchronizing PLO self running or drifting b2 Input clock down b3 b4 Route of Input clock see table b5 PLO input all down Connected With Primary Connected With Oscillator M OSC External Clock opp Rae 3 Route 3 b6 PLO output down b7 Drifting 0 1 n x 5msec clock down bl Frame Synchronization down from SYNC b4 Internal OSC clock down NDA
300. em can be changed over only when the mate system is in STBY mode Do not attempt the changeover if the mate Speech Path System is closed Legend E LampisOFF Lampis OFF S PH SW12 N pike PH PC20 N PH PC36 TSW ST BY DLKC ST BY MUX ST BY Figure 6 50 TSW DLKC MUX in STBY Mode NDA 24300 CHAPTER 6 Page 469 Issue 1 SYSTEM OPERATIONS Note Because this 4 IMG uses multiple TSW and MUX cards be sure to check all the circuit cards concerned which are in the same Switching Block For example if your system adopts the fully expanded system you must check a total of 4 TSW cards and a total of 16 MUX cards in this step Improper key operations may result in a system down Operate the related keys using extreme care STEP2 Flipthe MBR key on the active GT card Refer to Figure 6 51 After STEP 1 and STEP 1 5 are taken set the MBR key as shown below The system changeover starts automatically ATTENTION GT Active Figure 6 51 Speech Path System Changeover via Active GT MBR Key Note f the MBR and MB keys are turned ON UP the GT card is forcibly placed in a make busy status Therefore do not operate the MB key by mistake Also after the MBR key is flipped be sure to return the key to the original position DOWN STEP3 Confirm the changed lamp indications 1 To confirm the imposed Speech Path System changeover check all the lamps on the cards shown in Figure 6 52
301. en numbered MG No Trunk Ineffective Hold b2 Unit 2 Even numbered MG No Trunk Ineffective Hold b3 Unit 3 Even numbered MG No Trunk Ineffective Hold b4 Unit 0 Odd numbered MG No Trunk Ineffective Hold b5 Unit 1 Odd numbered MG No Trunk Ineffective Hold b6 Unit 6 Odd numbered MG No Trunk Ineffective Hold b7 Unit 3 Odd numbered MG No Trunk Ineffective Hold NDA 24300 SYSTEM MESSAGES 70H Call Forwarding Memory Clear Normal End ee 1900 QUOD 0900 0000 2 0000 QUOD 0000 0000 9 0000 OOOO OOO ODOD D Ae OUO OOOO OOOO OOOO bs 9090 GOOG COCO Q000 lt 6 0000 GOOG QOOQ 0000 Jt 0000 0000 0000 00909 9 0009 0000 0990 0000 95 00009 0000 0006 0000 D Routine Diagnosis 70H Call Forwarding Memory Clear Normal End NDA 24300 CHAPTER 3 Page 131 Issue 1 SYSTEM MESSAGES Periodic Back up Normal AOXX XX00 0000 xx00 2 0000 0000 0000 0000 3 eye eye ev oo o OOOO COUR OOOO os UU 00 000000 0000 0000 0009 0000 8 0000 0000 0000 0000 9 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 D Routine Diagnosis AOH Periodic Back up Normal 2 Information on Periodic Backup 0 0 1 Normal end Abnormal end b7 bl TIILI Normal End bl 0 1 HFD1 Normal end Abnormal end Backup Data to No 0 system 0 1 Individual Speed Calling Data 57 b 65 b4 63 b2 bl
302. endant Desk Console bO b2 Pattern No 1 7 b7 b2 bl Note Route Selection Time Pattern 0 7 corresponds to TDPTN No 0 7 in the AOPR command CHAPTER 3 NDA 24300 Page 100 Issue 1 SYSTEM MESSAGES Emergency Control Stop Default Alarm Default Grade Grade Modified Lamp Modified NON 3 This message displays when the LCR Attendant Manual Override 1s cancelled at the Attendant Desk Console ie 0000 0000 0000 2 0000 0000 0000 0000 3 0000 0000 0000 0000 CD 4t 0000 OUOU OOOO 29000 50000 0000 0000 0000 cof 9000 0000 20000 T SDOUO 09000 290900 OOOO JOO 0D 290900 QUO 95 10000 0000 0000 0000 D Suspension of Emergency Control p0 Fixed 0 0 Outgoing call restriction 15 released by Attendant Desk Console b7 ILIILLLI Note Route Selection Patterns 0 7 corresponds to TDPTN No 0 7 in the AOPR command NDA 24300 CHAPTER 3 Page 101 Issue 1 SYSTEM MESSAGES Abnormal Call Duration Data Default Alarm Default Grade Grade Modified Lamp Modified NON 0 This message displays when the system detects abnormal duration in the line connection between the calling and called party When the calling and called party establish a line connection and continue the hook up for an extremely short or long period of time predetermined by the AS YD command SYS1 Index 45 46 this mes sage 15 created 1 XXXX XXXX XXXX ae 2
303. ent to the server to disconnect the connection In response to this text the server promptly performs processing to disconnect the connection Data length Device ACK Text sending direction Client Server 8 TRAFFIC MANAGEMENT To obtain the value of common equipment usage the system provides traffic measurement feature It can im prove the system efficiency 8 1 Kind of Traffic Measurement Table 6 5 shows the kinds of traffic measurements Table 6 5 Traffic Measurement Types KIND OF TYPE DESCRIPTION MEASUREMENT 1 Terminal Traffic Measurement of traffic on a per LENS basis and measurement of the total traffic on Measurement a PIM basis 2 Route Traffic Measurement of traffic on a per route basis Measurement Station Peg Count Measurement of the number of outgoing connections intra office calls outgoing C O line calls Tie Line calls etc originated by each station NDA 24300 CHAPTER 6 Page 425 Issue 1 SYSTEM OPERATIONS Table 6 5 Traffic MeasurementTypes Continued KIND OF TYPE MEASUREMENT DESCRIPTION 4 ATTCON Peg Count Measurement of the number of each type of call handled at theATTCON DESKCON Route Peg Count Measurement of the number of various types of call connections on a per route basis Measurement of the number of times the following services are operated Call Hold Call Back Executive Right of Way Call Waiting Call Pickup Group Call Pickup Direct
304. equest Text from the client m Data length Device Sequence Billing data 2 XXXXX No No IPX Format Note Note Text format of billing data is IPX format only Refer to Section 7 2 9 Text Format of Centralized Billing Fusion Text sending direction Client 4 Server The number of billing data records is 64 or less 3 Identifier 3 Server Response Text A text to be sent to the client when there is no billing data to send in response to 1 Data Request Text or as a response to a 5 Status Monitoring Text Text Data length Device Response Text sending direction Client 4 Server 4 Identifier 4 Client Response Text A response text to be sent to the server by the client which has received the data by a 2 Sending Data Text Data length Device Se ACK Parit 00002 quence No Text sending direction Client Server CHAPTER 6 NDA 24300 Page 424 Issue 1 SYSTEM OPERATIONS 5 Identifier 5 Status Monitoring Text A text for use in monitoring the server status from the client s viewpoint or the client from the server s viewpoint At the same time the text is used to notify the server of the client status Client Data length Device device ACK Parit 00005 information y Text sending direction Client Server 6 Identifier 6 Connection Disconnect Text A text to be sent from the cli
305. er Note 2 START END MB Make Busy Information 0 2 0 Idle 1 Make Busy Outgoing 2 Make Busy Bothway Note 3 Note 1 Prior to this command logical route number must be allocated by using the ALRTN command Note 2 The status of plural trunks can be changed simultaneously according to the range of trunk number assigned and per a logical route Note 3 2 Make Busy Bothway is not used Display Data FPC Fusion Point Code 1 253 RT Route Number NDA 24300 CHAPTER 8 Page 605 Issue 1 MBTK Make Busy of Trunk MBTK Make Busy of Trunk 1 Functional Outline This command assigns the Idle Busy status of trunks 2 Parameters RT Route Number TK Trunk Number MB Idle 1 Make Busy Outgoing CHAPTER 8 NDA 24300 Page 606 Issue 1 MBTK_LR Make Busy Trunk Logical Route Number MBTK_LR Make Busy Trunk Logical Route Number 1 Functional Outline This command is used to assign the IDLE BUSY status of trunks Route number of the MBTK command can be assigned by using logical route number Note 1 When logging in to the NCN Network Control Node the data of other LN Local Node can be changed If logging in to a LN only the DM of self Node can be changed by this command 2 Parameters Input Data LGRT Logical route number 1 899 Note 1 TK Trunk Number 1 255 MB Make Busy Information 0 2 Idle 1 Make Busy Outgoing 2 Make Busy Bothway Note 2 Note 1 Prior to this comm
306. ernative Route Restriction 1 Functional Outline This command is used to continuously assign delete the restriction data of relay connections between the outgoing route and the incoming route 2 Parameters Input Data TYPE ICRT START END OGRT START END ARI A RES ARI D RES Display Data ICRT OGRT STATUS CHAPTER 8 Page 530 Issue 1 Assign Delete Incoming Route Logical Number External Route only Outgoing Route Number External Route only Restriction Data for Alternative Route Index A 0 1 Restriction of the trunk to trunk tandem connection via ATTCON or station when a C O Tie Line call terminates O Alternate routing is restricted 1 Alternate routing is allowed Restriction Data for Alternative Route Index D 0 2 Restriction of the trunk to trunk tandem connection by Direct Dial Access from a station when a C O Tie Line call terminates O Alternate routing is restricted 1 Alternate routing is allowed 2 Toll Restriction 15 restricted Incoming Route Outgoing Route OK or error message is displayed NDA 24300 CARRN Continuous Assignment of Alternative Route Restriction for NDM CARRN Continuous Assignment of Alternative Route Restriction for NDM 1 Functional Outline This command is used to continuously assign delete the restriction data of relay connections between the outgoing route and the incoming route The data assigned by this command is written in the Net
307. ery Operation Default Alarm Default Grade Grade Modified Lamp Modified SUP 1 This message displays when the battery is operated in the DRU system 14 9000 D000 0000 2 10000 0000 0000 0000 Se 160000 0000 0000 0000 CD 4 0000 0000 0000 0000 5 0000 0000 0000 0000 6 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 QUOO 20000 30000 0000 0000 0000 09000 Os 0001 0000 D Accommodated location b0 b4 Group No b5 b6 Unit No 0 3 b7 66 65 63 62 bl b7 No 0 1 Even numbered MG Odd numbered MG CHAPTER 3 NDA 24300 Page 174 Issue 1 SYSTEM MESSAGES DRU Line Operation Default Alarm Default Grade Grade Modified Lamp Modified NON 0 This message displays when the main power of the DRU system is restored to normal r en OOOO 0000 0000 27 O00 DOOU DUO OOU 0000 0000 D 4 0000 0000 0000 2000 5 0000 0000 0000 0000 6 000V 0000 0000 0000 Te COOO 0000 0000s 2000 ae DOO 000000007 9e 0000 DOQO C000 0000 D Accommodated location b0 b4 Group No b5 b6 Unit No 0 3 b7 56 b4 53 bl b7 Even numbered MG Odd numbered MG NDA 24300 CHAPTER 3 Page 175 Issue 1 SYSTEM MESSAGES Power Failure Default Alarm Default Grade Grade Modified Lamp Modified NON 3 This message displays when a PWR circuit card failure is detected 1 X
308. es of unavoidable circumstances Refer to Sec tion 12 1 2 How to Control CPU Block Speech Path Changeover The ACT STBY of Speech Path System can be changed over by using the CMOD command or operating the MBR key on the active GT circuit card If the system of Speech Path is once changeover all the TSW DLKC and MUxX in the same switching block are also totally changed over NDA 24300 CHAPTER 6 Page 455 Issue 1 SYSTEM OPERATIONS PLO Changeover Though PLO 15 included in the switching block together with the TDSW and DLKC its ACT STBY changeover should be performed inde pendently by operating the MB key on the card The changeover of PLO does not affect any other systems IMGO IMG1 IMG2 IMG3 Line Trunk PM Line Trunk Line Trunk PM Line Trunk PM E U U 0 UU OTS OIZ Sino lt lo Slo lt lt lt m lt IS lt lt m lt lt lm I IC II T I II II I I II II II 3029 0 0 SM 0 0 5 5 0 gt 5 0 0 o d HO d UNA M M MUX c 3l gt lt
309. explains the fault repair procedure when any of the faults shown in Table 5 12 occur to a specific ISDN Table 5 12 ISDN Line Fault Situation FAULTY SITUATION REFERENCE SECTION A specific CCH CCT card is faulty Section 13 3 Specific DCH PRT Card Is Faulty When the signal transmission line is a digital line transmitting Section 13 4 Fault of DCH DTI and Related Flat receiving of control signals cannot be performed Cable 13 1 Check Point When repairing an ISDN Line fault consider the following items 1 Check alarm lamps on the DCH or PRT circuit card 2 Refer to Figure 5 24 and check the cable connection 13 2 ISDN Line Control The DCH PRT circuit card controls the signal link digital of the ISDN line and transmits receives call processing information The signal link controls permit normal transmission and reception of call processing information Figure 5 24 shows the ISDN line control route LT Cable gt To ISDN Line LT Cable Figure 5 24 Controlling ISDN Line CHAPTER 5 NDA 24300 Page 386 Issue 1 13 3 Specific DCH PRT Card Is Faulty START END Check by replacing the DCH PRT card with a spare NDA 24300 FAULT REPAIR PROCEDURES On DCH PRT card set MBR switch UP On DCH PRT card set MB switch UP and extract the card from its mounting slot Make switch setting on a new DCH PRT card On new DCH PRT card set MBR and MB switches UP and insert the card into its mounting sl
310. external line is reversed it is detected in the form of Trunk Ineffective Hold START When OPE lamp on the trunk circuit card does not illuminate When BL lamp 15 flashing or illuminating on the trunk circuit card NDA 24300 FAULT REPAIR PROCEDURES ATTENTION Contents Static Sensitive Handling Precautions Required Confirm that MB switch of the trunk circuit card is in ON position UP side Confirm that trunk data ATRK command in the trunk circuit card is assigned Replace trunk circuit card with a spare Confirm that MB switch of trunk circuit card is in ON position UP side Use MBTK command to confirm that trunk circuit card has not been placed into make busy state Check trunk data ATRK command assignment Replace trunk circuit card with a spare CHAPTER 5 Page 325 Issue 1 FAULT REPAIR PROCEDURES ATTENTION Contents Static Sensitive Handling Precautions Required Check the faulty line on the MDF If the C O Tie Line is in Loop Start system Isolate the faulty line to C O side and to the system side Connect the test telephone to the C O side Note 1 Check can be made Confirm that Dial Tone DT 15 heard only on temporarily and the call is connected to the desti opened C O Tie Lines nation party at the opposite office Note 2 Cross connection If C O Tie Line is any other type than Loop methods are explained on Start the following pages By cross connections on the
311. f the diagnosis this command displays the information on the faulty logical drive and the number of faulty sectors on the MAT screen The information can also be output by the printer e Floppy Disk Diagnosis By executing cleaning of the floppy disk drive in the PBX this command diagnoses the floppy disk drive for its normality If the cleaning has not finished normally a diagnosis error has been found as a result of the diagnosis The result message may be displayed on the MAT screen or printed out by the printer 2 Parameters Input Data FUNCTION HD FDD Designation 1 2 1 Diagnosis of HD Hard Disk 2 Diagnosis of FDD Floppy Disk Drive AREA Area Designation Note Files 1 Program Files SYSTEM System 0 1 O No 0 System 1 No 1 System Note AREA parameter appears only when I is selected in the FUNCTION parameter Buttons Exe Click to execute the diagnosis Close Click to exit this command NDA 24300 CHAPTER 8 Page 625 Issue 1 XHFD X RAY HD or FDD Diagnosis Display Data FAULT DRIVE FAULT SECTOR MESSAGE CHAPTER 8 Page 626 Issue 1 Fault Drive Number 0 4 0 1 0 2 3 2 4 3 Number of Fault Sector 0 65535 Result of diagnosis 0 255 O Normal End Hard disk read test practice error 2 Floppy disk drive cleaning practice error 3 Common part parameter error Data length error 4 FDD cleaning abnormal end FD not in drive 5 Individual part p
312. fice Data And Program Loading From HD Procedure 4 482 Table 6 16 System Initialization by Phase 1 Restart Procedure 5 483 Table 6 17 system Initialization by Keys on CPU Front Panel Procedure 484 Table 6 18 System Initialization by SINZ Command Procedure 485 Table 6 19 Line Trunk Initialization Procedure 486 Table 6 20 Start Up When Basic amp Application Software Is Installed Procedure 1 490 Table 6 21 Start Up When Basic Application Software and Office Data Installed Procedure 2 492 Table 7 1 Test EDUIDIDORE and TOG 2 sence bess TES 496 Table 7 2 List of Routine Maintenance Procedures 497 Table 8 1 P Q 519 Table 8 2 Type of Traffic Measurement Explanation 524 Table 8 3 Type of Traffic Measurement Explanation 525 Table 8 4 Telephone Equipment Number Explanation 552 LIST OF TABLES NDA 24300 Page xiv Issue 1 Table Table 8 5 Table 8 6 Table 8 7 Table 8 8 LIST OF TABLES CONTINUED Title Page Internal Route Number Explanation 553 Route Number Explanation
313. fied 3 Explanations will be omitted pertaining to the following faults e Fault of peripheral equipment MAT telephone sets etc e Fault due to an error in office data assignment Fault due to an error in installation procedure an error in circuit card switch setting cross connection etc 4 How to Read This Manual When a fault is to be repaired for the first time See Section 3 How to Read Precautions Diagnostic Go to Chapter 5 and Fault Repair Information Chapter 2 See Section 4 Reporting Fault to NEC in Chapter 2 NDA 24300 CHAPTER 1 Page 1 Issue 1 INTRODUCTION e When only the contents of a system message needs to be known or when a fault is to be diagnosed from a system message Chapter 5 When the range of faulty conditions has been specified and a faulty circuit card can be assumed Chapter 5 See Section 4 Reporting Fault to NEC in Chapter 2 When investigating the system for the purpose of a fault repair See Section 2 Basic Knowledge in Chapter 2 Chapter 5 e When replacing a unit circuit card with a spare Chapter 4 When performing routine maintenance Chapter 7 CHAPTER 1 NDA 24300 Page 2 Issue 1 CHAPTER2 SYSTEM MAINTENANCE OUTLINE 1 GENERAL 1 1 Purpose This chapter explains the outline of fault diagnosis and duties necessary to maintain the PBX 1 2 Administrative Management Procedures Figure 2 1 shows the work flow of the administrative man
314. for the repair procedure CHAPTER 3 NDA 24300 Page 42 Issue 1 4 Data Load Result after restart processing bl b2 b7 b b5 b4 63 b2 bl b4 b5 b15 b11 b9 b6 b7 dis b9 11 SYSTEM MESSAGES 0 1 Office Data Load gt End Abnormal End 0 1 Data Load gt Normal End Abnormal End 0 1 Individual Speed Calling data load is Normal End Abnormal End 0 1 PS transfer service data load is Normal End Abnormal End 0 1 PS Name Display service data load is Normal End Abnormal End 0 1 Network DM Load gt Normal End Abnormal End 0 1 Local DM Load gt Normal End Abnormal End 0 1 DM Non Load 0 1 User Assign Soft Key data load is Normal End Abnormal End 0 1 Number Sharing data load is Normal End Abnormal End Note 2 0 1 Call Block data load is Normal End Abnormal End Note 1 Phase 1 Restart is executed when initializing the system without disrupting the following two way connections that have already been established Basic two way connections STN STN STN TRK TRK TRK Fixed connections Two way connections established on a Fusion link For more details see Chapter 6 Section 12 2 3 Note 2 Number sharing data load also affects the data load of Dual Station Calling Over FCCS NDA 24300 CHAPTER 3 Page 43 Issue 1 SYSTEM MESSAGES CPU Clock Down Default A
315. g numerical order U 2 U 3 Slot No jus E 06 fm Len EI 13 17 21 23 H 5 Jeee CHAPTER 8 24300 538 Issue 1 CBCN Control of Broadcasting for NDM CBCN Control of Broadcasting for 1 Functional Outline This command is used to specify the destination of NDM data broadcast from the NCN This command is available only at the NCN Network Control Node 2 Parameters Input Data TYPE ALL AII the Nodes ONE One designated Node FPC FPC of the designated Node Note Interval Broadcasting Interval Note 7715 parameter appears when ONE is selected at TYPE parameter NDA 24300 CHAPTER 8 Page 539 Issue 1 CCSE Change of Common Signaling Channel Equipment CCSE Change of Common Signaling Channel Equipment 1 Functional Outline This command is used to set reset the make busy state of CCH circuit card 2 Parameters CCH LENS LINK MB Line Equipment Number of CCH circuit card 5 digits MGzXX UNIT X GROUP XX Link Status 0 2 O Link Open 1 Link Close 2 Not Available Make Busy Information 0 2 0 Idle 1 Busy 2 Not Available Note This command cannot be used for the ISDN related circuit card such as PRT DCH CHAPTER 8 Page 540 Issue 1 NDA 24300 CDBU 1 Functional Outline CDBU Change of Dch Backup Change of Dch Backup
316. ge 571 Issue 1 DTF301 Display of UCD Route Peg Count Data DTF301 Display of UCD Route Peg Count Data 1 Functional Outline This command displays the result of traffic measurement data for Type 8 UCD Route Peg Count assigned by the ATRF command 2 Parameters Traffic Data 1 Terminal Traffic DTF101 Route Traffic DTF102 Station Peg Count DTF103 Attendant Peg Count DTF104 Route Peg Count DTF105 Traffic Data 2 Service Peg Count DTF201 Traffic Data 3 UCD Route Peg Count DTF301 UCD Group Peg Count DTF302 UCD Station Peg Count DTF303 Traffic Data 5 Attendant Ans Peg Count DTF501 Traffic Data 6 Connection Route Peg Count DTF601 Connection Route Traffic DTF602 CHAPTER 8 NDA 24300 Page 572 Issue 1 DTF302 1 DTF302 Display of UCD Group Peg Count Data Display of UCD Group Peg Count Data Functional Outline This command displays the result of traffic measurement data for Type 9 UCD Group Peg Count assigned by the ATRF command Parameters Traffic Data 1 Traffic Data 2 Traffic Data 3 Traffic Data 5 Traffic Data 6 Terminal Traffic DTF101 Route Traffic DTF102 Station Peg Count DTF103 Attendant Peg Count DTF104 Route Peg Count DTF105 Service Peg Count DTF201 UCD Route Peg Count DTF301 UCD Group Peg Count DTF302 UCD Station Peg Count DTF303 Attendant Ans Peg Count DTF501 Connection Route Peg Count DTF601 Connection Route Traffic DTF602 NDA 24300 CHAPTER 8 Page 573 Issue
317. gs WO iF 3 SYSTEM SELECTO STATUS Ag E E 1100000000 o SLOT No OOI OSIIN OpOd Hd VIN3 ra 2 m Tz E e 5 feso 2 2 Dos i E 2 FRONT VIEW Note place of PZ IO27 the CPR may be equipped with PZ IO28 which does not have the MB Make busy key Figure 4 1 Circuit Card Mounting Face Layout of LPM CHAPTER 4 NDA 24300 Page 240 Issue 1 UNIT CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE 1 3 Operating Procedures The following paragraphs provide operating procedures to replace unit circuit cards of the LPM Perform the operations that correspond to each Reference Item specified in Table 4 1 Table 4 1 LPM Unit Circuit Cards and Reference Items UNIT CIRCUIT CARD REFERENCE ITEM REMARKS Section 1 3 1 CPR Replacement Procedure LANI EMA Card Section 1 3 2 EMA Card Replacement Procedure IOC Card Section 1 3 3 IOC Card Replacement Procedure PWR Unit Section 1 3 4 Power Supply Unit Replacement Procedure BEEN MISC Card Section 1 3 5 MISC Card Replacement Procedure Improper key operations may result in a system down Operate the key using extreme care WARNING Duri es uring replacement of a circuit card the system issues system messages and activates the related alarm Reset the indicated alarm after completing the replacement procedure If the indicated alarm is cleared via the RALM command t
318. h 0 1 No 0 system No 1 system 57 bl bO bl side clock Reference See Chapter 4 Section 2 3 2 for the circuit card replacement procedure NDA 24300 CHAPTER 3 Page 63 Issue 1 SYSTEM MESSAGES TSW ACT Change Report Default Alarm Default Grade Grade Modified Lamp Modified NON 2 This message displays when the changeover of the TSW system is executed 1 XXXX 0000 XXXX XXXX 2 0000 0000 0000 0000 3 0000 0000 XXXX XXXX ER a Sa 92 0209 4 0000 0000 0000 0000 5 0000 0000 0000 0000 6 0000 0000 0000 0000 Ti 0000 QUOO 20000 30000 0000 0000 0000 0000 Os 0000 0000 0000 0000 D ACT side Speech Path TSW after 0 1 No 0 system No 1 system changeover b7 2 Reason for changeover b7 b 65 b4 63 b2 bl Contents 2 ve 3 Wade Aes fe mWSWMeen iei Alarm release 0 release 32ch Clock down recovered FH down recovered 24ch Clock down recovered FH MEM recovered TSW ACT STBY toic NM by CMOD command 6 1 MUX MUX circuit card Ready failure 2 MUX circuit card clock failure CHAPTER 3 NDA 24300 Page 64 Issue 1 9 6 Status of ACT side TSW card b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 62 bl bO 111 1114 2 40 Status of ST BY side TSW card b7 65 b4 63 62 bl bO 111 11114 MG00 MG02 MG04 MG06 b7
319. h a spare refer to Section 4 Fan Unit Replacement in Chapter 4 Fan Unit FAN 0 FAN 1 FAN 2 FUSE ALM 48V o Filter FAN START Switch To Display Section of TOPU Figure 5 19 Circuit Diagram of Fan Unit and Thermal Unit CHAPTER 5 NDA 24300 Page 374 Issue 1 FAULT REPAIR PROCEDURES 9 2 Fan Unit Fault START Set the PWR SW key on the PZ M369 to the ON position When the fan spins _ Set PWR SW key to AUTO position and short the thermal relay of the thermal unit If the fan does not Check the connector cable between operate the FANU and the thermal unit If the fan operates Replace thermal relay with a spare Disconnect the fan connector of the cable for the thermal unit Replace thermal relay with a spare Connect the fan connector If the fan does not operate a Check the voltage DC 48 V at connectors FCO through FC2 If the voltage is less Check the connector cable fan con than 48 V nector between the FANU and the PIM If the voltage is 48 Replace the fan with a spare Refer to Section 4 Fan Unit Replacement in Chapter 4 After the fault 15 corrected set PWR SW key to the AUTO position If the fans are to continue operating constantly set PWR SW key to the ON position END NDA 24300 CHAPTER 5 Page 375 Issue 1 FAULT REPAIR PROCEDURES 10 TONE FAULT This section explains the fault repair procedure when any of the various tones cannot be
320. he DSP of CPU 1s ON 1 System starts up again CPU OPE lamp on the DSP of active CPU lights steadily green 3 lamps flash IMGO lamp on the DSP of mate CPU flashes green STATUS LED right on the DSP of active CPU 15 ON ON LINE NDA 24300 CHAPTER 6 Page 479 Issue 1 SYSTEM OPERATIONS Table 6 13 System Initialization With Office Data Loading From HD Procedure 2 ACTION Confirm system is operating normally Turn ON the EFFECT key on the TOPU See Figure 6 58 Set the keys on the TOPU as follows PROGRAM KEY NON LOAD SYSTEM DATA KEY LOAD Press INITIAL START button on the TOPU HD Initialization Office Data Load System Initialization System starts up again CHAPTER 6 NDA 24300 Page 480 Issue 1 7SEG LED OPE LAMP KEY SETTINGS CPU OPE lamp on the DSP of active CPU lights steadily green IMGO0 3 lamps flash IMGO lamp on the DSP of mate CPU flashes green SYSTEM DATA en NON LOAD yer 01 Ll NON LOAD PZ DK222 CPU OPE and IMGX lamps on both DSP go OFF STATUS LED right on the DSP of CPU is ON H STATUS LED right on the DSP of CPU is ON 1 STATUS LED right the DSP of active CPU is ON CPU OPE lamp on the DSP of active CPU lights steadily green IMGO 3 lamps flash lamp on the DSP of mate CPU flashes green STATUS LED right on the DSP of active CPU is ON ON LINE SYSTEM OPERATIONS Tabl
321. he fault Perform the above check by extracting the TSW circuit cards individually Replace the MUX circuit card referring to Section 3 3 2 MUX Card Replacement Procedure in Chapter 4 Initialize the system by pressing the START button on the TOPU Check to see if a station to station connection can be set up and identify a TSW circuit card responsible for the fault Perform the above check by extracting the TSW circuit cards individually CHAPTER 5 Page 351 Issue 1 FAULT REPAIR PROCEDURES When the PLO PH CK16 17 circuit card is mounted for digital interface replace the PLO circuit card with a spare and check it END CHAPTER 5 NDA 24300 Page 352 Issue 1 ATTENTION Contents Static Sensitive Handlin Precautions Required Set MB switch of the PLO circuit card to UP side Confirm ACT lamp on the PLO circuit card goes out Extract PLO circuit card from its mounting slot Set MB switch UP and insert the new PLO circuit card into its mounting slot Set MB switch DOWN Confirm the ACT lamp on the new PLO circuit card illuminates Confirm that speech can be carried out normally by a station to station call FAULT REPAIR PROCEDURES 5 3 Speech Path System Fault When Dial Tone DT Cannot Be Heard Faulty Situation e Dial Tone DT cannot be heard e I A Both TSW Failure Permanent 1 Both TSW Clock Failure 4 Both TSW Ready Failure e 23 Y MUX Clock Failure
322. he system also clears the contents of the system message Before using the RALM command print the messages using the DFTD command Use the ALM RST button only to reset the alarm lamps NDA 24300 CHAPTER 4 Page 241 Issue 1 UNIT CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE 1 3 1 CPR Replacement Procedure This section explains how to replace the Control Processor Rack CPR Before p starting the procedures make a backup copy of the main data such as office data Gontents Call Forwarding CF data and Speed Calling SPD data on to the hard disk of the HFC Figure 4 2 shows the front view of the CPR Operate the related keys and con nectors to replace the CPU with a new one Using a Phillips screwdriver remove the four screws and extract the CPR with care as shown in Figure 4 3 PZ IO27 Note CPUOPEWDT IMGO MBR X ee xt Xt X SYSTEM SELECTO STATUS SYSTEM SELECTI SYSTEM SELECT2 AL CPURST SLOT No PZ PW92 Note place of PZ IO27 the CPR may be equipped with PZ IO28 which does not have the MB Make Busy key Figure 4 2 CPR Face Layout CHAPTER 4 NDA 24300 Page 242 Issue 1 UNIT CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE Figure 4 3 How to Replace the CPU NDA 24300 CHAPTER 4 Page 243 Issue 1 UNIT CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE Circuit Card Accommodation into the New CPR The steps below show the procedure to install the new C
323. he whole contents of the system message Before using the RALM command print the messages using the DFTD command Use the ALM RST button only to reset the alarm lamps NDA 24300 CHAPTER 4 Page 283 Issue 1 UNIT CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE 3 3 Operating Procedures The following sections provide operating procedures to replace circuit cards mounted in the PIM Perform the operations corresponding to each Reference Item specified in Table 4 3 Note that the procedures as sume that the system adopts the dual configuration Table 4 3 PIM Circuit Cards and Reference Items CIRCUIT CARD LC TRK Section 3 3 1 LC TRK Circuit Card Replacement Procedure MUX Section 3 3 2 MUX Card Section 3 3 2 MUX Card Replacement Procedure Procedure CHAPTER 4 NDA 24300 Page 284 Issue 1 UNIT CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE 3 3 1 LC TRK Circuit Card Replacement Procedure START Contents __ Static Sensitive Handling Precautions Required On the circuit card to be replaced set the MB switch UP Extract the circuit card from its mounting slot Keep MB switch set at UP Insert the new card into its mounting slot On the new card set MB switch DOWN END NDA 24300 CHAPTER 4 Page 285 Issue 1 UNIT CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE 3 3 2 MUX Card Replacement Procedure The MUX PH PC36 card is mounted in Slot No 13 and or 14 of each Port Interface Module PIM The card s main fu
324. heard in the whole system 10 1 Check Point When repairing a tone fault consider that the tone generator circuit is equipped in the TSW circuit card and supplies tone Figure 5 20 shows an example of the related trunking for dial tone connection Figure 5 20 DialTone Connection CHAPTER 5 NDA 24300 Page 376 Issue 1 10 2 Tone Fault START Replace the TSW circuit card with a spare and check When only Hold Tone is faulty If External Hold Tone source is in use Replace the EMA PLO circuit card with a spare Note When system is 1 IMG configuration replace EMA card Otherwise replace PLO card WANN if the EMA card is removed from the system while the system is in operation under the control of the CPU 71 the system will reset and stop all call processing Refer to Section 1 3 2 EMA Card Replacement Procedure in Chapter 4 for detailed instructions END NDA 24300 FAULT REPAIR PROCEDURES ATTENTION Contents Static Sensitive Handling Precautions Required Check the external equipment which sends out hold tone Check cross connections on the MDF Figure 5 21 shows a block diagram of external hold tone supply optional Set the MB switch of the EMA PLO circuit card to UP side and extract the circuit card from its mounting slot Make necessary switch settings on the new circuit card referring to the card extracted Set the MB switch of the new circuit card UP and insert the ci
325. heck Check trunk circuits individually Also check the Section 2 9 Trunk RGU Check RGU circuit in the PWR Supply of each Module Check each operation and lamps of DESKCON Section 2 10 ATTCON ATTCON DESKCON Check Quarterly Check the CPU TSW and line trunk Port Micro Section 2 11 System Check processors PMs NDA 24300 CHAPTER 7 Page 497 Issue 1 ROUTINE MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE 2 1 Ambient Conditions in Switch Room Check START Check the room temperature Check the humidity in the room If the temperature or the humidity 15 outside the allowable range adjust the air conditioner END CHAPTER 7 Page 498 Issue 1 NDA 24300 Check whether the room temperature is within the range of 5 C 41 F to 30 C 86 F Check whether the relative humidity in the room is within the 15 to 65 range ROUTINE MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE 2 2 Alarm Check START Check alarm indications on the TOPU _ If an alarm is indicated Check whether the alarm lamp on the power supply of any module is lit Check whether an alarm lamp is lit on any circuit card s Alarm recovery Refer to Chapter 5 diagnose the alarm and perform the indicated recovery procedures END NDA 24300 CHAPTER 7 Page 499 Issue 1 ROUTINE MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE 2 3 MAT Printer Check START Check the MAT System messages are automatically sent to the MAT HD for output System messages are automatically sent t
326. his parameter appears when TYPE 2 NDA 24300 CHAPTER 8 Page 543 Issue 1 CMWL_T Control Message Waiting Lamps Telephone Number CMWL T Control Message Waiting Lamps Telephone Number 1 Functional Outline This command 15 used to control display the Message Waiting Lamp s ON OFF status by using Telephone Numbers When the station is D this command can also be used to control the Message Waiting Lamp Display This command is available at NCN for Fusion network only 2 Parameters Input Data TYPE Designation by Telephone Number Designation by LEN UGN User Group Number Note 1 TELN Telephone Number max 16 digits Note 1 LENS Line Equipment Number Note 2 MWLAMP MW Lamp Status OFF ON MCI Message Center MW Status OFF ON ATT Attendant Console MW Status OFF ON STA Station MW Status OFF ON VMM Voice Mail Module MW Status OFF ON Note 1 This parameter is valid when Type 1 is selected Note 2 This parameter is valid when Type 2 is selected Display Data FPC Fusion Point Code 1 253 Note 3 TN Tenant Number Note 3 STN Physical Station Number max 5 digits for Business max 6 digits for Hotel system Note 3 These parameters are for display only Buttons Get Click to get information on the MW status Set Click to execute the assigned MW lamp control Exit Click to exit this command CHAPTER 8 NDA 24300 Page 544 Issue 1 CPRS Controlled Alternate PRSCs CPRS Controlled Alternate PR
327. ialization SINZ System Initialization 1 Functional Outline This command initializes the PBX from the MAT At the time of system initialization this command allows the programs and the office data to be loaded from a Hard Disk of PBX into the RAM of PBX 2 Parameters Input data TYPE Kind of Initialization 1 4 1 System Initialize 2 System Initialize Office Data Load amp System Initialize 3 System Initialize Program Load amp System Initialize 4 System Initialize Program amp Office Data Load amp System Initialize Note When the system is initialized the MAT is once disconnected Then log in to the system again NDA 24300 CHAPTER 8 Page 617 Issue 1 SPTS Scanning of Port Status SPTS Scanning of Port Status 1 Functional Outline This command displays momentarily the working status of Port Microprocessor PM on Module Group MG Unit and Group basis 2 Parameters Input data MG Unit Group Interval Unit for this parameter is in seconds Entry Procedure Type 1 By MG Display of Scanning by Designating MG Figure 8 1 Package Status PM Not Mounted Note ID Idle at least one BY All Busy MB Under Make Busy Status Note This information appears when the circuit card is in make busy status MB key is set upward or when the designated location has no circuit card CHAPTER 8 NDA 24300 Page 618 Issue 1 SPTS Scanning of Port Status SPTS Scanning of Port Status Type m 1 by MG Q 3
328. imum 6 digits Note 2 Note 1 The parameter is valid only when 2 Note 2 The parameter is valid only when Type 3 Display data CNT Count TN STN LENS NDA 24300 CHAPTER 8 Page 557 Issue 1 DLSS T Display of Lock Out Station Number Telephone Number 0155 T Display of Lock Out Station Number Telephone Number 1 Functional Outline This command is used to print out stations in lockout state by using Telephone Numbers This command is available at NCN for Fusion network only 2 Parameters Input Data TYPE Printout of all lockout stations Printout of lockout stations by tenant Printout of lockout stations within a specified range of station number UGN User Group Number Note 1 Note 2 Start TELN First Telephone Number max 16 digits Note 2 End TELN End Telephone Number max 16 digits Note 2 Note 1 This parameter is valid when Type Printout of lockout stations by tenant is selected Note 2 This parameter is valid when Type Printout of lockout stations within a specified range of station number is selected Display Data FPC Fusion Point Code 1 253 TN Tenant Number Start STN First Physical Station Number max 5 digits for Business max 6 digits for Hotel system End STN End Physical Station Number max 5 digits for Business max 6 digits for Hotel system CNT Count UGN User Group Number TELN Telephone Number max 16 digits LENS Line Equipment Number Buttons Get
329. in that circuit card can be used until the replacement is complete ATTENTION Contents Static Sensitive Handling Precautions Required START Check the faulty line on the MDF Isolate the faulty line to the in house wiring side and to the system side Connect the test telephone to the system side Call the faulty line by station to station calling When speech can be made Replace the telephone set with a spare When speech cannot be made Replace the LC circuit card with a spare END NDA 24300 CHAPTER 5 Page 317 Issue 1 FAULT REPAIR PROCEDURES 1 7 Fault Note 1 fa circuit card is replaced because only one line is faulty no other lines in that circuit card can be used until the replacement is complete Note 2 f any of the in house cable wirings short circuit the POW ALM lamp on the ELC circuit card lights Remove the cause of the short circuit and initialize the ELC circuit card START When OPE lamp on the ELC circuit card does not illuminate When BL lamp for each line is flashing or illuminating on the ELC circuit card CHAPTER 5 NDA 24300 Page 318 Issue 1 ATTENTION Contents Static Sensitive Handling Precautions Required Confirm that MB switch of the ELC circuit card is in ON position UP Confirm that station data ASDT command in the ELC circuit card is assigned Replace ELC circuit card with a spare Confirm that MB switch of the ELC circuit card is
330. ins how to replace unit circuit cards mounted in the LPM 11 Precaution Use this procedure to replace a faulty unit circuit card with a spare to check a spare card There are functional switches having set the default switch on some of the circuit cards to be replaced As for switch setting on the circuit cards confirm the circuit card mounting face layout for the LPM When circuit card with a default switch setting is replaced with a spare card always make the switch setting on the new circuit card the same as on the replaced card Otherwise electronic components on the circuit card may be destroyed or the circuit card itself may fail to function normally When handling a circuit card always use the field service kit for countermeasures against static elec tricity Touching a circuit card without using the field service kit may destroy the card due to static elec tricity on the human body 1 2 Circuit Card Mounting Face Layout Figure 4 1 shows the face layout of circuit cards mounted in the LPM The circuit cards marked with are optional NDA 24300 CHAPTER 4 Page 239 Issue 1 UNIT CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE PZ PW92 2 1027 LANI PZ PC19 GATE PZ GT16 i Me bl IMG1 IMG2 eee SYSTEM SELECTO T 910000 SYSTEM SELECT1 100000000 6 SYSTEM SELECT2 jun MET m m m m m m m m m m CPUOPEWDT MBR 20 IMG IMG
331. ion The 9th byte indicates the type of the calling or called party The 10th through 17th bytes are data pertaining to this calling or called party ORIG Originating Source Identification 0 Calling or called Party is a station Calling or called Party is an Attendant 2 Calling or called Party is an outside inside party e The contents of 12th through 17th bytes vary with the type of the calling or called party 1 Fora station ORIG 0 Data showing Station Number EXAMPLE 1st DIGIT 2nd DIGIT 3rd DIGIT 4th DIGIT 5th DIGIT 6th DIGIT 1st DIGIT 2nd DIGIT 3rd DIGIT 4th DIGIT 5th DIGIT 6th DIGIT 1st DIGIT Route 2nd DIGIT Number 3rd DIGIT 1st DIGIT Trunk 2nd DIGIT Number 3rd DIGIT NDA 24300 CHAPTER 6 Page 409 Issue 1 SYSTEM OPERATIONS 7 2 2 Call Start Call End Time Information e The data which indicates Call Start Time 15 as follows EXAMPLE MONTH 01 12 DAY THIS INFORMATION SHOWS THAT THE CALL 01 31 STARTED AT 1 O CLOCK ON JUNE tst HOUR 00 23 MINUTE 00 59 SECOND 00 59 YEAR INFORMATION IS SENT OUT ONLY BY THE LAST TWO DIGITS AS IN 98 FOR 1998 e The data which indicates Call End Time 15 as follows MONTH 01 12 DAY THIS INFORMATION SHOWS THAT THE CALL 01 31 ENDED AT 9 O CLOCK 10 MIN 30 SEC A M ON OCT 20 1998 HOUR 00 23 EXAMPLE MINUTE 00 59 SECOND 00 59 YEAR INFORMATION IS SENT OUT ONLY BY THE
332. ions from the monitor program The system abandons only the processings of the calls being handled by the program and maintains all the connections that have already been established e Circuit Card Front Initializing Restart The whole system is forcibly initialized However the initialization varies with the setting of the SENSE switch on the DSP of CPU see Table 2 2 NDA 24300 CHAPTER 2 Page 25 Issue 1 SYSTEM MAINTENANCE OUTLINE Table 2 2 Kinds of Circuit Card Front Restart DM Load Restart When the system is in operation e PM Line Trunk Card Make Busy Restart In this processing the faulty PM Line Trunk Card is isolated from the system and at the same time the calls associated with that faulty PM Line Trunk Card are released No calls related to the faulty PM Line Trunk Card are processed and the system normally runs without the faulty PM Line Trunk Card Data Copy Restart In a system of dual CPU configuration the RAM memory including data memory is copied from the ACT side CPU into the STBY side CPU and ACT STBY is changed over and monitor restart 15 executed In the case of this restart processing only the ACT side CPU and the STBY side CPU are changed over without any effect on the current connections However no call processings are executed while the restart processing is in progress from copying until the end of the changeover 3 HOW TO READ PRECAUTIONS DIAGNOSTIC AND
333. ircuit cards PH CK16 PH CK17 PH CK16 A PH CK17 A Figure 6 39 How to Check LEDs and SW Keys for System Changeover IMG1 CHAPTER 6 NDA 24300 Page 458 Issue 1 SYSTEM OPERATIONS To perform the ACT STBY system changeover check the lamp indicators shown in Figure 6 40 and then operate the related key Note LED indications cited in Figure 6 40 are only an example The indicating pattern ON Flash OFF can differ depending on each system setting IMG 2 3 System State TSW 0 gt ACT TOPU PIM3 PIM2 FANU PIM1 14 P S PIMO v O 9 DUMMY APM BASEU FRONT VIEW Legend ss sess ERIT Lampis ON Lampis OFF Figure 6 40 How to Check LEDs and SW Keys for System Changeover IMG2 3 NDA 24300 CHAPTER 6 Page 459 Issue 1 SYSTEM OPERATIONS How to check the STATUS 7 segment LEDs The ACT STBY status of CPU can be confirmed by viewing the STATUS 7 segment LEDs Visually check the LED indications and confirm which CPU is active in your system When the STATUS LEDs display any of the two digit numbers 00 99 the belonging CPU is active If the LEDs display the three letters S B and Y in rotation the CPU system is in STBY mode Note that the numbers 00 99 displayed on the active CPU front panel DSP conform to the percentage points showing CPU occupancy rate DSP Front View DSP Front View MBR WDT IMGO MBR CPUOPE IMGO e 0 e e
334. is message displays when the system detects a fault such as input clock all down or output clock down in the PLO cards at both sides 1 XXXX 0000 2 0000 0000 0000 0000 3 0000 0000 0000 0000 09 009 4 0000 0000 0000 0000 5 0000 0000 0000 0000 6 0000 0000 0000 0000 0009 D000 0000 85 0000 0000 0000 0000 95 0000 0000 UUUDU 0000 D Detected PLO number b0 0 12 No 0 PLO No 1 PLO b7 bO 2 Valid Information bit for Scan Data bO b7 Bit position corresponding to the detected information in Scan Data 1 1 4 is flagged 1 57 b6 65 b4 b3 b2 bl TT TTT tT 9 Valid Information bit for Scan Data bO b7 Bit position corresponding to the detected information in Scan Data 2 2 5 is flagged 1 b7 b 55 b4 63 b2 bl TTT Tet Tt Reference See Chapter 4 Section 2 3 2 and Section 2 3 4 for the circuit card replacement procedure NDA 24300 CHAPTER 3 Page 59 Issue 1 SYSTEM MESSAGES Scan Data 1 Current Status of PLO Clock status at time of detection card 0 1 STBY ACT bl Circuit Card status at time of detection 67 15 b4 63 62 bl 0 1 PLO synchronizing PLO self running or drift abnormal b3 b4 Route of Input clock b4 b3 DCS Input Route Route Of Input Clock b5 PLO input all down b6 PLO output down b7 Drifting Scan Data 2 Current Status of PLO 0 1 5
335. is provided to determine whether to use and as a part of the Station Number If necessary check the box Buttons Execute Click to make the input data valid Cancel Click to cancel the input data Exit Click to exit this command Display Data OLD STN Station Number before change NEW STN Station Number after change STATUS Data Entry Result OK Data Assignment is successful Note Note f not OK i e the data entry is not successful related error message is displayed here NDA 24300 CHAPTER 8 Page 547 Issue 1 DCBD Display of Call Block Entry Data DCBD Display of Call Block Entry Data 1 Functional Outline This command is used to display the following Call Block data assigned to a station e Number of station trunk whose is to be blocked in the remainder of this page denoted as Restriction Number Registered Restriction Numbers in total These data can be obtained by entering any of the station s Telephone Number TYPE 1 Physical Station Number TYPE 2 or LENS TYPE 3 in the parameters below 2 Parameters Input Data TYPE Selection of Input Data Type TYPE 1 Input Data UGN TELN Note TYPE 2 Input Data FPC TN STN Note TYPE 3 Input Data FPC LENS Note READ button to view the Display Data EXIT button to exit Note When using this command first choose the input data type Type I 3 in the TYPE selection list box Then the following parameters
336. it cards mounted Set the MB switch of the line trunk circuit card in the unit to see if they are faulty UP and extract it from its mounting slot Make a station to station call and see if a fault occurs Perform this check on an individual basis If the fault has stopped occurring the circuit card extracted at that time is faulty Replace the circuit card with a spare If the fault continues check the next circuit card END NDA 24300 CHAPTER 5 Page 337 Issue 1 FAULT REPAIR PROCEDURES ATTENTION Contents Static Sensitive Handling Precautions Required 2 For Single Configuration START Check by replacing the MUX PH PC36 circuit card Replace the MUX circuit card by referring to Section 3 3 2 MUX Card Replacement Procedure in Chapter 4 After replacement of the MUX Press the RESET button on the EMA card circuit card make a station to D station call in the faulty unit and see if speech is normal Check by replacing the TSW circuit card Replace the TSW circuit card referring to Section 2 3 2 TSW Card Replacement Procedure in Chapter 4 After replacement of the TSW Press the RESET button on the EMA card circuit card make a station to D station call in the faulty unit and see if speech is normal CHAPTER 5 NDA 24300 Page 338 Issue 1 END Check the line trunk circuit cards mounted in the unit to see if they are faulty Perform this check on an individual basis If the fault
337. it i OG Call to outside IC Call from outside b0 b7 Route No Hex Trunk No Hex Trunk No Hex Trunk No Hex CHAPTER 3 NDA 24300 Page 104 Issue 1 SYSTEM MESSAGES SMDR Output Buffer Overflow Alarm Default Alarm Default Grade Grade Modified Lamp Modified SUP 1 This message displays when the SMDR output buffer usage rate has exceeded the value assigned to ASYD SYSI Index 249 1 XXXX XXXX 0000 0000 2 0000 0000 0000 0000 3 0000 0000 0000 0000 O 4 0000 0000 0000 0000 5 0000 0000 0000 0000 6 0000 0000 0000 0000 OOOO WOOO OOOO sos QODO WOOO OOOO OOOO Se OUO OOOO WOOO D Detail Information b0 b3 FS br he GSE bun bo _ LITT This system message varies depending on the data MEANING a SMDR output buffer usage rate exceeds the value assigned by ASYD SYS1 Index 249 a 1 After SMDR output buffer usage rate exceeds the value assigned by ASYD SYS1 Index 249 usage rate lowered less than the value assigned by Index 250 2 Data output is impossible due to SMDR apparatus failure a FS 0 FE 0 1 2 0 1 Data assigned by the ASYD SYS1 Index 249 250 15 valid b7 bO invalid NDA 24300 CHAPTER 3 Page 105 Issue 1 SYSTEM MESSAGES 3 Buffer Usage Rate Assigned by b0 b3 Units ASYD SYSI Index 249 b4 b7 Tens b7 b 65 64 63 b2 bl
338. itches UP and insert the card into its mounting slot On new CCH CCT card set switch DOWN On new CCH CCT card set MBR switch DOWN Check whether the fault is still indicated 12 4 Fault of CCH DTI and Related Flat Cable START Check connectors and flat cables between DTI and CCH Check the connector Check the flat cable Check by replacing the DTI card with spare END NDA 24300 FAULT REPAIR PROCEDURES On DTI cards set MB switch UP On CCH card set MBR switch UP Check whether the connector is correctly con nected or not If the connection is found im proper plug and unplug the connector a few times On DTI cards set MB switch DOWN On CCH card set MBR switch DOWN Check whether the fault is still indicated On DTI cards set MB switch UP On CCH card set MBR switch UP Test the continuity of the flat cable If found to be abnormal replace the flat cable with a spare On DTI cards set MB switch DOWN On CCH card set MBR switch DOWN Check whether the fault is still indicated On DTI card set MB switch UP and extract the card from the mounting slot On anew DTI card make the switch setting On new DTI card set MB switch UP and insert the card into the mounting slot On new DTI card set MB switch DOWN Check whether the fault is still indicated CHAPTER 5 Page 385 Issue 1 FAULT REPAIR PROCEDURES 13 INTEGRATED SERVICE DIGITAL NETWORK ISDN LINE FAULT This section
339. ith a spare and check it The detailed procedure in dicated by G varies with the system configuration indicated by F NDA 24300 CHAPTER 2 Page 31 Issue 1 SYSTEM MAINTENANCE OUTLINE 2 FAULT Itis the fault of Chapter 5 11 FAULT SUPERVISION 6 CHECK OF WORK _ lt 10 Chapter 5 Note 1 Judgment of fault status 2 6 7 9 When the fault status coincides with the indication the cause of the fault is indicated 11 When repairing the fault refer to the relevant section in Chapter 5 3 Operating items for diagnosis 4 Branching of the result of the operation 5 Judgment of the status of the result of the operation 8 When operating method is unknown refer to Chapter Figure 2 24 Diagnostic Work Items and Symbols Example CHAPTER 2 NDA 24300 Page 32 Issue 1 SYSTEM MAINTENANCE OUTLINE Figure 2 25 Recovery Procedure Example 4 REPORTING FAULT TO NEC When the cause of a fault is uncertain make note of the situation involved and report it to NEC When for warding faulty circuit cards to NEC exercise caution to protect from static electricity 4 1 Fault Reporting Method The following three items must be included in the report without fail 99 1 Faulty situation reports should be similar to dial tone is not heard only on individual lines incoming line calls are not able to be terminated only to a spe
340. ith ready fault bl b2 67 656 55 54 63 62 bl jj b5 MG and system number for faulty MUX card b7 b2 bl 0 1 MUX ready fault in even numbered Unit 0 0 1 MUX ready fault in even numbered Unit 1 0 1 MUX ready fault in even numbered MG Unit 2 0 1 MUX ready fault in even numbered MG Unit 3 0 1 MUX ready fault in odd numbered MG Unit 0 0 1 MUX ready fault in odd numbered MG Unit 1 0 1 MUX ready fault in odd numbered MG Unit 2 0 1 MUX ready fault in odd numbered MG Unit 3 MG number for faulty MUX card 0 1 Even number Odd number 0 1 Ready failure in MUX No 0 system Ready failure in MUX No 1 system ACT or STBY status of faulty MUX 0 1 ACT STBY Reference See Chapter 5 Section 4 3 and Section 4 4 for the repair procedure NDA 24300 CHAPTER 3 Page 81 Issue 1 SYSTEM MESSAGES Both MUX Ready Failure Default Alarm Default Grade Grade Modified Lamp Modified MN 3 This message displays when the MUX PH PC36 card has a Ready Failure in both of the dual systems When the card is not ready for service function because of the failure or because the card 15 not mounted properly the system creates this system message lt XXXX 0000 0000 0000 2 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 00009 0000 anh DO 4 0000 0000 0000 0000 5 0000 0000 0000 0000 6 0000 0000 0000 0000 7 0000 0000 0000 0000 8 0000 0000 0000 0000 9 0000 0000 0000 00
341. its GROUP START First Group Number 0 31 GROUP END Last Group Number 0 31 LEVEL START First Level Number 0 7 LEVEL END Last Level Number 0 7 Note 1 the bottom part of the display a check box is provided to determine whether to use and as a part of the Station Number If necessary check the box Note 2 In the parameter here specify the size of increment between the consecutive station numbers to be assigned See the example below Example Input data Result STN START 100 Station Number is assigned by 10 increments STN END 200 When and are not used as part of STN STEP 10 100 110 120 130 190 200 V When and are used as part of STN 10 118 126 134 1 1 8 NDA 24300 CHAPTER 8 Page 527 Issue 1 CADSD Continuous Assignment of Station Data TEC Telephone Equipment Class 1 31 1 DP 10pps 2 PB 3 DP PB 4 DP 20pps 5 11 Not used 12 p 13 Data Terminal 14 Hot Line 15 CAS Line 16 Data Terminal via Data Module 17 Not used 18 Virtual Line Appearance for Multi Line 19 22 Not used 23 ISDN Terminal 24 26 Not used 27 8 Conference Equipment 28 3 1 Not used RSC Route Restriction Class 0 15 SFC Service Feature Class 0 15 Buttons Execute Click to make the input data valid Cancel Click to cancel the input data Exit Click to exit this command Display Data after Execute button is pressed TN Tenant Number STN Assigned Station Number LEN
342. ived by the recovered application equipment TCP IP Part Application Part XXXX XXXX XXXX 2 XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX 3 XXXX XXXX XXXX ra YY um com zx 20 0 00 O 960 20 O 0000 0000 0000 0000 5 0000 0000 0000 0000 6 0000 0000 0000 9099 0000 o 0000 0000 0000 0000 9 0000 IP Address for external equipment in which error has been detected Hex 57 b6 b5 64 b3 b2 bl I TTT Port No Client Port No Hex b7 b6 65 63 62 b TT tT 7 Socket Used Socket Hex b7 6 65 b4 63 62 bl Error Code TCP IP Error Code See Table 3 2 57 b6 65 64 63 62 bl CHAPTER 3 NDA 24300 Page 228 Issue 1 Application Type 57 b 25 64 63 62 bl When 03 04 MCI Device Number of recovered client PC 57 b 65 64 b3 b2 bl bO 1 Recovery Information 57 b b5 b4 b3 62 bl bO bO b7 bO b7 bO b7 NDA 24300 SYSTEM MESSAGES Hex 01 50 SERVER 02 03 SMDR 04 MCI 05 1 06 5 07 Device Number of recovered Client for external LAN Interface Hex 01 Recovered 02 FFzNot defined CHAPTER 3 Page 229 Issue 1 SYSTEM MESSAGES MUX Clock Restore Default Alarm Default Grade Grade Modified Lamp Modified NON 3 This message displ
343. ived correctly a Reorder Tone ROT is heard Is next register to be tested too TRUNK DESIGNATION TEST IN PROGRESS MUSIC ON Make switch hook flash HOLD ORT Note 2 ORT SND DP OR PB Note 1 After the sender to be tested is connected to the register the sender sends out I 9 0 by DP signals and 1 9 0 by PB signals thus checking to see if the dialed numbers are sent out correctly Note 2 f the trunk number of the next sender is not assigned the test ends Figure 6 30 Sender Test Procedure Connection Diagram NDA 24300 CHAPTER 6 Page 441 Issue 1 SYSTEM OPERATIONS c 3 Party Conference Trunk Test Procedure Lift handset DT Dial access code for e Access code is assigned by command CI N designated connection SRV SSC SID 17 14 99 XXX Route numbers to be designated are as follows RT No TRK No RT NUMBER TRUNK NAME 3 party conference trunk for station ATTCON trunk 913 3 party conference trunk only for ATTCON As shown in Figure 6 32 tone sending is repeated Is next register to be tested too Make switch hook flash Note Note f the trunk number of the next 3 Party Conference Trunk is not assigned the test ends Figure 6 31 3 Party Conference Test Procedure CHAPTER 6 NDA 24300 Page 442 Issue 1 SYSTEM OPERATIONS TRUNK DESIGNATION TEST IN PROGRESS 1 SEC Figure 6 32 3 Party C
344. k failure which occurs within the EMA card START Replace the card Replace the EMA referring to Section TTE if the EMA card is removed from the 1 5 2 EMA Card Replacement Procedure j 1 in Chapter 4 system while the system is 1n operation under the control of the CPU 1 the system will reset and stop all call processing See Section 1 3 2 EMA Card Replacement Procedure in END Chapter 4 for detailed instructions NDA 24300 CHAPTER 5 Page 389 Issue 1 This page is for your notes CHAPTER 5 NDA 24300 Page 390 Issue 1 6 SYSTEM OPERATIONS To maintain the system in a normal state maintenance technicians need to monitor the servicing status of the system Figure 6 1 shows the flow of the system status monitor When trouble occurs in any part of the system or to any phase of system operations maintenance technicians are alerted by an alarm indication or by a report from a station user or an operator When the system becomes overloaded maintenance technicians can execute Line Load Control SYSTEM STATUS MONITOR 1 ALARM INDICATIONS Alarm Lamps on Circuit Card e Alarm Lamps Alarm Lamps on Attendant Console 2 COLLECTION OF SYSTEM MESSAGES 3 INDICATION OF LOCKOUT STATUS 4 LINE LOAD CONTROL Figure 6 1 System Status Monitor 1 ALARM INDICATIONS When trouble occurs in the system the system activates an appropriate remedial action sy
345. k tone from test station 10 1 Designated Connection Test Station Test connection by designating trunks outgoing only from Attendant Desk Console m 10 2 Designated Connection Test ATTCON DESKCON Display of line failure indication when faulty condition occurred while a call is in progress 103 Bad Call Notification Figure 6 28 Test Operation Method Examples NDA 24300 SYSTEM OPERATIONS 10 1 Designated Connection Test Station 1 General The purpose of this test is to confirm the operations related to a trunk or tone that is designated from the test station Refer to Table 6 6 The test result displays on the MAT screen as system message 6 I Table 6 6 Designated Connection Test Station Operations ITEM TEST ITEM CONTENT OF CONFIRMATION Register ORT IRT Whether the dialed numbers 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 can be received correctly is to be confirmed Sender Whether the numbers 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 can all be sent out is to be confirmed Various kinds of tone are to be confirmed Interrupted Ringing Interrupt ringing IR is to be confirmed IR Connections of trunks are to be confirmed 2 Precaution 3 3 Party Conference By connecting the test tone to each port of a 3 Party Conference Trunk Trunk whether the test tone can be heard is to be confirmed Designated connection to a trunk A designated connection to trunk is limited only t
346. larm Default Grade Grade Modified Lamp Modified MN 3 This message displays when a fault has occurred to the clock oscillator in the CPU 1 XXXX 0000 0000 2 0000 0000 0000 0000 3 0000 0000 0000 0000 Tr 4 0000 0000 0000 0000 5 0000 0000 0000 0000 6 0000 0000 0000 0000 7 0000 0000 0000 0000 8 0000 0000 0000 0000 9 0000 0000 0000 0000 D Self CPU Restart Information bO 0 1 Monitor Restart b3 0 I Initialization b7 b4 b3 bO b4 0 1 Copy restart for Dual CPU system only b7 O 1 ACT STBY active system indication after restart 2 Male CPU Restart Information FF bO 0 1 Monitor Restart H not mounted b3 0 I Initialization b4 Copy restart for Dual CPU system only b7 b5 b4 b3 D ps 0 1 control 11 L1 b7 O I2ACT STBY active system indication after restart 3 Related Call Information b7 0 1 Released Not released b7 11111 Reference See Chapter 5 Section 6 2 for the repair procedure CHAPTER 3 NDA 24300 Page 44 Issue 1 SYSTEM MESSAGES C Level Infinite Loop Default Alarm Default Grade Grade Modified Lamp Modified SUP 2 C level infinite loop is a state where a clock level program running under clock interrupt disable state 1s in an infinite loop This message displays when the counter value to check the normality of the processing has become abnormal 0 C level Infini
347. lay Note 1 Wireless Call Forwarding Note 1 Program data Note 2 Call Forwarding Note 4 Speed Calling Note 4 User Assign Soft Key Note 4 Number Sharing Note 3 Note 4 Call Block Note 4 ACD Data Memory Note 1 NDA 24300 CHAPTER 8 Page 591 Issue 1 HDD FDD Data Control Between HDD and FDD File Name Select Auto Verify Afterward Note 1 When this data is selected specify the file names in the File Name Select parameter Note 2 Program data can be valid when you select Floppy Disk to Hard Disk or Verify HDD against FDD in the Direction Select list box Note 3 By saving the Number Sharing data the data concerning Dual Station Calling Over FCCS is also saved verified automatically Note 4 When this data is selected an LP Select dialog appears Then specify the LP number in the LP Select parameter CHAPTER 8 NDA 24300 Page 592 Issue 1 HDD MAT Data Control Between HDD and MAT HDD MAT Data Control Between HDD and MAT 1 Functional Outline This command is used to save the following data from HDD of PBX to MAT 2 Parameters Input data Direction Select PBX Hard Disk to MAT MAT to PBX Hard Disk Verify HDD against MAT Data Type Selection Data Memory Note 1 Name display Wireless Call Forwarding Program data Note 2 Call Forwarding Speed Calling User Assign Soft Key Number Sharing Note 3 Call Block ACD Data Memory LP Select This data appears only when Call
348. le 6 16 following two way connections that have already been established are forcibly released Basic two way connections STN STN STN TRK TRK TRK Fixed connections e Two way connections established on a Fusion Link Note 1 57 connection is not included in the two way connection list cited above These kind of calls are forcibly released once the initialization exe cutes When a calling party hears the Ring Back Tone the ORT is additionally provided and the call is placed into the Dial Tone DT connection CHAPTER 6 NDA 24300 Page 476 Issue 1 SYSTEM OPERATIONS HDD Initial Program Load Main Memory Files Basic Software 2 11 s ZPROGRAM Standard Service Software IMAT Software 1 2 TCP IP Software 1 Office Data Files Data Memory ASYD AUNT SYSTEM DATA ANPD ASPA ASDT etc Call Forwarding Data Speed Calling Data Name Display Data RCF NDM LDM User Assign Soft Key Data Number Sharing Data Call Block Figure 6 57 Conceptional Diagram of Initial Program Load NDA 24300 CHAPTER 6 Page 477 Issue 1 SYSTEM OPERATIONS To initialize the system check the lamp indications in Figure 6 58 and operate the keys on PZ DK222 TOPU PTS PZ DK222 Face Layout Nw C SYSTEM DATA INITIAL EFFECT t NON LOAD Q O ie To initialize the system operate the keys shaded here To confirm the imposed system initialization
349. line Network failure Temporary failure Switching system congested Access information discarded Use of requested line channel not allowed Class not allowed use of other resources Use of QOS not allowed Requested facility not contracted Bearer capability not allowed Bearer capability not allowed at present Class not allowed to use other services or options Unprovided bearer capability designated Unprovided channel kind designated Unprovided facility requested Restricted digital information bearer capability Class unprovided with other services or options Invalid call number used Invalid channel number used Designated transit call ID number unused Transit call ID number being used No transit call Designated transit call disconnected and released Terminal attributes unmatch Invalid transit network selected Other invalid message class Mandatory information elements inadequate Message kind undefined or unprovided Call status and message unmatching or message kind undefined Information element undefined Content of information element invalid Call status and message unmatching Recovery due to timer over Class of other procedure errors Other interworking class CHAPTER 3 Page 186 Issue 1 NDA 24300 SYSTEM MESSAGES Sender Start Time Out Default Alarm Default Grade Grade Modified Lamp Modified NON 0 This message indicates that an outgoing call by connection acknowledge system has not receiv
350. lization Program Load Office Data Load System Initialization System starts up again CHAPTER 6 NDA 24300 Page 482 Issue 1 7SEG LED OPE LAMP KEY SETTINGS CPU OPE lamp on the DSP of active CPU lights steadily green IMGO 3 lamps flash IMGO lamp on the DSP of mate CPU flashes green SYSTEM DATA nies NON LOAD yer NON LOAD PZ DK222 CPU OPE and IMGX lamps on both DSP go OFF STATUS LED right on the DSP of CPU is ON STATUS LED right on the DSP of CPU is ON STATUS LED right on the DSP of CPU is ON STATUS LED right on the DSP of active CPU is ON CPU OPE lamp on the DSP of active CPU lights steadily green IMGO 3 lamps flash IMGO lamp on the DSP of mate CPU flashes green STATUS LED right on the DSP of active CPU F is ON ON LINE SYSTEM OPERATIONS Table 6 16 System Initialization by Phase 1 Restart Procedure 5 7SEG LED OPE LAMP KEY SETTINGS CPU OPE lamp on the DSP of START active CPU light steadily green IMGO 3 lamps flash Confirm system 15 operating normally Set the SENSE switch on the DSP of CPR to 3 IMGO lamp on the DSP of mate CPU flashes green Turn ON the EFFECT key on the TOPU See Figure 6 58 SYSTEM DATA PROGRM Set the keys on the TOPU as follows m NON LOAD PROGRAM KEY NON LOAD 01 LOAD e SYSTEM DATA KEY NONLOAD IM PZ DK222 Press INITIAL START button on the TOPU CPU OPE and IMG
351. lt Alarm Default Grade Grade Modified Lamp Modified NON 3 This message displays when the MBR switch on the TSW card is turned OFF at CPU changeover or speech path changeover 1 XX00 0000 0000 0000 2 0000 0000 0000 0000 3 0000 0000 0000 0000 y7 4t 0000 9990 090009 0000 54 0009 8000 00090 0000 70000 0000 009090 0000 re OOOO WOOO OUO so QODO DCOU OOOO e OUO HOO HOO ODOD D system status of TSW card 0 1 No 0 system No 1 system b7 b0 b7 Kind of Circuit Card 0 1 SWI2 GTO9 NDA 24300 CHAPTER 3 Page 115 Issue 1 SYSTEM MESSAGES TSW PLO Key Turn ON Default Alarm Default Grade Grade Modified Lamp Modified NON 3 This message displays when the PLO MBR switch 15 turned ON UP 14 9000 D000 0000 2 10000 0000 0000 0000 Se 160000 0000 0000 0000 CD 4 0000 0000 0000 0000 5 0000 0000 0000 0000 6 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 QUOO 20000 30000 0000 0000 0000 09000 Os 0001 0000 D Information on PLO MBR b0 O I System O System 1 operation b7 CHAPTER 3 NDA 24300 Page 116 Issue 1 SYSTEM MESSAGES TSW PLO Key Turn OFF Default Alarm Default Grade Grade Modified Lamp Modified NON 3 This message displays when the PLO MBR switch 15 turned OFF DOWN 14 9000 D000 0000 2 10000 0000 0000 0000 Se 160000 0000 0000 0000 CD
352. lty Situation e The ACT side has become faulty and the system changeover has executed in the dual configuration system e 4 S MUX Ready Failure 4 T Both MUX Failure e 23 Y MUX Clock Failure START Check to see if the MUX PH PC36 circuit card of the STBY side is making poor contact If the connection is set up set the faulty system into STBY side CHAPTER 5 Page 344 Issue 1 NDA 24300 ATTENTION Contents Static Sensitive Handling Precautions Required Set the MB switch of the MUX circuit card UP Extract the MUX circuit card from its mounting slot and clean the contact portion If cleaning cannot be done repeat insertion and extraction of the circuit card two or three times Set the MB switch of the MUX circuit card UP and insert the circuit card into its mounting slot Set the MB switch of the MUX circuit card DOWN Set the faulty system to ACT side by flipping the key on the active GT PH GTO09 card Refer to Section 12 1 6 Manual System Changeover of Speech Path System in Chapter 6 Check to see if a station to station connection can be set up within the faulty unit END Replace the MUX circuit card with a spare and check it If the connection is set up set the faulty system into STBY side NDA 24300 FAULT REPAIR PROCEDURES ATTENTION Contents Static Sensitive Handlin Precautions Required Replace the MUX circuit card referring to Section 3
353. mand Parameters Traffic Data 1 Traffic Data 2 Traffic Data 3 Traffic Data 5 Traffic Data 6 Terminal Traffic DTF101N Route Traffic DTF102N Station Peg Count DTF103N Attendant Peg Count DTF104N Route Peg Count DTF105N Service Peg Count DTF201N UCD Route Peg Count DTF301N UCD Group Peg Count DTF302N UCD Station Peg Count DTF303N Attendant Ans Peg Count DTF501N Connection Route Peg Count DTF601N Connection Route Traffic DTF602N NDA 24300 CHAPTER 8 Page 585 Issue 1 DTF303N Display of UCD Station Peg Count Data for Fusion Network Display of UCD Station Peg Count Data for Fusion Network 1 Functional Outline This command is used for displaying the result of traffic measurement data for 10 UCD Station Peg Count assigned by the ATREN command 2 Parameters Traffic Data 1 Terminal Traffic DTFIOIN Route Traffic DTF102N Station Peg Count DTF103N Attendant Peg Count DTF104N Route Peg Count DTF105N Traffic Data 2 Service Peg Count DTF201N Traffic Data 3 UCD Route Peg Count DTF301N UCD Group Peg Count DTF302N UCD Station Peg Count DTF303N Traffic Data 5 Attendant Ans Peg Count DTF501N Traffic Data 6 Connection Route Peg Count DTF601N Connection Route Traffic DTF602N CHAPTER 8 NDA 24300 Page 586 Issue 1 DTF501N Display of Attendant Answering Peg Count Data for Fusion Network DTF501N Display of Attendant Answering Peg Count Data for Fusion Network 1
354. mer 2 Gate ON OFF 0 1 Speaker Gate ON OFF 0 1 Parity Check Enable MASK 0 1 Channel Check Enable MASK 0 1 RAM Refresh Pulse Output State 0 1 Timer 2 Output State 0 1 Channel Check Error Detected 0 1 Parity Error Detected 0 1 ACT side Processor CLK Alarm 0 1 ACT side Processor COP Alarm ACT side Processor MEM Alarm 0 1 ACT side Processor Emergency Timer Overflow 0 1 STBY side Processor CLK Alarm 0 1 STB Y side Processor COP Alarm 0 1 STBY side Processor MEM Alarm 0 1 STB Y side Processor Emergency Timer Overflow 0 1 CLK Alarm 0 1 Emergency Timer Overflow 0 1 SOFT EMA 0 1 SOFT changeover 0 1 Emergency Counter Overflow STBY ACT 0 1 Dual Single 0 1 CPU 0 CPU 1 0 1 Main Power Alarm 0 1 Power Alarm 0 1 FUSE Alarm 0 1 TEMP MJ Alarm 0 1 TEMP MN Alarm 0 1 Parity Alarm 0 1 Card is not mounted mounted 0 1 EMA CLK Alarm NDA 24300 SYSTEM MESSAGES B1 Level Infinite Loop Permanent Default Alarm MN Default Grade Grade Modified Lamp Modified 2 This message displays when a B level infinite loop failure occurs O F Memory Failure 1 2 09 4 XXXX XXXX XXXX 5 7 XXXX XXXX 8 3 6 XX
355. ming traffic measurement a node basis SYSI INDEX8 Number of Tenants SYSI INDEX9 Number of Attendant Consoles SYSI INDEX47 bit O Unit of Traffic Measurement 0 1 CCS Erlang SYSI INDEXA7 bit 7 Traffic Measurement Service 0 1 Out In Service Assign 1 When performing traffic measurement on a network basis via TCP IP e SYSI INDEX8 Number of Tenants SYSI INDEX9 Number of Attendant Consoles SYSI INDEX47 bit O Unit of Traffic Measurement 0 1 CCS Erlang SYSI INDEX47 bit 7 Traffic Measurement Service 0 1 Out In Service Assign 1 By using the ATRF ATRFN command assign the traffic measurement programs as follows When performing traffic measurement a node basis Assign traffic measurement Note PORT number to be used and the output INTERVAL and Time HOUR MINUTE etc For more details see the ATRF command in CHAPTER 8 When performing traffic measurement on a network basis via TCP IP Assign traffic measurement TYPE Note PORT number to be used and the output INTER VAL and Time HOUR MINUTE etc For more details see the ATRF command in CHAP TER 8 You can select one measurement TYPE at a time If you need two or more measurement TYPE repeat the same steps following the entry of this command Terminate all the MAT commands An image of IPX MAT Menu is shown in Figure 6 21
356. mmodated in the TSWM 2 1 Precaution This procedure is applied when replacing faulty circuit card with a spare It is also able to be applied when checking a spare card There are the functional switches having set the default switch on some of the circuit cards to be replaced As for switch setting on the circuit cards confirm the circuit card mounting face layout for the PIM When a circuit card that has default switch settings has been replaced with a spare card be sure to make switch settings on the new circuit card the same as on the replaced card Otherwise elec tronic components on the circuit card may be destroyed or the circuit card itself may fail to function normally When handling a circuit card be sure to use the field service kit for countermeasures against static electricity If you touch a circuit card without using the field service kit electronic components like an IC on the card may be destroyed by the static electricity on the human body 2 2 Circuit Card Mounting Face Layout The face layout of the circuit cards housed in the TSWM is shown in Figure 4 4 Circuit Card Mounting Face Layout of TSWM Note that the circuit cards marked with are optional TSWM Siot No 05 06 o7 os o9 10 11 12 13 t4 t5 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 2 v 35 PWRSW PH PW14 DLKC PH PC20 GT PH GT09 TSW PH SW12 PLO PH CK16 17 Figure 4 14 Circuit Card Mounting Face Layout
357. msec Burst Clock down card bl Frame Synchronization from SYNC card is down b4 Internal OSC clock down b7 b4 bl i ILLI CHAPTER 3 NDA 24300 Page 60 Issue 1 SYSTEM MESSAGES PLO Failure Default Alarm Default Grade Grade Modified Lamp Modified MN 3 This message displays when the system detects all the failures concerned with input clock down or output clock down in the PLO card at the ACT side When this message is indicated the PLO card changeover executes Note The No 0 PLO card automatically changes over to No 1 The changeover of No 1 to 0 is not automatic XXXX XXXX 0000 2 0000 0000 0000 0000 3 0000 0000 0000 0000 ub cie oo 4 0000 0000 0000 0000 5 0000 0000 0000 0000 6 0000 0000 0000 0000 7 0000 0000 0000 0000 8 0000 0000 0000 0000 9 0000 0000 0000 0000 D Self CPU Restart Information 0 1 No OPLO No 1 PLO b7 bO 2 Valid Information bit for Scan Data b0 b7 Bit position corresponding to the detected information in Scan Data 1 1 4 is flagged 1 b7 b b5 b4 63 b2 bl TT TTT tT Valid Information bit for Scan Data b0 b7 Bit position corresponding to the detected information in Scan Data 2 2 5 is flagged 1 b7 b b5 b4 63 b2 bl LT TTT ttt Reference See Chapter 4 Section 2 3 2 and Section 2 3 4 for the circuit card replacement procedure NDA 24300 CHAPTE
358. n issue No and date in the main memory and the program information SP No and issue No in the port microprocessor memory mounted in each circuit card in the PBX Parameters Input data Type of Issue Module Group Unit Display data Type Version Issue Date Group SP No Issue Note 1 This data is valid when Port Microprocessor is designated Main Memory Port Microprocessor Note 1 Note 1 Main Memory Boot ROM IP ACDP Note 2 Note 2 Note 2 Note 2 00 23 4 digits ASCII 2 digits Note 1 Note 1 Note 1 Note 2 This data is valid when Main Memory is designated NDA 24300 CHAPTER 8 Page 553 Issue 1 DLEN Display of LENS Data DLEN Display of LENS Data 1 Functional Outline This command displays the data station data or trunk data assigned for a designated LEN For Hotel system Room Class and Floor Service Data Annex ANX Ground Underground G Floor FLR displays also STN Maximum 6 digits TEC Telephone Equipment Number 1 31 See Table 8 4 Table 8 4 Telephone Equipment Number Explanation pra 18 Virtual Line Appearance 19 22 Not used for D Multi Line RSC Route Restriction Class 0 15 SFC Service Feature Class 0 15 ROOM CLASS 0 15 ANX Annex 0 3 CHAPTER 8 NDA 24300 Page 554 Issue 1 DLEN Display of LENS Data G O Ground 1 Underground FLR Floor 1 127 RT Internal Route Number See Table 8 5
359. n 22 0 1 Even numbered MG Odd numbered MG b7 b2 bl 2 Kind of fault bO 0 1 RGU Ringing Unit Fault 1 1 Howler Fault b7 bl bO b 0 Howler Fau CHAPTER 3 NDA 24300 Page 88 Issue 1 Default Alarm NON SYSTEM MESSAGES Line Load Control Start Default Grade Grade Modified Lamp Modified 3 This message displays when the CPU usage occupancy rate exceeds the value assigned to ASYD SYSI In dex 56 and the call origination from the pre selected group of stations is restricted 1 e Line Load Control is set This system message 15 always indicated as dt 4 du 0000 0000 0000 0000 2 OUO 4000 OOOO 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 8 0000 0000 0000 0000 OUO 8000 OOOO 26 0000 0000 00909 0000 925 0000 0000 0000 0000 9998 10000710000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 NDA 24300 CHAPTER 3 Page 89 Issue 1 SYSTEM MESSAGES Line Load Control Stop Default Alarm Default Grade Grade Modified Lamp Modified NON 2 This message displays when the CPU usage occupancy rate becomes lower than the value assigned to ASYD SYSI Index 57 and Line Load Control is cancelled This system message is always indicated as 1 0000 0000 0000 0000 2 0000 0000 0000 0000 3 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0UO00 20000 20000 lt O000 0000 0000 20000 os 0000 0000 0000 re OOO
360. n Data DSTN Display of Station Data 1 Functional Outline This command is used to display the registered Station Data corresponding to the designated Tenant and Station Number In addition the information of Hot Line Key Layout Hunting and Call Pickup etc can also be displayed as the data related to the designated stations 2 Parameters Input Data TN Tenant Number STN Station Number 0 9 Max 6 digits Buttons For display data selection SHP Station Hunting Group Pilot Note Key Data for Note CPG Call Pickup Group Note CPE Call Pickup Expand Group Note PHN Phantom Station Number Note SHC Station Hunting Circular Note SHU Station Hunting UCD Note HLS Hot Line Station Note Note When the designated station has any of these data the corresponding button s can be selected If the data is necessary click the button s For execution order Get Click to view the display data Close Click to exit this command Display Data by Parameters ETN Effective Tenant Number LENS Line Equipment Number 6 digits Telephone Equipment Class 1 31 1 DP 1 Opps 2 PB 3 DP PB 4 DP 20pps 5 11 Not used 1 2 13 Data Terminal via 14 Hot Line 15 CAS Line 16 Data Terminal via Data Module 17 Not used 18 Virtual Line Appearance for Multi Line 19 22 Not used 23 ISDN Terminal 24 26 Not used 27 8 Conference Equipment 28 3 1 Not used RSC Route Restriction Class 0 15 SF
361. na sees 174 13 R ______ 175 13 2 SoC ee Ue 176 15 VPS Failure 177 15 B eaaa N SHE 178 15 C Lo E E Se E A EE EAN ge E EEE E S een eee 179 16 A inside TUNK BUSY 180 16 Virtual Tie Line Set 182 16 C Tie Linie HepOIT ia don do dE HOP or DOR eor d OR aH a ce d da og 183 16 E Virtual Tie Line Sel Time UL aua t 4p ge eedoesbase rq 184 16 F aender Sb TImb Us cascade dea CERE ob AEH eee enn 187 16 ete ones 194 16 L E ek oe gt 195 16 oh ee ese eee __ ___ _ 196 16 N RESO ipo nd do JE de do ee ee 197 16 T qne eno db ads ous 198 16 U IG Paulie Pentaho ea c2a6425605605 50 __ _ 199 16 X Pee ee heehee qid ERE EA 200 17 A CUM MBR Rey TUI LI 26255 eme a eq acp GEO ORCI Ko qoin
362. nction is to provide an interface between the CPR and Port Microprocessor PM of the line trunk circuit and also to provide an interface for multiplexing de multiplexing of voice Pulse Code Modulation PCM information and digital data information Use the procedures below to re place the MUX card with a spare Note Execute the system changeover of MUX by using the MBR key operation on the active GT 9 card or by using the CMOD command Before starting this task be sure to confirm the system block diagram shown in Figure 4 16 or Section 12 System Control Procedures in Chapter 6 MUX Card Replacement Procedure Nem Apply extreme care when operating the keys on the circuit cards ATTENTION n Contents __ Static Sensitive andling Precautions Required On the active GT PH GTO09 card set the MBR key System Changeover UP Then return the key DOWN Check the following lamp indications on the circuit cards to be affected and ensure that they are all OFF e TSW ACT TSW cards DLKC card Note e MUX ACT MUX cards Note f the MUX card to be replaced represents system status 0 all circuit cards Check the mate GT block s ACT mode with 0 status are totally affected Check the cited cards lamp indications Refer to Figure 4 16 and Figure 4 17 On the MUX PH PC36 card to be replaced Set the MB switch UP Check the following lamp indications on the mate Speech Path Block and en
363. nnection processing and the connection for the next call 15 not able to be processed e Port Microprocessor Each line trunk card mounted in the PIM 15 equipped with a processor called Port Microprocessor PM which continuously supervises the lines trunks e Ready Error For acknowledging the connection between the CPU and a circuit card an interface signal called Ready Signal is used When the CPU has accessed a specific circuit card and the normality of the connection is acknowledged the Ready Signal is returned to the CPU within 6 us If the Ready signal is not returned to the CPU within 6 us after access the situation is referred to as Ready Error e Parity Error For confirming the normality of data transfer between the CPU and the circuit card under the control of the CPU parity check 15 made When an error is detected in a parity check it is referred to as Parity Error Parity check means to confirm the normality of data by adding an error detecting parity bit to a set of data to be transferred When set of data 15 transferred a parity bit 15 added to data so that the data has even number of 1 bits it 15 referred to as Even Parity When there is an odd number of 1 bits in the received one set of data it 1s detected as an error Monitor Restart Monitor restart processing suspends current processings in progress without applying any hardware controlling allowing the system to restart its operat
364. nnot receive the return data within a predetermined period of time the system displays this data When the failure is detected less than 15 times per hour the failure is judged as tem porary OOO DODO 90000 WOOO OOOO OOOO Sr O O00 HO GOO WOOO ODOD ain od 0 4 0000 0000 0000 0000 5 0000 0000 0000 0000 6 0000 0000 0000 0000 ie 0000 0000 20099 0900 0000 2000 20099 0000 95 0000 0000 20000 0000 Faulty Circuit Card Location 4 Group b5 b6 Unit 0 3 07 b 55 64 63 b2 bl 57 Module Group 0 1 Even numbered MG Odd numbered MG 0 PM Restart b0 0 1 B monitor Initial Restart b7 ILIILLLI CHAPTER 3 NDA 24300 Page 72 Issue 1 SYSTEM MESSAGES 48V Over Current Default Alarm Default Grade Grade Modified Lamp Modified SUP 3 This message displays when over current of the operating power DC 48V is supplied from the ATI ELC cir cuit card to the Attendant Console D When this fault occurs the related circuit card is placed into make busy state and stops supplying power Iz XX00 9000 09009 0000 2t 00009 9000 0000 0000 3 0000 0000 0900 0000 y7 CD 4 0000 0000 0000 0000 5 0000 0000 0000 0000 6 0000 0000 0000 0000 1 0009 9090 0000 0000 85 0009 2800 00909 0000 92 0000 0000 009090 0000 Location of faulty PM b0 b4 Group b5 b6 Unit 67 b b5 b4 63 02 bl
365. nstructions Replace the EMA circuit card with a spare Set the MB switch of the EMA circuit card and extract the circuit card from its mounting slot Make necessary switch settings on the new circuit card Set MB switch UP side and insert the circuit card into its mounting slot Set the MB switch DOWN Check to see if a fault is detected END CHAPTER 5 NDA 24300 Page 366 Issue 1 FAULT REPAIR PROCEDURES 8 POWER SUPPLY FAULT This section explains the fault repair procedure when any of the faults shown in Table 5 10 occur Table 5 10 PWR Supply Fault Situation FAULTY SITUATION REFERENCE SECTION Circuit Breaker OFF Fault in PWR Supply Section 8 3 Circuit Breaker OFF Fault in PWR Supply Fault of Alarm Lamps on PWR Supply Section 8 4 Fault of Alarm Lamps on PWR Supply 8 1 Check Point When repairing a power supply fault consider the following items 1 Before checking the system check the rectifier battery and power cables 2 The PWR circuit card is equipped with the circuits to supply ringing signal and howler tone When a fault occurs that causes the bell of the telephone not to ring or howler tone cannot be heard etc check the alarm lamp on the PWR circuit card 3 Figure 5 13 through Figure 5 15 show the block diagrams for the power supply to each module PIM2 Note PIM1 Note PIMO Note LPM a a Note Note PWRI is mounted when power supply system is a dual system configuration
366. nt set each circuit card in a separate cardboard box and stuff the box with shock absorbing material Note When sending a faulty circuit card put it in a static guard bag To prevent damage never place the cir cuit card in a vinyl bag or ship it without a protective bag NDA 24300 CHAPTER 2 Page 35 Issue 1 This page is for your notes CHAPTER 2 NDA 24300 Page 36 Issue 1 CHAPTER3 SYSTEM MESSAGES This chapter explains how to read and analyze system messages displayed during routine diagnosis system op eration status controlling and occurrence of a fault within the system Table 3 1 provides a list of system mes sages Table 3 1 System Messages Lis t eee NDA 24300 CHAPTER 3 Page 37 Issue 1 SYSTEM MESSAGES Table 3 1 System Messages List Continued _______ MN ENNLITIIIDUIT KM NK CHAPTER 3 NDA 24300 Page 38 Issue 1 SYSTEM MESSAGES Table 3 1 System Messages List Continued 24300 39 Issue 1 SYSTEM MESSAGES Table 3 1 System Messages List Continued _ CHAPTER 3 NDA 24300 Page 40 Issue 1 SYSTEM MESSAGES Table 3 1 System Messages List Continued ae eee DCH Back Up Automatic Change Start End DCH Back Up Manual Change Start End Note 1 Note 2 Note 3 Note 4 Refer to Fusion Network System Manual Refer to the manual related to ATM Refer
367. o 2 89 Not Used 9 0 Information on Calling Party Refer to b Trunk Route No Trunk No Route No Trunk No Example RT125 TKIO 01 25 00 10 L IL 1 4 3 DO Information on Held Party or 3rd Station Trunk in 3 Party Connection Refer to Note 2 When ACD Trouble Kind is 14 Hex 3 Issue of ACDP First digit of decimal place 4 Issue of ACDP Second digit of decimal place Note 3 When ACD Trouble Kind is 21 Hex 3 6 Information on Calling Party Refer to of Note 1 0 Not used 9 Information on Unknown Pilot No Refer to a Station of Note 1 CHAPTER 3 Page 94 Issue 1 NDA 24300 SYSTEM MESSAGES Note 4 When ACD Trouble Kind is 24 or 99 Hex D Not used 7 Error Counter Note 5 When ACD Trouble Kind is 30 Hex D Pointer Address 7 Not used Error Kind Note 6 When ACD Trouble Kind is 33 Hex 3 ACDP Data Memory OO Used 01 Not used ACDP System Capacity 02 50 Agent Positions 04 200 Agent Positions 07 500 Agent Positions Note 12 900 Agent Positions 15 2 000 Agent Positions Note 1 other data is output the ACD system not be working correctly In this case be sure to install the ACD application again by using the MSVIP command Note 7 When ACD Trouble Kind is 34 Hex 2 6 Information on Unknown Pilot No Refer to a Station of Note 1 NDA 24300 CHAPTER
368. o the external printer for output END CHAPTER 7 Page 500 Issue 1 NDA 24300 Turn ON the MAT s power Confirm that the menu appears on the screen Leave the MAT power ON continuously lower the CRT brightness when not in use Confirm that printer power is ON and that the SEL lamp is lit Check the remaining quantity of printer paper 2 4 Collection of System Messages START END Cause system messages to be displayed When a system message 15 displayed Check the results of routine diagnosis When the system 15 operating normally or after a fault is restored NDA 24300 ROUTINE MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE Refer to Chapter 3 If the system message indicates a fault diagnose the fault by referring to Chapter 5 and perform fault recovery System message 7 O indicates that the system 15 normal System message 7 P indicates that the system is abnormal Perform fault recovery by referring to Chapter 3 or Chapter 5 Use the RALM command to clear the alarm indication and registered system message CHAPTER 7 Page 501 Issue 1 ROUTINE MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE 2 5 Display of Locked out Station START Check the displays of relevant commands Check the displays of the following to locate any locked out stations commands e DLSL Display in the order of LENS e DLSS Display in the order of Station Numbers When any station in locked out Recover the locked out station s refer
369. o Figure 4 6 Contents __ Static Sensitive Handli ndling Precautions Required After mounting the ISAGT LANI cards reattach the top cover by tightening the 8 screws Then attach the Front Panel by fastening the 4 screws lt Front Panel Figure 4 6 Reattachment of CPR Top Cover and Front Panel CHAPTER 4 NDA 24300 Page 246 Issue 1 UNIT CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE new CPR into the LPM Then fasten the retained four screws Refer to STEP 4 After turning ON key on the DSP of the new CPR insert the Figure 4 7 ATTENTION Contents Static Sensitive Handling Precautions Required As shown in Figure 4 7 insert the new CPR into the LPM Then fasten the four screws Figure 4 7 Accommodation of New CPR into LPM NDA 24300 CHAPTER 4 Page 247 Issue 1 UNIT CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE STEP 5 Insert the new into the CPR Then fasten the two screws Refer to Figure 4 8 ATTENTION Contents __ Static Sensitive Handling Precautions Required By using the two screws fasten the new HFD onto the CPR Jf Q PZIO27 PZ IO28 Figure 4 8 Insertion of New HFD into CPR CHAPTER 4 NDA 24300 Page 248 Issue 1 UNIT CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE Replacement Procedure Make a backup copy of the main data office data CF SPD data etc onto the hard disk of the HFC T
370. o an individual line of either 2nd DT system or sender system NDA 24300 CHAPTER 6 Page 439 Issue 1 SYSTEM OPERATIONS 3 Designated Connection Test Procedure a Register Test Procedure Lift handset DT Dial access code for e Access code is assigned command CI N designated connection SRV SSC SID 17 Route numbers to be designated are as follows p RT NUMBER TRUNK NAME Originating Register Trunk Incoming Register Trunk Dial 1 2 3 4 5 0 7 8 9 0 in case of PB signal consecutively If any of the dialed numbers are not received correctly a 94 SST Reorder Tone ROT is heard NO Hang Up TRUNK DESIGNATION TEST IN PROGRESS Is next register to be tested too REGISTER UNDER TEST Make switch hook flash Note Note Jf the trunk number of the next register is not assigned the test ends Figure 6 29 Register Test Procedure Connection Diagram CHAPTER 6 NDA 24300 Page 440 Issue 1 SYSTEM OPERATIONS b Sender Test Procedure Lift handset DT Dial access code for designated connection KXK e Route number to be designated is as follows L e Access code is assigned by command CI N SRV SSC SID 17 RT No TRK No RT NUMBER TRUNK NAME Sender Trunk DP PB Music On Hold Connection test is automatically performed Note 1 SST e If any of the dialed numbers are rece
371. o exit this command Assigned Trunk Number Line Equipment Number Data Entry Result OK Data Assignment is successful Note 4 NDA 24300 CHAPTER 8 Page 533 Issue 1 CATK Continuous Assignment of Trunk Data When Delete is selected in the Type KIND selection list box Input Data RT Route Number TK START First Trunk Number 1 768 TK END Last Trunk Number 1 768 STEP Trunk Count up Step 1 10 Note 1 Buttons Execute Click to delete the input data Cancel Click to cancel the deletion Exit Click to exit this command Display Data TK Trunk Number STATUS Result of Deletion OK Deletion Success Note 2 Note 1 n the parameter here specify the size of increment between the consecutive trunk numbers to be de leted See the example below Example Input data Result TK START 1 TK END 21 Trunk Number is deleted by 2 increments STEP 2 1 3 5 I 9 1 19 2l Note 2 When the deletion is successful OK is displayed here Otherwise i e the deletion is rejected re lated error message is displayed CHAPTER 8 NDA 24300 Page 534 Issue 1 CATK Continuous Assignment of Trunk Data Details on Trunk Arrangement TYPE When assigning the consecutive trunk data by using the CATK command you must select the trunk arrangement type 1 6 in the TYPE parameter See the detailed examples below The following are the examples when the 16 COT circuit cards are accommodated as shown below _
372. o the new CPR Then insert the new CPR into the LPM Refer to Circuit Card Installation Into New CPR procedure in this section NDA 24300 CHAPTER 4 Page 251 Issue 1 UNIT CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE Connect the disconnected and Ethernet cables to the connectors on the PZ PC19 Connect the disconnected bus cables to the connectors on the PZ GT13 Connect the disconnected power cables to the OUTPWR and INPWR connectors Note Do not connect the cable for the PALM connector yet Turn ON the SW key on PZ PW92 Connect the disconnected power alarm cable to the PALM connector on PZ PW92 CHAPTER 4 NDA 24300 Page 252 Issue 1 PWR PZ PW92 Ny SW ON X 5 OFFS FRONT VIEW Contents __ Static Sensitive Handling Precautions Required UNIT CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE Contents __ Static Sensitive Handling Precautions Required EMA SUP lamp on the EMA card Turn OFF the EMA SUP key on the EMA goes OFF PH PC40 card MBR DSP Flip the MBR key on the DSP of the new CPR from ON to OFF Initial Program Load IPL ically Confirm that IPL has completed successfully e lamp DSP flashes green DSP
373. ocations o RR RE P REOR haus 305 Fuse Location Within TSWM 306 RGU Fuse Blown Fault Flowchart 307 DC 48V Fuse Blown Fault Flowchart 308 Controlling LC ELC Circuit Cards and Speech Path 312 Controlling Trunk Circuit Cards and Speech 323 ATT Connector Cabling and Connector Leads 330 Pe cee dre da dira 333 Unit Control Block Diagram Dual 334 Unit Control Block Diagram Single Configuration 335 PALA LOTO LOGSIUOS ir ded d Yd do x WR EEE Ardet dh REA AR SES 249 Speech Path Block Diagram 626 uda ds ERR sess ORE RR Rem PS RH E Scd os 347 CPU CONTOIMO BIOG Dist a a ee ors OR qoe oko dede 597 Alarm Bus Cable Connections 362 Cable Routing for Alarm 1 5 365 Cabling Related to Alarm Indicating 365 Block Diagram of Power Supply System 367 Block Diagram of Power Supply System 1
374. ocedure Lift handset DT Dial access code for e Access code is assigned by command CI N designated connection SRV SSC SID 17 ee 99 XXX Lo _____ RT No TRK No Dial the called party number The called party at the distant office answers and talks Is next register to be tested too Make switch hook flash Note Note f the trunk number of the next trunk is not assigned the test ends Figure 6 35 Trunk Test Procedure NDA 24300 CHAPTER 6 Page 447 Issue 1 SYSTEM OPERATIONS TRUNK DESIGNATION CALLED PARTY DIALING CALLED PARTY DIALING 2nd DT SYSTEM SENDER CHARGING SERVICE SYSTEM PROVIDED CALLED PARTY DIALING NUMBER SENDING Figure 6 36 Trunk Test Connection Diagram CHAPTER 6 NDA 24300 Page 448 Issue 1 SYSTEM OPERATIONS 10 2 Designated Connection Test DESKCON ATTCON 1 General The purpose of this test is to confirm the operations related to a trunk which has been designated from the Desk Attendant Console DESKCON ATTCON 2 Test Procedure a Trunk seizure with TKSL key Press TKSL or TRKSL key Whether dialing RT No TRK No OR or e Dialing Line NO is determined ASYD command SYS1 INDEX68 bl C O Line NO C O Line No is assigned by ACOC command RT No TRK No DT from Distant Office Dial called party number RBT Called party at distant office answers and talks
375. ods of procedure performance and various symbols used in the description See Section 4 Reporting Fault to NEC Explains the method of forwarding faulty circuit cards the method of creating a history record for fu ture fault repair and the method of reporting faults to NEC Explains how to read and analyze system messages Explains the method of replacing a unit circuit card due to a fault Explains repair procedures corresponding to the faults of processors or equipment Explains how to control the system in service management functions and precautions required in the system control process Explains routine maintenance Explains the commands used in the system administrative management procedure 2 BASIC KNOWLEDGE This section identifies the information necessary for the system operations and maintenance procedures 2 1 System Configuration 2 2 Line Equipment Numbers LENS 2 3 Local Partition LP Number 2 4 System Messages 2 5 Fault Detecting Function 2 6 Range of Faults Specification 2 7 Explanation of Terms CHAPTER 2 NDA 24300 Page 4 Issue 1 SYSTEM MAINTENANCE OUTLINE 2 1 System Configuration Figure 2 2 shows the system configuration of the fully expanded 4 IMG type For details on each module accommodation see Figure 2 3 through Figure 2 5 TOPU TOPU TOPU TOPU PIM3 PIM3 PIM3 PIM3 PIM2 PIM2 PIM2 PIM2 FANU FANU FANU FANU PIM1 PIM1 PIM1 PIM1 PIMO PIMO PIMO PIMO LPM TSWM DUMMY DUMMY BASEU BASEU BA
376. of 2 amp 9 Trunk No of IC trunk 7 Trunk No of IC trunk b7 b6 65 63 62 bl used OG route number Hex b7 dd 0 1 Internal trunk External trunk b7 b b5 b4 63 b2 bl b6 OP data 0 1 When OPRT data of is valid 1 displays bO b5 OG route number e bit 620 Route No lt 64 Refer to the e bit 6 1 63 Route No data of NDA 24300 CHAPTER 3 Page 191 Issue 1 SYSTEM MESSAGES OPRT data b0 b3 OPRT data Note b7 63 62 bl Note This data displays when the OG Route No is larger than 63 and bit6 of displays as 1 otherwise 0 is displays at any time While the six bit data of is self sufficient in verifying the Route No 1 63 this OPRT data provides a supportive role to cover the Route No which is larger than 63 Use the following method to analyze the data coronene OT OTe TO Senes aat OPRT data 0 fixed bit 0 bit 5 of D OG Route No 64 or larger OPRT data OG Route No T OPRT data variable bit 0 bit 5 of M 9 Trunk No of OG trunk b0 b7 Trunk No of OG trunk b7 b6 b5 63 62 bl Trunk No of sender bO b7 Trunk No of sender b7 b 65 b4 63 b2 bl D Number of digits dialed by caller bO b4 Number of digits dialed by caller b7 b4 b3 62 bl 1I L LLLI CHAPTER 3 NDA 24300 Page 192 Issue 1 SYSTEM MESSAGES 12 Number dialed by
377. of the faults shown in Table 5 6 has oc curred to all the line trunk circuit cards mounted in a specific unit Figure 5 4 shows the range of units Table 5 6 Unit Fault Situation FAULT SITUATION REFERENCE SECTION Noise one way speech no tone Section 4 2 Unit Fault Fault Related to Speech Even if dialing has been made dial tone does not stop Dial Tone cannot be heard Section 4 3 Unit Fault When Dial Tone DT Cannot Be Heard MUxX card has become faulty and as a result the CPU has changed Section 4 4 Unit Fault ACT Side MUX Card Is over Faulty and System Has Changed Over Unit2 Unit3 Unit2 Unit3 Unit2 Unit3 Unit2 Unit3 MGO01 MGO03 MGO05 MGO7 UnitO Uniti UnitO Unit 1 UnitO Unit 1 UnitO Unit 1 Unit2 Unit3 Unit2 Unit3 Unit2 Unit3 Unit2 Unit3 MGOO MG02 MG04 MG06 UnitO Unit 1 UnitO Unit 1 UnitO Unit 1 UnitO Unit 1 FRONT VIEW Unit No 0 2 Slot No 9 0d Hd 0 Figure 5 4 Range of Units NDA 24300 CHAPTER 5 Page 333 Issue 1 FAULT REPAIR PROCEDURES 4 1 Check Point When repairing a unit fault consider the following items 1 Speech paths and control paths in the unit are connected to line trunks the MUX circuit cards Be sure to check the alarm lamps on the MUX circuit cards and check to see if the front cable between each MUX circuit card and TSW circuit card 15 connected correctly Figure 5 5 and Figure 5 6 show the block dia g
378. old Plated Terminal with bare hands Figure 2 20 How to Hold a Circuit Card NDA 24300 CHAPTER 2 Page 27 Issue 1 SYSTEM MAINTENANCE OUTLINE 3 When a circuit card appears to be faulty check the following items before replacing it with a spare a b d Poor connector contact at the circuit card may be responsible for the fault Repeat insertion and ex traction of the circuit card a few times Clean the connector portion and recheck for proper operation Check the lead wires of vertically mounted parts resistors capacitors etc to ensure they have not shorted each other or broken Check the back side of the circuit card to see if there is any short circuited soldered portion or mod ified cross connection wires erroneously left unconnected Check the ROMs to ensure proper seating in the IC socket Figure 2 21 shows a leg that is bent and not set in the socket A pin is bent not inserted in the socket SOCKET CHAPTER 2 Page 28 Issue 1 Figure 2 21 How to Set the ROM in IC Socket NDA 24300 SYSTEM MAINTENANCE OUTLINE 4 How to clean the connector portion gold plated terminal a Dip the gold plated terminal portion in the cleaning fluid for 3 to 5 seconds only PA XX type circuit card as shown in Figure 2 22 Cleaning Fluid Circuit Card Container Figure 2 22 How to Clean the Connector Portion Note 1 Some of the parts are subject to damage if they come in
379. ommand For make busy make busy cancel by each circuit card MBPM commands or MB toggle switch setting on the circuit card Figure 6 13 Make Busy Make Busy Cancel of C O Line Tie Line Procedure CHAPTER 6 NDA 24300 Page 402 Issue 1 SYSTEM OPERATIONS 6 4 Line Management Commands MBLE Make Busy of LENS 7 STATION MESSAGE DETAIL RECORDING SYSTEM SMDR Billing information can be managed by connecting the PBX system and an external computer SMDR equip ment Note The SMDR equipment and its software must be provided by the user The PBX system provides the SMDR equipment with the following information e Calling Party Information e Called Party Number Call Start Time e Call End Time e Call Data Authorization Code Account Code Upon receiving the above information from the PBX system the SMDR equipment performs editing and man agement of the information and outputs the resulting information This section explains the information pro vided to the SMDR equipment and also explains the method of controlling the interface port IOC card between the SMDR equipment and the PBX system NDA 24300 CHAPTER 6 Page 403 Issue 1 SYSTEM OPERATIONS 7 1 Transmission Data to SMDR Equipment 1 Transmission Format As seen in the figure below the basic information to be transmitted Transmission Message is a block which begins with Start of Text STX and ends with End of Text ETX When the call ends the whole con
380. on by SINZ Command SYSTEM OPERATIONS The entire system can be initialized by execution of the SINZ command from the MAT which is useful for maintenance technicians who have to control the system from a distant location Perform the pro cedure in Table 6 18 Table 6 18 System Initialization by SINZ Command Procedure ACTION EE IN Use SINZ command to execute initialization Execution of Initialization Confirm the following lamp indications CPU DSP 0 CPU OPE steady green IMGO 3 flash green CPU DSP 1 0 flash green Use ATIM command to adjust date and time NDA 24300 For information about SINZ command see Chapter 8 When the initialization com pletes ACTO lamp lights green and lamp goes OFF on EMA PH PC40 card Note When the system is initialized the MAT is once disconnected Then log in to system again CHAPTER 6 Page 485 Issue 1 SYSTEM OPERATIONS 12 2 6 Peripheral Equipment Initialization Line Trunk Initialization Line trunk initialization can be divided into two types initialization on an indi vidual channel basis and initialization on a circuit card basis Follow the proce dure in Table 6 19 ATTENTION Contents Static Sensitive Handlin Precautions Required Table 6 19 Line Trunk Initialization Procedure Note When initializa tion executes ona circuit card basis all channels on the cir cuit card are placed Is initialization on Circuit ca
381. on link For more details see Chapter 6 Section 12 2 3 NDA 24300 CHAPTER 3 Page 111 Issue 1 SYSTEM MESSAGES CPU MBR Key Turn ON Default Alarm Default Grade Grade Modified Lamp Modified NON 3 This message displays when the MBR switch on the GATE card is turned ON at the time of CPU changeover or speech path changeover 1 XXXX 0000 0000 0000 2 0000 0000 0000 0000 3 0000 0000 0000 0000 lt 0 4t 0009 90990 0900 0000 54 0009 0000 00090 0000 78009 0000 0900 0000 OOOO WOOO OUO OOOO F P000 DCOU OOOO OOOO Se OUO TODO OUO D Self CPU Restart information 0 1 Monitor Restart b3 Initialization d De er ee bU b4 Data Copy Restart for Dual CPU system only b7 ACT STBY active system indication after restart 2 Mate CPU Restart information 0 1 Monitor Restart b3 Initialization b7 DD De D bO b4 Data Copy Restart for Dual CPU system only b7 0 1 ACT STBY active system indication after restart CHAPTER 3 NDA 24300 Page 112 Issue 1 Default Alarm SYSTEM MESSAGES CPU MBR Key Turn OFF NON Default Grade Grade Modified Lamp Modified 3 This message displays when the MBR switch on the GATE card 15 turned OFF at the time of CPU changeover or speech path changeover rey 0 Lio XXXX OOOO 0000 00009 2 4 0000 0000 0000 0000 5 1 7 0000 0000 0000 0000 8
382. onference Test Connection Diagram NDA 24300 CHAPTER 6 Page 443 Issue 1 SYSTEM OPERATIONS d Tone Test Procedure Lift handset DT Dial access code for designated connection Access code is assigned by command CI N SRV SSC SID 17 Dial 000 DT Dial xx For Tone No to be designated refer to Table 6 7 Tone Number Tone Tone designated by Tone is heard Hang Up TRUNK DESIGNATION TEST IN PROGRESS TONE ORT Figure 6 33 Tone Test Procedure Connection Diagram CHAPTER 6 NDA 24300 Page 444 Issue 1 SYSTEM OPERATIONS Table 6 7 Tone Numbers ene fear Sd sense ete Serta Wo ete Ne 24300 CHAPTER 6 Page 445 Issue 1 SYSTEM OPERATIONS e Interrupt Ringing IR Test Procedure Lift handset DT Dial access code for _____ Access code is assigned by command CI N SRV SSC designated connection SID 17 Dial 999 SST Hang Up Bell Rings Lift handset and answer SST Hang Up DESIGNATION TEST INPROGRESS A A A A p SST IR ANSWER SST ORT HANGUP Figure 6 34 Interrupt Ringing IR Test Procedure Connection Diagram CHAPTER 6 NDA 24300 Page 446 Issue 1 SYSTEM OPERATIONS f Trunk Test Pr
383. operating normally become faulty status Diagnose the fault from the content of the system message displayed and repair the fault as required When limiting the range of faults consider the system circuitry that consists of the control see Figure 2 16 where CPU 0 15 active and speech path systems see Figure 2 17 As seen from the block diagrams in Figure 2 15 through Figure 2 18 if a fault occurs within the common portions to be controlled all other associated portions are affected by that fault occurrence If the range of faults is outside PIM fault CPU TSW system changeover is executed only when the fault 15 detectable by the system CHAPTER 2 NDA 24300 Page 18 Issue 1 SYSTEM MAINTENANCE OUTLINE SERIAL BUS MUX MUX PM BUS PM BUS RES PM BUS PM BUS LL 1 BUS PM BUS p Sh JEGHRIECHPI s PM BUS i zi E1 DS1 B with m m oW E1 DS1 Fusion Link m m m m m m um um um LC TRK with m um um um um i m m m m um um um Fusion Link SHH uio B B m m m m um um m eee ee pe im eme b om m m m um
384. ormerly active go OFF All OPE or ACT lamps on the Speech Path System which were See Chapter 8 formerly STBY light steady green Speech Path System Changeover On active GT card turn MBR key UP All OPE or ACT lamps on the Key Operation on the active GT card Speech Path System which were Return MBR key to original position DOWN formerly active go OFF after OPE MB lamp goes OFF on GT card All OPE or ACT lamps on the See Section 12 1 6 Manual System Changeover other side Speech Path System of Speech Path System light steady green PLO Changeover by Key Operation On active PLO card turn MBR key UP ACT lamp on the PLO card which was formerly active goes OFF Return MB key to original position DOWN after ACT lamp goes OFF on PLO card ACT lamp on the PLO card which was formerly STBY goes steady See Section 12 1 7 Manual System Changeover green of PLO Note These operations cause a momentary interruption in speech paths Since the interruption is momentary it can be ignored as far as ordinary telephone calls are concerned However care should be take when data communications are involved as the interruption might cause bit errors CHAPTER 6 NDA 24300 Page 466 Issue 1 12 1 6 Note 1 Note 2 SYSTEM OPERATIONS Manual System Changeover of Speech Path System To changeover the ACT STBY of Speech Path System the CMOD command 15 normally used How ever if for some reason the command
385. osis 15 not normal 1 XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX 2 0000 0000 0000 0000 3 0000 0000 0000 0000 a 1 Note 4 0000 0000 0000 0000 5 0000 0000 0000 0000 6 0000 0000 0000 0000 Fe 0009 9090 0000 0000 85 0000 28007 00909 8000 95 0000 08007 0000 0000 D Detected Error Item 10H Program Memory Verification Discrepancy 11H Program Memory Verification Impossible HFD Fault 67 56 55 b4 63 b2 bl 50 12H Program Memory Verification Impossible Fault at CPU side 20H Data Memory Verification Discrepancy 21H Data Memory Verification Impossible Fault 30H TSW ACT STBY Changeover Failure 31H TSW ACT STBY Changeover Failure MUX Fault 41H CPU ACT STBY Changeover Failure Single CPU System 42H CPU ACT STBY Changeover Failure DM Verification NG 43H CPU ACT STBY Changeover Failure PCI Fault 44H CPU ACT STBY Changeover Failure Changeover NG or CPU RAM Copy NG 50H Trunk Ineffective Hold Detected 51H Trunk Ineffective Hold Detected and Released 52H Trunk Ineffective Hold Detected Impossible 70H Call Forwarding Memory Clear NG AOH Periodic Backup Abnormal End Detection of Remaining Link Abnormal End for Release 4 or later Note The data in this area will be diverse according to the diagnosis specified in For details on each item data see the following pages CHAPTER 3 NDA 24300 Page 134 Issue 1 SYSTEM MESSAGES 10H Program Memory Verification Discrep
386. ot On new DCH PRT card set switch DOWN On new DCH PRT card set MBR switch DOWN Check whether the fault is still 1ndicated CHAPTER 5 Page 387 Issue 1 FAULT REPAIR PROCEDURES 13 4 Fault of DCH DTI and Related Flat Cable START Check the connectors between DTI and DCH Check the connector Check the flat cable and flat cables Check by replacing the DTI card with a spare END CHAPTER 5 Page 388 Issue 1 NDA 24300 On DTI cards set MB switch UP On DCH card set MBR switch UP Check whether the connector is correctly connected If the connection is found improper plug and unplug the connector a few times On DTI cards set MB switch DOWN On DCH card set MBR switch DOWN Check whether the fault is still indicated On DTI cards set MB switch UP On DCH card set MBR switch UP Test the continuity of the flat cable If abnormal replace the flat cable with spare On DTI cards set MB switch DOWN On DCH card set MBR switch DOWN Check whether the fault is still indicated On DTI card set MB switch UP and extract the card from the mounting slot On a new DTI card make switch setting On new DTI card set MB switch UP and insert the card into the mounting slot On new DTI card set MB switch DOWN Check whether the fault is still indicated FAULT REPAIR PROCEDURES 14 HARD TIME CLOCK FAULT This section explains the procedure for repairing a hard time cloc
387. performing alarm tests alarm tests blown fuse is used when performing Phillips Screwdriver A screwdriver is used when replacing the fan with a spare CHAPTER 7 NDA 24300 Page 496 Issue 1 ROUTINE MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE 2 ROUTINE MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES This section explains general routine maintenance procedures to be performed on a daily monthly and quar terly basis Table 7 2 lists each procedure according to the time each procedure is to be performed Use the Reference Section to locate the detailed procedure Table 7 2 List of Routine Maintenance Procedures TIME PROCEDURE REFERENCE SECTION REMARKS Daily Check the temperature and relative humidity in Section 2 1 Ambient Conditions the switch room in Switch Room Check Check to see if any of the alarm indicator lamps Section 2 2 Alarm Check on the TOPU are lit Check the operating status of the MAT and the Section 2 3 MAT Printer Check printer remaining quantity of paper etc Check to see if a system message indicating a Section 2 4 Collection of Sys fault is displayed tem Messages Check whether any station is in lockout state Section 2 5 Display of Locked out Station Check whether the FANU is operating normally Section 2 6 Fan Unit Check MEM Monthly Generate an alarm and check whether an indica Section 2 7 Alarm Tests tion appears on the TOPU Check the conditions of the rectifier and batteries Section 2 8 Main Power System C
388. play Data FPC Fusion Point Code 1 253 RT External Route Number CHAPTER 8 NDA 24300 Page 600 Issue 1 MBSM Make Busy of System Message Printout MBSM Make Busy of System Message Printout 1 Functional Outline This command allows or inhibits the system message printer to output system messages 2 Parameters Input data PORT Port Number of the printer MB Idle 1 Busy NDA 24300 CHAPTER 8 Page 601 Issue 1 MBST Make Busy of Station MBST Make Busy of Station 1 Functional Outline This command assigns the Idle Busy status of stations 2 Parameters Input data TN STN Maximum 5 digits for Business system Maximum 6 digits for Hotel system MB Idle 1 Busy CHAPTER 8 NDA 24300 Page 602 Issue 1 MBST_T Make Busy of Station Telephone Number T Make Busy of Station Telephone Number 1 Functional Outline This command is used to assign the IDLE BUSY status of stations by using Telephone Numbers This command is available at NCN for Fusion network only 2 Parameters Input Data UGN User Group Number TELN Telephone Number max 16 digits MB Make Busy Make Idle Display Data FPC Fusion Point Code 1 253 Note TN Tenant Number Note STN Physical Station Number max 5 digits for Business system max 6 digits for Hotel system Note Note This data is for display only Buttons Get Click to get information on the station Set Click
389. pply Section 12 2 2 e System Initialization by Key Operations on Section 12 2 3 Procedure 1 through Procedure 5 System Initialization by the keys on the CPU Front Panel Section 12 2 4 System Initialization by SINZ Command Section 12 2 5 Peripheral Equipment Initialization Line Trunk Initialization Section 12 2 6 CHAPTER 6 NDA 24300 Page 474 Issue 1 SYSTEM OPERATIONS 12 2 2 System Initialization by Turning ON Power Supply This initialization executes when the power supply to the system has stopped Follow the procedure in Table 6 10 ATTENTION Contents Static Sensitive Handlin Precautions Required Table 6 10 System Initialization by Turning On Power Supply Procedure Confirm all switches are turned OFF on PWR cards Refer to Section 12 3 Power supply to the PBX 15 restored Confirm input source power to the PBX is normal Check INPUT voltage 15 nor mal at power terminals Turn ON power supply at PWR cards Refer to Section 12 3 Execution of Initialization Confirm the following lamp indications When initialization completes CPU DSP 0 CPU OPE steady green ACTO lamp lights green and IMGO 3 flash green ACTI lamp goes OFF on CPU DSP 1 IMGO flash green PH PC40 card Clear alarm by pressing ALM RST key on TOPU Use ATIM command to adjust date and time NDA 24300 CHAPTER 6 Page 475 Issue 1 SYSTEM OPERATIONS 12 2 3 System Initialization by Key Ope
390. ppy disk e Verify Function e Verifies the One Touch Speed Call Memory data saved on the floppy disk with the data residing in the One Touch Speed Call Memory of DLC ELC card e Function Loads the One Touch Speed Call Memory data saved in the floppy disk into the One Touch Speed Call Memory of DLC ELC card 2 Parameters Input data Direction Select PBX Memory to MAT MAT to PBX Memory Verify MAT against MEM Data Type Selection by Station by LEN Begin TN Note 1 End TN Note 1 Begin STN Note 1 End STN Note 1 Begin LEN Note 2 End LEN Note 2 Auto Verify Afterward Click ON Checked OFF Unchecked File Name and Path Note 1 When by Station is designated Note 2 When by LEN is designated CHAPTER 8 NDA 24300 Page 526 Issue 1 CADSD Continuous Assignment of Station Data CADSD Continuous Assignment of Station Data 1 Functional Outline This command can assign delete many station data simultaneously which have consecutive numbers 2 Parameters Input Data Type Assign Delete When Assign is selected in the Type selection list box TN START Start Tenant Number TN END End Tenant Number STN START Start Station Number 6 digits Note 1 STN END End Station Number 6 digits Note 1 STEP Station Count up Step Note 2 If using and gt 1 12 If not using and gt 1 10 LENS START First Line Equipment Number 6 digits LENS END Last Line Equipment Number 6 dig
391. r 2 00 a m is the start time INDEX 88 0 0 Minute To stop the routine diagnosis set FF respectively to INDEX87 88 NDA 24300 SYSTEM OPERATIONS SYS1 INDEX89 90 Routine Diagnosis Items The item corresponding to each bit is to execute once a day Single System Configuration INDEX89 INDEX90 INDEX304 Main Memory Check MM Program Memory 0 1 No Yes bl DM Check DM Data Memory 0 1 2 No Yes b4 Trunk Ineffective Hold Check 0 12 No Yes b5 Trunk Ineffective Hold Detection 0 1 No Yes b1 Backup of Call Forwarding Individual Speed Data Name Display Data User Assign Soft Key Data and Number Sharing Data to HDD see Index 304 0 1 No Yes b3 Residual Link Detection 0 1 No Yes Individual Speed Calling Data Saving 0 1 Out In Service This data is valid when SYS1 INDEX90 61 1 b Call Forwarding Data Saving 0 1 Out In Service This data is valid when SYSI INDEX90 b1 1 b3 Name Display Data Saving 0 1 Out In Service This data is valid when SYS1 INDEX90 61 1 b4 User Assign Soft Key Data Saving 0 1 Out In Service This data is valid when SYSI INDEX90 b1 1 b5 Number Sharing Data Saving 0 1 Out In Service This data is valid when SYSI INDEX90 b1 1 Dual System Configuration INDEX89 Main Memory Check MM Program Memory 0 1 No Yes bl DM Check DM Data Memory 0 1 2 No Yes b2 TSW ACT STBY Ch
392. ram within the unit 2 The MUX circuit cards are operating in the ACT STBY modes under control of the CPU circuit When the ACT side CPU has detected a fault in the ACT side MUX circuit card CPU changeover is executed and the ACT STBY mode of the Speech Path System is also changed over When both of the MUX circuit cards have become faulty all the lines trunks in that unit are placed into make busy state If a PFT circuit card 15 located in that specific unit the PFT 1s activated Figure 5 7 shows the location of the MUX cards 3 When both units in a specific PIM are faulty it is possible that the PWR circuit card mounted in that spe cific PIM is faulty In such a case refer to Section 8 Power Supply Fault To 19 TSW INT TSW INT Control of Control of CPU No 0 CPU No 1 ACT STBY of ACT STBY of CPU No 0 CPU No 1 SYMBOLS Circuit Card A Control on ACT STBY of Speech Path Systems B Control on ACT STBY of Clock Systems Figure 5 5 Unit Control Block Diagram Dual Configuration CHAPTER 5 NDA 24300 Page 334 Issue 1 FAULT REPAIR PROCEDURES To TSW INT Speech Path A Control of CPU LO TRK Trunk Circuit Card LO TRK TRK Figure 5 6 Unit Control Block Diagram Single Configuration IMGO0 1 2 3 MUX PH PC36 card is mounted in Slot No 13 and or 14 of each PIM Front View Figure 5 7 MUX Card Locations NDA 24300 CHAPTER 5 Page 335 Issue 1 FAULT REPAIR
393. rations on TOPU Table 6 11 shows the system initialization procedure Figure 6 57 shows the initial program load con ceptional diagram Table 6 11 System Initialization Procedure Types TYPE DESCRIPTION Procedure 1 System Initialization without Loading Whole system is initialized All communications are Table 6 12 forcibly released System restarts with current Main Memory Files and Office Data Files that exist on DRAM Procedure 2 System Initialization with Office Data Loading Whole system 15 initialized All communications Table 6 13 forcibly released System transfers Office Data Files from HDD to DRAM System restarts with the transferred Office Data Files and the current Main Memory Files Procedure 3 System Initialization with Program Loading Whole system is initialized All communications are Table 6 14 forcibly released System transfers Main Memory Files from HDD to DRAM System restarts with the transferred Main Memory Files and the current Office Data Files Procedure 4 System Initialization with Office Data and Whole system is initialized All communications are Table 6 15 Program Loading forcibly released System transfers both Main Memory Files and Office Data Files from HDD to DRAM System restarts with the transferred Main Memory Files and the transferred Office Data Files Procedure 5 System Initialization by Phase 1 Restart System is initialized All communications except for the Tab
394. rcuit card 18 con trolled from the CPU card via the INT on the TSW card Figure 5 3 shows the control route of the ATI circuit card The ATI PA CS33 circuit card is used as an interface card between the PBX and ATTCON DESKCON The card is mounted in Slots 12 or 23 NDA 24300 CHAPTER 5 Page 329 Issue 1 FAULT REPAIR PROCEDURES PIM Backplane gon 7 M nsa LT11 is used when PA CS33 is mounted in Slot 23 LT5 is used when PA CS33 is mounted in Slot 12 I 2 LI Ww nya PA CS33 Pin Assignment s Bwasoi Or Brew SL DESKCON 0 36 BNAGET o uo DESKCON 1 42 17 for Rosette 0 1 ATTCON DESKCON 0 Installation Cable for Rosette 0 1 Figure 5 3 ATT Connector Cabling and Connector Leads Accommodation CHAPTER 5 NDA 24300 Page 330 Issue 1 3 3 ATTCON DESKCON Fault Note 1 No speech can be made Note 2 While replacement of the ATI circuit card for the master ATTCON DESKCON is in progress the system is placed under Night Mode START On the ATTCON DESKCON LCHK Lamp Check key has been pressed but no lamps have illuminated When the OPE lamp of the ATI PA C S33 circuit card does not illuminate When the BL lamp of the ATI circuit card is flashing or illuminating When keys cannot be operated END NDA 24300
395. rcuit card into its mounting slot Set the MB switch DOWN Initialize the system and confirm the tone CHAPTER 5 Page 377 Issue 1 FAULT REPAIR PROCEDURES IMG1 External Tone Source Option TSWM TSW 00 TSW 01 TSW 02 TSW 03 To Music lt Connector m for EMA Card IMGO Note Symbols Circuit Card External Cable PH CK16 17 16 A 17 A TSW PH SW12 Connector PH PC40 Note f PH CK16 A PH CK17 A is used multiple connections are made between PLO 0 and Refer to the description of PH CK16 A or 17 in the Circuit Card Manual Figure 5 21 External Hold Tone Supply Block Diagram CHAPTER 5 NDA 24300 Page 378 Issue 1 FAULT REPAIR PROCEDURES 11 SYSTEM DOWN FAULT This section explains the fault repair procedure when both the CPU and TSW systems are faulty Figure 5 22 shows the sequence of repair for system down fault When cause for the fault cannot be identified When faulty circuit cards can be assumed from Section 11 1 system message Section 11 2 Check power supply Replace doubtful circuit card with a spare Minimize system configuration Execute system initialization and see if the mode becomes ON LINE Figure 5 22 System Down Fault Repair Sequence NDA 24300 CHAPTER 5 Page 379 Issue 1 FAULT REPAIR PROCEDURES 11 1 When Cause for Fault Cannot Be Identified START Check power supply circuits Check voltage DC 48V 5
396. rcuit card mounting face layout for the PIM When a circuit card with a default switch setting 1s replaced with a spare card always make the switch setting on the new circuit card the same as on the replaced card Otherwise electronic compo nents on the circuit card may be destroyed or the circuit card itself may fail to function normally When handling a circuit card always use field service kit as countermeasures against static elec tricity Touching a circuit card without using the field service kit may destroy the card due to static electricity on the human body 3 2 Circuit Card Mounting Face Layout Figure 4 18 shows face layout of the circuit cards mounted the PIM Universal Slots Universal Slots PIM SiotNo 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 os o9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 ii Note This section also covers the procedure to replace the SDT PA SDTA PA SDTB card The card can be mounted in any of the universal slots Slots 04 12 or 15 23 Figure 4 18 Circuit Card Mounting Face Layout of PIM Improper key operations may result in a system down Operate the keys with extreme During replacement of a circuit card the system issues system messages and activates the related alarm Reset the indicated alarm after completing the replacement procedure If the indicated alarm is cleared via the RALM command the system also clears t
397. rd Is Faulty When the signal transmission line is a digital line transmitting Section 12 4 Fault of CCH DTI and Related Flat receiving of control signals cannot be performed Cable 121 Check Point When repairing a CCIS Line fault consider the following items 1 Check alarm lamps on the CCH or CCT circuit card 2 Refer to Figure 5 23 and check the cable connection 12 2 CCIS Line Control The CCH CCT circuit card controls the signal link digital of the interoffice common channel signaling system and transmitting receiving call processing information The signal link controls permit normal transmission and reception of call processing information A break in signal links is detected then restored to establish signal links The call processing information is converted into No 7 signal format for channel 1 any channel of the DTI before being transmitted to a distant office Figure 5 23 shows the CCIS line control route LT Cable gt To CCIS Line LT Cable Figure 5 23 Controlling CCIS Line NDA 24300 CHAPTER 5 Page 383 Issue 1 FAULT REPAIR PROCEDURES 12 3 Specific CCH CCT Card Is Faulty START Check by replacing CCH CCT card with a spare END CHAPTER 5 Page 384 Issue 1 NDA 24300 On CCH CCT card set the MBR switch UP On CCH CCT card set MBR switch UP and extract the card from its mounting slot Make switch settings on a new CCH CCT card On new CCH CCT card set MBR and MB sw
398. rd Replacement Procedure Section 2 3 1 Card Replacement Procedure Section 2 3 2 TSW Card Replacement Procedure Section 3 3 2 MUX Card Replacement Procedure Place the circuit card CPU GT TSW MUX into ACT mode individually by executing CPU or Speech Path System changeover Refer to Section 12 1 6 Manual System Changeover of Speech Path System in Chapter 6 Check to see if a station to station connection can be set up and identify a circuit card responsible for the fault After all the steps are complete place the whole circuit card CPU GT TSW MUX examined above to the ACT mode Refer to Section 12 1 6 Manual System Changeover of Speech Path Sys tem in Chapter 6 Check to see if a fault is indicated CHAPTER 5 Page 359 Issue 1 FAULT REPAIR PROCEDURES 2 For Single Configuration Replace the related circuit card CPU GT TSW MUX EMA with a spare and check END CHAPTER 5 NDA 24300 Page 360 Issue 1 ATTENTION Contents Static Sensitive Handling Precautions Required Replace the circuit card CPU GT TSW MUX EMA individually by referring to the following sections in Chapter 4 Section 1 3 1 CPR Replacement Procedure Section 1 3 2 EMA Card Replacement Procedure Section 2 3 1 GT Card Replacement Procedure Section 2 3 2 TSW Card Replacement Procedure Section 3 3 2 MUX Card Replacement Procedure Initialize the system by pressing the START button on the TOPU an
399. rd basis individual channel basis or on circuit card basis Individual channel basis Use RLST command Refer to Chapter 8 Return MB switch to the previous position after the MB lamp has turned ON CHAPTER 6 NDA 24300 Page 486 Issue 1 SYSTEM OPERATIONS 12 3 How to Turn ON OFF Whole System A switching system once put into service is seldom stopped However there may be a case when a switching system must be stopped due to module expansion work etc In preparation for such a case this section explains the procedure for stopping the system and turning ON the power supply 12 3 1 How to Turn On Whole System START Confirm SENSE switch on DSP of Active ATTENTION Contents Static Sensitive Handling Precautions Required CPU is set at 2 DM Load Restart Turn ON power supply at PIMs of IMG3 1 Turn ON 48V SW on PWR card in PIMO PIMO PIM I PIM2 PIM3 2 Turn ON 48V SW on DPWR card in PIMO 3 Repeat 1 and 2 for PIMI 2 3 in turn depending on system configuration Turn ON power supply at TSWMI 1 Turn ON 48V SW on PH PW14 PWR 50 2 Turn ON 48V SW on PH PW14 PWR SW 1 Turn ON power supply at PIMs of IMG2 2 Turn ON 48V SW on DPWR card in PIMO 3 Repeat 1 and 2 for PIMI 2 3 in turn Turn ON power supply at TSWMO depending on system configuration 1 Turn ON 48V SW on PH PW14 PWR SW 0 Tun ON power supiy a MSOF IMCL 2 Tu
400. ring to state is displayed Section 3 Indication of Lockout Stations in Chapter 6 END CHAPTER 7 NDA 24300 Page 502 Issue 1 2 6 Fan Unit Check START When fan is set for automatic start When fan is set for constant operation When fan is out of order END NDA 24300 ROUTINE MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE Pull FAN START switch toward the front and set it to ON UP position Confirm that the fan has started running Pull FAN START switch toward the front and set it to AUTO DOWN position Confirm that the fan is running Refer to Section 9 Fan Unit Fault in Chapter 5 Replace the fan with a spare by referring to Section 4 Fan Unit Replacement in Chapter 4 CHAPTER 7 Page 503 Issue 1 ROUTINE MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE 2 Alarm Tests START An alarm is to be generated which will be displayed at the DESKCON ATTCON Be sure to inform the attendant of the test in advance Replace the 48 fuse in the FANU with a blown fuse Confirm that an alarm is indicated on the TOPU Replace the blown fuse with the original 48V fuse Using the RALM command reset all alarm indications END CHAPTER 7 NDA 24300 Page 504 Issue 1 ROUTINE MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE 2 8 Main Power System Check START Check the load voltage DC 48V 5 V of the rectifier Check the batteries Check the forced charge voltage and floating voltage Check the specific gravity liquid level and rated capacity of each battery END Note
401. rk 3 is broken down as indicated by 4 STEP 4 Determine whether the result of work 3 coincides with the status indicated by 5 If so the fault s 1s are indicated either by 6 or by 7 If not proceed to the next Step CHAPTER 2 NDA 24300 Page 30 Issue 1 SYSTEM MAINTENANCE OUTLINE STEP 5 Perform the work indicated by 8 and if the result of the work is the same as the status indi cated the fault is indicated by 9 If the fault repair work indicated by 9 affects another nor mal line recheck the work as indicated by 10 b Fault Repair Procedure A fault repair procedure is explained by means of TREE format in Chapter 5 The following ex plains how to follow the TREE format and proceed with designated work See Figure 2 25 Begin from START and proceed with the necessary repair work following the sequence When a faulty circuit card or circuit cards is suspected replace the faulty circuit card with a spare in accordance with the work procedure pertaining to that specific circuit card STEP 1 Replace the circuit card indicated by A with a spare and check it Perform the detailed work as per B If the fault status 1s beyond repair proceed to the next step STEP2 Ifthe range of the fault or the system configuration is as indicated by C perform a check as indicated by D If the fault status 1s beyond repair proceed to the next step STEP3 Replace the circuit card indicated by E w
402. rmation Error 134 7 U PLOU NEPOS ci doa 9 39 4 gt ene 156 7 V PLO MB Key Turn OFF base qe AR cfe 157 13 A COCK iia aud dim bad be bes EEE prd 158 13 B CCH C Level Infinite Loop Failure Permanent 159 13 C CCH C Level Infinite Loop Failure 160 13 D CCH Lock Up Failure Permanent 161 13 E CCH Lock Up Failure Temporary 162 13 F CCH B Level Infinite Loop Failure 163 13 G CCH B Level Infinite Loop Failure 164 13 H CCS Link Failure 165 13 GOS Link Falure CTSPHDOFOEVI ____ _ _ 167 13 J Restoration From CCS Link 169 13 K COH ane ober dedo abd dede e vor 170 13 N Be rs EE TOT OO TUTO peste eee 171 13 O Behe EB Lue a iex a eee oie aoi a 172 13 P 173 13 DRU Rando et
403. rmation is displayed in the text box on the DFTD command form 3 INDICATION OF LOCKOUT STATIONS When a station is in lockout status permanent signaling state shorting across speech wires etc 1t can quickly be discovered preventing the situation from developing into serious trouble 3 1 Indicating Method By entering the following commands from the MAT information pertaining to the lockout station con cerned will display COMMAND COMMAND FULL NAME DLSL Display of Lockout Station LENS DLSS Display of Lockout Station Number 3 2 Recovery Procedure on hook and then go off hook again Confirm the state of the handset of If dial tone is heard the station is in permanent the displayed station signaling status On the MDF connect the test telephone to the displayed station and confirm Dial Tone DT LOCKOUT STATION x 5 SEPARATING x TEST TEL The in house wiring from the MDF to the lockout station is shorting Check the wiring Figure 6 5 Recovery Procedure From Lockout Station CHAPTER 6 NDA 24300 Page 394 Issue 1 SYSTEM OPERATIONS RLST command Forcibly release the lockout station circuit Cl DT ____________y Go off hook again and confirm DT Circuit may be faulty temporarily Observe situation for a while Replace 16LC card with a spare Figure 6 5 Recovery Procedure From Lockout Station Continued COMMAND COMMAND FULL NAME RLST Release Station Trunk
404. rn ON 48V SW on PH PW14 PWR SW 1 PIM I PIM2 PIM3 1 Turn ON 48V SW on PWR card in PIMO 2 Turn ON 48V SW on DPWR card in PIMO 3 Repeat 1 and 2 for PIMI 2 3 in turn depending on system configuration Turn ON power supply at LPM 1 Turn ON the SW on PZ PW92 CPU 0 Turn ON power supply at PIMs of IMGO 2 Turn ON the SW on PZ PW92 CPU 1 PIMO PIM 1 PIM2 gt PIM3 1 Turn ON 48V SW on PWR card in PIMO 2 Turn ON 48V SW on DPWR card in PIMO END 3 Repeat 1 and 2 for PIMI 2 3 in turn depending on system configuration Note Start from bigger number depending on configuration of IMG stack 1 5 stack IMG3 gt IMG2 gt IMGO Figure 6 59 How to Turn ON the Whole System NDA 24300 CHAPTER 6 Page 487 Issue 1 SYSTEM OPERATIONS 12 3 2 How to Turn OFF Whole System 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Confirm that memory data has been backed up on the HD before turning OFF system power When turning OFF the power supply follow the procedure shown below Turn OFF the power supply in the uppermost PIM of the IMG stack whose number is larger Then move down to the bottommost PIM and repeat the procedure for the smaller IMGs ATTENTION Contents Static Sensitive Handling Precautions Required Turn OFF 48V SW on DPWR first and PWR next cards in PIM3 of IMG3 Repeat 1 for PIM2 PIM1 PIMO IMG3 in thi
405. routine Control No Maintenance Company Name of Equipment Room Temperature Name of Worker F amp humidity Reference Item Detail Check Reference Item Detail Check Section Z4 Check of Ambient 2 9 Trunk RGU Check SND Trunk Conditions in the Switch Room Relative humidity DCF Function Result of Routine ATTCON Check Ringing Signal Collection of 2 11 System Check ___ System Messages 2 Display of Locked Locked out out Station Stations TSW Fan Unit Check Printer Related to Fault Main Power Rectifier System Check Battery Trunk RGU Check C O Trunk Tie Trunk ORT IRT Condition And Cause Procedure and Parts Used NDA 24300 CHAPTER 7 Page 511 Issue 1 ROUTINE MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE C O Trunk Tie Line TEST TYPE TEST ITEM CONNECTION DIAGRAM C O Trunk Tie Line eSet up a speech path test Connection Test Station Speech Path Test seizing a trunk using the C O Ti Station or ATTCON DESKCON Une connection test diagrammed to X9 the right 03 Connection Test ATTCON DESKCON C O Tie Line TRK ATTCON DESKCON C O Trunk Tie Line ACCESS ROUTE TRUNK NAME OF TRUNK ROUTE ACCESS ROUTE CHAPTER 7 NDA 24300 Page 512 Issue 1 ROUTINE MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE Register Sender Trunk RST TEST TYPE TEST ITEM CONNECTION DIAGRAM ORT Function e Perform the
406. ry two years even if a fault is not detected Set the CPU whose rack houses the fan to be replaced in STBY mode via the MBR key on STEP 1 the DSP Refer to Figure 4 24 Note Note For the ACT STBY changeover of the CPU see Chapter 6 STEP 2 Disconnect the power alarm cable from the PALM connector on PZ PW92 STEP3 Turn OFF the PWR SW on the PZ PW92 Refer to Figure 4 24 Face Layout of CPR 2 1027 PZ GT16 PZ GT13 ISAGT CPUOPE WDT IMGO MBR e y 8 IMG1 Ys y 00 SELECTO SYSTEM SELECT1 H Ib H e 151 o 2 o o Ti E ooo 000 v 2 SLOT No PZ PC19 LANI Note PZ IO27 CPR may be equipped with PZ IO26 which does not have the MB Make busy key Figure 4 24 CPR Face Layout STEP 4 Disconnect the power and bus and ether cables from the relevant connectors Power cables from OUTPWR INPWR connectors on PZ PW92 Bus cables from the front connectors on PZ GT13 and PZ GT16 Ether UTP CTG5 ST CA n cables from front connectors on the PZ PC19 Remove the front bracket and then take off the four screws fastened onto the CPU Refer to Figure 4 25 STEP 5 STEP 6 Extract the CPR from the LPM Refer to Figure 4 25 CHAPTER 4 Page 301 Issue 1 NDA 24300 UNIT CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE Figure 4 25 Extraction of CPR from LPM STEP7 Disconnect the fan cable from the connector in the backbone of
407. s order Turn OFF 48V SW on DPWR first and PWR next cards in PIM3 of IMG2 Repeat 3 for PIM2 PIM1 PIMO IMG2 in this order Turn OFF 48V SW on DPWR first and PWR next cards in PIM3 of IMGI Repeat 5 for PIM2 PIMI PIMO in this order Turn OFF SW on PH PW14 both PWR SW 1 and 0 in TSWM Turn OFF 48V SW on DPWR first and PWR next cards in PIM3 of IMGO Repeat 8 for PIM2 PIMI in this order 10 Turn OFF SW on PZ PW92 of CPU 1 11 Turn OFF SW on PZ PW92 of CPU 0 Figure 6 60 How To Turn OFF the Whole System CHAPTER 6 NDA 24300 Page 488 Issue 1 SYSTEM OPERATIONS 12 4 System Start Up The system start up procedures consist of the following types Procedure 1 see Table 6 20 Executed when the Basic Software and Application Software have already been installed in the HD Office Data has not been installed Procedure 2 see Table 6 21 Executed when the Basic Software Application Software and Office Data have been already installed in the HD Note For the start up procedure in case any Basic Software Application Software and Office Data have not been in stalled in the HD refer to the Installation Manual 4 IMG Type NDA 24300 CHAPTER 6 Page 489 Issue 1 SYSTEM OPERATIONS Table 6 20 Start Up When Basic amp Application Software Is Installed Procedure 1 ACTION When Power is OFF When Power is ON and OFF LINE START START
408. scillator CPN BOR us EMA 40 ISAGT PZ GT13 ER LANI PZ PC19 GT PH GT09 ae a IOC PH lO24 TSW PH SW12 DLKC PH PC20 PLO PH CK16 17 16 A 17 A Staite un Sah PERS MUX PH PC36 Note 1 The circuit cards drawn by dotted lines indicate they are in STBY state These cards TSW MUX and DLKC are totally changed over to the ACT mode when the key of the active GT 9 card is once flipped However PLO PH CK16 17 16 A 17 A is independent and not affected by the development Note 2 f the ACT STBY of CPU is once changed over the system of GT in TSWM also changes over Note 3 Though an external cable is physically connected between ISAGTO and GTI the actual control signal is sent received only between ISAGTO and This is because GTO and are having a multiple connection on the backboard side Refer to Chapter 6 Section 12 Figure 2 16 CPU Controlling Block Diagram CHAPTER 2 Page 20 Issue 1 NDA 24300 IMG2 d PIM 3 d mux US PIM 3 L E i i y 7 LC TRK uro Quel i MUX i PMBUS 1 i i i PM BUS SYSTEM MAINTENANCE OUTLINE PM BUS
409. sender bO b7 Trunk No of sender b7 b 65 64 63 b2 bl 9 Number of digits dialed by caller bO0 b4 Number of digits dialed by caller b7 b4 63 62 bl ITI LLLLLI NDA 24300 CHAPTER 3 Page 189 Issue 1 SYSTEM MESSAGES 2 Number dialed by caller See table b7 66 b5 64 63 b2 bl 11111 In Case of Tandem Connection D Type of connection b7 b6 1 Tandem connection 57 b6 Lit IC route number Hex b7 AC data 0 1 Internal trunk External trunk 67 56 55 b4 63 b2 bl OP data 0 1 When data of 3 is valid 1 displays bO b5 IC route number bit 620 Route No lt 64 Refer to the e bit 6 1 gt 63 Route No data of 3 CHAPTER 3 NDA 24300 Page 190 Issue 1 SYSTEM MESSAGES 3 OPRT data 50 53 OPRT data Note b7 63 62 bl III LLLII Note This data displays when the IC Route No is larger than 63 and bit6 of displays as 1 otherwise 1 displays at any time While the six bit data of 2 is self sufficient in verifying the Route No 1 63 this OPRT data provides a supportive role to cover the Route No which is larger than 63 Use the following method to analyze the data oo IC Route No 1 63 OPRT data 0 fixed bits of IC Route No 64 or larger OPRT data IC Route No OPRT data variable bits
410. sert the ISAGT and LANI cards into CPR slots 6 ISA and 0 1 and 3 PCI respectively pee Slot 6 ISA Slot 3 PCI Cl Note Accommodation of the second LANI in PCI slot 3 is optional since Release 3 or later Figure 4 10 Insertion of ISAGT and LANI Cards NDA 24300 CHAPTER 4 Page 255 Issue 1 UNIT CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE 3 Reattach the top cover by fastening the removed eight screws Then reattach the front panel by fastening the removed four screws Refer to Figure 4 11 ATTENTION Contents __ Static Sensitive Handling Precautions Required S Top Cover Front Panel Figure 4 11 Reattachment of CPR Top Cover and Front Panel CHAPTER 4 NDA 24300 Page 256 Issue 1 UNIT CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE 4 After turning ON the MBR key on the DSP of the new CPR insert the new CPR into the LPM as shown in Figure 4 12 Then fasten the retained four screws ATTENTION Contents __ Static Sensitive Handling Precautions Required Figure 4 12 Location of New CPR Into LPM NDA 24300 CHAPTER 4 Page 257 Issue 1 UNIT CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE 5 Lastly insert the new HED into the CPR Then fasten the two screws as shown in Figure 4 13 ATTENTION Contents Static Sensitive Handling Precautions Required By using the two screws fasten the new HFD onto the CPR Pz IO27 PZ IO28 Figure 4 13 Insertion of New HFD Into CP
411. sic clock 0 1 No 0 system is ACT No 1 system is ACT NDA 24300 SYSTEM MESSAGES DLKC Data Transfer Failure Temporary Default Alarm Default Grade Grade Modified Lamp Modified SUP 1 This message displays when a data sending error or no answer error occurs at the time of data transfer from CPU to DLKC card 1 XXXX 0000 0000 2 0000 0000 0000 0000 3 0000 0000 0000 0000 4t 0009 9990 009090 0000 55 0090 2000 0990 00009 10000 00060 00900 0009 re OOOO OOOO OOOO 9x O00 sOOOO UJO OOOO Sr QUO QOO OOO OOOO D system status of faulty card 0 1 No 0 system No 1 system b7 bO 2 Error Code OIH Firmware fault b7 b6 b5 b3 b2 bl 02H Data transfer time out to DLKC 03H No answer time out at DLKC 9 Details on Switching Network bO Status of Speech Path System including DLKC b7 bl bO 0 1 2 No 0 system is ACT No 1 system is ACT bl Status of basic clock 0 1 No 0 system is ACT No system is ACT b7 Information on Reset of STBY DLKC Note 0 1 STBY DLKC card was reset Note This data displays when the STBY DLKC card is detected as faulty NDA 24300 CHAPTER 3 Page 67 Issue 1 SYSTEM MESSAGES PLO Restore Default Alarm Default Grade Grade Modified Lamp Modified NON 3 This message displays when a failure such as internal clock down occurred to PLO 1s restored DX
412. slot Set MB switch DOWN On the DSP CPU set SENSE switch to 1 Press RST button on the DSP CPU OPE lamp should illuminate on the DSP If CPU OPE lamp of the DSP does not illuminate replace next circuit card and check it Repeat the above steps for all basic circuit END cards NDA 24300 CHAPTER 5 Page 381 Issue 1 FAULT REPAIR PROCEDURES 11 2 When Faulty Circuit Cards Can Be Assumed From System Message Faulty Situation When the system is down with message 0 C 0 indicated faulty circuit cards can be assumed from the message detail data Replace circuit cards with spares START Replace faulty circuit card with a spare Set MB switch UP and extract the circuit card from its mounting slot Make necessary switch settings on the new circuit card Set the MB switch UP and insert the circuit card into its mounting slot Set the MB switch DOWN Initialize the system by loading the office data and program data from the hard disk Confirm that service connections such as station to station connection can set up END CHAPTER 5 NDA 24300 Page 382 Issue 1 FAULT REPAIR PROCEDURES 12 COMMON CHANNEL INTEROFFICE SIGNALING CCIS LINE FAULT This section explains the fault repair procedure when any of the faults shown in Table 5 11 occur to a specific CCIS line Table 5 11 CCIS Line Fault Situation FAULTY SITUATION REFERENCE SECTION A specific CCH CCT card is faulty Section 12 3 Specific CCH CCT Ca
413. stem changeover make busy shift of the circuit card restart processing etc by executing the automatic diagnostic function Re sults of the action taken and the faulty situation are displayed 1 1 Kinds of Alarm Indications Figure 6 2 shows the kinds of alarm indications TOPU TROUBLE ALARM INDICATION CIRCUIT CARDS ATTENDANT DESK CONSOLE MAT SYSTEM DEDICATED PRINTER SYSTEM MESSAGE Figure 6 2 Alarm Indications NDA 24300 CHAPTER 6 Page 391 Issue 1 SYSTEM OPERATIONS 1 2 How to Stop Alarm Indications To stop the alarm indication press ALM RST key on the TOPU or use the RALM command Note f the RALM command is executed the system messages that show the reason for the failure will be cleared Always print the indicated system message before using this command 1 3 Alarm Indications on TOPU The system has alarm lamps on the TOPU as shown in Figure 6 3 Table 6 1 lists the meaning of each lamp 0 DU JU UU SMJ SMN SUP TUM Figure 6 3 Alarm Indications on TOPU Table 6 1 Description of Alarm Indications on TOPU LAMP COLOR FUNCTION CONTENTS PWR Power ON Indication 96 when the power is turned ON to the LPR card mounted ALM MS MJ Red Alarm urgency level The kind of lamp indications are programmable by variable alarm RA lamps foreach indication Refer to Section 1 4 Variable Alarm Indication Red urgency level Lights when any abnormal state is dete
414. t detection in the optical fiber line When the ACT STBY change cannot be performed this message also indi cates the cause for the changeover execution failure 15 XOXX XXO0 0000 0000 2 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0 4 0000 0000 0000 0000 5 0000 0000 0000 0000 6 0000 0000 0000 0000 7 0000 0000 0000 0000 8 0000 0000 0000 0000 9 0000 0000 0000 0000 D MG Module Group b7 0 1 Even number MG Odd number MG b7 2 Detailed information Active SDT after Changeover 0 1 No 0 System No 1 System 67 b 65 63 bl bl Operating Status of SDT TLILLI 0 1 In service Out of service b2 b3 Result of Changeover 0 1 Success Failure b7 b4 Cause for Changeover 0001 SDT had a serious failure 0010 MB key on SDT card was turned ON 3 Cause for changeover execution failure 67 56 55 54 63 b2 bl OH Changeover Success 2H Optical interface has a serious failure in each 0 1 system Repair Procedure Once this message displays be sure to check other messages such as 33 C SDT Alarm Trouble and review the cause for the changeover If any fault is implicated repair the whole fault s according to the situation NDA 24300 CHAPTER 3 Page 237 Issue 1 This page is for your notes CHAPTER 3 NDA 24300 Page 238 Issue 1 CHAPTER 4 Unit Circuit Card Replacement Procedure 1 LPM Accommodating Unit Circuit Card Replacement Procedure This section expla
415. ta analyzed by NEC Engineers Error Drive b0 0 1 Drive Number 0 bl 0 1 Drive Number 1 b7 b3 b2 bl bO b2 Number 2 CHAPTER 3 NDA 24300 Page 136 Issue 1 SYSTEM MESSAGES 12H Program Memory Verification Impossible Fault at CPU side Itf 2 0000 0080 0000 5 0000 0000 0000 0000 33 0000 8000 0000 0000 DO 1 OOOO OOOO 0000 0000 5 0000 2000105 0900 0000 9000 OOOO 0000 QUOD 73 0009 0000 0000 0000 85 00009 0000 0000 0000 95 0000 0000 0000 0000 CD Error detection by Routine 12H Program Memory Verification Impossible Fault at CPU side Diagnosis Cause for suspension of Program OIH CPU to CPU communication failed Memory Verification Error Code 02H Check sum file copy failed b7 bl NDA 24300 CHAPTER 3 Page 137 Issue 1 SYSTEM MESSAGES 20H Data Memory Verification Discrepancy Lt 20 2 eye 09 4 0000 0000 0000 0000 5 Jt 0000 0000 0000 0000 9 XXXX XXXX XXXX 3 0000 0990 0000 09009 00009 6 0000 0009 0000 0000 0000 94 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 D Error detection by Routine Diagnosis 2 Verification of HFC b7 bl bO 3 Verification of Data Memory b7 bl ttt Ett fo Data analyzed by NEC Engineers CHAPTER 3 Page 138 Issue 1 20H Data Memory Verific
416. ta load backup of Dual Station Calling Over FCCS Figure 6 27 Backup Commands CHAPTER 6 NDA 24300 Page 436 Issue 1 SYSTEM OPERATIONS 9 4 Call Forwarding Data Individual Speed Calling Data Management Call Forwarding Data and Individual Speed Calling Data are changed at any time because these services are set cancelled from the station involved In the PBX these data are backed up by FD Call Forwarding Data HDD_MAT command Individual Speed Calling Data HDD_MAT command 9 5 One Touch Speed Call Memory Data Management One Touch Speed Call Memory data of is destroyed when DLC ELC circuit card has been replaced with a spare or its mounting slot has been changed The data can be backed up onto FD before replacement or mounting slot change of DLC ELC card Backup BOSD command 9 6 Data Management Commands COMMAND COMMAND FULL NAME One Touch Speed Call Memory Data Backup HDD_FDD Data Control Between HDD and FDD HDD_MAT Data Control Between HDD and MAT MEM HDD Data Control Between Memory and HDD NDA 24300 CHAPTER 6 Page 437 Issue 1 SYSTEM OPERATIONS 10 TEST OPERATIONS OF VARIOUS KINDS This section explains the methods of test operations shown in Figure 6 28 to be performed in case a fault recovery occurs CHAPTER 6 Page 438 Issue 1 Display of connection status of designated station trunk COMMAND COMMAND FULL NAME DCON Display of Connection Status Test connection by designating trunks tones and ringbac
417. te the MB key remains in the UP position the PLO system also stays in its make busy status Be sure to return the key DOWN except in the case of a special purpose STEP 3 Confirm the changed lamp indications 1 To confirm the imposed PLO changeover check the following lamps on both PLO cards The LED indications must change as shown in Figure 6 56when the PLO system has been correctly changed over PLO Formerly Active After Changeover Figure 6 56 LED Indications Before and After PLO Changeover 2 If your system uses PH CK16 PH CK17 make sure the active TSW cards and the newly activated PLO are in the same switching block Because this card s MUSIC ROM does not supply hold tones to the TSW cards which are in different Switching Blocks make sure the newly activated PLO and currently active TSW cards are both in the same Switching Block If not perform the Speech Path System changeover referring to Section 12 1 6 Note f the system uses PH CK16 A PH CK17 A this step is not required NDA 24300 CHAPTER 6 Page 473 Issue 1 SYSTEM OPERATIONS STEP 4 Analyze the displayed system messages After STEPs through 3 are performed the system messages 7 U and 7 V will automati cally display Make sure that no errors occurred during the PLO changeover process 12 2 lnitialization 12 2 1 General This section explains the initialization types System Initialization e System Initialization by Turning ON the Power Su
418. te Loop D 1 XXXX 2 XXXX XXXX 3 4 XXXX XXXX D 6 7 XXXX XXXX XXXX 8 XXO0 0000 0000 0000 9 XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX 0DOO 0000 0000 0000 D Self CPU Restart Information after clock fault occurrence b3 b4 b7 65 b4 b3 bO bs 2 Mate CPU Restart Information b3 b7 b5 b4 b3 bO b4 b7 3 NMI Factor b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b0 b4 b5 b6 0 1 2 Monitor Restart 0 1 Initialization 0 1 Data Copy Restart for Dual CPU system only 0 1 MBcontrol 0 1 ACT STBY active system indication after restart 0 1 2 Monitor Restart 0 1 Initialization 0 1 Data Copy Restart for Dual CPU system only 0 1 MBcontrol 0 1 2 ACT STBY active system indication after restart 0 1 Reset by Power On 0 1 2 Watchdog Timer timeout 0 1 ISAGT is mounted ISGAT is not mounted 0 1 OSC clock interrupt on ISGAT 0 1 IO parity Alarm 0 1 IO ready Alarm 0 1 External NMI Reference See Chapter 5 Section 6 2 for the repair procedure NDA 24300 CHAPTER 3 Page 45 Issue 1 SYSTEM MESSAGES System Controlling Port B b7 66 b5 64 63 b2 bl LT TTT ttt 5 CPU Alarm b7 b6 65 b4 63 62 bl TTT Tt tt CPU Changeover Factors b7 66 65 64 63 b2 bl 7 System ALM b7 66 65 64
419. te network to which the opposite party is directly connected Opposite party s side International Network Network from Interworking b4 b7 8 is always indicated 4 Fault Cause b0 b3 Reason Kind b4 b6 Class b7 6 b5 63 62 bl TA newer LLILLLLI Other than O Refer to the following table REASON CLASS KIND DATA REASON KIND VALUE 000 Dead Number No route to the designated transit network No route to the opposite Party Use of channel not allowed Reason Kind Class Value Call terminated to a setup channel X X Normal disconnection Called user busy 8765 4321 bit No response from called user Called party being rung no answer Communication denied Opposite party s terminal number changed Disconnection and release of the user not selected Opposite party s terminal out of order Invalid number format Incomplete Number Facility denied Answer to status inquiry Other normal class 000 XXXX 001 Normal Event Class NDA 24300 CHAPTER 3 Page 185 Issue 1 SYSTEM MESSAGES REASON KIND VALUE CLASS 010 xxxx Classes not allowed use of resources Reason Kind Value X mm 8765 4321 bit 011 XXXX Classes not allowed use of services 100 xxxx Classes not provided with services 101 xxxx Invalid message class xxxx Procedure error ex unrecognized message class 100 102 111 Interworking class DATA REASON KIND No usable channel
420. tenance procedures of the PBX into the following three types and ex plains the minimum required work steps and precautions pertaining to each of the three procedures Daily Maintenance Procedure e Monthly Maintenance Procedure e Quarterly Maintenance Procedure 11 Flow of Procedures The scheduling of routine maintenance daily monthly quarterly will vary with each installation and or ganization Figure 7 1 shows the flow of the routine maintenance procedures Section 2 7 Explanation of Terms in Chapter 2 Section 2 Routine Maintenance Procedures Daily Maintenance Procedures Monthly Maintenance Procedures Quarterly Maintenance Procedures Chapter 5 Fault Repair Procedures Note Perform procedure performance per Chapter 6 System Operations each divided section d Section 3 Routine Maintenance Check Lists Recording of checked items gt Chapter 4 Unit Circuit Card Replacement Procedure Figure 7 1 Flow of Procedures NDA 24300 CHAPTER 7 Page 495 Issue 1 ROUTINE MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE 1 2 Required Test Equipment and Tools Table 7 1 shows the tools and equipment required for test procedures Table 7 1 Test Equipment and Tools EJ TEST EQUIPMENT TOOLS PURPOSE Telephone Set A telephone set is used when performing connection tests on trunks etc VOM Digital Meter VOM digital meter is used when checking output voltages of the rectifier and the battery A blown fuse is used when blown fuse is used when
421. tents of this information is transmitted to the SMDR equipment TRANSMISSION MESSAGE START OF TEXT END OF TEST SYSTEM ADDRESS UNIT ADDRESS 2 Transmission Message One transmission message consists of 128 bytes of data Each byte represents by ASCII codes the data to be transmitted Refer to Table 6 3 The contents of the data to be transmitted vary with the kind of call but the first byte is always transmitted by ASCII code K 4B hex The second byte to be transmitted is the data which specifies the kind of call Note n case the Fusion service is involved the message can consist of more than 128 byte data Figure 6 14 shows the transmission message of an outgoing call Figure 6 15 shows the transmission mes sage of an incoming call Also Figure 6 16 shows the transmission message of a station to station call CHAPTER 6 NDA 24300 Page 404 Issue 1 SYSTEM OPERATIONS Table 6 3 ASCII Code ASCII CODE NUM Special Characters Code BINARY DIGIT CHARAC TER CHAPTER 6 Page 405 Issue 1 NDA 24300 SYSTEM OPERATIONS BYTE DATA ROUTE NUMBER ORIGINATING TRUNK INFORMATION NUMBER CALLING PARTY INFORMATION SEE PARAGRAPH 7 2 1 CALL START TIME SEE PARAGRAPH 7 2 2 BYTE DATA CALL END TIME SEE ACCOUNT CODE SEE PARAGRAPH 7 2 4 92 CALLING PARTY TENANT Uu OFFICE CALLING PARTY 100 OFFICE CODE OF BILLING PROCESS OFFICE ROUTE ADVANCE INFORMATION
422. test by specifying an ORT using the Connection Test Station Confirm that 6 I system message displays as a result of the test SENDER Function Perform the test by specifying an ORT using the Connection Test Station Confirm that 6 I system message displays as a result of the test NDA 24300 CHAPTER 7 Page 513 Issue 1 ROUTINE MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE RST ORT RUNK NO PB M DP RECEIVING omo sp po o RST No CHAPTER 7 NDA 24300 Page 514 Issue 1 ROUTINE MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE Digital Conference Function TEST TYPE TEST ITEM CONNECTION DIAGRAM Three way Perform the test by specifying Conversation an 8CFT using the Connection Test Station INT TSW Confirm that 6 I system message displays as a result of the test Speech Path for Each PIM and Ringing Generator Unit D TEST TYPE TEST ITEM CONNECTION DIAGRAM The ATTCON Normal speech path 15 confirmed DESKCON is called by calling the attendant from a from one station in station located in each PIM each PIM ATTCON DESKCON NDA 24300 CHAPTER 7 Page 515 Issue 1 ROUTINE MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE Speech Path for Each PIM and Ringing Generator Unit Continued L3 TEST TYPE TEST ITEM CONNECTION DIAGRAM The operator calls After normal speech path has the station back been confirmed the attendant calls the station back Confirm ATTCON that the station rings
423. the ACT mode when the key of the active GT 9 card is once flipped However PLO PH CK16 17 16 A 17 A is independent and not affected by the development Note 2 Note 3 If the ACT STBY of CPU is once changed over the system of GT in TSWM also changes over Though an external cable is physically connected between ISAGTO and the actual control signal is sent received only between ISAGTO and This is because GTO and are having a multiple connection on the backboard side Refer to Chapter 6 Section 12 Figure 5 9 CPU Controlling Block Diagram NDA 24300 CHAPTER 5 Page 357 Issue 1 FAULT REPAIR PROCEDURES Q JJ A 5 JJ A BIBI IWININININSIEEIEININININA date E ir a te MUX MUX D PM BUS eee PM BUS J A D L z E L r PIM 1 PM BUS PIM 1 PM BUS I d MUX lt MUX a E L L LC TRK LC TRK LC TRK LC TRK lt dii 42 4 H MUX MUX D PM BUS pop PM B
424. the new fan cables to the fan connector and the connector s disconnected in STEP 4 STEP 9 Fix the fan fuse 5A onto PZ M369 NDA 24300 CHAPTER 4 Page 297 Issue 1 UNIT CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE STEP 10 Set the PWR SW on the PZ M369 to the AUTO position Note The switch setting of the PWR SW can be ON depending on the location conditions of the system STEP 11 Attach the top cover again to the original location Figure 4 21 How to Replace FANU Fans on TOPU CHAPTER 4 NDA 24300 Page 298 Issue 1 UNIT CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE Replacement Procedure FANU in Fan Box When the FANU is mounted in the fan box perform the following replacement STEP Remove the front cover of the fan box Then extract the FANU STEP2 Turn OFF the PWR SW on PZ M369 Refer to Figure 4 22 STEP3 Remove the fan fuse 5A on the PZ M369 STEP 4 Remove the fan cables from the fan connector and the connector s corresponding to the fan to be replaced for example when replacing FAN 1 disconnect the FCO connector together with the fan connector ae ET me ee Remove the Front Cover and pull out the FANU Front Cover PWR SW OFF 47 These dotted squares indicate the fans They reside in the back side of PZ M369 PZ M369 TALMO TALM1 FCO FC1 FCR 50008 56 3 Disconnect the FAN cable 2 Remove this FAN fuse 9 Disconnect the FAN cable s
425. through 103rd byte indicates the Office Code of the office processing centralized bill ing for CCIS network Note Office Code includes the CCIS line access code EXAMPLE 1st DIGIT 2nd DIGIT OFFICE CODE OF CALLING CALLED OFFICE CODE 812 3rd DIGIT PARTY 4th DIGIT 1st DIGIT OFFICE CODE OF end DIGIT BILLING PROCESS OFFICE CODE 813 OFFICE 3rd DIGIT 4th DIGIT CHAPTER 6 NDA 24300 Page 414 Issue 1 SYSTEM OPERATIONS 7 2 9 Text Format of Centralized Billing Fusion Below is the text format for billing information Fusion to be transmitted to the SMDR equipment On the following pages Figure 6 17 through Figure 6 19 provide detailed information Transmission Data Transmission Data STX Start of Text End of Text For details on the Kind of Data see Table 6 4 KK Outgoing KL Incoming KM Extension Table 6 4 Centralized Billing Fusion Kinds of Data KIND KK KL KM i OUTGOING INCOMING STATION wem 02 Calling Party Information Station Number Calling Party Information Station Number Information Station Number Provided Provided Provided Party Information Telephone Number Conditionally Conditionally Provided Provided 04 Called Called Party Information Station Number Information Station Number Called Party Information Station Number Provided Provided E Party Information Telephone Num
426. tion is to provide both MISC and I O Local bus interface between the microprocessor of CPU and other lower echelons such as TSW cards Follow the procedures below to replace a GT card with a spare Note 7o replace the GT card the ACT STBY status of GT must be changed over first This must be done by operating the MBR key or by using the command on the DSP of active CPR Figure 4 15 shows a system block diagram centering upon the CPU and its controlling GT If the ACT STBY of GT is to be changed over the system of CPU must be manually changed over For more details on the GT changeover refer to Section 12 1 2 How to Control CPU Block in Chapter 6 T TSW I O BUS ISAGT PZ GT13 LANI PZ PC19 GT PH GT09 TSW PH SW12 MUX PH PC36 DLKC PH PC20 PLO PH CK16 17 EMA PH PC40 1024 The connection between ISAGT and GT is somewhat unique in this system As shown though an external cable is physically connected between ISAGT 0 and GT 1 the actual control signal is sent received only between ISAGT 0 and GT 0 This is because GT 0 and GT 1 have a multiple connection on the backboard side Figure 4 15 System Block Diagram Connections Between GT and CPU CHAPTER 4 NDA 24300 Page 268 Issue 1 UNIT CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE GT Card Replacement Procedure WARNING Use extreme care when operating the keys on the DSP of CPR and 9 card eM
427. tion Trunk RLST Release Station Trunk 1 Functional Outline This command releases a station or trunk 2 Parameters Input data TYPE Type of Select 1 4 1 Stations 2 Trunk 3 LENS 4 Connection Trunk TN Note 1 STN Maximum 6 digits Note 1 RT Note 2 TK Note 2 LENS Note 3 Connection RT 1 1023 Note 4 Connection TK 1 4095 Note 4 Note 1 This parameter is valid only when TYPE I Note 2 This parameter is valid only when 2 Note 3 This parameter is valid only when TYPE 3 Note 4 This parameter is valid only when TYPE 4 Display data STATUS Status of Station Trunk 1 4 1 Idle 2 Busy 3 Lockout 4 Make Busy FPC Fusion Point Code 1 253 INFORMATION Information of the connected party Note Note This parameter appears only when STATUS 2 CHAPTER 8 NDA 24300 Page 614 Issue 1 RLST_T Release of Station Trunk Telephone Number RLST_T Release of Station Trunk Telephone Number 1 Functional Outline This command 15 used to release a station trunk by using Telephone Numbers This command is available at NCN for Fusion network only Parameters Input Data TYPE UGN TELN RT TK LENS C_RT C_TK Note 1 This parameter is valid when Note 2 This parameter is valid when Note 3 This parameter is valid when Note 4 This parameter is valid when Display Data FPC TN STN Telephone Number Trunk LENS Connection Trunk User Group Number Note 1 Telephone Number ma
428. tion data assignment Replace the LC circuit card with a spare NDA 24300 CHAPTER 5 Page 313 Issue 1 FAULT REPAIR PROCEDURES Check the faulty line on the MDF END CHAPTER 5 Page 314 Issue 1 When Dial Tone DT is heard When no DT or side tone 15 heard When DT is not heard but side tone can be heard 4 c NDA 24300 ATTENTION Contents Static Sensitive Handling Precautions Required Isolate the faulty line to the in house wiring side and to the system side Connect the test telephone to the system side and check to see if dial tone can be heard Check the in house wirings Replace the station telephone set with a spare Check LT cables Replace the LC circuit card with a spare Replace the LC circuit card with a spare FAULT REPAIR PROCEDURES 1 4 Line Fault When Dialing Results in Wrong Connection Note fa circuit card is replaced because only one line is faulty no other lines in that circuit card can be used until the replacement is complete ATTENTION Contents Static Sensitive dling Precautions Required START When a call addressed to a specific station Check to see if Call Forwarding All Calls data has terminated to another station has been deleted Check the faulty line on the MDF On the MDF isolate the faulty line to the in house wiring side and to the system side Connect the test telephone to the system side Repeat station to station connections and
429. to Wireless System Manual Refer to the manual related to OAI NDA 24300 CHAPTER 3 Page 41 Issue 1 SYSTEM MESSAGES Reset Interrupt Default Alarm Default Grade Grade Modified Lamp Modified MN 3 This message displays when the processor 1s reset due to a failure in the system 1 XXXX XXXX 0000 2 0000 0000 0000 0000 3 0000 0000 0000 0000 xad 4 0000 0000 0000 0000 5 0000 0000 0000 0000 6 0000 0000 0000 0000 Jt 2000 0000 2005 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 9 0000 0000 0000 D Self CPU Restart Information 0 1 Monitor Restart bl 0 1 Phase 1 Restart Note 1 67 b b4 b3 bl bO 0 1 Anitialization 1 1 b4 Data Copy Restart executed for Dual CPU system only b6 Program Load not executed executed b7 ACT STBY active system indication after restart 2 Mate CPU Restart Information FF 0 1 Monitor Restart H not mounted bl 0 1 Phase 1 Restart Note 1 b3 Initialization b7 56 b4 b3 bl b4 Data Copy Restart executed for Dual CPU system only LL 1 b6 Program Load not executed executed b7 ACT STBY active system indication after restart 3 Related call Release Result b7 Release Processing after restart gt Normal 1 b7 End 11111 Reference See Chapter 5 Section 6 2 and Section 6 3
430. to execute the BUS Y IDLE performance Exit Click to exit this command NDA 24300 CHAPTER 8 Page 603 Issue 1 MBTC Make Busy of Trunk Continuous MBTC Make Busy of Trunk Continuous 1 Functional Outline This command is used to assign the IDLE BUSY status of trunks By using this command plural trunks can be placed into IDLE BUSY state simultaneously per a route designated in parameter 2 Parameters Input Data RT Route Number TK Trunk Number Note 1 MB Idle 1 Make Busy Outgoing 2 Make Busy Bothway Note 2 Note 1 Multiple trunks can be assigned simultaneously per aroute designated in RT parameter Note 2 2 Make Busy Bothway is not used CHAPTER 8 NDA 24300 Page 604 Issue 1 MBTC_LR Make Busy of Trunk Continuous Logical Route Number MBTC LR Make Busy of Trunk Continuous Logical Route Number 1 Functional Outline This command is used to assign the IDLE BUSY status of trunks By using this command plural trunks can be placed into IDLE BUSY state simultaneously per a logical route designated in LGRT parameter Route number of the MBTC command can be assigned by using logical route Note 1 When logging in to the NCN Network Control Node the data of other LN Local Node can be changed If logging in to a LN only the DM of self Node can be changed by this command Parameters Input Data LGRT Logical route number allocated to the Route Number Note 1 TK Trunk Numb
431. tput Data Error Situation Required Check SEND Execution Error 1 Check the TCP IP Transmission capacity on the UAP side is proper TCP IP connection is down because the text is not transmit or not ted conti ly ed continuously 2 Check the operation status on the UAP side is normal RECEIVE Execution Error 1 Check the software operation on the MIS or Host side Incorrect text format is received 2 Check the LAN cable connection Status TCP IP Connection Error Re start the MIS or HOST computer TCP IP connection is released due to the TCP port discon nection order from the MIS or Host Connection Error B level Infinite Loop etc Re check the operation status of MIS or Host TCP port is released due to the detection of abnormal state in the MIS or HOST operation TCP IP Port Capacity Over The number of allowed ports for applica tion use via TCP IP must be 16 or less Ad TCP IP connection cannot be established due to the connec just the used application number not to tion port capacity over exceed 16 in total D Not used NDA 24300 CHAPTER 3 Page 227 Issue 1 SYSTEM MESSAGES LAN Interface Release Report Default Alarm Default Grade Grade Modified Lamp Modified NON This message displays when the LAN Interface Connection Failure detected in Message 26 V recovers The message displays when the LAN Interface Connection Failure is restored The first data 1s normally sent re ce
432. tput down b6 0 1 External 32 ch Clock PLO No 0 System down 67 6 b2 0 1 External 32 ch Clock PLO No 1 System down 11 3 Clock status of 1 TSW Note Refer to the meaning of 2 Reference See Chapter 5 Section 5 3 for the repair procedure NDA 24300 CHAPTER 3 Page 57 Issue 1 SYSTEM MESSAGES Default Alarm TSW Clock Failure Default Grade Grade Modified Lamp Modified 3 This message displays when the system detects a clock failure such as TSW internal clock down or Frame Head down in one of the dual systems 09 1 XXXX 0000 0000 2 0000 0000 0000 0000 3 0000 0000 0000 0000 y7 4 0000 0000 0000 0000 5 0000 0000 0000 0000 6 0000 0000 0000 0000 0009 0000 D000 0000 85 0000 0000 0000 0000 95 0000 0000 UUUDU 0000 D TSW card in which a fault is detected bl b7 bl it 2 Clock status of No 0 TSW b2 b6 b7 b6 b2 b7 11 3 Clock status of 1 TSW Note Refer to the meaning 2 0 1 TSW No 0 0 1 TSW No 1 system 0 1 DTG output down 0 1 External 32 ch Clock PLO No 0 System down 0 1 External 32 ch Clock PLO No System down Reference See Chapter 5 Section 5 4 for the repair procedure CHAPTER 3 Page 58 Issue 1 NDA 24300 SYSTEM MESSAGES Both PLO Failure Default Alarm Default Grade Grade Modified Lamp Modified MJ 3 Th
433. trunk is judged as malicious and then the details on the call is traced with the called party pressing an access code the Call Trace key When a call is originated from a station XXXX XXXX XXXX 2 XXXX XXXX XXXX 3 XXXX QO 3 4 XXXX XXXX XXXX 5 XXXX XX00 0000 0000 6 0000 D 0000 0000 0000 0000 8 0000 0000 0000 0000 9 0000 Information on Called Party Informer Fusion Point Code FPC Hex Note b7 6 b5 b4 63 62 bl 2 Tenant Hex Note b7 b6 b5 b4 63 62 bl TU __ 3 Physical Station No Hex Note b7 b6 b5 64 63 62 bl __ User Group UGN Hex Note b7 b6 b5 b4 63 62 bl 5 Telephone Hex Note b7 6 b5 b4 63 62 bl TT TT CHAPTER 3 NDA 24300 Page 220 Issue 1 Information on Malicious call Kind of Call Hex b7 b6 65 63 62 bl bO Fusion Point Code FPC Note b7 6 65 b4 63 62 bl LT UT tT Tt Tenant No Hex Note b7 6 b5 b4 63 62 bl 111 Physical Station No Hex Note 57 b 25 64 63 62 bl User Group UGN Note b7 b6 b5 b4 63 62 bl I __ Telephone No Hex Note b7 b6 65 64 63 62 bl 1 SYSTEM MESSAGES 10H Call from a station Note Each No code is output in hexadecimal Detailed meanings are as follows Output Data
434. ts Note Set the MB switch of the line trunk circuit card UP and extract Confirm the MUX ACT lamp on the MUX cir cuit card illuminates Set the MB switch of an extracted line trunk circuit card UP and insert the circuit cards into their mounting slots one by one Confirm the OPE lamp of the inserted circuit card illuminates by setting the MB switch DOWN Make a station to station call and see if DT can be heard Note Perform this check on the rest of the circuit cards by inserting them into their slots individually CHAPTER 5 Page 341 Issue 1 FAULT REPAIR PROCEDURES 2 For Single Configuration START Check to see if the MUX PH PC36 circuit card 1s making poor contact Check by replacing the MUX circuit card with a spare CHAPTER 5 Page 342 Issue 1 NDA 24300 ATTENTION Contents Static Sensitive Handling Precautions Required Set the MB switch of the MUX circuit card UP Extract the MUX circuit card from its mounting slot and clean the contact portion If cleaning cannot be done repeat insertion and extraction of the circuit card two or three times Set the MB switch of the MUX circuit card UP and insert the circuit card into its mounting slot Set the MB switch of the MUX circuit card DOWN Check to see if a station to station connection can be set up within the faulty unit Replace the MUX circuit card referring to Sec tion 3 3 2 MUX Card Replacement Procedure in Chapter 4
435. ttendant Ans Peg Count DTF501N Connection Route Peg Count DTF601N Connection Route Traffic DTF602N NDA 24300 CHAPTER 8 Page 579 Issue 1 DTF103N Display of Station Peg Count Data for Fusion Network DTF103N Display of Station Peg Count Data for Fusion Network 1 Functional Outline This command is used for displaying the result of traffic measurement data for 3 Station Peg Count assigned by the ATRFN command 2 Parameters Traffic Data 1 Terminal Traffic DTFIOIN Route Traffic DTF102N Station Peg Count DTF103N Attendant Peg Count DTF104N Route Peg Count DTF105N Traffic Data 2 Service Peg Count DTF201N Traffic Data 3 UCD Route Peg Count DTF301N UCD Group Peg Count DTF302N UCD Station Peg Count DTF303N Traffic Data 5 Attendant Ans Peg Count DTF501N Traffic Data 6 Connection Route Peg Count DTF601N Connection Route Traffic DTF602N CHAPTER 8 NDA 24300 Page 580 Issue 1 DTF104N Display of Attendant Peg Count Data for Fusion Network 1 Functional Outline DTF104N Display of Attendant Peg Count Data for Fusion Network This command is used for displaying the result of traffic measurement data for 4 ATT Peg Count assigned by the ATRFN command Parameters Traffic Data 1 Traffic Data 2 Traffic Data 3 Traffic Data 5 Traffic Data 6 Terminal Traffic DTFIOIN Route Traffic DTF102N Station Peg Count DTF103N Attendant Peg Count DTF104N Route Peg Count DTF105N
436. tus 0 all circuit cards with 0 status are totally affected Check the cited cards lamp indications See Figure 4 16 and Figure 4 Check the ACT mode of the mate Speech Path System 17 On the DLKC PH PC20 card to be Check the following lamp indications replaced Set the MB switch UP on the mate Speech Path Block and en sure that they are all steady green TSW ACT TSW cards OPE MB DLKC card MUX ACT MUX cards OPE MB lamp on the DLKC card is red NDA 24300 CHAPTER 4 Page 277 Issue 1 UNIT CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE ATTENTION Contents __ Static Sensitive Handlin Precautions Required Extract the DLKC card to be replaced from the TSWM TSW ACT lamp on the new 15 red TSW ACT lamp the new card goes OFF On the new DLKC card set the MB switch UP System Changeover Replaced DLKC STBY to ACT Mate DLKC ACT to STBY Y MBR on the active GT card Insert the new DLKC card into the TSWM On the new DLKC card set the MB key DOWN Check the following lamp indications on the Speech Path block to which new DLKC Flip MBR key on the active GT card Confirm the card belongs and ensure that they are all new DLKC card functions normally steady green TSW ACT TSW cards OPE MB DLKC card MUX ACT MUX cards Check the following lamp indications on the mate Speech Path block and ensure that they are all O
437. unction is to provide a maximum of 8192 x 2048 Time Slot TS switching for a desig nated single IMG Because a single TSW card only enables the TS switching associated with a single individual IMG alone note that the fully expanded 4 IMG system requires a total of 4 TSW cards when it adopts a single configuration or as many as 8 in the case of dual configuration If your system adopts the latter s dual configuration the card s replacement procedures are as follows To replace a TSW card in dual configuration the system of the card must be changed over from ACT to STBY mode The changeover can be done by flipping MBR key on the active GT 9 card or by using the CMOD command For more details refer to Section 12 System Control Procedures in Chapter 6 Figure 4 16 provides the system block diagram centering upon the TSW cards If the system of TSW INT is changed over the ACT STBY of DLKC and MUX in the same switching block are also totally changed over The changeover can be performed by flipping key on the active GT PH GT09 card or by using the CMOD command CHAPTER 4 NDA 24300 Page 272 Issue 1 UNIT CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE Line Trunk PM Line Trunk PM Line Trunk PM Line Trunk PM TSW I O BUS TSW I O BUS MUX PH PC36 TSW PH SW12 O Q I A I PZ PC19 PLO PH CK16 17 LANI ISAGT PZ GT13 DLKC PH PC20 Figure 4 16 System Block Diagram
438. ups as an exception A total of two or four Groups G can be assigned on each PIM universal slot IMGO IMG1 IMG2 IMG3 Slot No 10 G 15 Slot No 05 G 14 8 N zi 1 5 o A D 5 3 9 25 13 FRONT VIEW 5 se es 5 01103105107 11 PIM N Group No 24 25 _ Extended 1541923 robe wlka oso os ae Group No nep s elata Note Slot No C 02 04 05 06 07 0809 10 11 2 14 15 6 17 19 p1 pa gt __________________ 0 2 1 3 Note n addition to Group No 00 23 the system can use No 24 31 as theoretically valid numbers Figure 2 9 Group Number Allocations NDA 24300 CHAPTER 2 Page 11 Issue 1 SYSTEM MAINTENANCE OUTLINE 2 2 4 Level Figure 2 10 explains the Level Lv numbers There a total of eight Levels Lv7 on every Group number which ranges from 00 to 31 A total of eight Levels LvO Lv7 can be assigned on each Group IMGO IMG1 IMG2 IMG3 2 PIM1 PIMO Level Lv Group No PIM Group G 15 19 23 Group G 14 18 22 Group G Odd No lt 11 1016 13 17 21 106 1100 9 Group G Even No lt 10 Group G 12 16 20 6 0 6 6 6 0 Figure 2 10 Level Number Allocations CHAPTER 2 NDA 24
439. urn ON the MBR key on the DSP of the CPU to be replaced Then turn OFF the MBR key again Confirm the mate CPU s ACT mode Turn ON the EMA SUP key on the EMA PH PC40 card Disconnect the power alarm cable from the PALM connector on PZ PW92 r a4 Cable Name to be disconnected CPU 0 10AL 110 FLT CA CPU 1 10AL 130 FLT CA Ae Lec vg ee CY umen ee Yee HS eee NDA 24300 ATTENTION Contents __ Static Sensitive Handlin DSP Precautions Required CPUOPEWDT IMGO pi IMG IMG2 IMG3 AAA 0666 h AAA MANAA naa 00000000 FRONT VIEW System Changeover of the CPU from ACT to STBY mode Y lamp on the DSP begins to flash green Check the mate CPU s lamp indications CPU OPE Steady green IMGO IMGI IMG2 IMG3 Flash green EMA SUP lamp on the EMA card is green PWR PZ PW92 INPWR ALM FRONT VIEW CHAPTER 4 Page 249 Issue 1 UNIT CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE PWR PZ PW92 Turn OFF the SW key on PZ PW92 ATTENTION Contents __ Static Sensitive Handling Precautions Required Disconnect power cables from the OUTPWR connector and INPWR connector on PZ PW92
440. ven numbered MG Odd numbered MG 111 NDA 24300 CHAPTER 3 Page 159 Issue 1 SYSTEM MESSAGES CCH C Level Infinite Loop Failure Temporary Default Alarm Default Grade Grade Modified Lamp Modified SUP 1 This message displays when C level infinite loop of the Port Microprocessor PM in the CCH DCH circuit card has occurred 1 XX00 0000 0000 0000 2 0000 0000 0000 0000 3 0000 0000 0000 0000 y7 4t 0000 99909 009009 0000 54 0009 80009 00090 0000 78009 0000 09090 0000 OOOO WOOO sos QODO WOOO OOOO OOOO Se OOOO WOOO D Location of faulty CCH DCH card 4 Group No b5 b6 Unit No 0 3 67 b6 b5 64 53 b2 bl b7 0 1 Even numbered MG Odd numbered MG 111 CHAPTER 3 NDA 24300 Page 160 Issue 1 SYSTEM MESSAGES CCH Lock Up Failure Permanent Default Alarm Default Grade Grade Modified Lamp Modified SUP 3 This message displays when a Port Microprocessor PM of the CCH DCH card did not send an answer to the CPU 1 XX00 0000 0000 0000 2 0000 0000 0000 0000 3 0000 0000 0000 0000 y7 4t 0000 99909 009009 0000 54 0009 80009 00090 0000 78009 0000 09090 0000 OOOO WOOO sos QODO WOOO OOOO OOOO Se OOOO WOOO Location of faulty CCH DCH card Group No b5 b6 Unit No 0 3 67 b b5 b4 63 02 bl 50 b7 Even number
441. which are in the relevant switching blocks Switching Block Formerly Active After Changeover TSW ACT Steady ON green DLKC Steady ON green MUX ACT Steady ON green TSW ACT Steady ON green DLKC OFF Steady ON green MUX ACT Steady ON green Figure 6 52 LED Indications Before and After Speech Path System Changeover CHAPTER 6 NDA 24300 Page 470 Issue 1 SYSTEM OPERATIONS 2 If the system uses PH CK16 PH CK17 as the PLO make sure the active PLO and newly activated TSW systems are in the same Switching Block Refer to Figure 6 53 Because this card s MUSIC ROM supplies hold tones only to the TSW cards that are in the same Switching Block be sure to check the active PLO and the newly activated TSW systems are all in the same Switching Block If not perform the PLO changeover referring to Section 12 1 7 Manual System Changeover of PLO Note the system has PH CK16 A PH CK17 A card this step is not required PH CK16 17 Front View NN T PH CK16 17 JE PH CK16 17 PLO Active Figure 6 53 Check of Active PLO STEP 4 Analyze the displayed system messages After STEPs 1 through 3 are performed the system messages 7 E 7 F and 1 T will au tomatically display Confirm that no errors occurred during the Speech Path System changeover process NDA 24300 CHAPTER 6 Page 471 Issue 1 SYSTEM OPERATIONS 12 1 7 Manual System Changeover of PLO
442. work Data Memory NDM of the Network Control Node NCN updating the NDM at each Local Node LN Parameters Input Data TYPE IC LGRT START END OG LGRT START END ARI A RES ARI D RES Display Data IC LGRT OG LGRT STATUS Assign Delete Incoming Logical Route Number 1 899 Outgoing Logical Route Number 1 899 Restriction Data for Alternative Route Index A 0 1 Restriction of the trunk to trunk tandem connection via ATTCON or sta tion when a Tie Line call terminates O Alternate routing is restricted 1 Alternate routing is allowed Restriction Data for Alternative Route Index D 0 2 Restriction of the trunk to trunk tandem connection by Direct Dial Access from a station when a C O Tie Line call terminates O Alternate routing is restricted 1 Alternate routing is allowed 2 Toll Restriction 15 restricted Incoming Logical Route Number 1 899 Outgoing Logical Route Number 1 899 OK or error message is displayed NDA 24300 CHAPTER 8 Page 531 Issue 1 CATK Continuous Assignment of Trunk Data CATK Continuous Assignment of Trunk Data 1 Functional Outline This command can assign delete many trunk data simultaneously which have consecutive numbers 2 Parameters Type KIND Note Note Assign Delete Note KIND When Assign is selected in the Type KIND selection list box Input Data RT Route Number TK START First Trunk Number 1 768 TK END
443. x 16 digits Note 1 External Internal Route Number Note 2 Trunk Number Note 2 Line Equipment Number Note 3 Connection Route Number 1 1023 Note 4 Connection Trunk Number 1 4095 Note 4 Fusion Point Code 1 253 Tenant Number Note 5 Physical Station Number max 5 digits for Business max 6 digits for Hotel system Note 5 Trunk is designated in the TYPE selection list box LENS is designated in the TYPE selection list box Telephone Number is designated in the TYPE selection list box Connection Trunk is designated in the TYPE selection list box Note 5 This data is displayed when Telephone Number is designated in the TYPE selection list box NDA 24300 CHAPTER 8 Page 615 Issue 1 RLST_T Release of Station Trunk Telephone Number STATUS INFORMATION ERN GRN CSN ZTN PCN Status of Station Trunk 1 5 l Idle 2 Busy 3 Lockout 4 Make Busy 5 Calling Information on the connected party Note 6 Area Number 1 32 Note 7 Group Number 1 8 Note 7 CS ZT Number 1 32 Note 7 PHS Community Number 1 1024 Note 7 Note 6 This data is displayed when STATUS 2 Busy Note 7 This data is for Wireless System only Buttons Get Release Exit CHAPTER 8 Page 616 Issue 1 Click to get information on the station trunk Click to execute the station trunk release Click to exit this command NDA 24300 SINZ System Init
444. y of Connection Route Peg Count Data for Fusion Network 19 Connection Route Traffic DTF602N Display of Connection Route Traffic Data for Fusion Network Note For information on the command display images see Figure 6 22 Figure 6 23 and Figure 6 24 amin 2 3 4 5 6 8 19 24300 CHAPTER 6 429 Issue 1 SYSTEM OPERATIONS Figure 6 22 shows the DTFD command display image example The DTFD DTFDN command should look similiar to this Data collecting Log Traffic Data This area displays the current Traffic Check box to specify the Traffic Data TYPE Measurement data based on the selected Traffic Data TYPE DTP TG Pug Cage Pur lee GPP T Cain 7 m da Sly bam Ao Peg Comer Tete OTP ee Tool Buttons Collect Data Used to collect the Traffic report with regard to the selected Traffic Data TYPE The result test is shown in the Data Collection Log display area Stop Used to quit the currently performed Traffic Data collection e Print Log Used to print out the text data now displayed in the Data Collection Log area View Database Used to view the whole data based on the selected Traffic Data TYPE so far stored in the database More details are shown in figure 6 11 3 Clear Datab
445. y on the PWR DPWR card to be replaced Turn OFF the 48V SW on the card to be replaced Disconnect the power cable from the 48V IN connector Extract the card to be replaced Turn OFF the 48V SW on the new card CHAPTER 4 NDA 24300 Page 294 Issue 1 UNIT CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE Fo ATTENTION Contents __ Static Sensitive Handlin Precautions Required Turn ON the MB key on the new card OPE lamp on the new card is OFF Insert the new card into the PIM Connect the power cable to the 48V IN connector Extract the card to be replaced OPE lamp on the new card is green Turn OFF the MB key on the card END NDA 24300 CHAPTER 4 Page 295 Issue 1 UNIT CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE 4 Fan Unit Replacement This section explains how to replace the Fan Unit FANU which is fastened on or inside the ded icated fan box within the system Because the fan 15 a vital device to protect the system from heated air it is recommended that the fan a total of three per unit be replaced at least every two years to guarantee its high performance The mounting location of FANU differs depending on the module configuration of each cabinet When the system consists of a total of three modules or less the FANU is mounted on the TOPU of the cabinet Other wise the FANU is housed in the dedicated fan box in the center of the cabinet Refer to Figure 4 19 FAN BOX F
446. ype 57 b 25 64 63 62 bl bO 111 When 03 SMDR 04 MCD Device Number of Error detected client PC 57 b b5 64 b3 b2 bl Kind of Error b7 b5 b4 63 62 bl bO 111 11111 2 Details on Detected Error 57 b6 65 64 b3 b2 bl ITTI W Not used CHAPTER 3 Page 226 Issue 1 bO0 b7 01 50 SERVER 02 03 5 042MCI 052OAI 06 5 07 15 b0 b7 Device Number of error detected Client PC If the Machine Number is not determined is output b0 b7 OIZSEND Execution Error O2 RECEIVE Execution Error 03 SEND Execution Count Over 04 RECEIVE Execution Count Over 05zSystem Data is not assigned 06 Time Over 07 Error 08 Connection Error 09 Connection Port Capacity Over OA Detection of B level Infinite Loop OB FFzNot Used When 01 02 is output at 7 Cause of error Hex When 05 is output at bO0 b7 01 Data Output via LAN not assigned 02 Device No not assigned When 07 is output at D bO0 b7 OOH No Parity is set 01H Odd Parity is set 02H Even Parity is set When 08 is output at D 7 Cause of error Hex NDA 24300 SYSTEM MESSAGES When 05 OAD 07 MIS Faulty Logical Port No Hex 57 b6 65 b4 b3 b2 bl O Error Kind ERRK b0 b7 Error Kind Hex Refer to Table 3 3 b7 b6 b5 b3 b2 bl Table 3 3 Error Kind ERRK Ou

NEC NDA-24300 User's Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents